This pocket-sized alphabetical guide to phonology provides an introduction to

the range of phenomena studied in phonology and the main theoretical
frameworks for engaging in phonological analysis. The entries are concise and
clear, providing an overview of one of the main area of linguistic analysis.
Key features:
• A handy and easily understandable pocket guide for anyone embarking on
courses in phonology
• Supplies numerous cross-references to related terms
• Contains an introduction which outlines the range of the field
• Includes an annotated bibliography with suggestions for further reading.
Philip Carr has a first degree, and a PhD, in Linguistics from Edinburgh
University. He is Professor of Linguistics in the English Department at the
Université Montpellier III (Paul Valéry). He is the author of Linguistic Realities
(1990), Phonology (1993) and English Phonetics and Phonology (1999). He
co-edited Phonological knowledge: conceptual and empirical issues (2000) and
Headhood, Elements, Specification and Contrastivity: Phonological papers in
honour of John Anderson (2005).
‘This is an extremely useful piece of work. The terms selected are essential for
anyone wishing to become acquainted with the fields of contemporary
phonology and phonetics. Not only does the glossary offer definitions for the
standard terms used in modern phonology and phonetics, but it also covers
aspects of historical linguistics, sociolinguistics, psycholinguistics, language
acquisition, bilingualism, and the philosophy of science. In a nutshell, it is a
reference work useful for a large audience, from students to professionals in
neighbouring disciplines.’
Jacques Durand, Professor of Linguistics, University of Toulouse and CNRS
Cover design: River Design, Edinburgh
Edinburgh University Press
22 George Square, Edinburgh EH8 9LF
ISBN 0 7486 2234 4
www.eup.ed.ac.uk
E
d
i
n
b
u
r
g
h
barcode
A Glossary of Phonology
PHILIP CARR
A Glossary of Phonology
PHILIP CARR
A
G
l
o
s
s
a
r
y
o
f
P
h
o
n
o
l
o
g
y
P
H
I
L
I
P
C
A
R
R
A Glossary of Phonology
TITLES IN THE SERIES INCLUDE
Peter Trudgill
A Glossary of Sociolinguistics
978 0 7486 1623 7
Jean Aitchison
A Glossary of Language and Mind
978 0 7486 1824 8
Laurie Bauer
A Glossary of Morphology
978 0 7486 1853 8
Alan Davies
A Glossary of Applied Linguistics
978 0 7486 1854 5
Geoffrey Leech
A Glossary of English Grammar
978 0 7486 1729 6
Paul Baker, Andrew Hardie and Tony McEnery
A Glossary of Corpus Linguistics
978 0 7486 2018 0
Alan Cruse
A Glossary of Semantics and Pragmatics
978 0 7486 2111 8
Philip Carr
A Glossary of Phonology
978 0 7486 2234 4
Vyvyan Evans
A Glossary of Cognitive Linguistics
978 0 7486 2280 1
Lyle Campbell and Mauricio J. Mixco
A Glossary of Historical Linguistics
978 0 7486 2379 2
A Glossary of
Phonology
Philip Carr
Edinburgh University Press
© Philip Carr, 2008
Edinburgh University Press Ltd
22 George Square, Edinburgh
Typeset in Sabon
by Servis Filmsetting Ltd, Stockport, Cheshire, and
printed and bound in Great Britain by
CPI Antony Rowe, Chippenham
A CIP record for this book is available from the British Library
ISBN 978 0 7486 2404 1 (hardback)
ISBN 978 0 7486 2234 4 (paperback)
The right of Philip Carr
to be identified as author of this work
has been asserted in accordance with
the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988.
Published with the support of the Edinburgh University Scholarly
Publishing Initiatives Fund.
Contents
Introduction 1
Glossary of Phonology 7
Sources 199
Bibliography 202
Introduction
When I agreed to write this little book, I imagined that it
would be easier to put together than a textbook. I was
wrong. In a textbook, one can tell the reader the follow-
ing sort of thing: ‘Recall our discussion of this phenom -
enon in chapter 2; now we’ll look at it in more detail.’ That
cannot be done in a glossary, since it has no narrative
structure. And while elementary textbooks require a good
deal of simplification, a glossary is bound to be even more
simplified, since the entries have to be kept relatively short.
None the less, I hope that the definitions given here are
accurate, if simplified, and will be of some help to students
engaging with a discipline which can appear to have a
dauntingly large amount of specialised terminology.
I have chosen to focus on what I take to be phonologi-
cal phenomena: that is, the kinds of states of affairs which
phonologists believe they have often observed in human
languages, such as, say vowel nasalisation. In doing so, I
have adopted the process metaphor; many of the phe-
nomena in question are described as processes. Because I
wish to focus on what I take to be phenomena, I have tried
to avoid defining phonological notions in terms of prop-
erties of diagrams. Phonologists are fond of diagrams for
understandable reasons; human beings find it helpful to be
able to depict, and thus visualise, abstract notions. But I
believe that one should not mistake the diagrams for the
phenomena under investigation. Since the focus is on
phonological phenomena, I have not attempted to list
every theoretical construct postulated in the history of
phonology. When one considers the vast number of such
constructs, particularly in the field of generative phonol-
ogy, the task would anyway have been impossible, given
the space limitations.
It is with the most fundamental, elementary terms in
linguistics that the most difficult issues arise. An example
is the definition of the word ‘phonology’ itself. The fact is
that there is controversy as to exactly what we take the
discipline and its object of inquiry to be. I have not sought
to sweep such controversy under the carpet. Rather, I have
tried to explain, in relatively simple terms, what the dif-
ferent, often competing, conceptions are. One of the issues
here is the question of whether a valid distinction can be
drawn between phonetics and phonology. And if such a
distinction can be drawn, how is it to be drawn, and what
might the relation be between these two areas? These are
difficult, controversial issues, and I have not hesitated to
convey that fact to the reader. Since I believe that we do
need to distinguish phonetics and phonology, and assum-
ing that a glossary of phonetics will be forthcoming in this
glossary series, I have not attempted a systematic coverage
of phonetic terminology. Rather, I have given definitions
for phonetic terms as and when I needed to use them.
Related to the kinds of controversy which exist in the
field of phonology is the status of expressions such as ‘men-
talism’ and other ‘isms’. The moment one tries to define
expressions such as ‘phonology’ or ‘phoneme’, one has to
explain that there are mentalistic and non-mentalistic
conceptions of these, and different kinds of mentalistic
conception. I have therefore included brief definitions of
various ‘isms’ in order to help the reader understand what
lies behind the various different conceptions of notions
2 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
such as ‘phoneme’. One would not, of course, think of
turning to a glossary of phonology if one were seeking a
brief definition of, say, Empiricism. But the Empiricist vs
Rationalist debate has formed part of the background to
the development of phonological theory and theories as to
how children acquire a phonological system, so I have
given an indication of what that debate is about. I have also
done this because I do not believe that phonology should
be taught in an intellectual vacuum, cut off from other dis-
ciplines. The history of the discipline also constitutes part
of the intellectual context in which phonology should
be studied. I have therefore included brief definitions of
various schools of thought which have existed in the
history of phonology, such as the Prague School, founded
in the mid-1920s. In connection with this, I have given brief
sketches of prominent phonologists, from the nineteenth
century to the present day. There was no way of knowing
just how many such figures to cite, or of knowing the
extent to which a given phonologist could be described as
‘prominent’. I do hope, however, that the reader will have
been given at least some idea of who has been associated
with which ideas. The discipline is as much about people
and places as it is about ideas. My apologies to phonolo-
gists who believe that they are major figures in the field, but
whose names do not appear here.
In choosing words, phrases and sentences for the pur-
poses of exemplification, I have tried to stick with lan-
guages which I purport to know something about, mostly
English and French. But there are many phonological phe-
nomena which are simply not attested in either of those
languages, and for those phenomena, I have had to resort
to primary and secondary sources, which are cited at the
end of the book. There is a great danger in citing examples
from languages one is not familiar with, but there is no
way around it if one is to achieve a decent coverage of the
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 3
kinds of phonological phenomena found in the world’s
languages. The result of my attempting to exemplify
notions from English and French is that there is a bias
towards English in this glossary. This should not be inter-
preted as an attempt to convey the idea that English is
somehow superior to, more important than, or more
worthy of study than other languages.
It will be evident to teachers that this book has been
written by someone with a background in British descrip-
tive traditions. However, I have not, I hope, fallen into a
kind of British insularity; there is a good deal of coverage
of notions used in European and North American descrip-
tive traditions. Where there are differences between British
and American descriptive traditions, I have attempted to
indicate what those are.
Since I believe that the discipline of phonology overlaps
with other disciplines, I have given brief accounts, where I
deemed it necessary and/or useful, of some notions from
the fields of child language acquisition, historical linguis-
tics, morphology, sociolinguistics and syntax. I have also
tried to ensure that there is a degree of consistency
between the definitions of morphological, sociolinguistic
and syntactic terms given here and those given in Laurie
Bauer’s A Glossary of Morphology, Geoffrey Leech’s A
Glossary of English Grammar and Peter Trudgill’s A
Glossary of Sociolinguistics.
I have included informal terms such as ‘smoothing’
(monophthongisation) when they are relatively widely
used and can be given a clear definition. Informal terms
used in ordinary everyday speech have been included if
they are meaningful and are also used by linguists. The
term ‘broad’, used to refer to certain accents, has therefore
been included. Other informal terms used by the lay person
have been omitted because they cannot be given a clear
definition. Examples are terms such as ‘twang’, ‘drawl’ and
4 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
‘flattened vowels’. Such terms are, in my view, used to refer
to such a disparate range of phonetic/phonological proper-
ties as to be more or less meaningless.
Cross-referenced terms are in bold. Words, phrases and
sentences given as examples are in italics. Glosses (English
translations of non-English words) are given in inverted
commas. Where a general phenomenon, such as intervo-
calic voicing or nasalisation, is discussed, the entry is given
in lower case. Where I am describing a process which
has been postulated for a specific language, such as the
Scottish Vowel Length Rule, Liaison in French or Rendaku
in Japanese, I have used upper case for the first letter.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 5
ablaut A process in which a vowel in a morpheme changes
to signal a morpho-syntactic property, as in the English
pair come vs came, where the ablaut process signals
past tense.
absolute neutralisation A form of neutralisation which was
postulated in the history of generative phonology. It
was characterised by the postulating of underlying
representations which corresponded to none of the
observed surface forms. For instance, in the analysis of
Polish, some instances of phonetic [ε] alternate with
zero, as in [pɔsε¡] vs [pɔs¡a], the nominative singular
and genitive singular of the word for ‘envoy’, where we
can see [ε] in the nominative form but no [ε] in the
genitive form. These alternations are distinct from pairs
such as [fɔtεl] vs [fɔtεla], the nominative singular and
genitive singular forms of the word meaning ‘armchair’,
where the [ε] does not alternate with zero. The sugges-
tion is that the [ε]s which alternate with zero must be
derived from an underlying representation other than
/ε/. That underlying representation is said to be a yer, a
non-ATR high vowel, represented as /˘i/, which may be
realised as [ε] or as zero. The objection raised to such
analyses is that there is no phonetic [˘i] in contemporary
Polish, and that a child acquiring present-day Polish
A
could not, therefore, possess mentally real underlying
representations such as /˘i/. Those who object to analy-
ses involving absolute neutralisation point out that the
yers existed in the history of Polish but no longer exist.
To postulate such abstract representations for the syn-
chronic phonology of Polish is arguably to represent
diachrony mistakenly as synchrony. Most current ver-
sions of generative phonology are less abstract than
those which adopted absolute neutralisation.
abstract This term is often used by phonologists to describe
analyses in which phonological representations of
words are postulated which are at some remove from
the observable pronunciation of the word. A simple
example is the phonological representation /viti/ of the
word witty in General American. The normal pronun-
ciation is [viɾi], with a flap (tap) rather than a [t]. Some
phonologists claim that the flap results from a syn-
chronic process of Flapping, in which the phonemes /t/
and /d/ are realised phonetically as an alveolar flap. See
realisation. Phonological representations can be consid-
erably more abstract than this. See absolute neutralisa-
tion. While some phonologists take the term ‘abstract’
to mean ‘mentally real’ in some sense, others who adopt
instrumentalism intend ‘abstract’ to mean ‘not corre-
sponding to anything real outside of the theory’.
accent A term used, especially by British linguists, to iden-
tify varieties of a language with respect only to phon -
etic and phonological properties of that variety. Accent
is often distinguished from dialect, which is said to
denote, not just phonetic and phonological properties
of a given variety, but also differences in vocabulary
and syntax. An example of an accent of English is
Standard Scottish English (SSE), which differs in its
8 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
vowel and consonant systems from the accent known
as Received Pronunciation (also known as Standard
Southern British English). For example, there is no /u:/
vs /υ/ contrast in SSE. An example of a dialect is
Lowland Scots, whose syntax and vocabulary differ
from the dialect known as Standard English. For
example, ‘ear’ in Lowland Scots is ‘lug’, and ‘chimney’
is ‘lum’. American linguists tend not to adopt the
accent/dialect distinction.
The term ‘accent’ is also used as a synonym for word
stress, so that an accented syllable is a stressed syllable.
active articulator The articulator which moves to form an
articulation with a passive articulator. For example, in
alveolar sounds, the tip and/or the blade of the tongue
is the active articulator, and the alveolar ridge is the
passive articulator; the tongue moves to form an artic-
ulation with the passive articulator.
Advanced Tongue Root (ATR) A property often associ-
ated with vowels, in which the root of the tongue is
pushed forward, leading to various effects on the
tongue body. Typical ATR and non-ATR vowel pairs
are [i]/[i], [u]/[υ], [e]/[ε], [o]/[ɔ]. Lowvowels frequently
fail to have an ATR counterpart, and often act as
opaque vowels in ATR-based vowel harmony systems.
ATR/non-ATR distinctions among high vowels often
collapse during historical change, leaving only the
ATR member, such as [i] or [u]. Such vowels often then
act as neutral vowels.
affix A morphological unit attached to a base. The three
main types of affix are prefixes, suffixes and infixes.
Prefixes precede a base. Examples are the English
prefix un-, as in unhappy, and the French prefix re-, as
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 9
in redemander (‘to ask again’). Suffixes follow a base.
Examples are the English suffix -ness, as in happiness,
and the French suffix -ment, as in doucement (‘gently’,
from the adjective douce, meaning ‘soft’ or ‘gentle’).
Infixes are inserted inside a base. An example is the
Tagalog infix -um, as in the word sumulat, which con-
sists of the base sulat (‘to write’) with the infix -um
inserted after the initial /s/.
affricate A type of speech sound involving a stop closure
followed by slow release of the closure, resulting in
audible friction, as in the case of the [tʃ] at the begin-
ning and the end of the English word church.
airstream The flowof air on which speech sounds are based.
airstream mechanisms The various kinds of airstream
which are harnessed in the production of human speech
sounds. The one found in all human languages is the
pulmonic egressive mechanism, in which air flows out
from the lungs. A less common one is the pulmonic
ingressive mechanism, in which air is sucked into the
lungs. Sounds produced this way are called implosives.
The bilabial, alveolar and velar implosives are tran-
scribed as [5], [d] and [d]. They are formed by making
a stop closure in the oral cavity, sucking air into
the lungs, releasing the closure, and allowing air to
implode into the oral cavity. They are found in many
African languages. Sounds produced with the glottalic
airstream mechanismhave a glottal closure and a stric-
ture of complete closure made within the oral cavity.
If the larynx is then raised, this pushes air upwards, cre-
ating an airstream, and if the oral closure is released,
the air rushes out. Sounds made this way are called
ejectives. The bilabial, alveolar and velar ejectives are
10 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
transcribed as [p’], [t’] and [k’]. These sounds are found
in many American Indian languages. Sounds made with
the velaric airstream mechanism have a closure
between the back of the tongue and the soft palate, and
another closure further forward in the oral cavity. If the
velar closure is pulled back, this creates an ingressive
airstream. This is the mechanism used in sucking.
When the closure further forward in the oral cavity is
released, air flows in. Sounds produced this way are
called clicks. They are found in child vocal play and
certain languages spoken mostly in Southern Africa,
such as Zulu and Xhosa. The alveolar click is tran-
scribed as [!] and the alveolar lateral click is transcribed
as [¦]. The latter sound is used by speakers of various
languages to ‘gee-up’ horses.
Aitken’s Law see Scottish Vowel Length Rule
algorithm A set of rules or procedures. It is common to
talk, for instance, of the algorithm for word stress
assignment in a language. In Malay, the algorithm for
word stress assignment is: place a primary stress on the
penultimate syllable of the word, and then place a sec-
ondary stress on the initial syllable of the word and
each alternate syllable thereafter, subject to stress clash
avoidance.
allophone see Phonemic Principle
allophony The phenomenon whereby a phoneme has two
or more allophones.
alternants Variant phonetic forms of a morpheme. The
English morpheme -in has the alternant [im] in impos-
sible, [in] in indirect, and [iŋ] in incredible. Such
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 11
morpho-phonological alternations are rule-governed;
in this case, the place of articulation of the nasal stop
is determined by the place of articulation of the fol-
lowing consonant.
alternation The phenomenon whereby a morpheme has
more than one alternant.
alveolar Sounds produced with the alveolar ridge as the
passive articulator are alveolar sounds.
alveolar ridge The teeth ridge, located behind the upper
teeth.
ambisyllabicity The boundary between syllables is often
easy to establish, as in the French word bateau (‘boat’):
[ba.to]. But there are cases where there seems to be evi-
dence for more than one possible syllabification. Take
the English word petrol. On the one hand, the Maximal
Onset Principle states that, since /tr/ is a legitimate onset
cluster in English, the syllabification should be pe.trol.
On the other hand, many speakers have a glottal stop
realisation of the /t/ in this word, and for these speak-
ers, /t/ is not normally realised as a glottal stop in onset
position. Some phonologists have therefore suggested
that in cases like this, the consonant in question is simul-
taneously in the coda of the penultimate syllable and in
the onset of the final syllable; it is ambisyllabic, belong-
ing to two syllables at the same time.
American Structuralism The kind of linguistics practised
in the US in the 1930s, 1940s and 1950s, prior to the
emergence of generative phonology. Names associ-
ated with this period include Leonard Bloomfield,
Archibald Hill, Charles Hockett, Martin Joos, George
12 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Trager and Rulon Wells. It is widely believed that
the American Structuralists were sceptical about the
existence of linguistic universals, unlike Chomsky
and his followers. Like Chomsky, the American
Structuralists believed that the kind of linguistics
they practised was ‘scientific’, but their conception of
what scientific method was differed radically from
Chomsky’s. Adopting a philosophy of science which
was influenced by logical positivism, the American
Structuralists assumed that genuinely scientific theor -
ies were based solely on observation and on inductive
generalisations over those observations. Since the
mind is unobservable, this meant excluding mental-
ism from linguistics. In the field of phonology, the
American Structuralists are said to have postulated
‘discovery procedures’ by means of which the linguist
can arrive at (‘discover’) the phonemic and morpho-
phonemic system of a given language. Included in
those ‘discovery procedures’ is the Phonemic Principle.
analogy A term used in psychology, linguistics and many
other fields to refer to the human capacity to spot
similarities between distinct objects or events. Some
have said that there is an analogy between the Iraq
War and the Vietnam War; they are said to be similar in
certain respects. In phonology, it is often claimed that
certain diachronic changes in languages are based
on perceived analogies. The phenomenon known as
Intrusive ‘r’ in non-rhotic varieties of English is often
said to have come about by analogy with Linking ‘r’.
In child language acquisition, it has often been claimed
that child forms such as bringed (instead of the irregu-
lar form brought) and catched (instead of caught) are
formed by analogy with the past tense forms of regular
verbs such as banged and splashed.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 13
Anderson, John M. A Scottish linguist known, in syntax,
for his work on case grammar and, in phonology,
for the elaboration of the framework known as
Dependency Phonology. Anderson is also known for
his support of the Principle of Structural Analogy.
Anderson, Stephen R. An American linguist working in
the generative phonology tradition, who has worked
on a wide variety of phonological phenomena includ-
ing nasal consonants, tone, vowel harmony and metri-
cal structure. He is also a specialist in the history of
phonology and is known for his theory of morphology.
antepenultimate Third last. Often used to refer to the
position of a syllable in a word for the purposes of
word stress assignment in languages where word stress
is calculated from the end of the word.
anterior A distinctive feature used to differentiate differ-
ent kinds of coronal speech sound types. Anterior
coronals are dental or alveolar (such as [θ] and [s]),
whereas postalveolars, such as [ʃ], are non-anterior.
antigemination A phenomenon whereby vowel deletion is
blocked if it would lead to two identical adjacent con-
sonants (i.e. a geminate consonant). In the Cushitic
language Afar, unstressed vowels are deleted in the
context #CVC_CV, so that /wager/ + /é/ (‘he recon-
ciled’) becomes [wagré]. But the deletion fails to apply
in cases such as /gonan/ + /a/ (‘search for’), since the
deletion would result in the sequence [gonna], with a
geminate [nn].
apical Sounds made with the tip of the tongue are said to
be apical. The dental fricatives [θ] and [ð] are examples.
14 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
apocope Loss of a word-final segment. This can be a con-
sonant or a vowel. In English, word-final /t/ is often
lost if the following word begins with a consonant, as
in last chance: [lɑ:stʃɑ:ns]. In Italian, the indefinite arti-
cles uno and una undergo loss of their final vowel if the
following noun begins with a vowel, as in una ragazza
(‘a girl’) vs un’ ora (‘an hour’).
approximant see degree of stricture
archiphoneme A term used by Prague School phonologists
such as Trubetzkoy when dealing with neutralisation.
When the contrast between two phonemes in opposition
is suspended (neutralised) in a specific context, one can
postulate an archiphoneme, which is a representation of
all of the properties shared by the phonemes in question.
For instance, in Polish, there is a phonemic contrast
between voiced obstruents and voiceless obstruents, but
it is neutralised in word-final position, so that /trud/
(‘labour’) undergoes Word-Final Devoicing and is pro-
nounced as [trut] in the singular. When the /d/ is not in
word-final position, it is not devoiced, as in the plural
form [trudi]. Trubetzkoy argued that what appears in
word-final position is neither the voiced phoneme /d/
nor the voiceless phoneme /t/, but an archiphoneme /D/,
which represents what the two phonemes have in
common: they are both stops and are both alveolar.
Articulatory Phonetics That branch of phonetics which
deals with the way human speech sounds are articulated.
Articulatory Phonology A phonological model which
takes phonological representations to consist of
sequences of overlapping phonological gestures such
as laryngeal gestures and gestures in the oral cavity.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 15
articulatory planning A term used to refer to the largely
unconscious planning of the movements of the articu-
lators during acts of uttering.
ash The name given to the vowel represented as /æ/ in
work on the phonology of English. Ash is often a low
front unrounded vowel, articulated somewhat higher
than cardinal vowel 4.
aspiration Some phonologists argue that sounds which
are aspirated are produced with spreading of the vocal
cords. Others suggest that aspiration is produced by a
delay in the onset of voicing after a stop closure has
been released, as in the pronunciation [p|it], in which
it is claimed that there is a delay between the release of
the bilabial stop closure and the onset of voicing for the
following vowel [i]. Aspirated stops are also some-
times referred to as fortis stops. See Voice Onset Time.
assimilation A process whereby two, normally adjacent,
sounds become more similar to each other. An example
of assimilation for place of articulation can be found
in sequences such as ten boys in English, where the
/n/ of ten tends to assimilate to the place of articula-
tion of the following bilabial stop: [t|εmbɔiz].
Assimilation for voicing is also common, as in the case
of the voiceless obstruents of Hungarian, which
become voiced when followed by another voiced
obstruent, as seen in the root /kalap/ (‘hat’) which is
realised with a voiced stop in [kalabban], where the
suffix [ban] is added.
These examples involve regressive (anticipatory)
assimilation, in which the first of two sounds assimi-
lates to a following sound. This is the most common
kind of assimilation, since it is grounded in ease of
16 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
articulation. But progressive (preservative) assimilation
is also attested, as in the case of the Lumasaaba mor-
pheme /li/ (‘a root’) which is realised as [di] when a
nasal stop precedes it, as in the form [zindi] (‘roots’).
Here, the complete closure of the nasal stop carries
over on to the following sound, changing it from an
approximant to a stop. In some cases, the sounds both
preceding and following a segment can induce assimi-
lation. This is what happens with intervocalic voicing,
as in the case of voiceless unaspirated stops in Korean,
which are realised as voiced stops intervocalically:
/pap/ (‘cooked rice’) is realised with a [b] when the
suffix /i/ is added: [pabi]. There are also cases of recip-
rocal assimilation, in which each of the adjacent sounds
assimilates to the other, as in the case of Raise your
hand! in English, typically uttered as [ɹeijəhænd].
In this case, the [z] at the end of raise becomes a
postalveolar [j] under the influence of the palatal glide
/j/ at the beginning of your, and the palatal glide
becomes a [j] as a result of progressive assimilation.
Reciprocal assimilation is also known as coalescence.
Some phonologists claim that long-distance assimila-
tion exists, in which the segments in question are not
adjacent. Examples of this are the phenomena known
as consonant harmony and vowel harmony.
atonic vowel An unstressed vowel. In the Latin word
amare (‘to love’), the final vowel is an atonic vowel. See
tonic vowel and countertonic vowel.
ATR see Advanced Tongue Root
auditory phonetics That branch of phonetics which deals
with the way that the human ear and perceptual system
receive and process speech sounds.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 17
Autosegmental Phonology A way of depicting, and
conceiving of, phonological representation which
departed from previous purely segmental models of
phonological structure and postulated several tiers of
phonological structure. For tone languages, a tonal tier
was postulated on which tones were represented as
autosegments, overlaid on a sequence of segments, as
in the following diagram:
The same approach came to be applied to certain lan-
guages with nasal harmony. A nasal autosegment was
postulated, located on a nasal tier. The nasal autosegment
was then said to be able to attach to individual segments,
which would then be nasal consonants or nasalised
vowels, as in Gokana [nu˜] (‘thing’), represented as:
segmental tier /l u/
nasal tier [N]
where ‘[N]’ represents a nasal autosegment which
gets attached to the segments on the segmental tier.
Autosegmental Phonology is a form of non-linear
phonology. It has been suggested by some that Firthian
Phonology was a historical precursor of Autosegmental
Phonology, since Firthian prosodies seem parallel to
autosegments.
18 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
segmental tier b u l u
tonal tier H L
Here, ‘H’ and ‘L’ represent high and low tones.
avoidance of homophony It is believed by some that
there is a general trend towards avoiding the applica-
tion of phonological processes which create homo-
phones, since we need to maintain lexical contrasts
for functional reasons; if most of the minimal pairs
of a language were to become homophones, the
language would be less useful for purposes of com -
munication.
In the history of French, the Latin word gallus
(‘cockerel/rooster’) underwent a sound change whereby
the intervocalic /l/ became a /t/, resulting in forms such
as gattus, which is homophonous with the Latin word
gattus, meaning ‘cat’. In this case, homophony was
avoided by using an alternative name for a cockerel,
resulting in the present-day word coq.
babbling A phenomenon which begins during the second
half of the first year of life, following, but overlapping
with, the vocal play period, in which the child utters
syllable-like sequences, based on rhythmic movements
of the jaw. The syllables in question are often of the CV
(consonant-vowel) type, such as [da]. When the child
utters reduplicated sequences of identical syllables,
such as [dadada], this is referred to as canonical bab-
bling. When the child utters sequences of non-identical
syllables, such as [bada], this is referred to as varie-
gated babbling. The amount of variegated babbling
increases towards the end of the first year of life.
Unfortunately, some writers use the term babbling to
refer to the pre-babbling vocalisations of the vocal play
period.
back see features
B
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 19
back of the tongue That part of the body of the tongue,
behind the front of the tongue and in front of the
tongue root, which is the active articulator in velar and
uvular sounds.
backing see vowel retraction
base A term used in morphology, to denote any part of a
word to which an affix may be added. In the English
word unhappy, the base is happy. This is the kind of
base known as a root. Roots contain no affixes. The
base in friendliness is friendly. In this case, the base is
not a root; it contains the morphemes friend and -ly.
Baudouin de Courtnay, Jan (1845–1929) Baudouin
worked in Russia and later in his native Poland. He
was part of the Kazan School. His work influenced the
thinking of the Prague School. Baudouin distinguished
between the purely physical aspects of sound structure,
which he called anthropophonics, and the psychologi-
cal aspect of sound systems, which he called psycho-
phonetics. This is a phonetics/phonology distinction in
which phonology (psychophonetics) is seen as mental-
istic phonetics. Baudouin also elaborated a theory of
alternations and a theory of phonologisation in which
alternations start out as phonetically grounded, but
that grounding can become obscured in the course of
time, leading to opacity.
BBC English Another term for Received Pronunciation.
Behaviourism A particularly extreme form of Empiricism
practised in the mid-twentieth century, in which it was
held that only observable behaviour constitutes the
object of a properly scientific linguistics. Behaviourism
20 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
is thus fundamentally opposed to any variety of men-
talism, since the contents of the mind are, by definition,
unobservable. It is associated with the work of B. F.
Skinner and Leonard Bloomfield. It is important to
bear in mind that, if one allows that both observable
behaviour and mental realities constitute the object of
linguistic (and thus phonological) inquiry, that does
not constitute Behaviourism.
bilabial see labial
bilateral opposition see opposition
bimoraic see mora
binary-valued features see feature values
bisyllabic Containing two syllables, as in the French word
bateau: [ba.to]. The term disyllabic is a synonym.
blade That part of the tongue just behind the tip, usually
involved in alveolar articulations.
blockers see opaque vowels and nasal spread
Bloomfield, Leonard (1887–1949) An American lin-
guist who worked on the native languages of North
America and who is often associated with American
Structuralism. Influenced by the drift away from
mentalism in psychology, Bloomfield adopted, not
only Empiricism, but also Behaviourism. Because he
opposed mentalism, Bloomfield argued that one should
analyse linguistic structure independently of meaning,
but he inevitably failed to do so. Bloomfield embraced
the concept of the phoneme, but one cannot establish
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 21
phonemic contrasts without recourse to meaning (see
minimal pairs). Bloomfield believed that linguistics
could be ‘scientific’, and his conception of what this
meant was influenced by logical positivism. It is
because of this conception that he believed that the only
scientifically valid generalisations in linguistics were
inductive generalisations.
Boas, Franz (1858–1942) A German linguist who became
an American citizen in the late nineteenth century.
Associated with anthropological linguistics in the USA,
in which language is viewed as a set of cultural prac-
tices, Boas engaged in a great deal of fieldwork on the
native languages of the North American Indians. His
best-known student was Edward Sapir.
body of the tongue The main part of the tongue, exclud-
ing the tip, blade and root.
bootstrapping problem A problem in child language
acquisition. The problem is this: if the child decodes
speech by mapping utterances of words on to words
stored in the child’s mind, how can the child make a
start? In order to have mental representations of words
stored in the mind, the child must first extract words
from the stream of speech. But how can the child
extract these if he/she does not already have mental
representations of words? There are not normally
pauses between words in the stream of speech, so
how is the child to know which sequences of phonetic
segments constitute words? One response to this
puzzle is to appeal to the child’s capacity to extract
statistical tendencies from the stream of speech (see
stochastic phonology). The term ‘bootstrapping’ may
come from the expression ‘to pull oneself up by one’s
22 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
own bootstraps’, meaning to get started from scratch
without help, or from its application to computers,
which have a bootstrapping program which gets the
computer started when it is switched on.
borrowing see loanword. The term is also used in the liter-
ature on code-switching, to denote words uttered by
bilinguals which have been taken from one of the
speaker’s languages and phonologically or morphologi-
cally modified in accordance with the systemof the other
language. An utterance such as L’ordinateur est discon-
necté (‘The computer is disconnected’), uttered by a
bilingual speaker, contains the English word discon-
nected which is borrowed and modified, both phono-
logically and morphologically, to fit with the phonology
and morphology of French. The phonological modifica-
tion lies in the utterance of the English prefix dis- as [dis],
with a French [i] vowel instead of an English [i] vowel.
The morphological modification lies in the uttering of
the French suffix -é instead of the English suffix -ed.
boundary tone The tone that occurs at the edge of an into-
nation group. The notion is used by phonologists who
analyse intonation contours by separating them into
their component tones. Boundary tones are repre-
sented in the representational system ToBI.
branching onset An onset which contains more than one
consonant, as in the English word brow. The term
‘branching’ derives from the use of tree diagrams to
represent syllable structure; a branching onset is visu-
ally represented using a diagram in which the onset
node contains two branches.
breaking A synonym for diphthongisation.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 23
broad Used to describe non-standard accents which have
not been influenced by features of standard accents.
Accents may be more or less broad; the broader the
accent, the more non-standard features it retains.
Thus, a speaker with a broad Liverpool English accent
will retain all of the features of that non-standard
accent, such as the lenition of voiceless stops to
affricates or fricatives, as in [bυx] for book. This is one
of the few terms to be used, in much the same sense, by
specialists and the general public alike.
broad transcription Usually defined in contradistinction
to narrow transcription. The difference between the
two is that, the narrower a transcription, the more
phonetic detail it contains. Broader transcriptions
contain less phonetic detail and often approximate to
phonemic transcription. Some authors equate broad
transcription with phonemic transcription.
Bybee, Joan Under the name Joan Hooper, this American
phonologist was associated with Natural Generative
Phonology and has more recently been associated with
usage-based phonology.
C Stands for consonant. For example, when phonologists
speak of CV syllables, they mean simple syllables with
a single consonant in the onset position and a single
vowel in the nucleus position.
canonical babbling see babbling
cardinal vowels Specific vowel qualities which are used
as reference points for locating any given vowel
C
24 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
articulation. The cardinal vowel system of description
is based on the idea that one can distinguish the high-
low dimension from the front-back dimension. The
cardinal vowels are often said to be vowel qualities
produced at certain very peripheral points in the vowel
space, such as cardinal vowel 1, which is said to be pro-
duced with the tongue as high and as far front as it can
go in the mouth without friction being created (and
with the lips unrounded). It has often been claimed
that, in making the transition from, say, cardinal
vowel 1 ([i]) through cardinal vowel 2 ([e]), to cardinal
vowel 3 ([ε]) and on to cardinal vowel 4 ([a]), the body
of the tongue descends through a series of equidistant
steps. But it has equally often been pointed out that this
seems not to be physiologically true. None the less, the
cardinal vowel system of representing vowel qualities
in a trapezium-shaped chart is still seen as a useful,
practical way of visualising the vowel space and the
available range of vowel qualities. The cardinal vowel
chart is still used in the International Phonetic
Alphabet.
categorisation The act of allocating specific objects and
events to categories. This can range from categorising a
given object as an instance of, say, a spoon, to the cate-
gorisation of a given speech sound to a particular cate-
gory. In decoding the speech signal, humans are able to
allocate a given speech sound to a specific speech sound
type; we can hear a given speech sound as an instance
of a [t] or an [s], for example. Many believe that cate-
gorisation is central to perception. See normalisation.
Celtic A language family which subsumes present-day
languages such as Scots Gaelic, Irish Gaelic, Welsh and
Breton. Part of the Indo-European language family.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 25
central The area of the vowel space between front and back.
Front vowels lie below the hard palate, back vowels lie
below the velum (soft palate), and central vowels lie
below where the two meet. An example of a central
vowel is the high, rounded ‘u’-type sound produced in
Scottish English; transcribed as [u], it lies between high
back [u] and high front [y]. The termis also used, in the
description of consonants, for sounds in which the air
escapes down a groove in the tongue. Most of the frica-
tives and approximants in English have central escape of
air, as in the alveolar fricative [s]. See lateral.
centralisation A vowel articulation is said to be cen-
tralised if it is produced closer to the central area of the
vowel space than it might otherwise have been. In the
IPA, centralised vowels are transcribed with a dieresis,
as in [e ¨], which denotes a centralised version of the car-
dinal vowel [e]. An example of a centralised vowel in
English is the [ε¨] of Scottish English, a centralised
version of [ε] found in many Scottish speakers’ pro-
nunciation of the stressed vowel in words such as
eleven, seven, next, yesterday.
centring diphthong A diphthong in which a transition is
made towards the centre of the vowel space, in the area
where schwa is produced. The RP centring diphthongs
are [iə], [υə] and [εə], as in here, poor and there.
checked syllable Synonym for a closed syllable.
checked vowel Another name for the set of English vowels
which are known as short or lax vowels.
Chomsky, Noam An American linguist who has worked
in the second half of the twentieth century and in the
26 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
early twenty-first century. His name is closely associ-
ated with generative linguistics. In the field of phonol-
ogy, he co-authored The Sound Pattern of English
(SPE) with Morris Halle, thus establishing the frame-
work known as SPE phonology, widely seen as the
starting point for generative phonology. He is known
for advocating Rationalism in linguistics.
clash avoidance see stress clash avoidance
Classical Latin The standard language spoken in Ancient
Rome, Latin was imposed on the inhabitants of the
Roman Empire, and was used as a lingua franca
among scholars throughout Europe for centuries after
the demise of the Roman Empire. Classical Latin is
usually distinguished from Vulgar Latin, the version of
Latin spoken by the lay person, by colonising Roman
soldiers and by merchants. It is Vulgar Latin that is
taken to be the source from which the present-day
Romance languages evolved.
‘clear l’ This term could be used to denote a lateral that is
palatalised, as in the ‘l’ sound found in the Scottish
English of the Highlands of Scotland, in words such as
[l
·
nl
·
] (lull), where the superscript diacritic ‘·’ denotes
palatalisation. One would then have three main types
of ‘l’: ‘dark l’, ‘clear l’, and an ‘l’ which is neither clear
nor dark (neither velarised nor palatalised). However,
the term is used to refer to ‘l’ sounds which are not
palatalised, but are also not pronounced with a retrac-
tion of the body of the tongue; they are not ‘dark l’s’.
In Received Pronunciation (RP), the /l/ phoneme is
realised as a ‘dark l’ in the rhyme of syllables, but it is
not ‘dark’ in onset position. Many authors refer to this
‘non-dark’ l as ‘clear l’.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 27
Clements, Nick An American phonologist with French
(and British) connections who has worked in the USA.
Since 1992, the leader of a phonology research team in
Paris, he has worked extensively in both the generative
phonology tradition and in the Laboratory Phonology
community. He is a specialist in the phonology of
various African languages who has worked on, among
other things, nasality, distinctive features in the
world’s languages, feature geometry, tone and the pho-
netics/phonology interface.
clicks see airstream mechanisms
clitic A unit which is intermediate between a word and an
affix, as in the French pronouns je, te and le in Je te le
rends (‘I’m giving it back to you’), which do not seem to
have the status of full words such as livre in Je te rends
ton livre. Nor do they seem to have the same status
as affixes, such as the prefix re- in redemander (‘ask
again’). Such units are not affixes, but they are unlike
full words in that they typically do not receive the tonic
accent in an intonation group. They also undergo reduc-
tion processes, such as the elision of the schwa vowel,
often conveyed in spelling via the use of apostrophes, as
in J’t’aime (‘I love you’), pronounced [͐tεm]. In English,
units such as the n’t in expressions like couldn’t are said
to be clitics. A clitic which follows its ‘host’ (such as n’t)
is called an enclitic. A clitic which precedes its ‘host’
(such as the J’ and the t’ in J’t’aime) is called a proclitic.
cliticisation A process in which full words are ‘demoted’
to the status of clitics. In the expression wannabe, from
want to be, the words to and be are ‘fused’ with want
to form a single trochaic foot which may then function
as a single word.
28 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
close approximation see degree of stricture
close juncture see juncture
closed syllable see syllable
coalescence A process in which two sounds assimilate to
each other. In English, a sequence of alveolar [s] fol-
lowed by the palatal approximant [j] will often result
in coalescence, yielding the palato-alveolar sound [ʃ],
as in [miʃə] for miss you. Also known as reciprocal
assimilation.
Cockney The popular term for broad varieties of London
English.
coda see syllable
code-switching A phenomenon found among both adult
and child bilinguals, in which the speaker switches
from one language to another during a single sen-
tence or intonation group. This is relevant for phono-
logical investigation, since such speakers switch from
one phonological system to another during a single
utterance.
cognition Mental states and processes.
cognitive Relating to cognition. Those who support a
cognitive view of phonology argue that phonology
is about investigating certain mental states and
processes, such as phonological representations under-
stood as representations in the mind. On this view, the
study of phonological representations and processes is
a part of cognitive science.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 29
cognitive science The science of mental states and
processes. Many believe that it is possible to gain sci-
entific understanding of at least some aspects of the
human mind.
compensatory lengthening A process in which a segment
undergoes elision and an adjacent segment lengthens.
Very often, it is a coda consonant which is elided, and
a preceding vowel is lengthened. In the history of
French, vowel + /s/ + consonant sequences underwent
elision of the /s/ and compensatory lengthening of the
preceding vowel, as in the transition from Old French
beste (‘beast’), pronounced [bεstə], to a later form with
an elided /s/ and a lengthened /ε/: [bε:tə], reflected in
the present-day spelling bête, where the circumflex his-
torically marked the length of the vowel.
competence A term associated with the work of Noam
Chomsky and thus widely used in generative linguis-
tics. It designates a speaker’s linguistic knowledge, as
opposed to the use of that knowledge. Most generative
linguists assume that there is a phonological compo-
nent within a speaker’s linguistic competence. It is
important to bear in mind that, in speaking of linguis-
tic competence, Chomsky is using an everyday term in
a specialist sense. In everyday language, ‘competence’
means ability to do something well, ability to perform
certain tasks to a certain level. Chomsky denies that
knowing a language is knowing how to do something.
See I-language, E-language and performance.
complement A term used in syntax to refer to obligatory
syntactic constituents, as in the noun phrase the dog in
the sentence John kicked the dog. In this example, the
noun phrase the dog is said to be the complement of
30 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
the verb kicked. The verb kicked, being a transitive
verb, must be followed by a complement, in this case
known as a direct object. Phonologists who postulate
parallelisms between syntactic structure and phono-
logical structure have argued that certain phonological
constituents are complements. For instance, coda con-
sonants are said by some to be complements of the
vowels which precede them, as in the word /kæt/ (cat),
where the coda consonant /t/ is said to be the comple-
ment of the vowel /æ/; the nucleus of the syllable is said
to require a complement in the form of a coda conso-
nant. Frameworks which have adopted the notion
of complement in phonology include Dependency
Phonology, Government Phonology and Head-Driven
Phonology.
complementary distribution see Phonemic Principle
complete closure see degree of stricture
complex segment Another term for a contour segment.
compound A word made from two or more other words.
Simple two-part cases in English include words such as
textbook, eyelid and mole-hill. Many phonologists pos-
tulate a compound stress rule for English in which the
first of the two elements is the most prominent. But
there are large numbers of English two-part compounds
in which the second element is the most prominent. The
criteria for establishing whether a given sequence of two
words in English is a phrase or a compound include
both phonological and semantic phenomena.
concrete A term often used to describe postulated phono-
logical representations which are said to be close to the
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 31
phonetic form of words as they are pronounced by
speakers. It is often opposed to abstract. The distinc-
tion is closely related to the difficult problem of the
possible distinction between phonology and phonetics.
See realisation.
Connectionism see neural nets
consonant Consonants are a subset of the set of human
speech sounds. Consonants are produced with three
different degrees of stricture: complete closure, close
approximation and open approximation. Consonants
can be defined in terms of their position in syllable
structure; they usually occupy the onset and coda posi-
tions, whereas vowels occupy the head of the nucleus
position in a syllable (but see syllabic consonants).
Some consonants, such as the glides [w] and [j], often
called semiconsonants, share with vowels a stricture
of open approximation, but, unlike vowels, do not
occupy the head of the syllable nucleus. There is a con-
tinuum among the set of human speech sounds from
most consonantal to most vowel-like. See sonority
hierarchy.
consonant harmony In child speech, a phenomenon in
which a consonant is altered so as to harmonise with,
i.e. become more similar to, another consonant, as in
[vipu] for ‘whistle’, where a coronal sound (the [s]) in
the adult target is uttered as a labial ([p]), thus har-
monising with the initial labial (the [w]). The harmon-
ising consonant may become identical to another
consonant, as in [gɒg] or [dɒd] for ‘dog’. Child conso-
nant harmony usually involves major place of articu-
lation. There is a general tendency for coronals to cede
place of articulation to non-coronals, as in [vipu] and
32 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
[gɒg], but the reverse is attested, as in [dɒd]. Individual
children vary a great deal in the extent to which they
produce harmonised forms. There is also variation
in the shape of words which undergo consonant
harmony. For instance, some individual children will
have harmony in CVC and CVCVC words, but not in
CVCV words.
In adult phonology, consonant harmony for major
place of articulation is unattested, but there are many
phenomena involving harmony for minor place of
articulation, as in Navajo sibilant harmony, where
the underlying representation /j-iʃ-mas/ (I’m rolling
along’) becomes [jismas], with the palato-alveolar /ʃ/
harmonising with the alveolar /s/.
consonant system see Phonemic Principle
consonant vocalisation A process whereby a consonant
articulation becomes vowel-like. In London English,
an /l/ in the rhyme of a syllable is frequently realised as
a [w] sound, as in [gεv] for ‘girl’, where the /l/ is in
coda position.
consonantal Pertaining to consonants; consonant-like.
The term is also used as a distinctive feature.
conspiracy Two or more distinct phonological processes
can ‘conspire’ to bring about a specific pattern. In
Swedish, the plural ending for nouns is -or. When this
is added to a noun root ending in a vowel, the final
vowel of the root deletes, so that when the plural suffix
is added to a root such as flicka, the resulting form is
flickor, with deletion of the -a. The definite article in
Swedish is the suffix -an. When this is added to a root
ending in a vowel, the /a/ in the suffix is deleted, so that
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 33
flicka becomes flickan. These are distinct processes,
but they ‘conspire’ to block sequences of two vowels
across a morpheme boundary.
constituent A term used in both syntax and phonology. In
syntax, it denotes a set of words which go together to
form a structural unit. In the sentence Jim is in the
park, the sequence in the park forms a constituent
known as a prepositional phrase. In phonology, sylla-
bles are often said to be composed of the two main
constituents onset and rhyme. Phonologists also pos-
tulate metrical constituents of words and phrases, the
main such constituent being the metrical foot.
constraint A way of stating an observed generalisation.
Examples are phonotactic constraints, which are ways
of stating which sequences of segments may occur in
specific parts of a syllable in a given language (for
instance, the onset sequence /pn/ violates English
phonotactic constraints). In the history of generative
phonology, a transition occurred in the 1990s from the
SPE tradition, which postulated both rules and con-
straints, to Optimality Theory, which attempts to state
all phonological generalisations in terms of con-
straints. The notion of ’constraint’ is essentially more
declarative than the notion of rule, which is easily
interpreted as process. Constraints also play a central
role in the Theory of Constraints and Repair Strategies
proposed by Carole Paradis.
constricted glottis A feature used to denote the closure of
the vocal cords found in glottal stops and glottalised
sounds.
constriction Synonym for stricture. See degree of stricture.
34 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
constructivism An approach to child language acquisition
which takes the child to be actively constructing his/her
linguistic knowledge. In the field of child syntax, a
well-known constructivist is Michael Tomasello. In the
field of child phonology, the work of Marilyn Vihman
is constructivist. In the field of developmental disor-
ders in child language acquisition, Annette Karmiloff-
Smith’s work is constructivist. Constructivists reject
the Chomskyan conception of the child’s linguistic
development.
content word Another term for words of a lexical
category.
contour segment A segment in which there are two dis-
tinct subparts, occurring in sequence. Affricates are
often said to be contour segments, since they consist
of a stop closure followed by a fricative release.
Prenasalised stops are also often analysed as contour
segments. Pre-aspirated stops in some languages may
be analysed this way too.
contrastive function see phoneme
contrastive stress A term used to refer to the placement
of tonics to highlight a contrast. The ‘neutral’ or
unmarked tonic placement in the sentence John went
to the pub would have the tonic on pub, since it is the
last lexical item. But if one were seeking to emphasise
the fact that it was John, and not someone else, who
went to the pub, one could place the tonic on John,
thus contrasting John with some other person. The
terms ‘contrastive intonation’ or ‘contrastive tonic
placement’ would seem more appropriate than ‘con-
trastive stress’.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 35
cooing A term used by some child phonology experts to
describe the first comfort sounds, uttered in the 2–4-
month age period. These sounds are normally pro-
duced in response to adults smiling at and talking to
the child.
corner vowels The four corner points in the cardinal
vowel chart: cardinal vowel 1 ([i]), 4 ([a]), 5 ([ɑ]) and
8 ([u]).
coronal A term used to subsume dental, alveolar and
postalveolar consonants, which are all produced using
the blade of the tongue. The word has the same root as
crown and coronation but, for some reason, we speak
of the blade, rather than the crown, of the tongue.
Various theories of distinctive features make use of
[coronal] as a feature.
correlate A term used to denote the relationship between
some phonological phenomenon and its phonetic
realisation. It is often said, for example, that the pho-
netic correlates of word stress are increased duration,
increased loudness, or pitch movement. Some lan-
guages rely more on pitch movement than duration to
signal word stress, while others rely equally on both.
The term is used as a verb in work on sociophonetic
variation. We may say, for example, that occurrence of
pre-aspirated [t] in Tyneside English correlates with
age, social class and gender, since it is used mostly by
young working-class women.
correlation In sociophonetic inquiry, it is common to try
to establish whether a given sociolinguistic parameter,
such as age or social class, correlates with the presence
of a given pronunciation feature, such as non-rhotic
36 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
speech. In New York City English, degree of non-
rhoticity correlates with the social class of the speaker.
countertonic vowel A vowel which receives secondary
stress. In Classical Latin and Vulgar Latin, word-initial
vowels which did not bear primary stress received a
secondary stress, as in the word amare (‘to love’), in
which the initial vowel is the countertonic vowel and
the second vowel receives primary stress. See tonic
vowel.
creole When children are exposed to a pidgin language as
their first language during the language acquisition
period, the language becomes less simplified than the
pidgin. This process is known as creolisation.
creolisation see creole
CV syllable A syllable consisting of a single consonant in
the onset position and a single vowel in the nucleus,
with no coda consonant. Syllables of this sort are often
assumed to be the most basic, or simple, sorts of sylla-
ble. They are found universally in the babbling stage of
child development. Some languages have phonotactic
constraints which allow only CV syllables.
‘dark l’ An informal term used to denote a lateral that has
a secondary articulation involving the body of the
tongue, usually the back of the tongue, which may form
a structure of open approximation with the velum,
resulting in velarisation of the lateral. Some ‘dark l’
sounds may have a retraction of the body of the tongue
which is not raised towards the velum, but is withdrawn
D
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 37
towards the back of the oral cavity, without being
raised. The British accent referred to as Received
Pronunciation (RP) has ‘dark l’ in the rhyme of sylla-
bles, but not in the onset position in syllables, as can be
seen in the RP pronunciation of words such as lull: [ln¡].
Here, the /l/ in the onset position is not dark, but the /l/
in coda position of the rhyme is a ‘dark l’. See ‘clear l’.
declarative A distinction is often made between an essen-
tially static way of conceiving of phonological general-
isations, and an essentially dynamic way of stating
those generalisations. The static way involves stating
what the well-formed phonological structures are in
a given language (phonotactic constraints are an
example). This kind of approach is said to be declara-
tive. The dynamic way leans on the notion of phono-
logical processes, such as the idea of syllabification
processes which actively build syllable structure.
declarative phonology A phonological model is declara-
tive if it states phonological generalisations in such a
way as to avoid any appeal to the notion of derivation.
It is sometimes claimed, in models which are said to be
declarative, that phonological representations in those
models are more concrete than those in derivational
models, in that the phonological representations pos-
tulated in declarative models are said to represent
surface forms ‘directly’.
declination see downdrift
default A term used to denote an unmarked state of
affairs. The placement of the tonic in English on the
last lexical item is the default placement. Default
values of features are the values that are supplied to
38 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
underspecified representations if no process has
applied to provide a non-default value. The unmarked
voicing state for sonorants in human languages is that
they are voiced. Some phonologists have therefore pos-
tulated default rules to supply feature [voiced] to sono-
rants, which are left unspecified for voicing state in
underlying representations.
degemination A process in which a geminate segment is
simplified to become non-geminate. In the English
word immaterial, the prefix in- is added to the adjec-
tive material. But the word is pronounced with a non-
geminate [m]: [imə'tiəɹiəl], and not as [immə'tiəɹiəl],
with a fake geminate. This is in contrast to words such
as unnatural, where degemination does not take place;
the prefix un- is added to the root natural, resulting in
the pronunciation [nn'nætʃəɹəl], with a fake geminate.
degree of stricture The extent to which airflow is
obstructed in the production of a sound. Three degrees
of stricture are often recognised. Complete closure rep-
resents the highest degree of stricture: the airflow is
blocked completely. Sounds produced this way are
called stops or plosives. Examples are the [p] in open,
the [t] in butter and the [k] in bucket. Close approxi-
mation constitutes a less extreme degree of stricture:
the articulators come into close contact, but the airflow
is not completely blocked. Rather, it escapes through a
small space, causing turbulence, heard as audible fric-
tion. Sounds produced this way are called fricatives.
Examples are the [θ] in thin, the [f] in fin, the [s] in sin
and the [ʃ] in shin. Open approximation is an even less
extreme degree of stricture: the articulators do not
come close enough to cause friction. Sounds produced
this way are called approximants and vowels. Examples
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 39
are the approximants [j] and [w] in yes and go, and the
vowels [i:] and [ɑ:] in see and far in certain varieties of
English. Degree of stricture is also known as manner of
articulation.
deletion A term used to refer to the loss (elision) of a
segment or syllable.
Dell, François A French phonologist who works in the
tradition of generative phonology. In the early 1970s,
Dell approached the phonology of French from the
perspective of SPE phonology. He is also known for his
later work on the phonology of the Berber language.
With Nick Clements, he runs a phonology research
laboratory in Paris.
dental Sounds which are dental involve an articulation
between the tip of the tongue and the upper teeth. An
example is the voiceless dental fricative at the end of
the English word teeth: [ti:θ]. Dental stops are also
widely attested, as in the pronunciation [t_|iŋ] for
thing, where the subscript diacritic indicates that the
articulation is dental. This phenomenon is attested in
many varieties of English. See TH-Stopping.
depalatalisation A process whereby palatal sounds
become non-palatal, usually as a result of a process of
assimilation. In Polish, the palatal phonemes /c
´
/, /j
´
/ and
/n´ / are realised as alveolar [t], [d] and [n] respect ively
when followed by coronal segments, as in the mor-
pheme /vilgoc
´
/ (‘moisture’) which is realised with a [t]
in the adjective [vilgotnI] (‘moist’).
Dependency Phonology A framework associated with the
linguist JohnM. Anderson, inwhichthe head-dependent
40 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
relation is central. Dependency Phonology uses
elements, rather than binary-valued features, in the
characterisation of segmental structure. Dependency
relations are postulated to hold between elements within
segments, between the constituents within a syllable,
and between the syllables within a foot. In this frame-
work, elements cluster together to form gestures.
dependent see head
derivation Models of phonological organisation which
posit more than one level of representation, and which
map one level on to another, contain appeal to the
notion of a derivation, in which one level is derived
from the other. A simple example would be a phone-
mic model in which the phonetic level is derived from
the phonemic level, as in the derivation of the phonetic
representation [p|υ¡] from the phonemic representa-
tion /pυl/ (pull). SPE phonology is derivational, since it
appeals to the idea of postulating two levels of rep -
resentation (underlying representations and surface
forms) and deriving one from the other, often via the
ordered application of a set of rules.
derivational phonology Any model of phonology which
appeals to the notion of a derivation. An example is
SPE phonology.
derived see derivation
derived contrast One often finds minimal pairs in which
one member of the pair is morphologically complex,
while the other is not. In Northern Irish English, the /e/
phoneme often has an [eə] allophone in closed sylla-
bles, as in same and daze: [seəm] and [deəz]. It often
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 41
has an [ε:] allophone in open syllables, as in day: [dε:].
When one adds the plural suffix to nouns such as day,
the pronunciation tends to retain the [ε:] allophone of
the singular: [dε:z] (days), despite the fact that the
vowel is in a closed syllable in days. One thus finds
minimal pairs such as [deəz] (daze) vs [dε:z] (days).
Such contrasts are often referred to as derived con-
trasts; the contrast is derived from a morphological
process (here, the addition of the plural suffix). Such
contrasts seem distinct from non-derived contrasts
such as [get] (gate) and [gεt] (get). Also known as mar-
ginal contrasts. See paradigm uniformity effect.
devoicing A process in which an underlyingly voiced
phoneme is realised as voiceless. Final devoicing
involves the devoicing of voiced obstruents in word-
final or syllable-final position, as in the German word
[ʁat] (‘wheel’), which is underlyingly /ʁad/, as seen in
the form [ʁadəs] (‘of the wheel’). Consonants may be
devoiced because they are adjacent to a voiceless
sound, as in the case of the French voiced uvular
fricative /ʁ/, which is devoiced in onset clusters when
preceded by a voiceless stop. The French word train
(‘train’) is /tʁε ˜/ phonologically, but [tχε ˜] phonetically,
with a voiceless uvular fricative. This latter kind of
devoicing is a form of assimilation.
diachronic Relating to diachrony. The diachronic phonol-
ogy of a language is the study of how its phonology has
changed during its history.
diachrony From the Ancient Greek meaning ‘through
time’. Studies in the diachrony of a language are
studies of the way it has changed over time. Opposed
to synchrony.
42 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
diacritic A visual symbol used in transcriptions to denote
some phonetic property. An example is the ‘|’ diacritic
used to denote aspiration in voiceless stops, as in the
English word tip: [t|ip]. Some diacritics are superscript
diacritics, such as the one we have just seen; they are
written above the relevant symbol. Others are sub-
script diacritics; they are placed below the relevant
symbol, as in the case of the diacritic for Advanced
Tongue Root: [c ¸] denotes an [e] with ATR. Some dia-
critics run through the symbols in question, as in the
case of the velarisation diacritic used to represent ‘dark
l’ and other velarised sounds; full in English is often
transcribed as [fυ¡], although the IPA now represents
velarised consonants with a superscript diacritic: [fυl
·
]
dialect see accent
diphthong A vowel sound in which there is a transition
from one vowel quality to another within a single syl-
lable nucleus, as in the English word [bai] (buy).
Transitions from one vowel quality to another across
syllable boundaries are not diphthongs; English [si:iŋ]
(seeing) has a transition from [i:] to [i], but this is not
a diphthong, since the transition does not take place
within a single nucleus.
diphthongisation A process in which a monophthong
becomes a diphthong. For example, the monoph-
thongs /e/ and /o/ have undergone diphthongisation in
many varieties of English to become, for example, [ei]
and [əυ]. Referred to informally as breaking.
Direct Syntax Hypothesis A claim that syntactic structure
may directly affect phonological processes. Some have
argued, for instance, that Liaison in French is triggered
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 43
by sequences of words which form a close syntactic
unit, as in les amis (‘the friends’): [lezami], in which the
latent consonant is pronounced since the definite
article and the noun form a syntactic constituent.
disharmony Many languages which have vowel harmony
contain words with vowels from different harmonic
sets, as in Hungarian [sofor] ‘driver’, which has a
vowel from the back set and a vowel from the front set.
Such cases are often loanwords, as is the case here,
where the word is from French chauffeur ([ʃofoʁ]).
Disharmony can also be induced by the presence of
neutral vowels and opaque vowels.
Dispersion Theory The claim that vowel phonemes tend
to be dispersed across the vowel space. The idea is that,
the fewer the vowel contrasts in a given language, the
more unlike each other the vowels will be, so that a
language with, say, only three vowel phonemes will
have maximally distinct vowel qualities, typically /i/,
/u/ and /a/, rather than, say, /i/, /e/ and /ε/. This minimal
vowel triangle plays a central role in element-based
theories such as Dependency Phonology. The three
vowels in question are sometimes referred to as the
point vowels, since they are visualised as three points
on a triangle.
dissimilation The opposite of assimilation. A process
whereby two adjacent sounds become less similar.
For instance, in the history of Greek, a sequence of
two fricatives in an onset was permitted in Ancient
Greek, but these tended to become, over time, a
sequence of a fricative followed by a stop, as in Ancient
Greek [fθinos] (‘cheap’) becoming [ftinos] in Modern
Greek.
44 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
distinctive features see features
distribution see Phonemic Principle
distributionalism A term associated with American
Structuralism, whose practitioners focused on estab-
lishing the distribution of linguistic units in order to
come up with an analysis. In phonology, this meant
examining the distribution of segment types in order to
assign them to phonemes.
disyllabic A synonym for bisyllabic.
domain A stretch of phonological material within which,
or across which, or at the edge of which, phonological
processes apply. Examples of postulated domains are
the syllable, the foot and the phonological word.
dominant/recessive harmony A form of vowel harmony
in which a property of a vowel in some specific affix
is spread throughout the root to which it attaches,
as in Turkana, where the root /imυj/ has RTR vowels,
but when the habitual suffix /eeni/ is added, its ATR
value spreads throughout the root: [ak-imuj-eeni].
Such suffixes are said to be dominant. In such lan-
guages, there will be other suffixes which are not dom-
inant, as in [a-imυj-i], where the aspectual suffix
undergoes ATR harmony. Such suffixes are said to be
recessive.
dorsal A term used to describe sounds in which the body
of the tongue (the dorsum) features. The term sub-
sumes velar and uvular sounds. It is used as a feature
in theories of distinctive features, and as a node in
theories of feature geometry.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 45
downdrift A phenomenon found in tone languages in
which the tones become progressively lower as the utter-
ance goes on, so that a word with a high tone which is
uttered near the end of the utterance may have the same
pitch, or even a lower pitch, than a word uttered with a
low tone early in the utterance. In the Kwa language
Igbo, the following sentence has a sequence of alternat-
ing high and low tones, marked here with the super-
script diacritics ´ and `: o´ na` a´ ŋ va` u´ nja` i ´gwè (‘He is trying
to ride a bicycle’). The last high tone, on the first sylla-
ble of i ´gvè, is close in pitch level to the first low tone,
on the word na` . Also known as declination.
downstep A phenomenon found in tone languages,
whereby a high tone has been lowered because of the
effect of a preceding low tone which is not phonetically
realised. In the Kwa language Twi, in the phonetic
sequence [mi ´ bu´] (‘my stone’), the second high tone is
lower than the first high tone. It has been downstepped
by the underlying low tone in the underlying represen-
tation /mi ´ ɔ` bu´ /. The underlying vowel /ɔ` / is then deleted,
so that the cause of the downstepping is not phonetically
present in the utterance. Instances of downstepping may
well derive historically from processes of downdrift.
drag chain see vowel shift
Dravidian A language family. The Dravidian languages
are spoken in Southern India. They include Tamil,
Malayalam, Toda, Telugu and Kannada. These lan-
guages do not belong to the Indo-European language
family.
DRESS Raising The name for a phenomenon found
in New Zealand English, in which words of the lexical
46 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
set DRESS are raised from the low mid [ε] position
to the high [i] position, so that words such as desk
are pronounced [disk]. DRESS Raising forms part of
a vowel shift in New Zealand English. Words of
the lexical set TRAP are raised from [æ] to low mid
[ε], while words of the lexical set DRESS move into
the space of the lexical set KIT, and words in the
latter set have a vowel that is shifted back to the high
central unrounded vowel [i]. Thus the claim that
check-in desk in New Zealand English sounds like
chicken disk.
Durand, Jacques A contemporary French linguist who
spent much of his career in Britain, before returning to
his native France. Durand has worked extensively on
machine translation, but is mostly known as a phonol-
ogist who has worked on a variety of languages, espe-
cially French phonology, including the phonology of
Midi French (Southern French).
duration A term used to describe the amount of time
taken to articulate a given segment. Geminate conson -
ants are said to be articulated with greater duration
than non-geminates. Long vowels are said to be artic-
ulated with greater duration than short vowels. The
term is clearly relative, but the phonetic duration of
segments is more or less measurable in milliseconds.
The main problem associated with measuring duration
is that it varies from speaker to speaker, depending on
context and rate of speech. There are also problems in
deciding where exactly a given segment starts when
one examines a spectrogram. Some phonologists dis-
tinguish length as a property of phonological repre-
sentations with the brute phonetic duration of a given
segment uttered on a given occasion.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 47
dyslexia A condition which may be present from birth or
which may be acquired as the result of brain injury of
the sort induced by a stroke. Dyslexia is a reading dys-
function. Two main subtypes are identified. In surface
dyslexia, the ability to recognise whole written
word forms is damaged, but the capacity of individ -
uals to access their graphophonemics may remain
intact. In cases of phonological dyslexia, the damage
is the other way round: affected individuals can
recognise whole written word forms, but cannot
access their grapho-phonemic knowledge. These phe-
nomena are important for phonologists, since they
suggest that graphophonemic knowledge is modular
in nature.
ease of articulation The tendency that human beings have
to produce utterances in which articulatory effort is
diminished. Assimilations of various sorts are exam-
ples; if one utters an /np/ sequence in English sequences
such as /in ϩ pυt/ (input) as [impυt], one makes a
saving in articulatory effort by keeping the lips closed
in the production of the nasal stop. Ease of articulation
stands in a relation of tension to the need to sustain
oppositions which signal differences in meaning. See
avoidance of homophony and Martinet.
ejectives see airstream mechanisms
E-language External language. In the view of Noam
Chomsky, notions such as ‘French’, ‘German’ and
‘Japanese’ are sociopolitical notions which do not con-
stitute the object of linguistic inquiry. Rather, the
object of inquiry is said to be I-language. Chomsky
E
48 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
also argues that languages defined as sets of sentences
constitute E-language.
elements see feature values
elide When a speech sound is elided, it is not pro-
nounced. When French-speakers (who have no /h/
phoneme in their native language) speak English, they
often elide the [h] sounds in words such as happy and
hair.
elision A process in which a segment is not pronounced.
In many varieties of English, words such as [fæmili]
(family) can be pronounced with an elided [i]:[fæmli].
In English, it is usually unstressed vowels which are
elided. Consonants too may be elided, as in [siksθs]
(sixths), often pronounced [siks]. The process is often
referred to as deletion. For the elision of [h] in English,
as in Cockney [æpi] for happy, the informal term ‘h-
dropping’ is often used.
emphatic consonants Consonants found in the Semitic
languages which are apical, but which have a
secondary articulation, often in the pharynx. The
pharyngealisation can spread to other segments in a
word containing an emphatic consonant. In Cairene
Arabic, the word for ‘friend’ is [s°a°a°hib], where the
diacritic [°] indicates pharyngealisation. In this case,
the pharyngealisation spreads from the emphatic con-
sonant [s°] to the following two vowels.
Empiricism A tradition in the history of philosophy in
which human knowledge is said to emerge from the
interaction of the mind with the mind-external world.
Empiricism has traditionally denied the existence of
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 49
innate cognitive content, such as innate concepts. An
Empiricist account of phonology claims that phonolog-
ical knowledge is internalised from the environment, via
social interaction with other human beings. Empiricism
is traditionally distinguished from Rationalism, also
known as Nativism.
empty onset see syllable
enclitic see clitic
Encrevé, Pierre A French phonologist who is known for
combining an investigation of sociophonetic variation
in speakers of French with an autosegmental approach
to Liaison in French.
enhancement The idea that a phonological contrast can
be perceptually reinforced, heightened or enhanced by
the addition of some extra articulatory gesture to one
member or members of the sounds in contrast. If a
back vowel contrasts with a front vowel, the contrast
can be enhanced if the back vowel is rounded and the
front vowel is unrounded.
environment see phonemic Principle
epenthesis The insertion of a segment in a sequence of seg-
ments. The inserted segment is said to be epenthetic.
An example of an epenthetic consonant is the Intrusive
‘r’ of non-rhotic varieties of English, as in law and
order: [lɔ:ɹənɔ:də]. An example of an epenthetic vowel
is the epenthetic [n] in Scottish pronunciations of
words such as umbrella: [nmbnɹε¡n].
epenthetic consonant see epenthesis
50 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
epenthetic vowel see epenthesis
European Structuralism see structuralist linguistics
eurhythmic see eurhythmy
eurhythmy In many rhythmic systems, there is a tendency
towards sequences of alternating stressed and
unstressed syllables, with every alternate syllable being
stressed. Such sequences exemplify eurhythmy. The
Malay word [,sa.ka.,ɾa.tul.'m ã.u˜ t] (‘near to death’)
exemplifies this. It has a (secondary) stressed syllable,
followed by an unstressed syllable, followed by
another (secondary) stressed syllable, followed by an
unstressed syllable, followed by a (primary) stressed
syllable, followed by an unstressed syllable. Such a
word is said to be eurhythmic.
Everett, Dan A linguist who works on South American
Indian languages, particularly the language Piraha.
Everett is a controversial figure since he claims, among
other things, that recursion is not an absolute univer-
sal of human languages. Everett is known for his work
in phonology, morphology and syntax.
exemplar theory An approach to the mental lexicon
whose central claim is that words are stored in the
mind with all of the phonetic detail perceived by
the speaker/hearer, including all redundant material.
The idea is that each time a speaker/hearer hears a
word, a trace of it is stored in the mind with all of the
phonetic detail included. Thus, words which are fre-
quently heard will have a large number of traces, or
exemplars, which will form a dense exemplar cloud in
the mind. Words which are heard infrequently will
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 51
have weaker representation in the mind. Exemplar
theory assumes that the human mind has a vast capac-
ity for storage, and subsequent recognition, of visual
and acoustic images. Phonologists who adopt exem-
plar theory deny that underlying representations in the
mind are stripped of all predictable information.
exponence see realisation
external sandhi see sandhi
extrametricality Segments or syllables are said to be extra-
metrical if they ‘do not count’ in the calculation of
syllabic or foot structure. Supposedly extrametrical
material occurs at the edges of phonological con-
stituents. It has been argued that, if one discounts the
final segment in English words, it is possible to simplify
the statement of the word stress assignment algorithm.
If the final segment in a verb such as astonish is extra-
metrical, then the final syllable ceases to be heavy and
the primary stress will be assigned to the preceding
syllable.
extrasyllabicity One or more segments are said to be
extrasyllabic if they are not integrated into syllable
structure. The floating consonants which participate in
Liaison in French are often said to be extrasyllabic.
fake geminate see geminate
falling diphthong a diphthong in which the most promi-
nent element is the first one, as in English [aυ] (some-
times transcribed [aw]), where the off-glide [w] is less
F
52 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
prominent than the [a]. The most prominent element is
often referred to as the head of the diphthong.
feature geometry The study of the way different features
group together. Many believe that the major place
of articulation features labial, coronal and dorsal
group together in this way, and that this grouping
may be represented using a tree diagramin which those
features are seen as nodes branching from an Oral
Place node. Similarly, the features [ATR] and [RTR]
are seen as grouping together under a Tongue Root
node.
feature values Some phonologists who postulate that seg-
ments are bundles of features argue that features have
a binary ‘ϩ’ or ‘Ϫ’ value, as in [+round], a feature said
to characterise speech sounds which have lip rounding.
Speech sounds which are said to possess the negative
feature value [Ϫround] are characterised as lacking
lip rounding. Some phonological theories, such as
Dependency Phonology, seek to dispose of such
binary-valued features, and replace them with ele-
ments which are said to be either present or absent, so
that sounds with lip rounding have the element
[labial], while sounds which lack lip rounding are char-
acterised as not possessing that element. On this
view, feature contrasts are privative in nature (see
Trubetzkoy). It is an open question whether there is
any profound conceptual distinction between presence
vs absence of an element such as [labial] on the
one hand, and presence of [ϩlabial] vs presence of
[Ϫlabial] on the other hand.
features Most phonologists agree that segments can be
decomposed into features, such as [round], [high],
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 53
[low], [front] and [back], so that the [u] vowel,
for instance, possesses, among others, the features
[round], [high] and [back]. Similarly, the [k] consonant
is said to possess, among others, the features [high],
[back] and [voiceless]. When phonologists speak of
distinctive features, they mean features which function
to signal phonological contrasts, such as the contrast
between voiced and voiceless phonemes. See also car-
dinal vowels.
final devoicing see devoicing
Firth, J. R. (1890–1960) A British linguist based at
University College London, and then at the School of
Oriental and African Studies in London. Firth was
sceptical about the extent to which the speech signal
can be segmented into individual speech sounds, and
this led him to question the validity of the notion
phoneme, which was supported by his contemporary
Daniel Jones. He adopted a polysystemic approach to
phonological analysis and postulated prosodies, which
are parallel to the autosegments of Autosegmental
Phonology. An example of a prosody is the nasality
which one finds in the language Terena, in which
words such as [ajo] (‘his brother’) become [ãjo˜ ], which
means ‘my brother’. In cases such as this, nasality
appears to be a purely suprasegmental morpho-syn-
tactic property. Firth argued that phonological proper-
ties such as this often had as their domain, not single
segments, but larger units such as the syllable, the
phonological word and the intonation group. There is
a strong element of instrumentalism in Firth’s ideas,
and thus anti-mentalism. Firth also appears to have
adopted the thesis that phonological objects lack
intrinsic phonetic content.
54 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Firthian Phonology see Firth
flap A speech sound type in which an active articulator
engages in a brief contact with a passive articulator.
Several varieties of English have an alveolar flap, tran-
scribed as [ɾ], which is rather like a short [d], or like an
alveolar trill, but with only one tap of the tip/blade of
the tongue against the passive articulator. During
the production of [ɾ], as in Spanish pero (‘but’) or
American English witty, the tongue tip/blade taps
briefly against the alveolar ridge. Also known as a tap.
Although the IPA takes taps and flaps to be the same
thing, some phonologists insist on distinguishing them.
On this latter view, flaps are said to be retroflex, while
taps are not; taps are said to involve a movement up
and down of the upper surface of the tip/blade of the
tongue against the alveolar ridge, while flaps are said
to involve a back-front movement of the underside of
the tongue tip/blade.
Flapping A process in which, historically, a [t] sound or a
[d] sound has come to be produced as a flap (also
known as a tap). The words patting and padding in
General American are typically produced with a tap:
[pæɾiŋ].
floating consonants Also known as latent consonants,
these are usually word-final consonants which are not
realised unless they can occupy the onset position in a
following word which would otherwise have an empty
onset. The Linking ‘r’ of non-rhotic varieties of English
is sometimes analysed as a floating consonant. The
claim is that there is a word-final /r/ in words such as
far in such varieties, and that it is floating, or extrasyl-
labic, but that it may be linked to an empty onset in
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 55
phrases such as far away. Similarly, the ‘latent conson -
ants’ which participate in the phenomenon of Liaison
in French are said to be floating consonants, such as
the /z/ of mes in mes amis (‘my friends’): [mezami].
These floating consonants fail to be realised if the fol-
lowing word begins with a consonant, as in mes gants
(‘my gloves’): [megɑ˜ ].
floating tones In the literature on tone languages, there
are two senses in which the expression is used. In the
first of these, floating tones are postulated to be present
in underlying representations, but are said to be unat-
tached to any segmental material in those representa-
tions. In the Central dialect of the Kwa language Igbo,
there are two low tones in the underlying representa-
tions of the words /a` gba` / (‘jaw’) and /c` ŋvc`/ (‘monkey’).
But the expression ‘jaw of monkey’ is realised phonet-
ically as [a` gbaác` ŋvc`], with a high tone on the second
vowel of the first element. Phonologists have postu-
lated an underlying high floating tone, meaning ‘of’,
placed between the two words, which attaches to the
preceding vowel in the word /a` gba` /.
In the second sense of the expression, underlying
tones are postulated which in this case are attached to
underlying segmental material, but that material is
deleted, leaving the tone floating and potentially avail-
able to be connected with some other segmental mate-
rial. In the Nigerian language Margi, the underlying
sequence /tla` ϩva´ / (‘to cut in two’) contains a low tone
followed by a high tone. A process of vowel deletion
deletes the first vowel, and the sequence is realised pho-
netically as [tlwa

], with a rising tone. It is claimed that,
while the [a] segment is deleted, its tone is not. Rather,
it becomes a floating tone which then attaches to the
remaining vowel to produce a rising tone, seen as a
56 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
combination of the floating low tone and the underly-
ing high tone in /va´ /. Also known as latent tones.
focalisation A process in which some element in a lin-
guistic expression is highlighted. This can be achieved
syntactically, but it can also be achieved phonologi-
cally, usually using intonation. If one wishes to high-
light the word John in the sentence John went to the
pub, one can place the tonic on John. This places the
focus on John.
foot see rhythm
foot-initial A phonological process is said to occur in
foot-initial position if the segment it affects is located
at the beginning of a metrical foot. In most varieties of
English, aspiration is at its strongest in segments which
are in foot-initial position, so that the /t/ in tack is more
strongly aspirated than the /t/ in witty. The /t/ in tack
is in foot-initial position, whereas the /t/ in witty is in
foot-internal position.
foot-internal A phonological process is said to occur foot-
internally if it applies to a segment which is located
within a metrical foot. Flapping in American English
operates foot-internally; the /t/ in witty undergoes
Flapping because it is located within a metrical foot,
but the /t/ in attack does not undergo Flapping since it
is in foot-initial position.
formalism Any conception of human language in general,
or phonology in particular, in which human language
is not seen to be functionalist in nature (designed for
the function of communication), but is taken to be a
formal object, in the sense of having abstract formal
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 57
properties such as infinitude and recursion. The work
of Noam Chomsky is formalist (anti-functionalist) in
the sense that he denies that human language is
designed for communication (instead, it is, for him,
designed for thinking).
The term is also used to denote any set of formal
devices for the representation of linguistic structure,
such as the formalisms known as metrical grids used in
Metrical Phonology.
Some linguists take the term to denote a way of
describing human languages in terms of mathematical or
logical formalisms. Some have argued that Chomsky’s
work is not properly formalist, in the sense that it is not
properly mathematical in nature.
formant The cavities above the larynx, such as the pharynx
and the oral cavity, act as amplifiers of the sounds
created by the vibration of the vocal cords. Since all res-
onators have natural frequencies at which they will res-
onate, these cavities will resonate some frequencies, but
not others. These resonances are called formants.
fortis see lenis. See also fortition and aspiration
fortition The opposite of lenition. A process whereby a
segment becomes ‘stronger’, or more consonantal,
moving up the sonority hierarchy. In the historical
change known as Grimm’s Law, the voiced stops of
Proto-Indo-European (PIE) became voiceless stops,
as in the case of the PIE root gews (‘choose’),
which became kiusan in Gothic. Processes of assimila-
tion can induce fortition. Lumasaaba morphemes such
as /li/ (‘a root’), with an initial /l/, are realised with a [d]
when a nasal stop precedes the /l/, as in the form[zindi]
(‘roots’). Here, the complete closure of the nasal
58 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
stop carries over on to the following sound, changing it
from an approximant to a stop, which is said to be
‘stronger’ (more fortis) than a lateral approximant.
frame theory of syllable structure A theory of how syllables
emerge in child speech, proposed by Peter MacNeilage
and his colleague Barbara Davis. The idea is that the
consonant-vowel syllables found at the babbling stage
of child development emerge from the rhythmic alter-
nation of open and closed jaw, which in turn is said to
have evolved from cyclic behaviour such as chewing in
early primates. The open/closed jaw movement is said
to provide the frame for such syllables, with the tongue
and lips being carried by the jaw movement. With the
tongue body in the neutral position, a sequence such as
[bɐ] is produced, with a central low vowel; with the
tongue fronted, a sequence such as [gɑ] is produced,
with a front low vowel; and with the tongue body
retracted, a sequence such as [gɑ] is produced, with a
low back vowel. As the child develops, the tongue and
lips begin to function as independent articulators.
free syllable Synonym for an open syllable.
free vowel Used in the analysis of English to refer to what
are elsewhere known as the tense, or long, vowels in
the vowel phoneme system of most varieties of English.
The free vowel phonemes are all the vowel phonemes
except the checked vowels /υ, n, ɒ, i, æ/. These latter
vowels are also known as the lax vowels, or the short
vowels of English.
frequency of occurrence The frequency with which a given
word is uttered. Two main sorts are distinguished.
Token frequency denotes the frequency with which
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 59
tokens of a given word are uttered. The word went in
English, which is an irregular past tense form, has a
high token frequency; it is often uttered. Type fre-
quency denotes the number of words belonging to a
given type. Regular past tense verbs in English, such as
cried, shouted and kicked, have high type frequency;
the vast majority of English verbs have regular past
tense forms. The distinction is central to usage-based
phonology and the notion of productivity.
fricative see degree of stricture
front see features
front of the tongue That part of the tongue which lies
below the hard palate when the tongue is at rest. It
really ought to be called the middle of the tongue, since
it excludes the tip and the blade of the tongue, which
lie at the very front of the tongue.
frontness The property of being front (see features). Front
vowels such as /i/ and /e/ have this property. Some pho-
nologists, particularly those working with privative
features, use the term ‘palatality’ as a synonym for
frontness, to subsume both front vowels and conso-
nant articulations made with the front of the tongue,
the tip of the tongue and the blade of the tongue.
function word A term used to refer to words of a gram-
matical category. Important for phonologists, since
function words are often unstressed in human lan-
guages, and often fail to receive the tonic.
functional category The same thing as grammatical
category.
60 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
functional load The extent to which a phonemic contrast
serves to sustain semantic contrast in a language, via
minimal pairs. In English, the contrast between /ð/ and
/θ/ is said to have a low functional load, since there are
few minimal pairs based on that contrast, whereas the
contrast between /p/ and /b/ is said to have a high func-
tional load, since there are many minimal pairs which
exhibit that contrast, such as pat vs bat, pin vs bin, etc.
functionalism Any view of language in general or phonol-
ogy in particular, in which language in general, and
phonology in particular, is taken to be driven by a
major function: that of the need for human beings to
communicate. Usually distinguished from formalism.
Gallo-Romance The language spoken in ancient Gaul
after the disintegration of the Roman Empire and
before the emergence of Old French, roughly from the
end of the fifty century AD until the middle of the ninth
century.
geminate A long, or double, sound, normally a conson -
ant, as in Archi [lappus] (‘to throw’) or Finnish [poltta]
(‘burn’). The constriction in such consonants is held
for longer than for single, non-geminate, consonants.
Geminates are often represented as being connected to
two skeletal slots, or two moraic positions, in syllable
structure. When a long consonant of this sort occurs
within a morpheme, it is known as a true geminate.
When two identical segments happen to occur adja-
cently across a morpheme boundary, as in Archi [k’os-
sas] (‘touch a knife’), they are referred to as a fake
geminate.
G
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 61
gemination A process whereby a single, non-geminate,
consonant undergoes lengthening to become a gemin -
ate consonant. For instance, in Malay, when a root
ending in a single consonant combines with a suffix
beginning with a vowel, the consonant undergoes gem-
ination; thus the root /lətop/ ϩ suffix /an/ is pro-
nounced [lətoppan] (‘explosion’).
General American (GA) A term used to designate a range
of American accents (known as dialects in the USA)
which are broadly similar, and which differ from RP-
type accents in several respects. Among these differ-
ences is rhoticity and the existence of Flapping/
Tapping in GA. GA is defined as not being a Southern
US accent, and not belonging to the non-rhotic
accents, such as the Boston accents, found in the north-
eastern seaboard of the USA.
generate A term used in generative linguistics. It has its
origins in a branch of mathematics known as formal lan-
guage theory, in which very explicit formal rules are said
to generate, or characterise, or define certain sequences
of symbols. In early work in generative linguistics, this
aspect of formal language theory was applied to human
languages. The termis often used to mean, simply, ‘fully
explicit’, so that an analysis or an entire grammar is said
to be generative if it is fully explicit. Some argue that
much of generative linguistics has ceased to be fully
explicit. The term was not intended to mean ‘produce’,
as in ‘produce electricity’, but many linguists use it in
exactly that way, talking of speakers generating utter-
ances. The original idea was that a generative grammar,
as an account of a speaker’s competence, generated a set
of abstract expressions, quite distinct from the utter-
ances produced in performance.
62 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
generative linguistics Designates various different
approaches, often associated with the work of Noam
Chomsky, to the study of language in which the term
generate is central.
generative phonology The phonological aspect of genera-
tive linguistics, associated with the work of Noam
Chomsky. It is generally agreed that the founding
book in this tradition is SPE. Generative phonol-
ogy subsumes the SPE model, Lexical Phonology,
Autosegmental Phonology and Optimality Theory.
Some scholars see generative phonology as a continu-
ation of structuralist linguistics, while others believe
that the advent of generative phonology represented a
radical break with structuralist linguistics.
Geordie see Tyneside English
gesture In certain models of the internal structure of seg-
ments, such as feature geometry, phonological features
are bundled together into subunits within the segment.
In Dependency Phonology, the two main subgroupings
of features (elements) are the categorical gesture,
which subsumes laryngeal features, and the articula-
tory gesture, which subsumes place of articulation in
the oral cavity. In Articulatory Phonology, laryngeal
and supralaryngeal gestures are said to overlap in the
stream of speech and in phonological representations.
glide A name given to a class of sounds which are vowel-
like, but which, unlike vowels, do not occupy the head
position in the nucleus of a syllable, as in French [jauʁt]
(‘yoghurt’), [wat] (‘watt’), where the [j] is a palatal glide
and the [w] is a labial-velar glide. It is sometimes
claimed that such segments can be considered as high
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 63
vowels occupying positions outside of the head of the
syllable nucleus. In our French examples, the high
vowels in question are /i/ and /u/, and the position in syl-
lable structure is the onset position. Glides are some-
times known as semiconsonants or semivowels, since
they are vowel-like, but often occupy syllabic positions
in which one normally finds consonants. The non-head
position in a diphthong is sometimes referred to as a
glide, as in the French word [wa] (‘goose’), which con-
sists only of a nucleus, with [a] as the head of the
nucleus, and [w] as glide within the nucleus, preceding
the head. Glides of this sort are referred to as on-glides.
Where a glide follows the head within a nucleus, it is
referred to as an off-glide, as in the English word [aj]
(eye).
glide formation A process in which a nucleus vowel ceases
to occupy the nucleus of a syllable, and instead occu-
pies the onset position of a syllable, as in French /lu/ ϩ
/e/ (the root ‘rent’ ϩ infinitive suffix), which is pro-
nounced as a single syllable: [lwe], with a labial-velar
glide within the onset. Other examples from French
are /ty/ ϩ /e/ (the root ‘kill’ ϩ infinitive suffix), pro-
nounced as monosyllabic [tɥe], with a rounded palatal
glide in the onset, and /li/ ϩ/e/ (the root ‘link’ ϩinfini-
tive suffix), pronounced as [lje], with an unrounded
palatal glide in the onset. Glide formation is sometimes
distinguished from glide insertion.
glide insertion A process whereby the vowel articulation
in a nucleus carries over into an empty onset to form a
homorganic glide. For instance, in Malay, /tari/ ϩ /an/
(the root ‘dance’ and the suffix /an/) is pronounced
[talijan]. Similarly, Malay /buru/ ϩ/an/ (the root ‘hunt’
and the suffix /an/) is pronounced [buruwan].
64 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
glossematics see Hjelmslev
glottal An adjective used to describe sounds produced in
the glottis.
glottal fricative A fricative made in the glottis by bringing
the vocal cords together to produce friction. It is tran-
scribed as [h]. An example can be found in the first
sound in the English word happy.
glottal stop A consonant formed by complete closure of
the vocal cords. It is transcribed as [ʔ]. Often, the stop
closure will be released, as in the Scottish English pro-
nunciation ['bnʔəɹ] (butter). Because the closure of the
vocal cords blocks the airstreamand puts a sudden end
to voicing, one often detects a glottal stop because one
hears a very abrupt end to a preceding vowel.
Glottalic airstream mechanism see airstream mechanisms
glottalisation A process in which the closure in an oral
articulation is accompanied by a glottal stop articula-
tion. Glottalised stops are common in Tyneside
English, spoken in the North-East of England.
Examples are ['hæʔpi] (happy), ['viʔɾi] (witty) and
['p|iʔki] (picky).
glottalised Exhibiting glottalisation.
glottalling A process in which oral stops undergo reduc-
tion to a glottal stop articulation. Glottalling occurs in
many varieties of English, as in Cockney ['wiʔi] for
witty.
glottis The space between the vocal cords.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 65
Goldsmith, John An American phonologist known for his
work on Autosegmental Phonology, Goldsmith is
interesting since his training was in generative phonol-
ogy, but he came to abandon that tradition in its
entirety.
government A postulated relation between linguistic
objects, often found in work on syntax. Transitive
verbs such as kick are said by some syntacticians to
govern their direct objects, as in The man kicked the
dog, where the verb kick may be said to govern the
direct object the dog. The term has been taken over
into phonology within the framework known as
Government Phonology, in which some syllabic posi-
tions are said to govern others. For instance, in the
Standard French word devenir, the final nucleus posi-
tion is said to govern the preceding one. The postulated
government relations are said to give rise to the
observed patterns of alternation in Standard French
between schwa and zero, as seen in pronunciations
such as bisyllabic [dəvniʁ] for devenir.
Government Phonology A framework within generative
phonology which adopts an element-based approach
to the internal structure of segments, and which sees
segments as contracting government relations.
grammatical category see lexical category
grammatical word A word which is a member of a gram-
matical category.
Grammont, Maurice A late nineteenth-early twentieth-
century French phonologist, based at Montpellier
University. He is known as an early pioneer in studies
66 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
of the way schwa works in French, notably la loi des
trois consonnes. He also worked on bilingualism, in
which he argued for the One Parent, One Language
(OPOL) approach to bringing up bilingual children,
whereby each parent sticks to only one language in
addressing the child.
grapheme A unit in the spelling system of a language.
Graphemes are usually distinguished from letters,
since a given grapheme may contain more than one
letter, but still act as a single unit in the spelling system.
Graphemes which contain two letters are called
digraphs. An example is the <th> grapheme used in
English spelling, which corresponds to the phonemes
/θ/ and /ð/.
graphophonemics The study of the relationship between
spelling and pronunciation, more precisely the rela-
tionship between the graphemes of an alphabetic
writing system and the phonemes of the language. A
complete account of the graphophonemics of a lan-
guage provides an exhaustive statement of all the
grapheme-phoneme correspondences. See dyslexia.
Great Vowel Shift (GVS) A historical change which took
place in the history of English. Long vowels shifted
upwards in the vowel space, with vowels such as the
high mid vowels [e:] and [o:] undergoing raising to [i:]
and [u:] respectively, and the high vowels [i:] and [u:]
undergoing diphthongisation to become [ai] and [au].
Present-day pronunciations of words such as divine
([divain]) show the results of the vowel shift; they used
to be pronounced with an [i:]: [divi:n]. In Scots and in
certain accents of English, one can find words which
have not undergone the GVS, such as the word toon
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 67
(‘town’) in Scots, pronounced [t|un]. In RP, this is pro-
nounced as [t|aυn], since the historical [u:] diph-
thongised to [aυ] during the GVS. The GVS has been
interpreted both as a drag chain (pull chain) and a push
chain (see vowel shift).
grounded see grounding
grounding A notion appealed to by some scholars who
postulate a clear distinction between phonology and
phonetics. The idea is that phonological knowledge,
by definition mentally real, is rooted in phonetic phe-
nomena, where the term ‘phonetic’ covers facts about
the production and perception of human speech
sounds in social context. Many processes of assimila-
tion are said to be phonetically grounded in the
tendency towards ease of articulation, as in the case
of assimilation for place of articulation, witnessed in
pronunciations such as [impυt] (input), where the
nasal assimilates to the place of articulation of the
following stop. Those who argue for phonetics-free
phonology deny that phonology is grounded in
phonetics.
Guierre, Lionel (1921–2001) A French phonologist who
specialised in the phonology of English. Guierre elab-
orated an analysis of English word stress patterns
which departs from the Anglo-American quantity sen-
sitivity approach. He also worked extensively on the
graphophonemics of English, claiming that English
spelling is, contrary to first impressions, a reliable
guide to pronunciation.
gutturals An informal cover term, not found in the chart
of the International Phonetic Association, for sounds
68 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
produced at the back of the mouth and in the throat,
in the uvular, pharyngeal and laryngeal places of artic-
ulation. There is some evidence that sounds produced
in these areas constitute a natural class.
half-close Another term for high mid. See cardinal vowels.
half-open Another term for low mid. See cardinal vowels.
Halle, Morris An American phonologist who was profes-
sor of phonology at MIT in Boston. He was co-author,
with Noam Chomsky, of The Sound Pattern of English
(SPE), and widely regarded as one of the founding
fathers of generative phonology. Halle has worked on
a wide range of phonological phenomena, notably
word stress systems.
hard palate The front part of the palate, located in the
roof of the mouth, behind the alveolar ridge and in
front of the velum.
Hayes, Bruce An American phonologist who works in
generative phonology. Hayes has worked on a wide
range of phonological phenomena, including metrical
structure. He is also associated with an interpretation
of Optimality Theory in which constraints are said to
be phonetically grounded.
head A term used variably in syntax, morphology and
phonology. Several notions are appealed to in talking
of heads. One is the idea of obligatoriness; the head of
a unit is said to be obligatory. In phonology, one can
argue that the obligatory element in a syllable is the
H
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 69
nucleus, and thus the nucleus is the head of the sylla-
ble. It can also be argued that a metrical foot must
contain a stressed syllable, and that this is therefore the
head of the foot. In phonology, the notion of promi-
nence (salience) is also appealed to in talking of heads;
the head of a phonological constituent is the most
prominent element in that constituent. To return to our
two examples: the nucleus of a syllable is said to be the
most prominent element in the syllable and is thus the
head of the syllable. Similarly, the stressed syllable in a
metrical foot is the most prominent and is thus the
head of the foot. Within diphthongs, it is often claimed
that one vowel quality will be more prominent than the
other, and is thus the head, as in the English falling
diphthong [aυ], where the [a] is more prominent than
the off-glide [υ] and is thus the head of the diphthong.
The notion head is often linked to the notion depend-
ent; two or more elements in a phonological con-
stituent are often said to contract a head-dependent, or
governor-governee, relation. For instance, the head of
a falling diphthong is said to govern the dependent, so
that [a] governs [υ] in the diphthong [aυ]. The head-
dependent (or governor-governee) relation lies at
the heart of Dependency Phonology, Government
Phonology and Head-Driven Phonology. These theo-
ries apply the notion of head-dependent to the relation
between the elements of individual segments.
Unfortunately, the term ‘head’ is used in some
descriptions of intonation groups to mean something
quite distinct from the notions just mentioned. In such
descriptions, the ‘head’ in an intonation group consists
of the first stressed syllable occurring before the tonic
syllable, and any syllables following it, as in John went
to the pub, in which the tonic falls on pub, and John
went to the is said to be the head of the intonation
70 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
group, since John is the first stressed syllable before the
tonic. ‘Heads’ are not obligatory in intonation groups
(Go! contains a tonic syllable, but no head); nor are
they the most perceptually salient parts of an intona-
tion group. This notion of head is thus quite unlike the
notion described above.
Head-Driven Phonology An approach to phonological
representation which takes the head-dependent rela-
tion to be central at all levels of analysis. Associated
with the work of Dutch phonologist Harry van der
Hulst.
heavy syllable see syllable weight
hiatus A sequence of two adjacent vowels across a sylla-
ble boundary, as in Standard French le hibou (‘the
owl’), which may be pronounced as [lə.i.bu]. Many
languages exhibit hiatus avoidance processes, such as
glide formation and vowel apocope.
hierarchical structure It is widely believed that human
languages contain expressions, such as phrases and
sentences, which do not consist simply of linear strings
of words strung together like a string of beads. Rather,
it is believed that those sequences can be subdivided
into constituents, and that those constituents can in
turn be analysed into smaller constituents. Thus, the
sentence I saw the man who shot the farmer is said to
be analysable into the subject noun phrase I followed
by the predicate verb phrase saw the man who shot the
farmer. This latter constituent can be said to contain
the constituent who shot the farmer, which is said to
contain the constituent the farmer. This constituent-
within-constituent structure is hierarchical. Many
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 71
phonologists believe that phonological structures are
also hierarchical. For instance, feet are said to be
analysable into their constituent syllables, which in
turn are said to be analysable into their constituent
segments.
high A term used in the description of vowels (see cardi-
nal vowels). It is also used as a distinctive feature (see
features), and to describe certain types of tone.
high mid Vowels which are high mid are articulated above
the neutral position of the tongue, but are less high
than high vowels. Examples are [e] and [o]. Also
referred to as half-close.
historical phonology The study of the way the phonology
of languages changes over time.
Hjelmslev, Louis (1899–1965) A Danish linguist who was
associated with a school of linguistic thought known
as glossematics. Hjelmslev was influenced by logical
positivism, and attempted to devise a purely formal,
non-mentalistic account of linguistic structure. The
consequence of this purely formalistic approach is
that his conception of phonology was substance-free.
Hjelmslev also argued in favour of the principle of
structural analogy.
Hockett, Charles (1916–2000) An American linguist who
taught at Cornell University. He is often seen as the
last of the great linguists associated with American
Structuralism. Hockett remained critical of generative
linguistics throughout his career; in 1968, he published
a book which constituted a critique of some of the
central claims made by Noam Chomsky.
72 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
homophone Two words are homophones if they have
identical pronunciation. In many accents of the North
of England, pairs such as put and putt are pronounced
identically: [p|υt]. Homophones such as these consti-
tute minimal pairs in accents of the South of England:
[p|υt] vs [p|nt].
homophony The state of affairs whereby homophones
exist. Phonemic mergers create homophony. See avoid-
ance of homophony.
homorganic A term used to describe identical place of
articulation of two adjacent segments, as in English
[θiŋk] (think), where the nasal stop and the following
oral stop are homorganic (they are both velar) because
the nasal stop exhibits nasal assimilation.
Hyman, Larry An American phonologist who works in
the generative phonology tradition. Hyman works on
African languages, and is known for his work on,
among other things, tone languages.
hypercorrection A phenomenon connected with the attempt
by a speaker to alter his or her pronunciation so as to
approximate a pronunciation perceived as more ‘correct’.
Hypercorrection occurs when words which do not need
to be ‘corrected’ are changed. Speakers with a native
accent of English which lacks the /æ/ vs /ɑ:/ distinction
may ‘correct’ their pronunciation so as to say [dɑ:ns]
(dance) when they attempt to speak with an RP accent.
But they may also hypercorrect words such as mass to
[mɑ:s], when in fact it is pronounced [mæs] in RP.
hypocoristics Pet names or nicknames. These are of inter-
est to phonologists, since they can reveal facts about
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 73
phonological structures in specific languages. A simple
example comes from French, where names such as
Florence and Didier may be pronounced in their
hypocoristic forms as [floflo] and [didi], in which the
first syllable of the name is reduplicated.
hypocorrection A term associated with the work of John
Ohala. The ‘hypo’ part comes from a word in Classical
Greek meaning ‘under’. Ohala argues that speakers
sometimes fail to engage in normalisation (correction)
when perceiving the speech signal. Take velar sounds,
such as [k], uttered before a high front vowel; it is pho-
netically natural for there to be slight affrication of
such sounds in that position. Often, this affrication
will be factored out by the listener, who will hear
words such as kick in such a way as to classify both
consonants as instances of the voiceless velar stop [k];
the affrication is factored out as redundant ‘noise’ in
the speech signal. When this factoring out fails to take
place, the hearer identifies the affricate as an instance
of an affricate, not a stop. This is hypocorrection: the
hearer mistakenly assumes that the speaker he/she was
listening to intended to utter an affricate, not a stop.
The hearer can then, in turn, start to utter affricates
deliberately in such positions. This, Ohala argues, is
what lies behind the well-known sound change known
as Velar Softening (Palatalisation), which can be seen
in historical changes such as that from [kikən] to
[tʃikən] (chicken).
iamb see rhythm
iambic see rhythm
I
74 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Iambic Reversal A term used to describe a phenomenon
attested in English, in which prominence patterns
are switched round (reversed) in phrases containing
three metrical feet. In the name East London, the word
London constitutes a trochaic foot which is more
prominent than the metrical foot in East. But when
East London occurs in the phrase East London
Airport, the prominence levels of East and London are
typically switched around, so that Airport is more
prominent than East, which in turn is more prominent
than London. Also known as the rhythm rule, since
this is a rhythmic phenomenon.
I-language Anotion found in work by NoamChomsky. The
‘I’ stands for ‘internal’, since Chomsky believes that lin-
guistic knowledge is mind-internal, rather than public. It
also stands for ‘individual’, since Chomsky believes that
linguistic knowledge is located within the minds of indi-
viduals, rather than distributed across social communi-
ties. Followers of Chomsky believe that a speaker’s
I-language contains a phonological component.
implementation see realisation
implicational universals see universals
implosive see airstream mechanisms
Indirect Syntax Hypothesis Unlike proponents of the
Direct Syntax Hypothesis, proponents of this hypoth-
esis argue that syntactic structure does not directly
trigger phonological processes. Rather, the purely
phonological domains which feature in the prosodic
hierarchy are said to be the proper domains for the
operation of phonological processes.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 75
Indo-European A major language family which sub-
sumes many of the world’s present-day languages,
including most of the languages of Europe and the
languages of the North of the Indian subcontinent.
The Indo-European language family was recon-
structed in the nineteenth century, when systematic
phonological and morphological correspondences
were established between Sanskrit, a language of
Ancient India, and Greek and Latin. Proto-Indo-
European was spoken around the period from 2,500 to
2,000 BC.
inductive generalisations Generalisations which arise
from the observation of specific instances. If a French-
acquiring child often hears Il a fini (‘He has finished’)
with the past tense of the verb finir (‘to finish’) and Il
est sorti (‘He’s gone out’) with the past tense of the verb
sortir, it is possible for the child to form the inductive
generalisation that the past participle of verbs ending
in -ir is a form ending in [i]. Application of this gener-
alisation, via a process of analogy, can lead to child
utterances such as Il a couri (‘He ran’), from the verb
courir (‘to run’). In this specific case, the form couri is
an over-generalisation; the past participle of courir is
the irregular form couru.
infinitude A property said by Noam Chomsky and others
to be a formal characteristic of all human languages. If
one assumes that all human languages exhibit recur-
sion, then this guarantees that there is no limit to the
set of well-formed expressions in a given language; the
set is literally infinite. On these assumptions, it makes
no sense to ask, for instance, how many English sen-
tences there are; there exists an infinite number of such
sentences.
76 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
insertion A way of talking about epenthesis. Phonologists
sometimes argue that epenthetic sounds have been
inserted into a sequence of segments, as in the case of
the Intrusive ‘r’ in sequences such as law and order
when pronounced as [lɔ:ɹənɔ:də].
instrumentalism A way of interpreting theories in which
one takes theoretical constructs to be mere instruments
for organising, classifying and making predictions
about observable phenomena. An instrumentalist inter-
pretation of atomic theory would interpret the theory
as a mere device, without granting that atoms and
atomic structure are real. Instrumentalism is opposed
to realism. The American Structuralists are said to have
adopted a purely instrumentalist interpretation of
notions such as the phoneme.
interface A notion used by those who adopt any modular
conception of linguistic knowledge. If one accepts, for
instance, the idea that phonological and syntactic
knowledge form separate modules in the mind, one
needs to address the question of how the two modules
interact. The point at which the two modules connect
is said to constitute an interface. With respect to phon -
ology and syntax, some claim that phonology does
not interact directly with syntax, while others claim
that it does; they have different conceptions of the
phonology/syntax interface.
internal sandhi see sandhi
International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) An alphabet
designed to provide a symbol for every speech sound
type which is capable of functioning in a phonological
opposition in a human language. Provided by the
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 77
International Phonetic Association, the IPA is regularly
updated in accordance with the latest thinking about
phonetic and phonological categories. The IPA contin-
ues to incorporate the notion of the cardinal vowels.
interpretation see realisation
intervocalic Between vowels. Consonants often undergo
certain lenition processes in this context, as in the case
of the voiced stop phonemes in Spanish, which are
realised as voiced fricatives or voiced approximants
intervocalically, as in la bodega, pronounced [laβoðeγɐ].
intervocalic voicing A lenition process, whereby voiceless
sounds become voiced between vowels. For instance,
the Korean root /pap/ (‘cooked rice’), when followed
by the suffix /i/, is pronounced [pabi].
intonation The kinds of pitch modulation which are found
in whole utterances. Intonation contours can be used to
highlight certain elements in an utterance, to bundle
words together into information chunks, and to convey
the speaker’s attitude to what he/she is saying.
intonation group A single word, or a sequence of words,
which forms an intonational unit, containing a tonic
syllable. The written English sentence ‘It’s me, Tom’ is
ambiguous. If a speaker is addressing someone called
Tom, then the whole utterance constitutes a single
intonation group, with the tonic on ‘me’. If the speaker
is called Tom and is announcing that it’s he who is
there, there will be two intonation groups: ‘It’s me’,
with the tonic on ‘me’, and a second intonation
group consisting of the word ‘Tom’, which constitutes
a tonic syllable. Intonation groups are also known as
78 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
intonational phrases. One of the functions of intona-
tion groups is to bundle up the stream of speech into
information chunks. Also known as a tone group or a
breath group.
intonational phrase Another term for an intonation
group.
intrinsic phonetic content Among the phonologists who
adhere to a distinction between phonology and phonet-
ics, some believe that phonology is ‘based on’, or
grounded in, phonetics. Thus, the rule of final devoicing
in German may be said to be grounded in the natural
tendency for obstruents to devoice in utterance-final
position. SPE phonology incorporated the view that
phonological processes, and phonological features,
could be given a phonetic definition; they were said to
have intrinsic phonetic content, so that a phonological
feature such as [voice] could be defined in terms of the
vibration of the vocal cords. Opponents of this notion
argue for substance-free phonology; they argue that
phonological objects are abstract in at least one sense of
the term, and cannot be defined in terms of phonetics.
Intrusive ‘r’ see non-rhotic
IPA see International Phonetic Alphabet
isochronous see stress-timed
Jakobson, Roman (1896–1982) A Russian linguist who
became an American citizen in the mid-twentieth
century. Jakobson, a major figure in twentieth-century
J
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 79
linguistics, arguably bridged the gap between
European Structuralism, American Structuralism and
generative phonology, since he spent the first half of his
career in Europe and the second half in the USA, lat-
terly at MIT, where Morris Halle was based. Jakobson
co-founded the Moscow School, and later co-founded
the Prague School with Trubetzkoy. Jakobson had a
wide range of interests, including aphasia, poetry,
phonology, Slavic folklore and child language acquisi-
tion. He adopted Saussure’s notion of the linguistic
sign, and also a functionalist conception of the notion
phoneme. Jakobson adhered to the concept of marked-
ness, and attempted to state implicational universals
based on markedness. He proposed that historical
sound changes were teleological in nature. Jakobson
also worked with Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle on an
acoustic theory of distinctive features in phonology.
His work on phonology also incorporated the idea of
redundancy. Jakobson was a functionalist. He believed
that linguistic structure was driven by what he took to
be the main function of language: that of communica-
tion. In this respect, his views are quite distinct from
those of the formalist linguist, Noam Chomsky. In the
field of child acquisition of phonology, Jakobson
argued that there was a major discontinuity between
the babbling stage and the first words stage. This view
was later discredited by Marilyn Vihman in her
empirical work on infant speech.
Jones, Daniel (1881–1967) A British phonetician who
worked at University College London. Unlike J. R.
Firth, Jones argued for the validity of the notion
phoneme. His conception of the phoneme was that of
a ‘family’ (a set) of sounds. Jones is still known for his
English Pronouncing Dictionary, first published in
80 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
1917 and still used by learners of English all over the
world.
juncture A boundary or transition point in a phonologi-
cal sequence. Junctures include syllable, foot, mor-
pheme and word boundaries. Such boundaries are
widely believed to play a role in certain phonological
generalisations. In Scottish English, the morpheme
boundary between the root and the past tense suffix in
words such as brewed will induce lengthening of the
preceding vowel. The lengthening does not occur in
the word brood since there is no juncture between the
vowel and the [d]; brood is morphologically simple. It
is often said that some junctures are ‘weaker’ than
others; the juncture between could and n’t in the sen-
tence He couldn’t is said to be weaker than that
between could and go in the sentence He said he could
go. The juncture between could and go is said to be a
full word boundary, whereas the juncture in couldn’t is
said to be weaker; n’t is said to be joined to could as a
result of a process of cliticisation, with could and n’t
forming a single trochaic foot. Weaker junctures are
often referred to as close junctures, and stronger junc-
tures are known as open junctures. In some cases,
sequences of words which undergo such cliticisation
end up undergoing lexicalisation. Examples are cuppa
(from cup of ) and wannabe (from want to be).
Karmiloff-Smith, Annette A child development expert
and advocate of constructivism, who believes that she
has found a middle way between Empiricism and
Rationalism. She postulates innate biases in specific
cognitive domains, such as vision, but she denies that
K
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 81
there are richly specified innate modules of the sort
postulated by Noam Chomsky. Her work has been
influenced by Jean Piaget and is reasonably described
as Neo-Piagetian. In the field of child phonological
development, the work of Marilyn Vihman is broadly
consistent with Karmiloff-Smith’s ideas.
Kazan School A name given to two late nineteenth-
century scholars and their students, based in Kazan in
central Russia: notably the Polish linguists Miko¡aj
Kruszkewski and Jan Baudouin de Courtnay. Their
work pre-dated that of Saussure. Like many Western
linguists in later decades, they sought to develop what
they took to count as a ‘science’ of language. In doing
so, they attempted to find ‘laws’ governing the syn-
chronic structure of human languages. They adopted
the idea of the phoneme, and had a static theory of
morpho-phonological alternations, in which state-
ments about alternations are not taken to be state-
ments about processes. It has been argued that their
work influenced the thinking of Roman Jakobson.
Kenstowicz, Michael An American phonologist who has
worked in generative phonology throughout his career,
studying a wide range of different languages. He took
over from Morris Halle when the latter retired as pro-
fessor of phonology at MIT.
Kiparsky, Paul A phonologist known for his work in his-
torical phonology, metrics and the phonology of
English. He is the founder of the generative phonology
framework known as Lexical Phonology. He played a
prominent part in arguments against the abstract
nature of the underlying representations postulated in
SPE phonology.
82 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
La loi des trois consonnes A generalisation, postulated by
the French phonologist Maurice Grammont, concern-
ing constraints on schwa deletion in French. The gen-
eralisation states that a given schwa cannot be deleted
if it would result in a sequence of three consonants. For
example, in the phrase Je te le redemande (‘I’m asking
you this again’), the schwa vowels in Je, te le, re- and
de may be elided, as in [ʃtələʁədmɑ˜d], where the
schwas in Je and de have been elided, but not the
schwas of te, le or re-. The phrase cannot be uttered as
[ʃtləʁədmɑ˜d], since the elision of those schwas would
result in the three-consonant sequence [ʃtl].
labial One of the major places of articulation. A sound is
labial if one or both lips are involved in its production.
Subsumes labiodental and bilabial sounds.
labial harmony see vowel harmony
labialisation A process in which a speech sound acquires
labial articulation. In the North American Indian lan-
guage Nootka, the initial consonant of the root /ki:¡/
(‘making’) undergoes labialisation when preceded by a
labial vowel (a vowel with lip rounding), as in the word
[ʔok-i:¡] (‘making it’). The diacritic ‘-’ denotes the
labialisation of the [k]. Labialisation is a form of
assimilation; in this case, an otherwise non-labial con-
sonant is ‘picking up’ labiality from an adjacent
segment which is labial.
labiality The property of labial articulation. Labial con-
sonants such as [p], [b], [f] and [v], as well as vowels
with lip rounding, such as [u] and [o], are said to
possess labiality. The property is represented as
L
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 83
[+labial] in theories of distinctive features which adopt
binary-valued features. The element/feature [labial] is
said to be a privative feature in element-based theories.
Labiality enters into certain vowel harmony systems.
labiodental A place of articulation term which denotes
sounds produced with the lower lip as the active artic-
ulator and the upper teeth as the passive articulator.
Examples are the voiceless labiodental fricative [f] in
the English word fin, and the voiced labiodental frica-
tive in the English word van.
Laboratory Phonology (Lab Phon) The members of the
Lab Phon community of scholars believe that labora-
tory techniques, such as acoustic analysis, are central
to any properly scientific phonological investigation.
Use of mathematical and statistical techniques is also
central to Lab Phon. Prominent proponents include
Janet Pierrehumbert and Robert D. Ladd.
Labov, William An American pioneer of modern urban
sociolinguistics, Labov is famous for his work on
sociophonetic variation in New York City and else-
where in the USA, particularly his work on the soci-
olinguistic variables which underlie variable rhoticity
amongst speakers of New York City English.
Ladd, Robert D. An American phonologist based at
Edinburgh University who is widely known for his
work on intonation. He is a member of the Laboratory
Phonology community.
language family A group of languages which have a
common historical origin. Examples are the Indo-
European and the Dravidian language families. Much
84 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
of the reconstruction of common historical origins has
been based on phonological reconstruction.
language games It is common to find cases in which
speakers of a language ‘play around’ with the pronun-
ciation of certain words in the language, often produc-
ing a kind of secret language. An instance of this is the
French language game known as verlan, pronounced
[vεʁlɑ˜], which is based on the expression l’envers (‘the
reverse’), pronounced [lɑ˜vεʁ]. Phonologists believe
that language games are based on systematic processes,
which can reveal facts about the phonological struc-
ture of the language. In this case, one simply reverses
the syllables of the word in question to produce the
verlan version. In the case of phonetically monosyl-
labic words such as femme (‘woman’), pronounced
[fam], the verlan version is meuf, pronounced [mof].
Some have argued that forms such as this provide evi-
dence for an underlying schwa at the end of the word
femme, which appears in the verlan form in its stressed
form, [o].
language-specific Specific to a particular language. The
English phonotactic constraint according to which
only /j, w, r, l/ may occur as the second consonant in an
onset containing two consonants is a language-specific
constraint. The term is not to be confused with the
expression ‘specifically linguistic’, meaning specific to
human language as a whole.
langue A term used by Saussure to denote a language as a
set of signs which enter into a series of oppositions.
Saussure claimed that langue, which he took to be
social in nature, was to be distinguished from parole,
which he took to be individual in nature.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 85
laryngeal A place of articulation. Laryngeal sounds are
produced in the larynx. The term is also used to refer
to laryngeal features.
laryngeal features Features postulated to characterise
laryngeal properties of speech sounds. Examples are
[spread glottis] and [stiff vocal folds].
larynx The voicebox: a structure made of cartilage,
located in the windpipe, containing the vocal cords.
Lass, Roger An American linguist who has spent his
career in Britain and South Africa. Lass is a phonolo-
gist who specialises in the history of English, historical
phonology in general, and the application of notions
from the field of biology to language study. He was one
of the first to query the explanatory power of the
notion of markedness.
last lexical item In work on the intonation of English, it is
often claimed that the basic rule for the placement of
the tonic is on the last lexical item in a clause. Lexical
items are words of a lexical category. These are typi-
cally nouns, verbs and adjectives. In the sentence John
went to the pub, the most ‘neutral’ (unmarked) into-
nation would have the tonic on the word pub, which
is the last lexical item in the sentence.
latent consonant see floating consonant
latent tones see floating tones
lateral Sounds produced with air escaping down one or
both sides of the tongue are lateral sounds. An example
is the [l] in the RP pronunciation of the word lip: [lip].
86 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Lateral escape of air is distinguished from central
escape of air.
lax The opposite of tense. Lax vowels are often said to be
articulated in a more central manner than their tense
counterparts, and with less duration.
laxing Any process in which a tense speech sound becomes
lax. A well-known example is Trisyllabic Laxing.
learningbyforgetting Anexpressionusedbythe Frenchpsy-
cholinguists Jacques Mehler and Emmanuel Dupoux.
It is used to refer to a phenomenon attested in child
acquisition of phonology whereby, in the first year of
life, infants become desensitised to allophonic differ-
ences in the adult language. For instance, a child being
exposedsolely toRPwill ‘filter out’ the purely allophonic
distinction between aspirated and unaspirated voiceless
stops, whereas achildbeingexposedsolelytoalanguage,
such as Thai, where the aspirated/unaspirated distinc-
tion is phonemic, will not do this. The term ‘forgetting’
is something of a misnomer; the child is not engaged in
forgettinganything, but is focusingonthe phonemic con-
trasts in the adult language and classifying allophones as
instances of ‘the same thing’.
left-headed Used to refer to phonological constituents with
the head on the left side of the constituent, as in the case
of trochaic feet, where the head of the foot (the stressed
syllable) is the leftmost syllable in the foot, as in the
English word happen. See right-headed and rhythm.
length A term often used to describe the relative duration
of a vowel or consonant. The long vs short distinction
can be phonemic or allophonic. In the Dravidian
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 87
language Malayalam, [koI:a], with a short [o], means
‘basket’, whereas [ko:I:a], with a long [o:], means
‘castle’. Vowel length is phonemic in Malayalam.
Similarly, [kaIi], with a short [I], means ‘biting’ in
Malayalam, whereas [kaI:i], with a long [I], means
‘thickness’. Consonant length is also phonemic in
Malayalam. In Scottish English, certain vowels under -
go lengthening before voiced fricatives or /ɹ/, as in
[bɹu:z] (bruise) and [bɹi:z] (breeze), as opposed to
[bɹus] (Bruce) and [flis] (fleece), with short vowels.
This is allophonic length. Some phonologists distin-
guish between length, as a phonological property, and
duration, as a phonetic property. Long vowels in
English are also known as tense, or free, vowels, and
are distinguished from the short vowels, also known as
lax, or checked, vowels.
lengthening A process in which a consonant or vowel is
produced with greater length than it previously was. In
the history of Received Pronunciation, the sequence
/əɹ/ underwent lengthening of the vowel in coda posi-
tion, as in the words third and fir, now pronounced
with the long vowel [s:]. One kind of lengthening is
compensatory lengthening.
lenis The opposite of fortis. Lenis consonants are said to
be ‘weaker’ than fortis ones. The voiced obstruents of
English are held to be lenis, whereas the voiceless
sounds are said to be fortis. Lenis sounds are consid-
ered to be produced with less articulatory energy than
fortis sounds, with greater muscular effort and greater
breath force. See also lenition.
lenition The opposite of fortition. Any process whereby
consonants become weaker, in the sense of becoming
88 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
voiced and/or undergoing a diminution in stricture.
Intervocalic voicing of voiceless sounds is an example
of lenition. Anther example of lenition is the reduction
of voiceless fricatives to [h], which happened in the
history of many languages, such as Spanish, where the
[f] of Latin filium became an [h] in hijo, which subse-
quently underwent elision. Lenition processes are often
cited as evidence for the sonority hierarchy.
level-ordering see Lexical Phonology
lexical category Words of a lexical category, also called
content words, typically include nouns, verbs, adjec-
tives and adverbs. They convey substantial semantic
content, and are often distinguished from words of a
grammatical (or functional) category, which typically
include articles, conjunctions, auxiliary verbs and pro-
nouns. This is relevant for phonology, since words of a
functional category often undergo various forms of
reduction, are often unstressed, and often fail to
contain the tonic syllable.
lexical-distributional differences A difference between
two varieties of a language is said to be lexical-
distributional if a given phonemic opposition is shared
by the two varieties, but specific lexical sets in the two
varieties contain different members of the opposition.
In both RP and certain varieties of English spoken in
the North of England, the opposition between short
/æ/ and long /ɑ:/ is present, so that pairs such as ant and
aunt are minimal pairs: ant is pronounced [ænt] and
aunt is pronounced [ɑ:nt]. But in words of the lexical
set BATH, North of England varieties select the short
phoneme, with pronunciations of the sort [bæθ] for
bath. The RP pronunciation of words like these is with
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 89
the long phoneme: [bɑ:θ]. This particular difference
between RP and North of England accents often func-
tions as a shibboleth. Differences of this sort are
neither realisational nor systemic.
Lexical Phonology Also known as Lexical Morphology
or Lexical Phonology and Morphology, Lexical
Phonology is a model of the interaction of phonology
and morphology which postulates different levels (also
known as strata) of word formation, with different
phonological rules and/or constraints holding at those
different levels. Two levels of word formation have
been postulated for English: one at which the so-called
stratum 1 (level 1) affixes are added to roots, and a
later level at which stratum 2 (level 2) affixes are
added. It has been claimed that the level 2 affixes are
more productive than the level 1 affixes. An example
of a level 2 affix is the prefix un- in words like unnat-
ural. An example of a level 1 affix is the prefix in- in
words like innumerable. An example of a lexical rule
applying at only one level is the rule of degemination
in English, which yields forms such as [inju:məɹəbəl],
with a non-geminate [n]. Degemination is said not to
hold at level 2, so that words such as unnatural contain
a (fake) geminate: [nn'nætʃəɹəl]. This idea of word for-
mation taking place at different levels is often referred
to as level-ordering. The morphological and phono-
logical processes in question are said to take place in a
specific order: level 1 processes first, level 2 processes
later.
Lexical Phonology also postulates a distinction
between word phonology and phrase phonology,
claiming that word-level phonological operations have
distinct characteristics from phrase-level operations. In
English, word-level phonology contains the kinds of
90 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
affixation and process which we have just seen. The
phrase-level phonology contains phenomena such the
Linking ‘r’ of many non-rhotic accents of English,
whereby a word-final underlying /r/ is said to be
realised if the following word has an empty onset, as
in far away, pronounced [fɑ:ɹəvei].
Versions of Lexical Phonology which contain
Optimality Theory constraints (rather than rules) are
sometimes referred to as ‘Stratal Optimality Theory’.
lexical sets Phonologists, particularly British phonolo-
gists, who work on the pronunciation of different vari-
eties of English, often appeal to a list of word sets
proposed by J. C. Wells. These sets were devised to
bring out the kinds of accent differences which exist
between different varieties of English. Examples are
the lexical sets THOUGHT, FORCE and NORTH.
Words in these sets all have the long /ɔ:/ phoneme in
Received Pronunciation (RP). Another example is the
lexical set LOT, which has the short /ɒ/ phoneme in RP.
The usefulness of these sets can be seen in the descrip-
tive statement that, in certain varieties of English,
such as Standard Scottish English (SSE), there is a sys-
temic difference with respect to RP: pairs such as
horse/hoarse are homophones in RP, but minimal pairs
in SSE. In RP, both words have [ɔ:], whereas, in SSE,
horse has /ɔ/, but hoarse has /o/. This /ɔ/ vs /o/ opposi-
tion has undergone a phonemic merger in RP, but not
in SSE.
lexical word A word which is a member of a lexical
category.
lexicalisation A process in which a sequence of words
becomes a single word, as in the expression wannabe
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 91
(from want to be), which can now be found in dic-
tionaries, listed as a single word.
Liaison A syllabification phenomenon found in French.
Many word-final coda consonants were elided in the
history of French, as in words such capot, pronounced
[kapo]. But some word-final consonants in certain
words have remained as floating consonants, and will
be realised, under certain conditions, if the word in
question is followed by a word with an empty onset, as
in les amis (‘the friends’), pronounced [lezami]. Where
the following word does not have an empty onset, the
floating consonant is not pronounced, as in les gants
(‘the gloves’), pronounced [legɑ˜].
light syllable see syllable weight
lingua franca A language used by speakers who do not
share a common language. Swahili is used this way in
parts of East Africa. English often acts as a lingua
franca among speakers of different Indian languages.
Linking ‘r’ see non-rhotic
liquid A kind of consonant in which one part of the
oral cavity is blocked while airflow escapes through
another part of the cavity. Examples are ‘l sounds’, as
in the lateral [l] in RP light, and certain ‘r sounds’, such
as the [ɹ] in RP run.
loanword A word from one language which is introduced
into another, such as the English words weekend and
parking, which have been borrowed by French speak-
ers. Typically, loanwords are pronounced by speakers
of the borrowing language according to the phonology
92 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
of their native language. In our example parking, for
instance, French speakers place the stress on the final
syllable of the word, in accordance with the French
word stress placement pattern. They also pronounce
the <p>, the <a>, the <r>, the <k> and the <I>in a
French way: [pɐʁ'kiŋ], with no aspiration on the voice-
less stops, a French central [ɐ], a uvular ‘r’, and [i]
instead of [i], as opposed to RP ['p|ɑ:kiŋ].
loanword adaptation The process whereby loanwords are
adapted by speakers of the borrowing language. Very
often, loanwords are forced into the phonotactic
patterns of the speaker’s native language, as in
the Japanese utterance of the English word screw:
[sɯkɯɾɯ], which has three syllables, since onset
sequences such as /skr/ do not conform to the phono-
tactic constraints of Japanese.
logical positivism A philosophy of science which is said to
have influenced American Structuralism and thus the
kind of phonological investigation practised by the
American Structuralists. Working in the 1920s and
1930s, the logical positivists known as the Vienna
Circle argued that truly scientific statements were
based on observation statements. On this view, postu-
lated unobservable realities had no part to play in
scientific theorising. Applied to linguistics, and to
phonology in particular, this led to an anti-mentalistic
stance. Some of the philosophers who were members
of the Vienna Circle were also members of the
Linguistic Circle of Prague. See Prague School.
Lombard effect A phenomenon documented by Etienne
Lombard in the early twentieth century, in which
speakers are said to raise the volume of their speech to
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 93
compensate for increased background noise. You can
observe this if you go into a public space, such as a bar,
early in the evening, and listen to the rising volume of
speakers’ voices as the bar gets busier. The phenome-
non need not indicate a fully conscious decision to raise
one’s voice. A perception/production feedback loop is
said to be involved in this phenomenon, and that loop
is conceived of as central to speech perception and pro-
duction. The effect is said by some to be interpretable
as a purely self-orientated phenomenon (one wants to
be heard), but is said to be an altruistic phenomenon by
others (one is bearing one’s listeners in mind).
London English A variety of English which has its origins
in the working-class districts of the East End in the
inner city in London.
long vowel/long consonant see duration and length
low Vowels which are low are articulated lower than low
mid vowels, at the bottom of the vowel space.
Examples are [a] and [ɑ]. The term is used as a dis-
tinctive feature. See cardinal vowels.
low mid Vowels which are low mid are articulated below
the neutral position of the tongue, but are less lowthan
low vowels. Examples are [ε] and [ɔ]. Also referred to
as half-open vowels.
lowering Any process in which a speech sound is lowered,
in articulatory terms. Normally used to refer to vowels
which shift down the vowel space, as in the case of the
lowering of the high mid vowel /e/ to low mid [␧] in
French alternations such as cafeteria, pronounced
[kafeterja], which, in its shortened, informal form, is
94 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
pronounced [kafεt]. In this particular case, the context
which triggers the lowering is the closed syllable
created when the word is shortened; the [t] in [kafεt] is
in coda position, whereas the [t] in [kafeterja] is in
onset position.
Lyman’s Law A well-known phenomenon in the phonol-
ogy of Japanese which relates to Rendaku. Lyman’s
Law states that Rendaku voicing is blocked if the
second element of the compound contains a voiced
obstruent. An often-cited example is the combination
of [kami] (‘god’) and [kaze] (‘wind’), which does
not become [kamigaze], but remains as [kamikaze],
because of the presence of the [z] in [kaze].
McCarthy, John An American linguist who works in the
generative phonology tradition. He has worked exten-
sively on Optimality Theory and is widely known for
his work on a prosodic approach to morphology.
McGurk effect A form of perceptual illusion in speech
perception, in which subjects are exposed to a video
recording of a speaker uttering, say, [ba], [ba], [ba], but
the audio track features the sequence [ga], [ga], [ga].
Viewers frequently report that they have perceived a
sequence [da], [da], [da]. Based on an experiment
carried out by McGurk and McDonald in the 1970s,
the phenomenon is said by some to show that lipread-
ing occurs spontaneously in humans and is not just a
special form of behaviour adopted by the deaf.
MacNeilage, Peter A New Zealander based at the
University of Texas at Austin, MacNeilage is known
M
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 95
for his theory of the evolution of speech and handed-
ness. He argues that the left-hand/right hemisphere of
the brain evolved for the purpose of predation, and
that the right-hand/left hemisphere evolved for the
control of bodily posture, leading to left hemisphere
specialisation for speech. With his colleague Barbara
Davis, he is also known for the frame theory of syllabic
utterances of infants during the babbling phase.
major place of articulation The labial, coronal and dorsal
places of articulation. See minor place of articulation.
manner of articulation A synonym for degree of stricture.
marginal contrast see derived contrast
mark see opposition
marked In the work of Trubetzkoy, a member of an oppo-
sition is said to be marked if it possesses a property
which enters into a privative opposition, so that the /m/
in the opposition /m/ vs /b/ is said to be marked. A
further sense of the term relates to the frequency of
occurrence of certain sounds, or classes of sound, in
the world’s languages. For instance, the fricative /s/
occurs much more widely than the fricative /θ/, so that
/θ/ is said to be a more marked sound than /s/.
Similarly, the class of front vowels tend to be
unrounded; rounded front vowels occur in the world’s
languages but are rarer, and are said to be marked with
respect to front unrounded vowels. Markedness has
also been said to be related to sequence of acquisition
in child development; some speech sounds, or classes
of speech sound, are said to be more difficult to acquire
than others and are thus acquired later than others. It
96 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
is often claimed that a child acquiring a language
which has both /s/ and /θ/ will acquire the former (the
less marked segment) earlier than the latter.
markedness A notion which appears in a variety of
phonological theories, from Prague School phonology
to Optimality Theory. The idea is that marked prop-
erties of phonological segments and constituents play
an active role in phonological processes, the shape
of phonological systems and their acquisition. For
instance, the unmarked shape of syllables is the shape
which contains an onset constituent (containing one or
more onset consonants). A syllable with an empty
onset is thus said to be marked in comparison with a
syllable which contains a filled onset, so that the
English word eye is marked, in this respect, in com-
parison with the English word buy. Syllables which
contain one or more coda consonants are said to be
marked with respect to syllables which lack coda con-
sonants, since the most basic syllable structure is said
to be the CV syllable, containing an onset consonant
and no coda consonants. Syllables with complex
(branching) onsets are said to be more marked
than syllables which have single onset consonants, so
that English /bɹait/ (bright) is said to have a more
marked onset than English /bait/ (bite). It is sometimes
claimed that certain phonological processes are sensi-
tive to the marked vs unmarked distinction. Some have
questioned the explanatory value of the appeal to
markedness.
Martinet, André (1908–99) A French linguist who
worked within European Structuralism (see structural-
ist linguistics). He worked in Paris in the late 1930s,
then at Columbia University from 1947 to 1955, and
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 97
finally at the Sorbonne in Paris. He is known for his
claim, later reiterated in Optimality Theory, that there
was a tension in human languages between the need to
sustain oppositions in the form of minimal pairs, and
the tendency to ease of articulation, which leads natu-
rally to homophones. See avoidance of homophony.
Maximal Onset Principle A principle which states that,
where a given consonant could constitute a well-
formed coda consonant in a word or equally a well-
formed onset, as determined by the phonotactic
constraints of the language, then it is syllabified as an
onset. For example, in the English word appraise, the
syllabification [əp.ɹeiz] satisfies the phonotactic con-
straints of English, since a coda containing only a /p/ is
legitimate (as in cup), and an onset containing only an
/r/ is also legitimate (as in run). However, the branch-
ing onset /pr/ is also legitimate (as in pray), so that the
syllabification [ə.pɹeiz] is also legitimate. The principle
states that, in cases such as this, it is the latter syllabi-
fication which holds, since it maximises the content of
an onset.
melody A term used to identify properties of segments, as
opposed to properties of suprasegmental phenomena.
Features, or elements, such as [labial], found in labial
sounds such as [b], [m] and [u], are said to be melodic
features.
mental lexicon The idea that the mind contains a vast
stock of stored mental representations of words, linked
together in multiple ways. The mental lexicon is not
conceived of as a list of the sort found in dictionaries,
but as a network of interconnected representations
which vary in the extent to which they resemble each
98 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
other. When we select the wrong word from the mental
lexicon, this is often because we have selected a word
which is similar in some way(s) to the word we were
searching for, as in the statement by George W. Bush
that ‘coal prevents an environmental challenge’, in
which Bush selected prevents instead of presents; the
two words have the same number of syllables, the same
stress pattern, and differ with respect to only one
segment. They are therefore closely linked in the
mental lexicon.
mentalism A given form of linguistics is mentalistic if its
practitioners postulate mental realities as part of the
object of inquiry. Edward Sapir is known for his men-
talism: he argued for the psychological reality of
phonemes in the mind of the speaker. Noam Chomsky
is a mentalist, of a specific sort; he postulates an innate
module of mind devoted solely to language. That pos-
tulated module is often referred to as Universal
Grammar, or the Language Faculty.
merger A term used in the phonemic tradition to denote a
historical process in which a phonemic distinction is
conflated. An example is the traditional phonemic
opposition between front [a] and back [ɑ] in Standard
French, seen in minimal pairs such as pattes (‘feet of an
animal’) and pâtes (‘pasta’). While the distinction is
still given in dictionaries and can be heard in the speech
of older speakers, the phonemes have merged for many
younger speakers, and pairs such as these are now
homophones.
metaphony A kind of assimilation process involving
vowels, in which one vowel assimilates to another
despite the fact that they are not strictly adjacent to
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 99
each other in the stream of speech. The two main kinds
are umlaut and vowel harmony.
metathesis A process in which segments within a word are
switched around. In Lithuanian, fricative + stop clus-
ters undergo metathesis when they occur before a con-
sonant. The morpheme /dresk/ (‘to bind’) has the past
tense form [dreske], with the addition of a suffix [e],
whereas the infinitival form is [dreksti], with the addi-
tion of the suffix [ti] and metathesis of the /k/ and /s/.
Metathesis also occurs in child speech, in utterances
such as ['tʃikin] for kitchen.
metre see rhythm
metrical Relating to the metre (the rhythm) of a language.
Metrical Phonology A development in generative phon -
ology which emerged in the early 1980s. Work in
Metrical Phonology was chiefly concerned with
suprasegmental phenomena such as word stress and
rhythm. Metrical phonologists represented such
phenomena using either grid-like visual representa-
tions or metrical trees. An example of a metrical grid
follows:
The idea is to represent the different degrees of
salience of each syllable in the phrase: the more aster-
isks, the more salient the syllable. Here, the least
100 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
*
* *
* * * *
* * * * *
Dundee marmalade
salient syllable is the penultimate syllable in the word
marmalade, which is unstressed. The most prominent
syllable is the antepenultimate syllable in marmalade.
The second most prominent syllable is the penultimate
syllable in Dundee. The representation depicts the
result of the application of Iambic Reversal.
metrics The study of the metre (the rhythm) of languages.
mid A vowel is a mid vowel if the height of the tongue falls
between high and low.
minimal pair see Phonemic Principle
minimal word The minimal amount of phonological
material required to form a word. If we analyse English
long (free) vowels as VV (vowel-vowel) sequences, and
English short (checked) vowels as containing a single
V slot, then the minimal word for most varieties of
English is (C)VV or (C)VC; there are no words con-
sisting of (C)V. So word shapes such as [næ], [nυ], [ni],
[nɒ], [nn] fail the minimal word requirement for
English.
minor place of articulation A sub-division within the
major place of articulation categories, such as the dis-
tinction, within coronals, between dental and alveolar,
or between alveolar and postalveolar/palato-alveolar.
MIT Massachusetts Institute of Technology. A prestigious
East Coast American university in Boston. The birth-
place of SPE phonology, since both Noam Chomsky
and Morris Halle were based there.
modular Relating to a specific mental module.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 101
modularity see module
module A term used in linguistics and cognitive science to
refer to a specific component of mind which is said to
be dedicated to a specific cognitive function. Relevant
for phonology, since there are phonologists who sub-
scribe to the thesis that the mind contains a language
module. Of those who adopt this view, some believe
that the putative module is innate (present at birth), a
view associated with the linguist Noam Chomsky.
Some linguists who subscribe to the idea of a language
module in the mind (whether innate or not) believe
that there is a submodule devoted to phonology.
Others reject this modular conception of the nature of
phonological organisation in the mind.
monomoraic see mora
monophthong A vowel in which the quality remains more
or less constant during its production.
monophthongisation A process in which a diphthong
becomes a monophthong. In some varieties of
Yorkshire English and some accents of English spoken
in the South of the USA, the diphthong /ai/ loses its
off-glide, so that cry is pronounced [kɹa:], with a
monophthong. Known informally as smoothing.
monostratal Involving only one level of representation.
While classical SPE phonology postulated two levels
of phonological representation (underlying repre -
sentation and surface representation (see surface
form)), monostratal models of phonology, such as
declarative phonology, abandon this two-level, bis-
tratal, approach.
102 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
monosyllabic containing one syllable. The English words
man, dog and cat are all monosyllabic.
mora A term which is often used to describe the length of
segments. Long vowels are often said to have two moras
(or morae), whereas short vowels are said to have only
one. Segments which have two moras are said to be
bimoraic, whereas segments withone mora are saidtobe
monomoraic. Similarly, geminate consonants are often
said to have two moras, as opposed to short consonants.
moraic Relating to moras.
Moraic Phonology Any theory of phonological structure
in which the mora is postulated as a significant phono-
logical unit.
morpheme see morphology
morpheme boundary The boundary between two mor-
phemes, indicated using a ‘+’ symbol, as in /kæt + s/
(cats). Morpheme boundaries can play a role in phono-
logical processes. In the case of the Scottish Vowel
Length Rule, the presence of a morpheme boundary
triggers lengthening of a preceding /i/, /u/ or /ni/, as in
the word [əgɹi:d] (agreed), which consists of the root
morpheme agree and the past tense suffix: /əgi: + d/.
morphological Relating to morphology.
morphologically complex Containing more than one
morpheme. The singular noun cat is morphologically
simple, whereas the plural noun cats is morphologi-
cally complex; it contains the root morpheme /kæt/
and the plural suffix.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 103
morphologically simple Containing only one morpheme.
See morphologically complex.
morphology The study of the internal structure of words.
More specifically, morphology deals with units within
the word which have an identifiable meaning or gram-
matical function. These are often referred to as mor-
phemes. In the English word unhappiness, the prefix
un-, the root happy and the suffix -ness are mor-
phemes. Words such as this are therefore said to be
morphologically complex; they contain more than one
morpheme. Morphology and phonology are connected
because of the existence of morpho-phonological
processes.
morpho-phonological Involving the interaction between
morphology and phonology. In Malay, when a root
ending in a single consonant undergoes the morpho-
logical process of suffixation with a vowel-initial
suffix, the root consonant undergoes the phonological
process of gemination. Thus the root /lətop/ plus suffix
/an/ is pronounced [lətoppan] (‘explosion’). This is
an example of a morphological process triggering a
phonological process; the phenomenon is thus said to
be morpho-phonological.
morpho-phonology see morpho-phonological
morpho-syntactic see morpho-syntax
morpho-syntax The aspect of linguistic structure in which
both syntax and morphology play a role. Morpho-
syntactic properties include properties such as singular
vs plural, or present vs past, as in the case of the sin-
gular form of the English noun cat, as opposed to the
104 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
plural form cats. Morpho-syntax is connected to
phonology in many cases. In this case, the phonetic
form of the plural morpheme is determined by phono-
logical factors. If the root ends in /s/, /z/, /ʃ/ or /j /, the
realisation of the plural morpheme will be [iz], as in
horses ([hɔ:siz]); otherwise, if the root ends in a voiced
segment, the realisation of the plural morpheme will be
[z], as in dogs ([dɒgz]); and if the root ends in a voice-
less segment, the realisation of the plural morpheme
will be [s], as in cats ([kæts]).
Moscow School Also known as the Moscow Circle, this
was a group of Russian linguists working in the early
twentieth century. Influenced by the work of Baudouin
de Courtenay and Saussure, these scholars were inter-
ested in the linguistic analysis of literary objects,
including poetry. Chief among them was Roman
Jakobson, who was later involved with the Prague
School and then American Structuralism.
Motor Theory of Speech Perception A controversial
theory of speech perception, according to which we
perceive speech sounds by internally synthesising the
vocal tract shapes involved in the production of a given
speech pattern, and then seek to match these on to the
incoming speech signal.
multilateral opposition see opposition
narrow transcription see broad transcription
nasal assimilation The process whereby nasal stops assim-
ilate to an adjacent obstruent, as in the case of the
N
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 105
English prefix /in-/, realised as [im] in impossible, [in]
in indirect, and [iŋ] in incredible. This phenomenon is
an example of a phonetically motivated process; the
speaker anticipates the place of articulation properties
of the oral stop, and produces a nasal stop which is
homorganic with the stop.
nasal cavity One of the three resonance chambers. It
refers to the space within the nose through which air
may flow during the production of nasal stops and
nasalised sounds.
nasal harmony A process in which nasality spreads
throughout all of, or part of, a word, rather in the way
that certain vowel properties spread in the process of
vowel harmony. In Malay, nasality will spread from a
nasal stop on to all following vowels and approxi-
mants, unless blocked by a consonant with oral cavity
constriction, as in Malay [ma ˜h˜a ˜l], where the [h] and
the vowels undergo nasal harmony, but the [l] blocks
the spread of nasality.
nasal spread see nasalisation
nasal stop A stop consonant in which there is complete
closure in the oral cavity but velic opening, allowing
air to flow out through the nasal cavity. Nasal stops
are usually voiced, resulting in a kind of resonance
which is readily identifiable as being nasal in character.
nasalisation An assimilation process in which a vowel
becomes nasalised when it is adjacent to a nasal sound,
often a nasal stop. In many accents of American
English, the vowel /æ/ is nasalised when followed by
a nasal stop, as in [pæ˜n] (pan). In Malay, a vowel
106 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
preceded by a nasal stop becomes nasalised, as in
[ma ˜saʔ] (‘cook’). When nasality spreads beyond seg-
ments which are strictly adjacent to a nasal stop, this
is often referred to as nasal spread, as in Malay [ma ˜h˜a ˜l]
(‘expensive’).
nasalised Involving escape of air through the nasal cavity.
Vowels which are nasalised are transcribed with a
superscript diacritic, as in the French nasalised vowel
[ɑ˜], found in words such as banc.
nasality The presence of nasal airflow in speech sounds,
namely nasal stops and nasalised vowels. Nasality
seems to be able to function at the segmental level and
at the suprasegmental level. In English, nasality is a
property of segments, as in the word map. In other lan-
guages, nasality is overlaid on a sequence of oral
vowels to signal a morpho-syntactic property, as in the
case of the language Terena, in which words such as
[ajo] (‘his brother’) become [a ˜jo˜], which means ‘my
brother’. In cases such as this, nasality appears to be a
purely suprasegmental morpho-syntactic property.
Some phonologists regard [nasality] as a privative
feature.
Nativism see Rationalism
natural class The idea that speech sounds fall into classes,
or ‘families’. Two main classes are consonants and
vowels. Other subclasses are obstruents vs sonorants,
and stops vs fricatives. It is often claimed that many
phonological processes affect all of the members of a
given natural class. For instance, spirantisation will
often affect the entire set of voiceless stops in a lan-
guage, yielding [f], [θ] and [x] instead of [p], [t] and [k].
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 107
Natural Generative Phonology A development in the
history of generative phonology initiated by the pho-
nologist Joan Bybee. This approach to phonological
generalisations was founded on a rejection of overly
abstract underlying representations which are at a con-
siderable remove from surface forms. In the place
of such abstract analyses, it was postulated that
true phonological generalisations express phonetically
motivated allophonic variation, such as nasal assimi-
lation. For morphologically related pairs such as
divine/divinity, Bybee rejected the SPE analysis, which
involved postulating a single abstract underlying rep-
resentation from which the alternants [divain] and
[diviniti] could be derived. Instead, she proposed that
speakers store the alternants in their surface phonetic
form.
Natural Phonology An approach to phonological phe-
nomena which was a reaction to the abstractness of
SPE phonology. In the theory bearing this name
adopted by David Stampe, a set of natural phonologi-
cal processes were postulated. By ‘natural’ is meant
‘naturally occurring’, given the nature of human per-
ceptual capacities and the human speech apparatus.
An example of a natural process is final devoicing,
which is arguably grounded in the phonetic fact that
the vocal cords will tend to cease to vibrate at the end
of an utterance. Another example is the natural ten-
dency for vowels to undergo nasalisation when fol-
lowed by a nasal stop. It is common to assume that
there is a rule of Final Devoicing in German, but not in
most varieties of English. It is also assumed that there
is a rule of Nasalisation in (Standard) French, but not
in English. To account for the fact that these natural
processes are not present as rules in English, Stampe
108 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
argued that the child, in acquiring English, must sup-
press the natural process.
Another version of Natural Phonology has been
proposed by Wolfgang Dressler.
Network English A synonym for General American.
neural nets A term used in the theory of computing to
describe systems which are set up as vast networks of
nodes which, when fed input, can apparently learn pat-
terns in the input via a form of inductive generalisa-
tion. Neural nets are central to Connectionism, a
theory of computation in which patterns can be iden-
tified by a neural net simply by the establishing of con-
nections between nodes in the net, on exposure to
specific kinds of input. The term ‘neural’ is used since
it is suggested that such networks resemble the
network of neurons in the human brain.
The emergence of work on neural nets in the late
1980s was important for linguists such as Geoffrey
Sampson, who support Empiricism, since neural nets
are said to start out as a blank slate with, it was
claimed, no inherent structure. It has been argued that,
if neural nets can learn linguistic patterns without
initial built-in ‘knowledge’, then so can the brain of a
child, unaided by the Universal Grammar postulated
by Chomsky and his followers. Neural nets are impor-
tant to phonologists who want to argue that statistical
learning plays a role in phonological acquisition. See
stochastic phonology.
neutral position of the tongue The position of the tongue
when the body of the tongue is in the centre of the
vowel space. When the lips are unrounded, the vowel
quality produced with this position is schwa. The
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 109
notion of the neutral position is central to the cardinal
vowel system of vowel description, since vowels with
the tongue raised above the neutral position are said to
be high, while vowels with the body of the tongue
lower than the neutral position are said to be low.
Similarly, vowels with the body of the tongue in front
of the neutral position are said to be front, and vowels
with the body of the tongue retracted from the neutral
position are said to be back.
neutral vowel A vowel which fails to undergo vowel
harmony but none the less does not block the spread
of harmony, as Hungarian [rɑdir-to:l] ‘frog, ablative’,
where the suffix vowel harmonises with the back
vowel in the root, ‘skipping over’ the neutral vowel [i].
These are also known as transparent vowels, since
harmony ‘passes through’ them.
neutralisation A phonological contrast (see Phonemic
Principle) is said to be neutralised in a specific context
if the contrast is not attested in that context. For
instance, there is a contrast between /t/ and /d/ in many
varieties of American English, as in tin vs din. But the
contrast is frequently neutralised intervocalically in
foot-internal position, as in bedding and betting, both
typically pronounced ['bεɾiŋ]; the /t/ vs /d/ contrast
is neutralised via a postulated process of Flapping,
whereby either phoneme is realised as a flap (tap) in
this context. See absolute neutralisation.
New York City English A variety of English spoken mostly
by people of working-class origins in boroughs of New
York City such as Brooklyn and the Bronx. Sometimes
known as the Bronx accent, or the Brooklyn accent,
this variety is socially stigmatised. Features include
110 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
variable rhoticity, raising of the /æ/ vowel and TH-
Stopping.
node A point in a tree diagram, such as the Place node in
diagrams used in feature geometry intended to repre-
sent the internal structure of segments.
non-linear phonology A development in generative
phonology which emerged in the 1970s. In the late
1960s and early 1970s, SPE phonology postulated
phonological representations consisting of a linear
sequence of segments, subsuming features representing
properties such as word stress and nasality. Non-linear
phonology involved the postulating of multiple layers
of representation, particularly with respect to supraseg-
mental properties. The term subsumes Autosegmental
Phonology and Metrical Phonology. The term is some-
thing of a misnomer, since all varieties of non-linear
phonology incorporate linear sequences of segments or
syllables.
non-rhotic A term used mostly in the study of English, but
which is none the less applicable to other languages. A
language, or a variety of a language, is said to be non-
rhotic if its ‘r’ sounds do not occur in the rhyme of
a syllable. There are many non-rhotic varieties of
English. One such is RP, in which an ‘r’ is pronounced
in run, since the ‘r’ there occupies an onset position. In
RP, there is no ‘r’ pronounced in farm or in far left,
since the ‘r’, were it to be pronounced there, would be
in coda position. All non-rhotic varieties of English
used to be rhotic; the ‘r’ has been elided during the
history of the variety in question. Some phonologists
define non-rhoticity in non-syllabic terms; they say
that non-rhotic accents do not have non-prevocalic ‘r’.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 111
Non-rhotic varieties of English often exhibit the phe-
nomenon known as Linking ‘r’, where a word-final ‘r’
is pronounced when it occupies the otherwise empty
onset of a following word, as in RP far away:
[fɑ:ɹəvei]. This is an example of resyllabification, par-
allel to what one finds with Liaison in French.
Connected with this is the phenomenon of Intrusive ‘r’,
where an ‘r’ is pronounced despite the fact that the
word in question had no ‘r’ historically, as in law and
order: [lɔ:ɹənɔ:də].
non-standard A variety of a language which has not come
to be viewed socially as a standard variety. Examples
are New York City English, Midi French and
Andalucian Spanish.
normalisation A perceptual process in which variability in
an acoustic signal is factored out. When we articulate
speech sounds, there is inherent variability in how we
do so. For instance, a given articulation of, say, the
speech sound type [æ] in English will not be articulated
in exactly the same way every time we utter it.
Speakers are able to compensate for this variability,
such that they can categorise the variants as instances
(tokens) of the same speech sound type. Normalisation
is part and parcel of the process of the categorisation
of speech sounds.
The normalisation process is not foolproof; we can
fail to categorise a speech sound as an instance of the
speech sound intended by the speaker one is listening
to. This can, in turn, result in changes in pronunciation
on the part of the speaker who has failed to normalise
the speech sound. Some phonologists believe that this
is the source of certain kinds of historical change in
sound systems. In certain varieties of Spanish, the
112 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Castillian (Standard Iberian Spanish) contrast between
the palatal lateral /ʎ/, as in calle (‘street’), and the
palatal approximant /j/, as in yo (‘I’) has collapsed; a
phonemic merger has taken place, in which both
phonemes have come to be pronounced as the voiced
palato-alveolar affricate [dj]. Thus, calle is pro-
nounced [kadje] and yo is pronounced [djo]. It could
be that failure to normalise affricated versions of these
phonemes lies behind this merger.
Northern Cities Vowel Shift A vowel shift in American
English which is said to have been under way for some
time in the central and eastern cities of the North of the
USA, such as Milwaukee, Chicago and Syracuse. The
/æ/ phoneme in words of the lexical set TRAP is said
to be raised to pronunciations such as [i] or [iə]. The
/i/ phoneme in words of the lexical set KIT is lowered
to [ε] or [n]. The /ε/ phoneme of the lexical set DRESS
is retracted to [n] or lowered to [æ]. The /n/ of the
lexical set STRUT is retracted to [ɔ]. The /ɔ/ of the
lexical set THOUGHT switches to [ɒ], and the /ɒ/ of
the lexical set LOT is fronted to [æ].
nuclear syllable The syllable on which the pitch change
occurs in an intonation group, as in the syllable ‘pub’
in the English sentence John went to the pub.
nucleus see syllable and intonation
Obligatory Contour Principle (OCP) A supposed ‘princi-
ple’ of phonological organisation, this is a statement of
an observed tendency in some languages towards the
avoidance of adjacent sequences of like elements. It has
O
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 113
its origins in the frequently observed avoidance of
sequences of like tone contours, such as HHL (High,
High, Low), as opposed to sequences such as HLH
(High, Low, High). The notion has been extended to
other phenomena, such as the avoidance of sequences of
stressed syllables. The idea probably has some founda-
tion in a human perceptual tendency in favour of alter-
nating opposites, such as sequences of consonant and
vowel, sequences of stressed and unstressed vowels, or
sequences of high and low tones. Whether it has any
genuine explanatory power as a principle of phonolog-
ical organisation is a moot point. There are countless
examples of phenomena which violate this ‘principle’,
because of the phonologisation of various phenomena.
obstruent The class of obstruents is a subclass of the class
of consonants. Obstruents are characterised by a
major constriction in the oral cavity, namely complete
closure or close approximation. The term subsumes
oral stops, affricates and fricatives. The other subclass
of consonants is that of sonorants.
off-glide see glide
Ohala, John An American phonologist who has been a
long-standing critic of generative phonology, which
he takes to be non-explanatory and ‘non-scientific’.
Ohala seeks genuine ‘scientific’ explanations for
phonological patterns, which he believes to be
grounded in facts about human articulation, percep-
tion and social behaviour that, can be investigated
in laboratory experiments. Proper explanation, for
Ohala, is phonetic explanation. Ohala is known for
stressing the role of the listener in phonological
change.
114 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Old English Used to refer to a period in the history of
English stretching, roughly, from the seventh to the
eleventh century.
Old French The language spoken in France from roughly
the middle of the ninth century to the end of the four-
teenth century.
on-glide see glide
onset see syllable
opacity An phonological process is said to be opaque if its
original phonetic grounding is no longer apparent.
Vowels tend to be longer before voiced segments for
purely phonetic reasons, so that the stressed vowel in
bedding will be somewhat longer than the stressed
vowel in betting. When a given voiced/voiceless dis-
tinction is neutralised, the phonetic basis for such
length distinctions may become obscured. This is the
case with Flapping in American English; the /t/ vs /d/
contrast is neutralised foot-internally, so that betting
and bedding are both realised with a flap/tap, tran-
scribed as [ɾ]. The stressed vowel in betting remains
shorter than the one in bedding, but the original pho-
netic motivation for this length difference has become
obscured; the lengthening process has become opaque.
opaque vowel A vowel which fails to undergo vowel
harmony and also blocks the spread of harmony, as in
Tangale, which has ATR and non-ATR vowel sets, but
where the low vowel [a] lacks a harmonic counterpart,
so that [top-a] ‘start’ and [tɔp-a] ‘answer’ take the
same form of the nominative suffix, despite the
fact that ‘start’ is an ATR root, whereas ‘answer’ is a
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 115
non-ATR root. When a further suffix is added after a
suffix containing /-a/, it fails to undergo harmony, as in
[ped-na-n-gɔ] ‘united me’, where the root /ped/ is an
ATR root, but where the suffix /na/ blocks the spread
of ATR harmony to the final suffix. Opaque vowels are
also known as blockers; they induce disharmony.
open approximation see degree of stricture
open juncture see juncture
open syllable A synonym for free syllable. See syllable.
open syllable lengthening The opposite of closed syllable
shortening. A process in which a vowel in an open syl-
lable undergoes lengthening. In the transition from
Old English to Middle English, the vowel in the first
stressed syllable in a bisyllabic word underwent length-
ening, as in Middle English over, with a long mid
vowel, which comes from Old English ofer, with a
short mid vowel.
opposition A term associated with the work of Ferdinand
de Saussure and Nikolaj Trubetzkoy. A phonological
opposition is a contrast (see Phonemic Principle), as in
English /p/ vs /b/, exemplified by minimal pairs such as
staple and stable. Trubetzkoy distinguished between
different kinds of opposition. One type is the bilateral
opposition. These are two-way oppositions of the sort
/p/ vs /b/. Another type is the multilateral opposition,
of the sort /p/ vs /t/ vs /k/, where the contrasts involve
more than two members, contrasting for major place
of articulation. Among the bilateral oppositions,
Trubetzkoy identified privative oppositions, charac-
terised by the presence vs absence of a phonological
116 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
property, as in the case of nasal stops vs their equiva-
lent non-nasal counterparts. Thus the opposition
between /m/ and /b/ is a privative opposition; the
former member contrasts with the latter in that it pos-
sesses the property of nasality. The property which
may be present or absent was called the mark, and the
member of the opposition which possesses this prop-
erty was said to be marked for that property. The term
‘opposition’ is used loosely in literary theory to mean
‘dichotomy’, as in ‘life’ vs ‘death’.
Optimality Theory (OT) An approach to the study of
phonological phenomena which replaces the notion of
rule with the notion constraint. In OT, constraints are
said to be violable, so that a constraint banning voiced
obstruents in word-final position would be violated in
a language which permits voiced obstruents in that
position. Constraints are also said to be capable of
clashing with each other, i.e. coming into conflict. A
constraint which is said by some to be universal (but
violable) is the proposed constraint that the voicing
state of a given segment must remain the same in its
surface form. In a language which has Word-Final
Devoicing, such as German, this universal constraint
comes into conflict with the constraint which bans
voiced obstruents in word-final position. In OT, con-
straints are said to be ranked differently in different
languages. In our German case, the constraint banning
voiced obstruents is said to ‘outrank’, or predominate
over, the universal constraint. In a language which has
voiced obstruents word-finally, the ranking is reversed.
In some interpretations of OT, all constraints are
said to be universal, given by Universal Grammar.
Other interpretations reject this view and argue that all
constraints are language-specific. There is debate as to
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 117
whether constraints should be seen as phonetically
grounded or not.
oral Sounds in which there is no airflow through the nasal
cavity are called oral sounds. During the production of
these sounds, there is velic closure. Examples are oral
stops, such as [p] and [d], fricatives such as [f] and [s],
and affricates such as [dz] and [tʃ].
oral cavity That part of the vocal tract above the pharynx,
excluding the nasal cavity.
oral stop A stop consonant in which the velum (soft
palate) is raised. This velic closure prevents nasal
airflow. Examples of oral stops are [t] and [b].
over-generalisation A phenomenon attested in child lan-
guage acquisition, in which children grasp a phono-
logical, morphological or syntactic rule and apply it to
forms it does not apply to in adult speech. Examples
are child utterances such as I catched the butterfly,
which suggest that the child has grasped the generali-
sation for forming regular past tense forms of English
verbs, but has over-generalised it to irregular forms
such as the past tense of the verb catch. Children pass
through this phase and eventually master the irregular
forms, especially if they are high in frequency.
oxytone A word which has primary stress on the final syl-
lable, as in the English word deny.
palatal Sounds in which the active articulator is the front
of the tongue and the passive articulator is the hard
P
118 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
palate are said to be palatal. An example is the palatal
approximant [j] in the English word yes.
palatalisation A process in which non-palatal sounds
become palatal or postalveolar. It is common for velar
sounds to become palatalised before front vowels. The
postalveolar fricative [ʃ] found in French words such
as cher (‘expensive’) was a velar [k] in Latin which
palatalised to become the postalveolar affricate [tʃ], and
then became [ʃ]. Processes in which velars undergo
fronting to become alveolar sounds are also sometimes
referred to as palatalisation processes. The velar stop [k]
in Latin was fronted to the alveolar affricate [ts] before
the high front vowel [i] in Gallo-Romance, and later
became [s] in Old French; the initial [s] in the modern
French word ciel (‘sky’) was a [k] in Latin. In the
description of English, palatalisation is referred to
informally as velar softening, found in present-day
alternations such as electric, ending with velar [k] and
electricity, in which an [s] is found before the suffix -ity.
palatality see frontness
palato-alveolar see postalveolar
paradigm A term used both in morphology and in
phonology. Although there is some variability in the
way it is used, it often denotes a set of related word
forms, such as the French pronouns moi, toi, lui, elle,
nous, vous, eux, elles. These are said to stand in a par-
adigmatic relationship, in that each can be substituted
for the other in a given structural slot, such as the
structure Il est chez____, where use of moi yields Il est
chez moi (‘He’s at my place’), whereas use of toi yields
Il est chez toi (‘He’s at your place’). The term is also
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 119
used for sets of morphologically related words, such as
kind, unkind, kindness, kindly, kindliness, unkindli-
ness, etc. See paradigm uniformity effect.
paradigm uniformity effect A phonological phenomenon
in which the paradigmatic relatedness of words has an
effect on phonological processes. In General American,
the process of Flapping occurs foot-internally, so that
it will occur in the word city, but not in the word mili-
tary, which has two metrical feet in American English:
['mili] [
'
tεɹi], with primary stress on the ['mi] and
secondary stress on the [
'
tε]. Because the /t/ in [
'
tε] is in
foot-initial position, it cannot undergo Flapping. When
one forms the paradigmatically related word militaris-
tic, the primary stress shifts: [,militəɹ'istik], with
primary stress on the ['is]. The /t/ in question is now in
foot-internal position, so one would expect it to
undergo Flapping, but it does not. Phonologists believe
that, in cases like this, the morphological relatedness of
the words in question acts to block the phonological
process; in retaining the non-flapped pronunciation,
one is retaining a degree of uniformity in the phonetic
shape of the members of the paradigm.
paradigmatic Two items stand in a paradigmatic relation
if they belong to the same paradigm.
Paradis, Carole A Canadian phonologist associated with
the Theory of Constraints and Repair Strategies. See
constraint and repair strategies.
parallel distribution see Phonemic Principle
parameter The term is sometimes used in a relatively non-
technical way, in its ordinary everyday sense, to mean
120 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
some feature according to which languages, or vari-
eties of a language, vary, as in the example ‘If we con-
sider the parameter of lip rounding, we find that back
vowels tend to be rounded, whereas front vowels tend
not to be.’ Sociolinguistic parameters are also appealed
to in work on sociophonetic variation. For instance,
the parameter of social class correlates with degree of
non-rhoticity among speakers of New York City
English: the lower the social class of a speaker, the
more non-rhotic the speaker is likely to be.
Used in a more technical sense by those who adopt
a principles and parameters approach to generative lin-
guistics. Applied to phonology, postulated parameters
include selecting left-headed vs right-headed foot
structures.
parole A term used by Saussure to denote individual acts
of uttering. Saussure distinguished parole and langue.
paroxytone A word which has primary stress on the
penultimate syllable, as in the English word city.
passive articulator see active articulator
Peirce, C. S. (1839–1914) An American philosopher
whose work has implications for linguistics in
general, and phonology in particular. His conception
of signs is distinct from Saussure’s; for Peirce, a sign
was a mind-external object, as opposed to a connec-
tion between an acoustic image and a concept. Peirce
divided signs into three sorts: indices, icons and
symbols. It is symbols which act as linguistic signs, for
Peirce. The distinction between type and token, much
used in linguistics, including phonology, stems from
Peirce’s work.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 121
penultimate Second last. Often used to refer to the posi-
tion of a syllable in a word for the purposes of word
stress assignment.
performance A term associated with the work of Noam
Chomsky, and thus much used in generative linguistics.
It designates use of linguistic knowledge in a specific
context of utterance, as distinct from linguistic knowl-
edge per se (referred to as competence). Some linguists
argue that the competence/performance distinction is
untenable. Others wish to retain it, but to focus as
much on performance as on competence. The compe-
tence/performance distinction bears some similarity to
Saussure’s langue/parole distinction, but they differ in
at least two major respects. Competence is located
within the individual for Chomsky, and performance is
located in social context. For Saussure, langue is social,
not individual, while parole is individual. For Saussure,
langue is an inventory of signs. For Chomsky, compe-
tence is not; it is a mind-internal grammar. See
I-language and E-language.
pharyngeal Articulated in the pharynx.
pharyngealisation A kind of secondary articulation in
which there is constriction in the pharynx. To tran-
scribe such sounds using the IPA, a superscript diacritic
[°] is placed after the relevant symbol, as in the Arabic
word [t°i:n] (‘mud’).
pharynx One of the three resonance chambers in the vocal
tract, stretching from the larynx up to the oral cavity.
phoneme The term dates at least as far back as the work
of the nineteenth-century Polish linguist Jan Baudouin
122 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
de Courtnay. There is more than one definition of the
phoneme in the phonological literature. It is common
to find a phoneme defined as a kind of sound, a dis-
tinctive sound in a specific language. By ‘distinctive’ is
meant ‘having a contrastive function’, where the con-
trast in question is semantic (related to meaning), as in
the distinction between [lip] (lip) and [sip] (sip) in
English; the substitution of one sound-type ([s]) for
another ([l]) results in a change of word meaning. This
view is a rather concrete, or phonetic, conception of
the phoneme. A variant on this concrete view is that a
phoneme is a set, or family, of distinct speech sound
types which count as ‘the same thing’. This variant
version is more abstract than the idea that phonemes
are literally sounds, since sets are not sounds; they are
abstract, in some sense. Another view is more mental-
istic than this. On one version of this view, phonemes
are not sounds and cannot be heard, since they are
mental categories. These first two views are based on
realism. A third view takes phonemes to be no more
than theoretical constructs, devised by the linguist as
convenient fictions, in order to provide a picture of the
sound patterns in a specific language. This view is
based on instrumentalism. Some phonologists, such
as Trubetzkoy, have argued for a functional view
of phonemes; for Trubetzkoy, one must identify
phonemes on the basis of their function in the phoneme
system of a particular language. Trubetzkoy’s view of
phonemes seems to be neither phonetic, nor mentalis-
tic, nor instrumentalist. All of these interpretations of
the notion ‘phoneme’ assume the validity of the
Phonemic Principle. Some linguists deny the existence
of phonemes; they believe that the phoneme notion
arises from the influence of alphabetic writing systems
on phonologists’ analyses. It is the norm to represent
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 123
phonemes using slanted brackets, as in the case of the
English word pull: /pυl/. Square brackets are used in
phonetic transcriptions which show allophonic detail:
[p|υ¡].
phonemic see phoneme
Phonemic Principle Whatever view one takes of the exist -
ence, or the status, of phonemes, one finds a cluster of
notions which constitute the Phonemic Principle.
Central to this method is the idea of distribution. The
distribution of a sound type, such as [l] in RP, is the
range of environments in which it can occur. An envir -
onment is a specific structural slot in which a sound can
occur, such as the onset of a syllable, or word-initial
position, or intervocalic position. The sound [l] in RP
has the following distribution: it occurs only in onsets,
as in the word [lip] (lip). The sound [¡], often known as
‘dark l’, has a different distribution in RP: it occurs only
in rhymes, as in [p|i:¡] (peel), where it occurs in coda
position, and [k|np¡
.
] (couple), where it occurs in
nucleus position. When two or more sounds exhibit this
kind of non-overlapping distribution, they are said to
occur in complementary distribution. Once it is estab-
lished that two or more sounds are in complementary
distribution, we may ask whether the sounds in ques-
tion are phonetically similar. In this case, they are; both
are laterals, both are voiced, both have an alveolar artic-
ulation. Once we have established complementary dis-
tribution and phonetic similarity, we say that the two
(or more) sounds are allophones of the same phoneme.
Allophones are said to be rule-governed, predictable
realisations of phonemes. In this case the rule is: the /l/
phoneme is realised as [l] in onsets, and as [¡] in rhymes.
Two or more sounds are said to have overlapping, or
124 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
parallel, distribution, if there is at least one structural
slot in which either sound can occur. This is true for the
two sounds [l] and [s] in RP; both may occur in word-
initial onsets before a stressed vowel, as in [lip] (lip) and
[sip] (sip). Once we have established that two sounds
are in parallel distribution, we may establish whether
they have a contrastive function: that is, whether the
presence of one rather than the other may signal a dif-
ference in meaning. This is the case here: [lip] does not
mean the same thing as [sip]. Pairs of words of this sort
are known as minimal pairs. A minimal pair is a pair of
words which differ with respect to only one sound.
Once we have established that two or more sounds have
parallel distribution and that they function con-
trastively, we say that they are realisations of different
phonemes, in this case /l/ and /s/.
Phonemic contrasts are often known as phonemic
oppositions. Typically, the set of phonemic oppositions
in a language is systematic; the oppositions form a
phonemic system. In English, /p/ stands in opposition
to /b/, and the same is true of /t/ vs /d/ and /k/ vs /g/. We
have here a system of phonemic oppositions which is
symmetrical; in each case, we find an opposition
between a voiceless member and a voiced member. We
therefore say that the phonetic property of voicing is
phonemic for stops in English. This is different from
the phonetic property of velarisation which we saw in
RP [¡], as distinct from RP [l]. Since these two sounds
are allophones of the phoneme /l/ in RP, we say that
velarisation is allophonic in RP. A given phonetic pro -
perty may be allophonic in one language but phonemic
in another. For instance, voicing is allophonic for stops
in Korean; there are no voiced stop phonemes in
Korean, but Korean has voiced stop allophones of the
phonemes /p/, /t/ and /k/.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 125
Vowel phonemes are also typically organised into
phonemic systems of opposition. For instance, French
has a series of front unrounded vowel phonemes: /i/,
/e/, /ε/. It also has a corresponding set of front rounded
vowel phonemes: /y/, /o/, /o/. Once again, the system
of oppositions is symmetrical. Not all sets of phonemic
oppositions are symmetrical, but there is a general ten-
dency towards symmetricality. An alternative to this
picture of the way oppositions work is the polysys-
temic approach. It should be noted that some scholars
argue that the idea of the phoneme is based solely on
knowledge of alphabetic writing systems and that
phonemes do not exist. Others argue that, to the con-
trary, when an alphabetic writing system is invented, it
taps into intuitions based on pre-existing, mentally real
phonemes.
phonemic transcription Strictly speaking, this ought to be
a form of visual representation of a word, or sequence
of words, which contains only symbols representing
the phonemes of the language. A strictly phonemic
transcription of the RP word pull ought to contain
only three symbols for the three phonemes in the word:
/pυl/. Phonemic transcriptions ought not to show allo-
phones. In our example, the difference between a
phonemic transcription of the word and a phonetic
transcription is that the aspiration on the /p/ and the
velarisation of the /l/ would be represented in the pho-
netic transcription: [p|υ¡]. However, the reality in
many pronouncing dictionaries is that supposedly
phonemic transcriptions do indeed contain representa-
tions of allophones. An example of this is the repre-
sentation in such dictionaries of the tap in General
American; transcriptions such as /siɾi/ for the word city
ought to be /siti/ if they are to be truly phonemic, since
126 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
the tap is an allophone of the phonemes /t/ and /d/. It
is clear what the practical advantage is of representing
allophones such as taps, but in doing so, dictionary
editors are providing transcriptions which are not
strictly phonemic.
phonetic transcription see phonemic transcription
phonetically motivated A process is said to be phoneti-
cally motivated if it can be shown to be driven by facts
about acoustics, articulation or the perception of
speech sounds. An example of a phonetically moti-
vated process is the phenomenon of voicing assimila-
tion in obstruents, as in the case of Polish /gorod/
(‘town’), which has a voiceless stop at the end of
the base when the diminutive suffix /-ka/ is added:
[gorotka] (‘little town’). This is a form of anticipatory
assimilation, in which the voicelessness of the [k] is
anticipated, resulting in devoicing of the /d/ at the end
of the base. Such assimilations are driven by facts
about articulation.
phonetics The study of human speech sounds. Often sub-
divided into articulatory phonetics (the study of how
human speech sounds are made) and acoustic phonet-
ics (the study of the acoustic properties of those
sounds). There is no universal consensus on the dis-
tinction and relation between phonetics and phonol-
ogy. See realisation.
phonetics-free phonology Any conception of phonologi-
cal objects in which they are said not to be definable
in terms of phonetics. It appears that this view was
adopted by the Danish linguist Louis Hjelmslev
and the British linguist J. R. Firth. The idea recurs
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 127
throughout the history of phonology, appearing in
work on Government Phonology and in the notion of
‘substance abuse’, associated with the writings of
Mark Hale and Charles Reiss. Here, ‘substance’ means
‘phonetic substance’, which they take to be misused if
incorporated into our account of phonological, as
opposed to phonetic, objects.
phonological phrase A prosodic unit postulated by some
phonologists, often said to constitute one of the units
in the prosodic hierarchy. In the analysis of the process
of Liaison in French, it is possible to argue that a
sequence of a determiner and a noun, as in les amis
(‘the friends’), or a pronoun and a verb, as in Ils
arrivent (‘They are coming’), form a phonological
phrase. One can then argue that Liaison must apply
within phonological phrases: [lezami] (les amis) and
[izaʁiv] (Ils arrivent). But Liaison can be said to be
blocked at the boundary between phonological
phrases, as in the sentence Les amis arrivent, which can
be said to consist of two phonological phrases: [Les
amis] and [arrivent], pronounced [lezamiaʁiv], with no
[z] at the end of the word amis. Phonologists who pos-
tulate units such as the phonological phrase often
embrace the claim that syntactic structure does not
directly trigger phonological processes; rather, certain
syntactic configurations in specific languages are said
to form phonological phrases, which then act as the
domain for the application of certain phonological
processes.
phonological word A prosodic unit postulated by some
phonologists. It is claimed by some that this unit acts
as the domain for the operation of certain phonologi-
cal processes. It has been claimed that the phonologi-
128 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
cal word in French consists of a root plus any suffixes
which follow it, and that prefixes in French constitute
separate phonological words. The process of glide for-
mation in French is claimed to apply within phono-
logical words, as in the adjective colonial (‘colonial’),
pronounced [kɔlɔnjal], derived from the noun colonie
(‘colony’), pronounced [kɔlɔni]. Here, the [i] at the
end of colonie becomes the glide [j] when followed by
a vowel-initial suffix, which forms a phonological
word with the root. Glide formation fails to occur
across the boundary between phonological words, as
can be seen in the pronunciation of Je vis à Paris (‘I
live in Paris’), pronounced [jəviapaʁi]. Here, the [i] at
the end of the phonological word Je vie does not
undergo glide formation: the pronunciation is not
[jəvjapaʁi].
phonologisation The term is used when ‘low-level’,
universal phonetic tendencies attain the status of
phonological generalisations in a specific language.
Universally, vowels tend to be longer before voiced con-
sonants. But this tendency can evolve into a language-
specific vowel lengthening process, such as the Scottish
Vowel Length Rule, in which specific vowels are con-
siderably lengthened before specific voiced consonants.
The term is also used to describe the historical
process by which a speech sound type changes its
status from that of an allophone to that of the realisa-
tion of an independent phoneme. In present-day
French, there is a /ʃ/ phoneme, as in words like /maʁʃe/
(marcher, ‘to walk’). We can tell this because there are
minimal pairs such as /maʁʃe/ vs /maʁke/ (marquer, ‘to
mark’). In Old French, there was no /ʃ/ phoneme; the
[ʃ] sound was merely an allophone of the /k/ phoneme
(marcher comes from the Vulgar Latin verb marcare,
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 129
with a /k/), but it attained phonemic status during the
evolution of the French phonemic system. This kind of
phonologisation is also an example of a phonemic
split.
phonology The study of the sound systems found in
human languages. Some define phonology as the study
of the functions of speech sounds. On that definition,
phonology is functional phonetics. Others have a more
mentalistic conception of what the discipline of
phonology is; they see sound systems as being objects
represented in the minds of human beings.
The term is used both for the discipline and for
the object of inquiry; we talk of phonology as a field
of study, parallel to politics, but as with the term
‘politics’, we also use the word ‘phonology’ to refer
to the sound systems under investigation, as in the
phrase ‘Vowel harmony occurs in the phonology of
Hungarian.’
The distinction and relation between phonology and
phonetics is controversial. See phoneme, Phonemic
Principle and realisation.
phonotactic constraints These are restrictions on the
sequence of sounds that can occur in a given position
in a syllable. They vary from one language to another.
For instance, in most varieties of English, there are
constraints on what kinds of consonant can occur in
the first and second positions in a branching onset. If a
stop consonant occupies the first slot in a branching
onset, then only one of the following approximants
can occur in the second position: /r, l, w, j/, as in tray,
play, twice and cure. In contrast, French phonotactic
constraints allow the consonants /n/ and /s/ in the
second position in a branching onset, as in pneu
130 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
(‘tyre’), pronounced [pno], and psychiatre (‘psychia-
trist’), pronounced [psikjatʁ]. Phonotactic constraints
can refer to specific consonant types, as we have seen,
but they can be very broad too. For instance, if a lan-
guage allows only CV syllables, i.e. does not allow
coda consonants, then that too would constitute a
phonotactic constraint.
phrasal phonology see Lexical Phonology
phrasal stress Prominence of specific syllables in specific
words in a phrase. In English, the phrasal stress rule is
said to make the final element in the phrase the most
prominent. In the noun phrase tall boy, the noun boy is
most prominent. In the verb phrase quickly departed,
the verb departed is most prominent. In the adjective
phrase very tall, the adjective tall is most prominent.
The application of the phrasal stress rule is said to
trigger Iambic Reversal. In the word thirteen, -teen is
normally more prominent than thir-. But when thir-
teen is inserted into a phrase such as thirteen men, the
phrasal stress rule is said to create a stress clash
between men and -teen, resulting in the reversal of the
prominence patterns between thir- and -teen.
Piaget, Jean Twentieth-century Swiss psychologist who
worked on child development. Unlike Chomsky, he
argued that the child’s linguistic development was
integrated into the child’s general cognitive develop-
ment. Present-day Neo-Piagetians include Annette
Karmiloff-Smith.
pidgin A pidgin language is a form of language which
emerges when speakers of different languages seek to
communicate. A pidgin language therefore acts as a
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 131
lingua franca. Some of the best-known examples are
pidgin varieties of English, Dutch, French, Spanish and
Portuguese which emerged during the slave trade.
Pidgin languages are said to be syntactically, morpho-
logically and phonologically simpler than the languages
they are based on, which are the languages of the slave
traders and the languages of the slaves. See creole.
Pierrehumbert, Janet An American phonologist known
for her work on intonation. Pierrehumbert is a leading
light in the Laboratory Phonology community, and is
a proponent of stochastic phonology.
pitch The acoustic effect produced by different rates of
vibration of the vocal cords. Generally speaking, the
higher the rate of vibration, the higher the pitch. Pitch
changes feature in word stress, intonation and tone.
pitch accent A form of salience. Syllables which have a
pitch accent have pitch movement on that syllable, as
in the Japanese word toshokan (‘library’) which has a
sequence of three syllables, the first having a low pitch,
the second a high pitch and the third a low pitch.
pitch accent language A language such as Japanese, in
which each word has a single tonal pattern. In the
Japanese word toshokan (‘library’), the second syllable,
with the high pitch, is the stressed syllable; the stress is
conveyed by pitch alone, unlike in English. Pitch accent
languages are said by many to be different from tone
languages and stress and intonation languages.
place of articulation The point in the oral cavity at which
a sound is articulated. For consonants, the main places
of articulation are labial, coronal and dorsal.
132 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
plosive A synonym for a stop. See degree of stricture.
point vowels see dispersion theory
polysyllabic Containing more than two syllables. The
English words elephant, elaborate and gentlemanliness
are all polysyllabic.
polysystemic Polysystemic approaches to the nature of
phonological contrasts differ from the classical phone-
mic approach. Under the latter, one considers the
entire set of environments, and establishes allophones
on the basis of complementary distribution. On this
view, there is a single set of phonemic oppositions, with
the allophones of those phonemes being distributed
across a range of environments. On the polysystemic
approach, one postulates several sets of phonemic
systems for each environment, such as onset position
and coda position. On this view, a given language has,
for example, a system of onset consonants and a dis-
tinct system of coda consonants. Associated with the
work of British linguist J. R. Firth.
postalveolar Sounds which are postalveolar are produced
with a stricture involving the blade of the tongue and the
area just behind the alveolar ridge. Examples are the
Englishfricatives inwords suchas ship[ʃip] andmeasure
[mεjə]. Many phonologists andphoneticians still use the
term palato-alveolar for such sounds, though this does
not feature in the most recent revision of the IPA.
postvocalic Occurring after a vowel. The /d/ in the word
bad is postvocalic.
Poverty of the Stimulus (POS) argument see stimulus
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 133
Prague School Agroup of linguists and philosophers, based
inPrague fromthe mid-1920s intothe 1930s, whodevel-
oped several concepts in linguistic analysis, including
markedness and the idea of different types of phonolog-
ical opposition. Perhaps the best-known phonologist
working inthe Prague School was a Russianprince called
Nikolaj Trubetzkoy. The phonologist Roman Jakobson
also worked closely with members of the Prague School.
pre-aspirated stops Stops which are pre-aspirated have a
period of aspiration preceding the stop closure, as in
the case of the [ht] stop found in Icelandic. These are
distinct from post-aspirated stops such as the [p|], [t|]
and [k|] in English, which are normally referred to
simply as aspirated stops. Icelandic has both pre-
aspirated and post-aspirated stops. In some languages,
such as the Applecross dialect of Scots Gaelic, pre-
aspirated stops have been analysed as single contour
segments. In other languages, such as Icelandic, they
are analysed as sequences of two segments.
prenasalised stops Stops which are treated as single seg-
ments, but which contain a nasal articulation prior to
the oral stop articulation, as in the Terena word
[mbiho] (‘I went’). Prenasalised stops, like affricates,
are often described as contour segments, or complex
segments, since, in each case, there are two distinct,
sequential subparts within a single segment.
pre-pausal Occurring before a pause. The [t] at the end of
the utterance ‘He got hit’ is in pre-pausal position if the
speaker pauses at the end of that utterance.
prevocalic Occurring before a vowel. The [ɹ] in the sen-
tence I’m ready is in prevocalic position.
134 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
primary articulation The main articulation produced in
sounds which also have a secondary articulation. The
primary articulation in English ‘dark l’ is alveolar, but
this sound also has a secondary articulation, a velari-
sation in which the back of the tongue articulates with
the velum.
primary stress Some languages have more than one degree
of word stress. Many varieties of English are said to
have both primary stress and secondary stress, as in the
word preconception, which contains both a secondary
stress and a primary stress: [,precon'ception], where
the diacritic [,] marks secondary stress, and the dia-
critic ['] marks primary stress. The idea is that the syl-
lables between the stressed syllables are unstressed,
and thus less prominent than the stressed syllables, but
that the syllable with primary stress is more prominent
than the syllable with secondary stress.
Prince, Alan An American phonologist who works within
the generative phonology tradition. He is known for
his work in Metrical Phonology. He is considered
the co-founder, with Paul Smolensky, of Optimality
Theory. He has also worked with John McCarthy on
Optimality Theory.
principles Many linguists believe that there are basic prin-
ciples which govern the structure of human languages.
In the field of phonology, avoidance of homophony is
considered to be a functioning general principle, which
is said to come into conflict with the tendency towards
ease of articulation.
A more formal sense of ‘principle’ is used in branches
of generative linguistics which postulate formal princi-
ples and parameters, given by Universal Grammar.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 135
principles and parameters approach Any approach to the
theory of linguistic structure which postulates linguis-
tic principles and parameters that are said to be given
by Universal Grammar. Mostly associated with syn-
tactic analyses adopted within present-day generative
linguistics, but the notion has been adopted by gener-
ative phonologists.
privative feature A feature which is said to be either
present or absent, as in the case of the feature [labial],
present in segments such as /u/, /o/, /p/, /b/ and /m/, but
absent in segments such as /i/, /e/, /t/, /d/ and /n/. See
also opposition.
privative opposition see opposition
process One way of talking about the relationship
between related phonetic and phonological forms is
to appeal to the idea of phonetic or phonological
processes. In Korean, there are related forms, such as
[pap] (‘cooked rice’) and [pabi] (the ‘subjective’ form
of the ‘cooked rice’ morpheme). Phonologists have
analysed such pairs by postulating an underlying rep-
resentation of the form /pap/, with an underlyingly
voiceless unaspirated stop. Forms such as [pabi] are
then said to result from the operation of a process of
intervocalic voicing. The process idea tends to be asso-
ciated with the notion of phonological rule.
proclitic see clitic
productivity The extent to which a given phonological,
morphological or syntactic pattern can apply to create
new forms. The suffix -ee in contemporary English is
currently exhibiting a certain degree of productivity;
136 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
speakers are uttering new forms such as kissee and
teachee, in which the new forms denote the person
undergoing the experience. It is claimed, particularly in
usage-based phonology, that the productivity of a
given pattern is largely determined by the type fre-
quency of the pattern.
progressive (preservative) assimilation see assimilation
prominence A synonym of salience.
proparoxytone A word which has primary stress on the
antepenultimate syllable, as in the English word
America.
prosodic Relating to prosody.
prosodic domains see prosodic hierarchy
prosodic hierarchy It is often claimed that phonological
units larger than the segment form a hierarchy of ever-
larger units, known as the prosodic hierarchy. An
example of such a proposed hierarchy would contain the
units known as the syllable, the foot, the phonological
word, the phonological phrase, the intonational phrase
and the utterance. As one moves fromthe syllable at the
bottom of the hierarchy to the utterance at the top, the
units are said to get larger, so that feet contain syllables,
phonological words contain feet, and so on. It is a moot
point whether all languages have all of these units. It is
also debatable whether utterances can be strictly subdi-
vided into neat packages containing such units.
Prosodic Morphology An approach to morphology, asso-
ciated primarily with the work of John McCarthy and
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 137
Alan Prince, in which morphological templates are
said to be definable in terms of prosodic constituents
such as the syllable and the metrical foot.
prosody The study of prosody is the study of supraseg-
mental features of speech, such as word stress, rhythm
and intonation. Some phonologists treat other phe-
nomena, such as nasality, as a potentially prosodic
property. The term is used in Firthian Phonology
to denote phonological elements which correspond
to what were later called autosegments. See
Autosegmental Phonology.
proto-language A reconstructed earlier stage in the
history of a language family. Examples are Proto-Indo-
European, the reconstructed precursor of the Indo-
European language family and Proto-Dravidian, the
reconstructed precursor of the present-day Dravidian
languages, such as Malayalam, Tamil and Telugu.
The term ‘proto-language’ is also used by the lin-
guist Derek Bickerton to refer to a postulated more
‘primitive’ form of human language which he claims
was an evolutionary precursor to fully-fledged human
language.
prototypes In the work of Eleanor Rosch, it is argued that
human perception relies heavily on prototypes, which
are central exemplars of a given category. In the field
of colour perception, it is said that we have a clear
sense of a prototypical example of, say, ‘green’, and a
prototypical example of, say, ‘blue’. But we are poor at
categorising tokens which lie on the fuzzy boundaries
of blueness and greenness, and will often disagree as to
whether a given object is green or blue, if the colour is
not prototypical. It is argued that vowel perception
138 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
works in the same way. Native speakers are good at
recognising a prototypical example of, say, /i/ in
English, as in the word pit; they are also good at recog-
nising prototypical examples of /ε/, as in the word pet.
But if we hear non-prototypical exemplars of these
phonemes, articulated halfway between /i/ and /ε/, we
are less good at identifying the vowel sound (though
context of utterance will help immensely in guessing
what word is intended).
Prototypes are said by some to be central to speech
perception and to our conceptual categories, so that
concepts such as ‘dog’ are said to have more and less
central exemplars. Prototype theory is similar to exem-
plar theory.
psychological reality The idea that the phonological rep-
resentations and generalisations postulated by linguists
correspond in some way to mental entities and/or
processes in the minds of speaker/hearers. See realism.
pull chain A synonym for a drag chain. See vowel shift.
Pullum, Geoffrey A British linguist who spent a great deal
of his career in the USA before returning to Britain in
2007 to become Professor of Linguistics at Edinburgh
University in Scotland. Pullum’s early work was on
SPE phonology, but he has worked on a remarkably
wide range of areas in linguistics, including syntactic
theory (he was one of the co-founders of a framework
known as Generalised Phrase Structure Grammar) and
the syntax-phonology interface. He is co-author of a
phonetic symbol guide and lately known for his work
with the philosopher Barbara Scholz criticising the
Poverty of the Stimulus argument and, more generally,
Chomsky’s Rationalism.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 139
pulmonic egressive see airstream mechanisms
pulmonic ingressive see airstream mechanisms
push chain see vowel shift
quantity A property often attributed to syllables, nor-
mally the rhyme of the syllable. Syllables are often said
to be heavy if the rhyme contains a certain amount of
phonological material. Syllable rhymes in Latin are
said to have been light if they contained only a short
vowel, and heavy if they contained a long vowel, a
diphthong, or a vowel followed by a coda consonant.
The heavy syllables are said to have greater quantity
than the light syllables. In the Latin word l[a]udati
(‘praised’), pronounced [lauda:ti], the final syllable is
light and the other two syllables are heavy. Many word
stress systems are said to be governed by syllable quan-
tity. In Latin, words which are trisyllabic or longer are
said to have been stressed on the penultimate syllable
if it was heavy, or otherwise on the antepenultimate
syllable. Some phonologists distinguish quantity as a
phonological property from length as a purely phon -
etic property of segments.
quantity sensitivity A term for word stress assignment
systems in which syllable weight (otherwise known as
syllable quantity) plays a role.
‘r’ sounds Otherwise known as rhotics. It is common
for phonologists to postulate different ‘r’ sounds in a
R
Q
140 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
language, and the range of sounds considered to be ‘r’
sounds is remarkably broad, subsuming taps, trills,
fricatives and approximants. It is a moot point whether
there is a natural class of ‘r’ sounds. It is worth noting
that, although the class of sounds considered to be
rhotics is large, it is none the less constrained; no nasal
stops ever count as rhotics, for example, and nor do
voiceless stops.
radical consonants Sequences of three consonants in
Arabic which constitute morphological roots. Vowels
can then be interspersed among these consonants, and
various affixes can be added to them. The sequence
/drs/ is an example. With the addition of various
vowels and affixes, the following forms, among others,
can be created: [darasa] (‘he studied’, [darsun] (‘a
lesson’), [madrasah] (‘Koranic school’). In the analysis
of such forms, phonologists often appeal to the idea of
templates such as CVCVC, found in the first example.
Radoppiamento Sintattico (RS) Literally, ‘syntactic dou-
bling’. An external sandhi phenomenon found in
Italian, in which a word-initial consonant undergoes
gemination (doubling) next to a word boundary, as in
Era venuto con tré piccoli cani (‘He came with three
little dogs’), in which the underlyingly short [p] in
piccoli (the plural form of the adjective meaning ‘little’)
is geminated to [pp]. The process applies if the segment
following the target consonant is a vowel, a liquid or a
glide, and if the syllable preceding the target consonant
is stressed. There has been much discussion of the con-
ditions for RS. Like Liaison in French, it does not
happen across all sequences of two words, and this has
led to discussion as to whether syntactic structure
plays a direct role in the triggering of the process, or
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 141
whether there is an indirect link between syntactic
structure and phonological processes, mediated by
postulated units such as the phonological phrase.
raised A vowel is said to be raised if its articulation has
moved upwards in the vowel space. In the Northern
Cities Vowel Shift, many of the articulations of the /æ/
phoneme are raised towards the low mid vowel [ε], or
even higher than that.
raising Any phonological process in which vowels are
raised in the vowel space. An example is DRESS
Raising in New Zealand English, in which vowels of
the lexical set DRESS are raised from the low mid [ε]
position and pronounced as [i], as in the pronunciation
of the word desk as [disk]. Raising in phonology is not
to be confused with the use of the same term in the
history of generative syntax.
Rationalism A tradition in the history of philosophy
which rests on the idea that certain kinds of cognitive
content are native to, or innate in, the human mind
and not acquired via interaction with the environ-
ment. It is important not to confuse this meaning with
the everyday use of the term, which means ‘relying on
rationality’. Rationalism is associated with the work
of the French philosopher Descartes, who argued that
the human mind is possessed, at birth, with certain
‘innate ideas’. The notion of innate cognitive content
was pursued in the twentieth century by Chomsky,
who claims that humans are born with innate linguis-
tic knowledge, including phonological knowledge.
Rationalism is often referred to as Nativism. The idea
that humans are born with innate linguistic knowl-
edge is opposed by those who support Empiricism.
142 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Innate phonological knowledge is said to include
general principles governing the shape of the phono-
logical systems of human languages.
Rationalist Relating to Rationalism.
realisation A term often used by scholars who postulate a
distinction between phonological and phonetic repre-
sentations, and who see the relation between the two
to be one of the phonological representation being
realised in phonetic substance. The term is somewhat
unfortunate for proponents of realism, since it suggests
that the phonological representation is somehow less
real than the phonetic representation, but this is
usually not intended by authors who use the term.
Other terms used to designate the relation between
phonology and phonetics are manifestation, phonetic
implementation, phonetic interpretation and phonetic
exponence. Others use the term transduction to
describe the relationship between phonology and pho-
netics phonological objects, taken to be mental in
nature, are said to be transduced into phonetic sub-
stance. It is, at times, unclear exactly what terms such
as these are supposed to mean. There is no consensus
on whether a clear distinction can be drawn between
phonology and phonetics, and even those who believe
that such a distinction can be drawn do not agree on
how it should be drawn, or on what the relation
between the two is.
realisational difference A difference between two varieties
of a language is said to be realisational if there is a dif-
ference in the way the phonemes of those varieties
are realised. In Received Pronunciation (RP), the /l/
phoneme is realised as a ‘dark l’ in the rhyme of a
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 143
syllable, as in the word dull: [dn¡], where the /l/ is in
the coda position of the rhyme. In the word lip, the /l/
is in the onset, and is therefore not realised as a dark l
in RP. The word lull in RP has an /l/ in onset position
and an /l/ in the rhyme, and is therefore pronounced
[ln¡], with two different l sounds. In Standard Scottish
English, the /l/ phoneme is realised as a dark l in all syl-
labic positions, so that lull is pronounced [¡n¡]. This
kind of difference is realisational, not systemic; the dif-
ference does not lie in the set of phonemic oppositions
found in the two varieties, but in the way a specific
phoneme is realised. See systemic differences.
realism A way of interpreting scientific theories, accord-
ing to which the theoretical constructs postulated by
the scientist are assumed to correspond to real entities
and events. A realist interpretation of atomic theory
assumes that atoms are real. Adopting a realist inter-
pretation of phonological constructs such as phoneme,
syllable and foot means assuming that such things are
real entities in some sense. The alternative to this
assumption is to adopt an instrumentalist interpreta-
tion of theoretical constructs, according to which we
are not justified in assuming that phonemes, feet, syl-
lables and other postulated objects actually exist
outside of our theories.
Received Pronunciation (RP) An accent of English which
has often been associated with speakers who attended
the English fee-paying schools. It is widely taught to
foreign learners of English around the world. Some
phonologists prefer to speak of the present-day RP-
type accents as Standard Southern British English. RP
is also referred to as BBC English, although BBC pre-
senters nowadays speak with a wide variety of accents.
144 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
reciprocal assimilation see assimilation
recursion In syntax, a syntactic category is said to be recur-
sive if one canidentify aninstance of that category occur-
ring within a category of the same type. For instance, the
noun phrase, The old man in the park, contains another
noun phrase (the park). Since noun phrases can occur
within noun phrases in English, we say that noun phrase
is a recursive category in English. It has often been
claimed that recursion is a universal property of human
language, present in all human languages. This claimhas
recently been disputed by the linguist Dan Everett.
Recursive categories have been postulated in phonology,
but their status is much more questionable than the
status of recursive categories in syntax. Examples of pos-
tulated recursive categories in phonology are the phono-
logical word and the intonational phrase.
recursive see recursion
reduced vowel see reduction
reduction With respect to consonants, this is a process in
which a sound with oral cavity articulation comes to
be replaced by another sound without oral cavity artic-
ulation. Voiceless fricatives are often historically
reduced to glottal fricatives, with loss of stricture in the
oral cavity. Spanish hijo (‘son’) used to be pronounced
with an [h] at an earlier stage in the history of the lan-
guage. This [h] was a reduced form of Latin [f] in
filium. Voiceless oral stops are often reduced to glottal
stops, again with loss of stricture in the oral cavity, as
in the pronunciation [bnʔə] (butter). This process is
often called glottalling. With respect to vowels, in
many languages, unstressed vowels are often reduced
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 145
to schwa, which involves no deviation from the neutral
position of the tongue. A word such as personal has
reduced vowels in its unstressed syllables, both of them
schwas: ['p|s:sənəl], but in the word personality, the
syllable with primary stress has a non-reduced vowel:
[,p|s:sə'næliti]. Some languages have a more restricted
range of vowel phonemes in unstressed syllables than
is found in stressed syllables, but none the less do not
reduce the unstressed vowels to schwa. In Catalan, the
seven vowels /i, e, ε, a, ɔ, o, u/ can occur in stressed syl-
lables, but in unstressed syllables only /i, a, u/ can
occur. This kind of phenomenon is analysed as a kind
of vowel reduction by some.
redundancy see redundant
redundant A phonetic feature is said to be redundant if its
occurrence is predictable from context. The notion is
central to the Phonemic Principle: allophonic properties
of speech sounds are predictable from context, as in the
case of the intervocalic voicing of unaspirated voiceless
stops in Korean, where morphemes such as /pap/
(‘cooked rice’) have a [b] realisation of the morpheme-
final /p/ in forms such as [pabi]. In SPE phonology,
underlying representations were stripped of all such
redundant features, so that the underlying representa-
tion for ‘cooked rice’ in Korean would be /pap/.
In exemplar theory, it is argued that mental repre-
sentations of words are not stripped of redundant
phonetic material but are stored in the form they are
heard, with all the phonetic detail which was perceived
when a word was uttered on a specific occasion.
reduplication A morphological process in which segmen-
tal material from a base is copied. In Maori, /mate/
146 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
means ‘sick’ and the reduplicated form /matemate/
means ‘sickly’. Reduplication is relevant for phonol-
ogy because any account of reduplication phenomena
requires a statement of exactly which phonological
material is to be reduplicated. There are clear cases,
such as our Maori example, in which a constituent
such as a syllable or a word is reduplicated. But other
reduplication phenomena are less straightforward,
leading phonologists to appeal to notions such as tem-
plates and underspecification. In Ilokano, a Philippine
language, the progressive form of the base [basa]
(‘read’) is [ag+bas+basa], with [bas] copied from the
base. Here, what is copied is neither a syllable nor a
base. The same is true for the base [trabaho] (‘work’),
whose reduplicated form is [ag+trab+trabaho]. An
analysis making appeal to the idea of a template would
postulate a prefix consisting of a CCVC template
which is underspecified for phonological content.
Segmental content from the base is then copied on to
the template. Other phonologists have argued that
there are prosodic constraints on reduplication, so that
the reduplicated material is a prosodic constituent such
as the mora, the syllable and the foot. In the case
of Ilokano reduplication, the suggestion is that the
sequence CCVC is not arbitrary, but corresponds to
the language’s maximal syllable.
regressive (anticipatory) assimilation see assimilation
Rendaku A well-known voicing process in Japanese, in
which an initial voiceless consonant in a compound
becomes voiced when inserted into the compound. The
standard example is the combination or ori (‘fold’)
plus kami (‘paper’), which together form the com-
pound [oɾigami] (‘paper folding’). See Lyman’s Law.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 147
repair strategies An idea associated with the work of
Canadian phonologist Carole Paradis. In her theory
of constraints and repair strategies, both universal
and language-specific constraints are postulated.
When these are violated, repair strategies may be trig-
gered. For instance, if a given language has a language-
specific constraint prohibiting adjacent consonants,
then any such sequence could be repaired by the
insertion of an epenthetic vowel between the two
consonants.
representation A notion that has been widely appealed to
in phonology in a variety of different ways. In SPE
phonology, a distinction was made between two sig-
nificant levels of phonological representation, both
attributed with psychological reality. The first was the
level of systematic phonemic/phonological representa-
tion, otherwise known as underlying representation.
This was a level at which all redundant (predictable)
phonetic features were stripped away. Those features
were then supplied by phonological rules, which
yielded a derived level of representation known as the
systematic phonetic level of representation.
resonance chamber Any of the three chambers in the
vocal tract in which resonance may take place: the oral
cavity, the nasal cavity and the pharynx.
resyllabification see syllable
retracted see vowel retraction
Retracted Tongue Root (RTR) A property often associ-
ated with vowels, in which the root of the tongue is
retracted, resulting in various effects on the body of the
148 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
tongue. Typical RTR and non-RTR vowel pairs are
[i]/[i], [u]/[υ], [e]/[ε], [o]/[ɔ], in which the latter
member is RTR. Such pairs often figure in vowel
harmony systems. There is often debate as to whether
a given system is ATR-based or RTR-based. It appears
that ATR-based systems may change into RTR systems
over time. Some believe that there are languages with
both ATR and RTR vowel harmony.
retraction see vowel retraction and stress retraction
retroflex A speech sound is said to be retroflex when
the tip/blade of the tongue is curled back and the
underside of the tip/blade forms a constriction with
the passive articulator, usually the alveolar ridge.
Retroflex consonants are common in both the
Dravidian and the Indo-European languages of India,
such as Tamil. They include retroflex stops, such as the
voiceless retroflex stop [I] in the Tamil word [Iɑβam]
(‘penance’), and the voiced retroflex stop [d] in the
Tamil word [pu:ndυ] (‘garlic’). The latter word also
contains the retroflex nasal stop [n]. The Tamil word
[kυrυ] (‘give’) contains the retroflex tap/flap [r], and
the Tamil word [pɑzɯ] (‘waste’) contains the voiced
retroflex fricative [z].
reversal see Iambic Reversal
rhotic A language, or variety of a language, is said to be
rhotic if its ‘r’ sounds may appear in both onsets and
codas. In Standard Scottish English and in many vari-
eties of American English, an ‘r’ is pronounced in farm
and far left. See non-rhotic.
rhotics see ‘r’ sounds
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 149
rhyme There are two different senses of this word.
There is a phenomenon known as rhyme which is
found in poetry and song. In English, the unit for
rhyming is the metrical foot, with any onset conso-
nants ignored, so that city rhymes with witty. Each
word constitutes a trochaic metrical foot, and when
one ignores the onset consonants, both have the foot
[iti]. Because metrical feet can cut across word bound-
aries, it is possible to form rhymes such as the follow-
ing: pneumonia and stone ya (informal spelling of
stone you, as in the sentence They’ll stone ya.) The
word pneumonia has an initial unstressed syllable, fol-
lowed by the metrical foot [məυnjə]. The phrase stone
ya consists of the metrical foot [stəυnjə]. Ignoring the
onset consonants, both expressions contain the metri-
cal foot [əυnjə], and thus they rhyme. Popular music
abounds with examples like this.
The term is also used to refer to a constituent within
a syllable which consists of the nucleus and any coda
consonants. It is worth noting that, despite its name,
the rhyme of a syllable is not the basis for rhyming in
English. See syllable.
rhythm The regular placement of beats in speech. While
all human speech is rhythmic, different human
languages exhibit different rhythmic patterns. One
pattern contains a perceptually salient syllable fol-
lowed by a less salient syllable, as in the English word
father. Such a structure is known as a trochee, and is
referred to as a trochaic structure. Another pattern
contains a less salient syllable followed by a more
salient one, as in the word [ŋin'tip] (‘bee’) in the lan-
guage Weri. This is known as an iamb, and is referred
to as an iambic structure. The structures in question
are often referred to as metrical feet. It is said that
150 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
English father constitutes a trochaic foot, while Weri
ŋintip constitues an iambic foot. The most prominent
syllable in a foot may have only secondary stress, as in
the English word preconception, which contains two
trochaic feet: [,precon] ['ception].
rhythm rule see Iambic Reversal
right-headed Used to refer to phonological constituents in
which the head is located at the right edge of the con-
stituent, as in the case of iambic feet. These can be
found in, for example, the South American language
Weri. An example from this language is the word
[ŋin'tip] (‘bee’), in which the final stressed syllable
forms an iambic foot with the preceding unstressed syl-
lable. See left-headed and rhythm.
rising diphthong A diphthong in which the most promi-
nent element is the second, as French [wa] (‘goose’),
where the [a] is more prominent than the on-glide [w].
The most prominent element in a diphthong is often
referred to as the head of the diphthong.
Romance languages A subgrouping within the Indo-
European language family which includes present-day
languages such as Catalan, French, Italian, Occitan,
Portuguese and Spanish. The Romance languages are
historically derived from Vulgar Latin.
root A term from the field of morphology, designating the
part of a word which remains once all affixes have been
removed. For instance, in the English word unfriendli-
ness, once one removes the prefix un- and the suffixes
-ly and -ness, one arrives at the root friend. The term is
also used in phonetics to refer to the tongue root.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 151
rounded Having lip-rounding. Back vowels are typically
rounded, as in the case of [u] and [o], but there are front
rounded vowels too, as in the case of the French vowels
[y], [o] and [o] found in the words lune (‘moon’), peu
(‘little’) and sœur (‘sister’). Consonants can also have
lip-rounding, as in the case of the English palato-
alveolar sound [ʃ], found in words such as share and ash.
roundedness The property of being rounded. For some
phonologists working with private features, rounded-
ness is subsumed under labiality
RP see Received Pronunciation
RTR see Retracted Tongue Root
rule A way of stating a generalisation. When we say that
there is a rule of voicing assimilation in Polish, this is
a way of saying that there is a generalisation to be
made about the assimilation that occurs between adja-
cent obstruents in Polish. An alternative way of stating
the generalisation would be in the form of a constraint.
rule-governed A given phonological pattern is said to be
rule-governed if it exhibits a clearly stateable regular-
ity. The occurrence of the allophones of a phoneme are
said to be rule-governed if we can state exactly which
environments they occur in. The word stress patterns
of a language are said to be rule-governed if we can
state an explicit algorithm for word stress assignment
in that language.
Rutgers Optimality Archive (ROA) An on-line archive
of papers on Optimality Theory, based at Rutgers
University in the USA.
152 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
salience A perceptual notion. In all languages, some
phonological units will be more salient (prominent) to
its speakers than others. Stressed syllables are more
salient than unstressed syllables, as in the word
happen, where the penultimate syllable is more salient
than the final syllable. Among the stressed syllables,
syllables bearing the tonic are more salient than
syllables which do not carry the tonic, as in Mary
bought a dress, in which the tonic syllable dress is
more salient than the other stressed syllables Mary
and bought.
Sampson, Geoffrey A British linguist who has consistently
opposed the Rationalist belief that humans are born
with linguistic knowledge. In opposition to this,
Sampson claims that we learn the language(s) we
speak, using general learning mechanisms. Sampson
supports Empiricism; he denies the existence of
Universal Grammar. While he has not worked on
phonology, his views are relevant for the study of
phonology. According to his view, human children
learn the phonology of their language from scratch;
there is no innate phonological knowledge (though this
is not to deny that humans possess certain innate per-
ceptual and articulatory capacities).
sandhi A term taken from Sanskrit, meaning ‘putting
together’, from sam (‘together’) and dhi, (‘put’). The
term was first used by the ancient Indian grammarians.
Sandhi processes are processes which operate across
morphological and syntactic boundaries. External
sandhi processes operate across word boundaries. The
phenomenon of Linking ‘r’ in non-rhotic varieties of
English, as in [fɑ:ɹəvei], far away, is an example of
S
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 153
this, since the presence of the ‘r’ is triggered by the
presence of a vowel-initial word following the word
far. Internal sandhi processes operate within word
boundaries often across morpheme boundaries, as in
the case of Lumasaaba morphemes such as /li/ (‘a
root’), realised as [di] when a nasal stop precedes it, as
in the form [zindi] (‘roots’). Some processes operate
both internally and externally, sometimes beginning as
internal sandhi, and then being extended such that they
also operate externally.
Sanskrit An Indo-European language which was spoken
on the Indian subcontinent. The present-day Indo-
European languages of India, such as Bengali and
Hindi, are said to be descendants of Sanskrit. It was the
discovery of systematic phonological and morpholog-
ical relationships between Sanskrit, Latin and Ancient
Greek that led to the postulating of the Indo-European
language family.
Sapir, Edward (1884–1939) An American linguist who
did a great deal of work on native American Indian
languages in the first half of the twentieth century.
He studied with Boas, and is known for his combin -
ation of anthropological linguistics and mentalism.
Sapir stressed the cultural, as opposed to biological,
nature of linguistic practices. Unlike some of his
American successors in the mid-twentieth century,
he was committed to the psychological reality of
phonological representations. His name is also
associated with the ‘Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis’ because
of his association with Benjamin Lee Whorf and the
idea that the language one has learned shapes the
kinds of thought process in which we regularly
engage.
154 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Saussure, Ferdinand de (1857–1913) A Swiss linguist
often described as ‘the father of modern linguistics’,
and frequently associated with various versions of
Structuralism. He was concerned to identify what the
object of linguistic inquiry was, and argued that it was
langue, a system of linguistic signs, as opposed to
parole, often referred to as the physical realisation of
the underlying system. The distinction between langue
and parole bears some similarity to Chomsky’s distinc-
tion between competence and performance, but, for
Saussure, langue is said to be a social fact, whereas
Chomsky takes competence to reside in individuals, not
in a social collectivity. The linguistic sign, for Saussure,
was an arbitrary connection between a phonological
representation (for Saussure, this was said to be an
acoustic image) and a concept. But if acoustic images
and concepts exist in individual minds, rather than in a
social collectivity, it is hard to see how the social concept
of langue can be sustained. Linguistic signs were said by
Saussure to stand in opposition to each other. Saussure
also distinguished between the synchronic and the
diachronic study of language. His emphasis on the
importance of synchronic linguistics influenced the way
linguistics was practised in the twentieth century. He is
best known for the Course in General Linguistics, pub-
lished in French in 1916. Unfortunately, the book was
not actually written by Saussure; it is a reconstruction
of lecture notes taken by two of his students. There is a
large literature on how to interpret Saussure’s ideas, and
on decisions taken by different translators as to how
best to translate key terms from the Course in General
Linguistics into English.
Schane, Sanford An American phonologist who was the
first to investigate the phonology of French within the
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 155
SPE phonology framework. He later developed an
approach to phonological segments, known as Particle
Phonology, based on the notion of elements.
schwa The name for a vowel quality which is produced
without lip rounding and with the body of the tongue
in the neutral position. Transcribed as [ə], it occurs
widely in unstressed syllables in many varieties of
English, as in the word character: ['k|æɹəktə]. This
vowel alternates with a wide variety of other vowels in
many languages. It also alternates with zero in many
languages, such as French.
Scots A language spoken in Scotland, Canada and
Northern Ireland which is derived historically from the
Northumbrian dialect of Old English. Scots is not to be
confused with Scots Gaelic, which is a Celtic language
spoken in Scotland and Canada. Nor is it to be con-
fused with Standard Scottish English, the accent of
English spoken predominantly by the educated middle
classes in Scotland. Whether Scots is to be viewed as a
dialect of English or as a separate language, as sug-
gested here, is a sociopolitical issue. A few examples of
Scots words are bairn (‘child’), lum(‘chimney’) and the
verb fash (‘get annoyed’), as in the expression ‘Dinnae
fash yersel’ (‘Don’t get irritated or upset’).
Scottish Standard English see Standard Scottish English
Scottish Vowel Length Rule (SVLR) A vowel lengthening
process in Scots and Scottish English whereby the
vowels /i/, /u/ and /ni/ are lengthened before voiced
fricatives, /r/ or a morpheme boundary, as in the words
[bi:z] (bees), [bi:ɹ] (beer) and [əgɹi:d] (agreed). Also
known as Aitken’s Law, after the linguist Jack Aitken.
156 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
secondary articulation see primary articulation
secondary stress see primary stress
segmental Relating to segments. Segmental phonology is
the study of segmental phenomena such as vowel and
consonant allophones.
segments Many phonologists argue that the continuous
stream of speech is analysed by speakers into segments,
which may group together to form syllables, so that the
monosyllabic English word bit can be analysed as the
sequence of segments [b]-[ɹ]-[t]. Some argue that seg-
ments are an artefact stemming from our knowledge of
alphabetic writing systems. Others argue that the idea
of segments is not a mere artefact, but that segments
are psychologically real objects which enter into the
speech planning process, and are reflected in slip of the
tongue phenomena.
semiconsonant There is a class of segments which, like
vowels, are voiced and have a stricture of open approx-
imation, but which, unlike vowels, do not occupy the
head position in the nucleus of a syllable. Examples are
the [w] in wet and the [j] in yet. Also known as semi-
vowel. See glides and yod.
Semitic A language family which includes Hebrew and the
various dialects of Arabic.
semivowel Synonym for semiconsonant.
sentence The term is often used in its ordinary, every-
day sense to denote a syntactic unit consisting of a
subject and a predicate, as in the unit John went to
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 157
the pub, where John is the subject and went to the pub
is the predicate. It has been used more technically in
the literature on generative linguistics, where a dis-
tinction has sometimes been drawn between the sen-
tence as a unit of competence and the utterance as a
unit of performance. The notion ‘sentence’ is some-
times used in phonology when discussing sentence
stress.
sentence stress A term sometimes used to refer to the
placement of the tonic in a sentence.
shibboleth Any feature of language use which betrays
one’s social or ethnic origins. Pronounced ['ʃibələθ], it
derives from a Hebrew word which features in a bibli-
cal tale in which the members of an ethnic group are
identified by their pronunciation of the word, and then
slaughtered. Shibboleths can be syntactic, morpholog-
ical or phonological. An example of a present-day
phonological shibboleth in England is the pronunci -
ation, by speakers with a North of England origin, of
words of the sort bath and class with the short /æ/
phoneme, instead of the long /ɑ:/ phoneme found in
Received Pronunciation (RP) and similar accents.
Since speakers from the North of England are some-
times associated with working-class lifestyles, uttering
shibboleths of this sort can lead to such speakers being
judged socially inferior.
short see length
shortening Any process in which a segment is shortened.
An example is trisyllabic shortening.
sibilant harmony see consonant harmony
158 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
sign A term used by Saussure to denote the arbitrary cou-
pling, in a given language, of an acoustic image and a
concept, so that the English acoustic image represented
by /dɒg/ is arbitrarily coupled, in English, with the
concept ‘dog’. Saussure described the acoustic image as
a signifier, and described the concept as the signified.
Unfortunately, many writers use the term ‘sign’ to
denote actual sequences of speech sounds, such as the
utterance [dɒg]. And many people use the term ‘signi-
fied’ to denote, for instance, the set of all dogs, rather
than the concept ‘dog’. This is arguably not what
Saussure intended.
signified see sign
signifier see sign
slack vocal folds A laryngeal feature said to be present
during the production of voiced sounds.
slanted brackets The brackets used to represent phonemes.
See square brackets and phonemic transcription.
slip of the tongue A speech error, such as a Spoonerism.
Slips of the tongue give us insights into articulatory
planning and production. ‘It’s roaring with pain’,
instead of ‘It’s pouring with rain’, is an example.
Smolensky, Paul An American scholar who works on for-
malist approaches to the study of human cognition.
Smolensky has worked extensively on neural nets and
is also known as the co-founder, with Alan Prince, of
Optimality Theory.
smoothing An informal term for monophthongisation.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 159
sociolinguistics The study of the relationship between
language use and social context. Important for
phonology, since the way people speak is intimately
tied into their social background. Examples of soci-
olinguistic variables which affect the different ways in
which people speak are age, social class, ethnicity and
gender.
sociophonetic variation Variation in people’s speech
which is governed by sociolinguistic factors such as
age, gender, ethnicity and social class. An example of
this is the occurrence of a pre-aspirated pronunciation
of [t] in pre-pausal position in Tyneside English; this
pronunciation is correlated with age, social class and
gender, since it is found predominantly among young
working-class women.
soft palate see velum
sonorants A subset of the set of consonants. Consonants
are often subdivided into obstruents and sonorants.
The term subsumes nasal stops, such as [m] and [n],
and liquids, such as [l] and [ɹ].
sonority hierarchy A hierarchy of classes of speech sound
types, organised according to their degree of sonority.
Two main factors determine how sonorous a sound is:
the degree of obstruction of the vocal tract during
the production of the sound, and whether the sound
is voiced or not. Oral stops have a high degree of
obstruction, the stricture of complete closure, and
are thus less sonorant than fricatives. All voiced
sounds are more sonorous than their voiceless
counterparts, so that, within the class of obstruents,
the hierarchy reads as follows: voiced fricatives> -
160 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
voiceless fricatives>voiced stops>voiceless stops,
where ‘>’ means ‘more sonorant than’. The class of
sonorant consonants (sonorants) are all considered
more sonorant than the class of obstruents. Among
the class of sonorants, there is disagreement as to
which are more sonorous than others, but it is
common to take glides to be more sonorant than
liquids, which in turn are more sonorant than the
nasal stops (nasals). The most sonorant of all classes
are vowels, which have a structure of open approxi-
mation and are typically voiced. Among the vowels,
the more open a vowel, the more sonorant it is, since
openness equates with less obstruction in the vocal
tract. A general depiction of the sonority hierarchy
would be: vowels>glides>liquids>nasals>obstruents.
The sonority hierarchy is said to figure in processes of
lenition, with speech sounds becoming more sonorous
as they are lenited. In processes of fortition, sounds are
said to move up the sonority hierarchy, becoming less
sonorous. The sonority hierarchy is also said to figure
in the sonority sequencing principle.
sonority sequencing principle The idea that sequences of
consonants in the onset of a syllable increase in sonor-
ity, according to the sonority hierarchy, as one heads
towards the nucleus of the syllable, which is taken to
be the most sonorous sound in the syllable. The prin-
ciple also claims that sequences of consonants in the
coda of a syllable decrease in sonority as one heads
away from the nucleus. The idea has some validity, and
works well for words such English pleased (/pli:zd/).
But there appear to be many exceptions, and the facts
are complicated by the presence of suffix consonants
within a syllable (as in pleads), as well as the existence
of syllabic consonants.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 161
Southern US accent Most agree that the linguistic South
in the USA is in the South-east, and that the linguistic
South begins in the state of South Carolina, extend-
ing south into the states of Georgia and northern
Florida, and west into the states of Virginia, Kentucky,
Arkansas, Tennessee, Alabama, Mississippi and
Louisiana. Quite how the vast state of Texas fits into
this is unclear; Eastern Texan accents are to some
extent non-rhotic, as in the neighbouring state of
Louisiana, which all agree is Southern. Some include
the state of North Carolina in the linguistic South of
the USA.
SPE The Sound Pattern of English, a book published in
1968 by Noam Chomsky and Morris Halle. It is often
seen as the founding text for generative phonology.
SPE phonology The model of generative phonology
adopted in the book SPE, based on the combined
notions of rule and representation, coupled with the
idea that rules apply to underlying representations to
yield derived representations. The transition from an
underlying representation to a surface phonetic repre-
sentation is known as a derivation, and models of
phonological organisation based on this idea are
known as derivational phonologies, as distinct from
non-derivational models such as various versions of
declarative phonology.
spectrogram A visual display of the component parts of a
sound wave, made by a device known as a sound spec-
trograph. Spectrograms have two axes, the horizontal
one showing the number of milliseconds that have
elapsed in a recording, and the vertical one showing
the frequencies of the formants of the speech sounds.
162 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
spirantisation Fricativisation: the process in which stops
become fricatives. This has happened as a historical
change in many languages. In the history of Spanish,
voiced stops underwent spirantisation in intervocalic
position. Thus, a word such as lugar (‘place’) changed
over time from having the voiced velar stop [g] to
having the voiced velar fricative [γ]. The same spirant -
isation process happened with the voiced bilabial
stop [b], which became the voiced bilabial fricative [β],
and the voiced dental stop [d_ ], which became the
voiced dental fricative [ð]. Spirantisation is one form
of lenition.
split A term used in the phonemic tradition when describ-
ing historical change in phoneme systems. A phonemic
split is said to have taken place when a sound which
had allophonic status takes on phonemic status over
time. Nasalised vowels used to be allophones of oral
vowels in the history of French, occurring before nasal
stops. But, with the elision of word-final nasal stops in
the history of the language, the present-day nasalised
vowel phonemes of Standard French emerged, as seen
in minimal pairs such as [bo] beau (‘beautiful’) and
[bo˜] bon (‘good’).
Spoonerism A kind of speech error named after the
Reverend W. A. Spooner. Examples are ‘You have hissed
my mystery lecture and were caught fighting a liar in
the quad,’ instead of ‘You have missed my history
lecture and were caught lighting a fire in the quad.’
Spoonerisms involve the transposition of segments,
syllables or words. The process is often mistakenly
described in popular definitions as the transposition of
letters, rather than segments. Spoonerisms are interest-
ing for phonologists because they give us insight into
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 163
syllabic constituents, articulatory planning and the
mental lexicon. In the examples just given, not only are
word-initial onsets transposed, but the result of the
transposition in each case is a well-formed word which
is stored in the mental lexicon.
spread glottis Open glottis: a laryngeal feature said to be
present in sounds which are aspirated.
square brackets The brackets used in phonetic transcrip-
tion, as for the English word pull: [p|υ¡]. They are
distinct from slanted brackets, which are used in
phonemic transcription, and are thus used for visual
representation of underlying representations. In
reality, books and articles on phonology frequently fail
to stick consistently to the use of slanted brackets for
phonemic representations and square brackets for
phonetic representations, and indeed some authors
often use no brackets at all.
standard A standard variety of a language is a variety
which happens to have undergone the sociohistorical
process of standardisation, in which fixed forms of
words are established as the ‘correct’ pronunciations,
and certain grammatical structures are also deemed to
be ‘correct’. Several different sociolinguistic and
sociopolitical factors may lead to the standardisation
of a language variety, including, in many cases,
the translation of the Bible into that variety and
the adopting of an agreed-upon spelling system.
Examples of standard varieties are Standard French
(as opposed to Midi French) and Castillian Spanish (as
opposed to, say, Andalucian Spanish). Regional stan-
d ards also exist, as in the case of Standard Jamaican
English.
164 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Standard Scottish English (SSE) An accent of English
spoken predominantly by the educated middle classes
in Scotland. Most Scots speak SSE, but many mix this
with Scots to varying degrees. Generally speaking, the
more Scots in a speaker’s speech, the more Scottish
they will sound, and the more working class. SSE
differs from Received Pronunciation in many phono-
logical respects, one of which is the presence of the
Scottish Vowel Length Rule. Sometimes referred to as
Scottish Standard English.
Standard Southern British English (SSBE) see Received
Pronunciation
standardisation see standard
stiff vocal folds A laryngeal feature said to be present in
voiceless sounds.
stimulus A term used in Behaviourismin conjunction with
the term ‘response’. Stimulus-response Behaviourism
took utterances of speakers to be stimuli which induced
a verbal response on the part of the hearer. On this
view, one conceives of phonology, not as phonological
knowledge, but as a set of verbal behavioural pat-
terns and dispositions to behave verbally in certain
ways.
The term is used quite differently by the followers of
Noam Chomsky to refer to the ambient language
(the input) to which the human child is exposed.
Chomskyans adopt the Poverty of the Stimulus argu-
ment, claiming that the stimulus is impoverished, in
that it is full of hesitations, false starts, errors and
uncompleted sentences. Having assumed this, they go
on to argue that a child could not acquire a language
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 165
without the aid of innate linguistic knowledge.
Linguists such as the British Empiricist linguist
Geoffrey Sampson assume the richness of the stimulus,
and argue that everything the child has to acquire is
present in the stimulus. As far as phonological knowl-
edge is concerned, Sampson’s view is that all of the
phonological knowledge that the child has to acquire
is present in the input.
stochastic phonology Probabilistic phonology. Human
beings are capable, from birth, of extracting statistical
probabilities from the stream of speech. These include
the probability of a given speech sound to follow
another speech sound. For instance, given a complex
onset cluster in English starting with a stop, the follow-
ing segment will be one of the approximants /w, j, l, ɹ/;
the probability of any other segment type occurring in
that position is zero. The transitions between segment
types are different across word boundaries from what
they are within words. Because infants can extract such
probabilities from the stream of speech, this helps con-
siderably with the bootstrapping problem. Those who
adopt stochastic approaches to the acquisition of
phonology and of morphological and syntactic knowl-
edge tend to argue for the richness of the stimulus to
which the child is exposed. This approach stands in
stark contrast to the approach of Noam Chomsky, who
argues that the stimulus is impoverished.
stop see degree of stricture
strata see stratal phonology
stratal phonology Any model of the interaction of
phonology and morphology which postulates different
166 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
levels or strata of affixation, with specific phonological
operations or constraints holding at specific levels of
word formation. Lexical Phonology is an example.
strengthening see fortition
stress The term is often used to refer to word stress, syn-
onymous with one of the senses of accent. However,
phonologists also use the term when referring to
phrasal stress and sentence stress.
stress and intonation language A language like English,
which has both a word stress system and an intonation
system, but which is neither a tone language nor a
pitch accent language.
stress clash a situation in which two stressed syllables in a
word are adjacent. Many languages exhibit stress clash
avoidance. In English, when one word is derived from
another by the addition of affixes, there is a tendency
to place a secondary stress on the syllable which had
a primary stress in the deriving word, as in ,character-
i'sation, where a secondary stress has been placed on
the syllable which has primary stress in 'character. But
where this tendency would result in a stress clash, the
secondary stress is placed so as to avoid a stress clash,
as in ,Japan'ese, where the placement of the secondary
stress on the syllable which has primary stress in Ja'pan
would result in a stress clash; we avoid saying
Ja,pa'nese.
stress clash avoidance see stress clash
stress retraction A term sometimes used to refer to the
kind of reversal one encounters in phenomena such as
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 167
Iambic Reversal. When expressions such as East
London occur in phrases such as East London Airport,
the prominence levels (stress levels) of East and
London are switched around; the stress on London is
said to be retracted, so that East becomes more promi-
nent than London.
stress-timed A language is said to have stress-timed
rhythm if the beats fall on the stressed syllables. It is
often claimed that most varieties of English are stress-
timed. This claim rests on the idea that there is a ten-
dency for the time between the beats to be the roughly
same, or isochronous. See syllable-timed.
stressed vowel A vowel which is stressed, as in the vowel [i]
in the English word ambiguous: [æm'bigjuəs]. Stressed
vowels can have either primary or secondary stress.
stricture see degree of stricture
structural analogy The idea that the structure of phono-
logical constituents is analogous to the structure of
syntactic constituents. For instance, some linguists
believe that the structure of syllables is parallel in some
serious sense with the structure of sentences, in that
both are said to contain constituents, and both are said
to exhibit hierarchical structure. The idea can be found
in the work of the Danish linguist Louis Hjelmslev and,
more recently, in Dependency Phonology, Government
Phonology and Head-Driven Phonology.
Structuralism see structuralist linguistics
structuralist linguistics In a sense, all forms of linguistics
are structuralist, since linguists are typically interested
168 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
in structure and believe that human languages have
structure. But the term ‘structuralist’ has been used to
denote several traditions in linguistics. Firstly, the
European tradition which started with Saussure, and
continued with the Prague School, is often called
European Structuralism. Central ideas here are the
notions of sign, markedness and systems of opposition.
Secondly, the kinds of linguistics practised in the United
States in the 1930s to the 1950s are often referred to as
American Structuralism. A key idea here was distribu-
tion; both in syntax and in phonology, it was held that
one could identify the distribution of syntactic and
phonological objects, and thus arrive at an analysis of
a language. Scholars working within generative lin-
guistics argue that there was a radical break, or ‘revo-
lution’ between pre-generative American Structuralism
and generative linguistics. Others claim that generative
linguistics shares so many assumptions with American
Structuralism that it is wise to label both genera-
tive and pre-generative American linguistics as ‘struc-
turalist’.
structuralist phonology see structuralist linguistics
substance-free An approach to phonological structure
which is substance-free attempts to define phono -
logical objects independently of phonetic substance.
On this view, phonological objects have no intrinsic
phonetic content. See phonetics-free phonology and
Hjelmslev.
supralaryngeal Articulatory features and gestures
which are supralaryngeal are articulated above the
larynx. Articulations involving the tongue and lips are
examples.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 169
suprasegmental Concerning phonological phenomena
above the level of the segment, such as word stress,
intonation and tone.
surface form Often distinguished from underlying repre-
sentation. The general idea, found in derivational the-
ories of phonology, is that surface forms are somehow
closer to the actual pronunciation of the word in ques-
tion. For example, the surface form of the English word
period is ['p|i:ɹiəd] in many varieties. This more closely
represents the actual pronunciation by many speakers
than a postulated underlying representation such as
/pi:ɹiɒd/. In the latter representation, the primary stress
is omitted on the grounds that English word stress is
predictable. Aspiration is also omitted because it too is
said to be predictable (i.e. allophonic), and the non-
reduced vowel /ɒ/ is postulated as forming part of the
underlying representation, because the stress assign-
ment principles are said to reduce it, in a predictable
manner, to the unstressed vowel [ə] (schwa).
Sweet, Henry (1845–1912) A British phonetics/phonology
scholar based at Oxford University. Sweet worked
on the history of English and on the transcription of
English and other languages. His work contains an
appeal to the distinction between phonemic and phon -
etic representations. It has been widely assumed that
Sweet was the model for Professor Henry Higgins in
George Bernard Shaw’s play Pygmalion (which forms
the basis for the film My Fair Lady), but the British
phonetician Beverley Collins has argued persuasively
that Higgins was modelled on Daniel Jones.
syllabic consonants Consonants which occupy the nucleus
of a syllable. Transcribed with a subscript diacritic
170 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
under the consonant symbol. In English, the pronunci-
ation [hæʔm
,
] of the word happen is bisyllabic, the
second syllable consisting of a syllabic [m].
syllabification The process whereby segments are slotted
into syllabic positions. Principles such as Maximal
Onset are said to guide the syllabification of segments.
syllable A unit of phonological organisation whose
central component is a nucleus, which is normally a
vowel, and which may be preceded or followed by con-
sonants. The most basic kind of syllable is the CV
(Consonant-Vowel) syllable (e.g. [ba]). This is the kind
of syllable attested in the babbling stage of child devel-
opment. Some languages contain only CV syllables.
The syllable is often said to be subdivided into the
onset (any consonants preceding the nucleus) and the
rhyme (the nucleus and any consonants following
the nucleus). The rhyme is said to be further subdivided
into the nucleus and the coda (any consonants follow-
ing the nucleus). Thus, in the English word but (/bnt/),
the onset contains /b/ and the sequence /nt/ constitutes
the rhyme, which contains the nucleus /n/ and the coda
consonant /t/. Syllables which contain no coda conso-
nants are open syllables, as in the English word bee
(/bi:/). Syllables which contain one or more coda con-
sonants are closed syllables, as in the English word but.
Syllables which lack an onset consonant are said to
have an empty onset, as in the English word eye (/ai/).
Empty onsets are said to be involved in the process of
resyllabification, whereby a consonant which might
otherwise occupy a coda position comes to occupy a
following onset position, as in the sequence green eye,
syllabified as /gri:.nai/ (where the full stop represents a
syllable boundary).
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 171
syllable quantity A synonym for syllable weight.
syllable-timed A language is said to be syllable-timed if
the beats in the rhythmfall on each successive syllable,
regardless of whether it is stressed or not. It is often
said that French is syllable-timed. See stress-timed.
syllable weight A notion based on the distinction between
heavy syllables and light syllables. Generally speaking,
heavy syllables have more weight, or quantity, in the
rhyme, in the form of more segments, or longer seg-
ments, than do light syllables. In many languages, a
syllable containing a long vowel in the nucleus will
count as heavy, whereas a syllable containing a short
vowel will count as light. Coda consonants often con-
tribute to syllable weight, so that a syllable containing
a short vowel followed by a coda consonant will count
as a heavy syllable. The distinction is often appealed to
in analyses of word stress assignment. In many lan-
guages, only heavy syllables in certain positions may
be stressed. For instance, in Latin, a heavy penultimate
syllable was stressed, as in rela:tus (with a long vowel
in the penultimate syllable) and refectus (with a short
vowel and a coda consonant in the penultimate sylla-
ble). When tree diagrams are used to represent syllable
structure, it is often claimed that a heavy syllable can
be defined as a syllable with a branching rhyme.
synchronic Related to synchrony. The study of the syn-
chronic phonology of a language is the study of its
present-day phonology, rather than its historical
phonology.
synchrony The present day, rather than the past. Opposed
to diachrony.
172 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
syncope The deletion (elision) of a vowel, resulting in the
loss of a syllable, as in the bisyllabic pronunciation
['fæmli] (family), as opposed to the trisyllabic pronun-
ciation ['fæmili]. In English, this deletion typically
affects unstressed syllables.
systematic phonemic level of representation see represen-
tation
systematic phonetic level of representation see represen-
tation
systematic phonological representation A synonym for
systematic phonemic level of representation.
systemic differences A difference between two varieties of
a language is said to be systemic if the varieties exhibit
differences in the set of phonemic oppositions found in
those varieties. For example, in Received Pronunciation
(RP), there is a phonemic opposition between short /æ/,
as in the word ant, and long /ɑ:/, as in the word aunt.
In Standard Scottish English (SSE), this opposition does
not exist; pairs of words such as ant/aunt are homo-
phones, both being pronounced [ɐnt], with a low
central vowel, half-way between [æ] and [ɑ:]. See real-
isational differences and lexical-distributional differ-
ences. The three-way conceptual distinction between
systemic, realisational and lexical-distributional differ-
ences goes back at least as far as the work of
Trubetzkoy, although he used different terms for each
of the members of the trichotomy.
tap see flap
T
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 173
Tapping see Flapping
tautosyllabic A sound is said to be tautosyllabic if it is
produced in the same syllable as some other sound. For
instance, the [¡] in the English word full is tautosyllabic
with the preceding vowel.
teleological Goal-orientated, or purpose-orientated. Some
phonologists believe that we can conceive of sound
changes in the history of human languages as ‘con-
spiring’ towards specific outcomes. An example would
be the various vowel lengthening and vowel shorten-
ing changes which led to the elimination of phonemic
vowel length in Scots and Standard Scottish English.
See conspiracy.
template Generalised phonological patterns, such as
CCVC, where the ‘C’ stands for ‘consonant’ and the
‘V’ stands for ‘vowel’. In generative phonology, tem-
plates are appealed to in the analysis of Arabic and in
the study of reduplication patterns: see reduplication
for examples. Also see radical consonants.
In the field of child phonology, templates are
appealed to in the work of Marilyn Vihman. These are
generalised patterns, such as /CVlV/, specific to the
speech of an individual child. Examples of French child
utterances conforming to that template are [lεla] (Il/Elle
est là: ‘He/She is there’) and [sεla] (C’est là: ‘It’s there’).
Vihman argues that utterances which conform to the
child’s templates are perceptually salient to the child,
and that the child will select such utterances in his/her
attempt at adult utterances. She also argues that infants
will adapt adult utterance so that they are slotted into
the templatic pattern, as in our example [lεla], which
does not conform exactly to the targeted adult forms.
174 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
tense A feature which has often been postulated to
account for certain vowel oppositions, such as the
oppositions /i:/ vs /i/ and /u:/ vs /υ/ in RP, where the first
member of the pair is said to be ‘tense’ and the second
member ‘lax’. One definition claims that tense vowels
are articulated with ‘heightened subglottal pressure’.
Other definitions take tense vowels, as opposed to lax
vowels, to be articulated closer to the periphery of the
vowel space, and to be typically longer than their lax
counterparts. Both of these are certainly true for the
RP pairs just mentioned, but the term ‘tense’ remains
controversial. Some equate it with Advanced Tongue
Root, while others question this equation.
tensing Any process in which a segment is said to be artic-
ulated with greater tension. The process known as
‘happY tensing’ in various varieties of English affects
the word-final vowel written <-y> in words such as
happy, yielding a tense [i], rather than a lax [i]. The
opposite of laxing.
tertiary stress see word stress
TH-Fronting An informal term for the uttering of labio-
dental fricatives in place of dental fricatives, as in the
pronunciations [fiŋ] for thing and [fεvə] for feather.
This is attested in child language acquisition and in
many non-standard varieties of English.
TH-Stopping The pronunciation of the dental fricatives
/θ/ and /ð/ as stops, often the dental stops [t_] and [d_ ].
This is attested in child language acquisition and
in several varieties of English, such as New York
City English, Indian English and Standard Jamaican
English, as in pronunciations such as [t_iŋ] for thing.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 175
tip of the tongue The very foremost part of the tongue,
often involved in dental articulations.
tip of the tongue phenomenon The state of affairs in
which people report that a word is almost, but not
quite, within reach of retrieval from the mental
lexicon; the word is said by English speakers to be ‘on
the tip of my tongue’. This is relevant for phonologists,
since psycholinguistic research suggests that certain
phonological properties of the word in question, such
as its initial onset consonant or its stress pattern, can
sometimes be retrieved, even though the entire phono-
logical form of the word cannot. This is relevant for
theories of how phonological information is stored in
the mind.
ToBI Tone and Break Index. ToBI is a notational system
for the description of intonational patterns which ori -
ginates in the work of Janet Pierrehumbert. The tones
in question are intonational tones and the breaks are
various kinds of juncture. The essence of the ToBI
system is the breaking down of intonation contours
into their component high and low tones. The ToBI
system is used a great deal in the USA, but less among
phonologists working in the British tradition.
token see type
token frequency see frequency of occurrence
Tomasello, Michael A child syntax specialist who
rejects the Chomskyan notion of innate linguistic
knowledge. In its place, he argues for a constructivist
approach to child language acquisition, emphasising
the child’s social interaction with other human beings.
176 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Although his work is in the acquisition of syntax, the
general approach carries over into the acquisition of
phonology.
Tone Bearing Unit (TBU) In tone languages, the segmen-
tal material to which a tone is attached. This is usually
a vowel, as in the case of vowels in the utterance [mi ´bu´]
(‘my stone’) in the Kwa language Twi. Consonants can
also act as TBUs.
tone see tone language. The term ‘tone’ is used by some
phonologists, in describing non-tone languages, to
refer to the pitch changes that occur on the nuclear syl-
lable (also known as the nucleus, or the tonic syllable)
in an intonation group. Examples of tones referred to
in the description of English intonation are the falling
tone, the rising tone, the fall-rise and the rise-fall.
Consider the question ‘Has Mary been seeing Bill?’
The response ‘No!’ with a rise-fall tone, conveys cer-
tainty, and the response ‘No’, with a fall-rise tone,
conveys hesitation or doubt. The rise tone in English is
associated with questioning, as in ‘Has Mary been
seeing Bill?’
tone group see intonation group
tone language A language in which pitch differences func-
tion to differentiate words. Tones are often subdivided
into level tones and contour tones. Typical level tones
are high vs mid vs low tones. High tones have a higher
relative pitch than mid tones, which in turn have a rel-
atively higher pitch than low tones. High tones are
often transcribed using the acute accent, as in the
word ko´, which means ‘build’ in the African language
Yoruba. Low tones are often transcribed using the
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 177
grave accent, as in the Yoruba word ko`, which means
‘refuse’. Mid tones are often transcribed with no
marker, as in the Yoruba word ko, which means ‘sing’,
though some writers use a level diacritic for mid tones,
so that ‘sing’ in Yoruba would be transcribed as ko¨. The
segmental material in these three Yoruba words is the
same; they differ only with respect to tone, which is a
suprasegmental property. Non-tone languages, such as
English, do not exhibit this phenomenon. Contour
tones include rising tones and falling tones. Rising
tones are often transcribed using a wedge diacritic, as
in the Thai word na

, which means ‘thick’. Falling tones
are often transcribed with a circumflex, as in the Thai
word na
ˆ
, which means ‘face’. Tone languages can be
found in many parts of the world, including Africa,
Asia and South America.
tongue root That part of the tongue which lies behind the
back of the tongue, opposite the back wall of the
pharynx.
tonic see tonic syllable
tonic placement The placement of the tonic in an inton -
ation group.
tonic syllable The syllable in an intonation group on which
the pitch changes. In the English sentence John went to
the pub, the ‘neutral’ (least marked) intonation has pub
as the tonic syllable. It is often argued that the basic rule
for the placement of the tonic syllable in English is on
the last lexical item in a clause, as is the case here.
tonic vowel A vowel which receives primary word stress,
as in the antepenultimate syllable of the Spanish word
178 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
bueno (‘good’). Not to be confused with the term
‘tonic’ used in studies of intonation.
tonogenesis The historical process in which a non-tone
language becomes a tone language. There is a natural
affinity between, on the one hand, voiceless obstruents
and high tones, and, on the other, voiced obstruents
and lowtones. High tones and voiceless obstruents are
characterised by stiff vocal cords, whereas low tones
and voiced obstruents are characterised by slack vocal
cords. Tonal contrasts can often be reconstructed as
voicing contrasts. For example, a sequence of a voiced
obstruent and a following vowel can develop into a
voiced obstruent and a vowel with a low tone.
transduction see realisation
transformation A term used in the earlier stages of gener-
ative linguistics. Transformational rules were postu-
lated which applied to a representation to yield a
derived representation, by means of inserting, deleting
or transposing elements of syntactic structure. In SPE
phonology, two of the rules postulated for many vari-
eties of English were Nasal Assimilation and Voiced
Velar Deletion. In words of the sort sing and bring,
they applied as follows: Underlying Representation:
/sing/; Nasal Assimilation: /siŋg/; Voiced Velar
Deletion: /siŋ/. The second and third of these are
derived representation. In phonological frameworks
which are derivational, it is possible to formulate
certain phonological rules as transformations. For
instance, in Lithuanian, there is a process of metathe-
sis under which a fricative + stop sequence is switched
around when such a sequence occurs before a conso-
nant, as in /dresk/ + /kite/, which ‘becomes’ [drekskite].
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 179
This process can be construed as a transformational
rule which transposes two elements.
transparent vowel see neutral vowel
tree diagram A type of visual representation of a struc-
ture, used in both syntax and phonology. Tree dia-
grams take the same form as the family trees used
in genealogy; they consist of a central node which
branches on to other nodes, which themselves have
branches. They are used to represent the idea of con-
stituents, both in syntax and phonology. In phonology,
tree diagrams have been used to represent the structure
of syllables and feet. They have also been used in work
on feature geometry.
trill A sound made with a rapid series of closures and
openings, as in the alveolar trill [r], where the blade
of the tongue closes against the alveolar ridge,
then opens, then closes again and so on, in quick suc-
cession. Trills can be made at two other points of
articulation. Bilabial trills, transcribed as [B], involve
rapid closures and openings between the lips. Uvular
trills, transcribed as [R], involve the same kind of
articulation, but with the back of the tongue as
the active articulator and the uvula as the passive
articulator.
trisyllabic Containing three syllables. The English words
cinema, horizon and kangaroo are all trisyllabic.
Trisyllabic Laxing Also known as Trisyllabic Shortening,
this was a change that took place in the history of
English whose effect can be seen in certain alternations
in present-day English. In bisyllabic words which
180 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
contained a stressed long (tense) vowel, the addition
of a suffix meant that the word had three or more
syllables, and the vowel in question then underwent
laxing/shortening. An examples of the residue of this
change in present-day English is the pair serene/seren-
ity, where bisyllabic serene has the long stressed vowel
[i:], but serenity has the short/lax vowel [ε].
trochaic see rhythm
trochaic bias hypothesis The claim that infants are pre-
disposed towards trochaic, rather than iambic, metri-
cal feet.
trochee see rhythm
Trubetzkoy, Nikolaj (1890–1938) A Russian prince who
fled Russia at the time of the Russian Revolution.
Trubetzkoy’s name is widely associated with the Prague
School (although he actually spent most of his career in
Vienna). He was known for his collaboration with
Roman Jakobson. Trubetzkoy insisted on a distinction
between phonetics and phonology, but rejected a men-
talistic (psychological, sometimes termed ‘cognitive’)
interpretation of phonology. He was interested in
systems of opposition between phonemes. Central
ideas in Trubetzkoy’s work are the identification of dif-
ferent kinds of phonological opposition (bilateral, mul-
tilateral, proportional, isolated, privative, gradual and
equipollent oppositions). He also developed the notion
of the neutralisation of phonological oppositions.
Connected with this is the appeal to markedness in
phonological oppositions.
true geminate see geminate
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 181
Tyneside English The variety of English spoken in the area
around the River Tyne in the North-East of England.
Also known as Geordie.
type/token The type/token distinction goes back to the
work of the American philosopher C. S. Peirce (1839–
1914) and has been adopted in most areas of linguis-
tics. Tokens are specific objects or events at a particular
point in space and time, such as the utterance of a
voiceless aspirated alveolar stop ([t]) by a specific
speaker at a specific point in time. Types are said to be
more abstract than this; it may be claimed that a large
set of utterances of voiceless alveolar stops are tokens
of the type, or kind, ‘voiceless alveolar stop’. Types
may be viewed as categories, and many believe that
human perception relies heavily on classifying objects
and events into categories. Tokens of a type are said to
‘count as the same thing’, so that, when one hears a
given [t], it counts as an occurrence of ‘the same thing’
as another, slightly different, [t], uttered on another
occasion.
type frequency see frequency of occurrence
typological Relating to typology. The term is used in
syntax, morphology and phonology. An example of
a postulated typological difference in phonology is
the three-way distinction between stress and intona-
tion languages, tone languages and pitch accent
languages.
typology The study of different linguistic types. In
phonology, the term can subsume the study of differ-
ent word stress systems, the study of different vowel
harmony systems or the study of natural classes.
182 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
umlaut A kind of metaphony in which a vowel (normally
in a root) assimilates to another vowel (normally in a
suffix), even though the two vowels are not adjacent to
each other. An example is the historical process of i-
umlaut in German, in which the back vowels [u], [o]
and [ɔ] in a root fronted to [y], [o] and [o] respectively
when the plural suffix [-i] was added. For instance, in
present-day German, the singular noun Sohn (‘son’)
has a high mid, back vowel [o] in the root, but the
plural Söhne has the umlauted version of that vowel:
[o], which is high mid and front. Historically, this
word, like many others, had a plural suffix consisting
of the high front vowel [i]. For some scholars, umlaut
is a process in which a vowel in a root assimilates to a
vowel in a suffix, while vowel harmony is a process in
which a vowel in a suffix assimilates to one or more
vowels in a root.
unaspirated Voiceless stops which are unaspirated can be
defined as having no delay in Voice Onset Time; the
voicing for a following vowel begins at the point at
which the stop closure is released, as in the French
word pain (‘bread’): [pε ˜]. These are distinct from the
voiceless aspirated stops of most varieties of English,
as in the word pad: [p|æd].
underlying representation A level of representation pos-
tulated in theories which are derivational in nature. In
rule-based derivational theories such as SPE, morpho-
phonological alternations were dealt with by postulat-
ing a single underlying representation from which the
surface forms could be derived. For alternants such as
Hungarian [kut] (‘well’) and [kudban] (‘in the well’), a
single underlying representation /kut/ is postulated,
U
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 183
from which the surface form [kud] is derived via a
process of voicing assimilation.
underspecification An underlying representation is said to
be underspecified if any of its features are not present,
or are not assigned a value. In the Bantu language
Lumasaaba, there is a prefix which attaches only to
nouns beginning with a consonant. The realisations
of the prefix are [zim], [zin], [zin] and [ziŋ], as in
[zimbati] (‘knives’), [zindaha] (‘wings’), [zin|e|ele]
(‘buds’) and [ziŋgunija] (‘bags’). The place of articula-
tion of the nasal at the end of the prefix is entirely pre-
dictable; it will have the same place of articulation as
the following consonant, because of nasal assimilation.
Phonologists who argue that underlying representa-
tions should contain only arbitrary, non-predictable
features postulate a nasal stop at the end of the prefix
which is underspecified; it is stripped of all place of
articulation feature values. Phonologists such as Joan
Bybee, who adopt exemplar theory, argue against this
approach; they claim that words are stored in the mind
in full phonetic detail, including entirely predictable
information.
Universal Grammar (UG) A term associated with the
work of Noam Chomsky. It is used as a name for a
postulated innate module of mind said to contain
specifically linguistic knowledge. Chomsky now uses
the expression only for the theory of this postulated
module, preferring the term ‘the human language
faculty’ for that module. But many of his followers
continue to use the term for both the theory and its
object. The existence of innate linguistic knowledge is
hotly disputed by many scholars.
184 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
universals The term is used in at least two different senses.
For the followers of Noam Chomsky, who believe in
the existence of Universal Grammar, linguistic univer-
sals are universal principles, given by a supposedly
innate language module, which operate in all human
languages. This is a strong sense of the term, since
the universal principles postulated are absolute. An
example of an absolute syntactic universal would be
the claim that all human languages exhibit recursion.
An example of a phonological universal would be the
statement that all languages have both consonants and
vowels. For other linguists, talk of universals is talk of
tendencies in human languages, such as the tendency
for vowels to nasalise when adjacent to a nasal stop.
This is a weaker sense of the term. It is conceptually
possible to allow that there are absolute universals
while denying that they are given by Universal
Grammar. Implicational universals take the following
form: if a given language has property X, then it will
also have property Y. An example would be: if a given
language has voiced obstruents, then it will also have
voiceless obstruents. See Jakobson.
unmarked see markedness
unrounded Lacking lip-rounding. Front vowels are typi-
cally unrounded, as in the vowels [i] and [e], but there
are front rounded vowels too, as in the case of the
French vowels [y], [o] and [o], found in the words lune
(‘moon’), peu (‘little’) and sœur (‘sister’).
unstressed Bearing neither primary stress nor secondary
stress. In the English word happen, the final syllable is
unstressed, while the penultimate syllable has primary
stress. Unstressed syllables often have reduced vowels.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 185
usage-based phonology An approach to phonology, asso-
ciated with the work of Joan Bybee, which stresses that
performance (actual usage in specific contexts of utter-
ance) is as central to our understanding of phono -
logical phenomena as competence. A key notion in
usage-based phonology is frequency of occurrence.
utterance A term sometimes used in its ordinary, everyday
sense to mean a stretch of uninterrupted speech made
by a speaker. It has been used more technically in the
literature in generative linguistics when a distinction
is made between sentences and utterances, with the
former seen as units of competence generated by a
grammar, and the latter as units of performance pro-
duced by a speaker. However, the generative literature
is inconsistent in its usage of this distinction. In dis-
cussion of the prosodic hierarchy, the utterance is often
postulated as the largest unit in the hierarchy.
uvula The part of the soft palate which can be seen dan-
gling down at the back of the mouth.
uvular Sounds which have the back of the tongue as the
active articulator and the uvula as the passive articula-
tor are uvular. Stops, fricatives and approximants can
all be produced in this way. An example of a voiced
uvular fricative is the ‘r’ sound produced in Northern
French, as in the word rat (‘rat’), pronounced [ʁɐ].
V Stands for vowel. For instance, when phonologists
speak of CV syllables, they mean syllables consisting
simply of an onset consonant and a vowel in the
nucleus position.
V
186 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
van der Hulst, Harry A Dutch phonologist who has
worked on, among other things, vowel harmony
systems and word stress systems. He has developed a
descriptive famework for phonological representa-
tions known as Head-Driven Phonology. See struc-
tural analogy.
variegated babbling see babbling
velar A place of articulation. Velar sounds are charac-
terised by an articulation between the back of the
tongue and the velum.
velar softening see palatalisation
velaric airstream mechanism see airstream mechanisms
velarisation A secondary articulation made by the back of
the tongue and the velum. It is often said that the ‘dark
l’ in many accents of English has a primary articulation
which is alveolar and a secondary articulation which is
velar. This velarised [l] is transcribed with a diacritic
which runs through the phonetic symbol for the con-
sonant, thus: [nn¡] (null).
velarised Articulated with a secondary articulation of
velarisation.
velic Relating to the velum. Used to refer to velic closure,
in which the velum is raised, preventing air from
flowing through the nasal cavity, and velic opening (or
lowering) in which the velum is lowered and air may
flow through the nasal cavity.
velic closure see velic
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 187
velic opening see velic
velum The soft palate: the soft part of the palate, located
behind the hard palate.
verlan see language games
Vihman, Marilyn A specialist in child phonology who
has carried out extensive empirical investigation with
infants. Vihman is a constructivist who opposes the
Chomskyan conception of child linguistic develop-
ment. See template.
vocal cords Two strips of tissue located in the larynx,
which may vibrate, leading to voicing. During the pro-
duction of voiceless sounds, the vocal cords are said to
be slack, whereas they are said to be stiff during the
production of voiced sounds. Note that the term is not
spelled ‘vocal chords’.
vocal folds A synonym for the vocal cords.
vocal play A stage in the first year of life, which starts
before the babbling period. During this period, the
child seems to be experimenting with its vocal appara-
tus. The sounds produced are not syllabic in nature,
unlike the CV syllables of the babbling period. They
include a range of relatively ‘exotic’ sounds such as
clicks and bilabial and uvular trills.
vocal tract The three resonance chambers taken together:
the oral cavity, the nasal cavity and the pharynx.
Voice Onset Time (VOT) When one produces a stop con-
sonant in which the vocal cords are not vibrating, and
188 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
then follows this with a vowel sound, there may be a
delay in the onset of voicing in the vowel. When this
happens, we say that the stop in question is aspirated,
as in the English word pad: [p|æd]. If there is no such
delay in VOT, we say that the stop is unaspirated, as in
the French word pain (‘bread’): [pε ˜].
voiced A term for speech sounds which are produced with
voicing. Many phonologists have pointed out that the
voiced/voiceless dichotomy alone is insufficient to dis-
tinguish between the full range of laryngeal contrasts
in human languages. One needs, at least, to distinguish
between the following: (a) fully voiced stops, in which
the vocal cords are vibrating prior to the release of the
stop closure, as in the French word bain (‘bath’): [bε ˜];
(b) voiceless unaspirated stops, as in the French word
pain (‘bread’): [pε ˜]; (c) voiceless aspirated stops, as in
the English word pad: [p|æd]. It has been pointed out
that, although English spelling conventions represent
words such as bed with the <b> grapheme, the sound
in question is not, in fact, a fully voiced stop, but an
unaspirated voiceless stop, unlike the stop at the begin-
ning of the French word bain. The contrast among
French stops is thus a contrast between fully voiced
and voiceless unaspirated stops, while the contrast in
most varieties of English is between voiceless aspirated
and voiceless unaspirated stops. Languages such as
Thai have a three-way phonemic contrast between
fully voiced, voiceless unaspirated and voiceless aspir -
ated stops, as in the words [ba` :] (‘shoulder’), [pa`:]
(‘forest’) and [p|a` :] (‘split’).
voiceless Speech sounds are said to be voiceless if the
vocal cords are not vibrating during their produc-
tion. Example of voiceless sounds are the voiceless
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 189
unaspirated stops [p], [t] and [k] in the English words
spilt, still and skin, and the voiceless fricatives [f] and
[s] in the English words sin and fin.
voicing The vibration of the vocal cords. Fully voiced
sounds are produced with vibration of the vocal cords
during the articulation of the sound, as in the [v] in the
word heavy. Word-initial stops are fully voiced if the
vocal cords are vibrating prior to the release of the stop
closure, as in the French word bain (‘bath’): [bε ˜:].
voicing assimilation see assimilation
vowel Any sound which occupies the nucleus of a syllable
and is produced with a stricture of open approxima-
tion. See degree of stricture.
vowel fronting Any process in which one or more vowels
is produced further forward in the vowel space than it
previously was. The front rounded vowels [y], [o] and
[o] in contemporary Standard French all resulted from
the historical fronting of the back vowels [u], [o] and
[ɔ]. See also umlaut.
vowel harmony A kind of metaphony in which all the
vowels in a word must share one or more properties
(but see opaque vowels and neutral vowels), as in
Finnish [tyhmæ] ‘stupid’ vs [tuhmɑ] ‘naughty’, where
the first word has vowels which share the property of
frontness (palatality) and the vowels in the second
word all lack that property. Such languages tend to
have two sets of vowels, one possessing the har-
monic property, the other lacking it. Vowel harmony
often spreads from roots to affixes, as in Hungarian
[by:n-tol] ‘crime’, where the ablative suffix undergoes
190 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
palatal harmony and thus contains a front vowel,
unlike [mokuʃ-tol] ‘squirrel’, where the ablative suffix
has a back vowel. Other properties which feature in
vowel harmony include the following: (a) labiality
(roundedness), as in Turkish [gyl] ‘rose’ (nominative),
[gyl-y] ‘rose’ (possessive) as distinct from [is] ‘foot-
print’ (nominative), [iz-i] ‘footprint’ (possessive); (b)
lowness, as in Kikuyu, which has a suffix which takes
the form [ir] (with a high vowel) or [er] (with a lowered
vowel), determined by the height of the first vowel of
the stem: [rut-ir-a] ‘work for’, [ror-er-a] ‘look at’; (c)
Advanced Tongue Root (ATR), as in Tangale [tug-o]
‘pounding’, [vυd-ɔ] ‘farming’; (d) Retracted Tongue
Root (RTR), as in Yoruba [epo] ‘oil’, [εkɔ] ‘pap’. There
is often debate as to whether a given system exhibits
ATR or RTR harmony. Some languages have harmony
for more than one property. For instance, the Khirgiz
infinitive forms [bil] ‘know’, [kyl] ‘laugh’, [kil] ‘do’ and
[bol] ‘be’ take different forms of the past definite suffix:
[bil-di], [kyl-dy], [kil-di] and [bol-du], showing both
palatal and labial harmony. Some languages with
vowel harmony have words exhibiting disharmony,
involving neutral vowels and/or opaque vowels. There
are languages in which harmony may spread from
certain affix vowels into the root: see dominant/reces-
sive harmony. Vowel harmony often has no effect on
intervening consonants, but there are cases where it
does.
vowel quality The acoustic impression given by the pro-
duction a given vowel type. This is difficult to pin
down precisely, because there is a continuum as one
moves from one vowel sound to another; there are
no sharp boundaries between, say, [i], [e] and [ε].
None the less, it is possible for humans to identify
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 191
prototypical [i]-type, [e]-type and [ε]-type qualities,
just as we can identify prototypical examples of
colours such as green and blue, even though there are
colours which are intermediate between the two.
vowel raising Any process in which one or more vowels is
produced higher in the vowel space than it previously
was. In Standard French, the vowel [u] results from the
historical raising of an [o] vowel, as in the transition
from trover (‘to find’) to trouver, pronounced [tʁuve].
vowel reduction see reduction
vowel retraction Any process in which one or more
vowels is produced further back in the vowel space
than it previously was. In present-day Received
Pronunciation, the back vowel [ɑ:] in words such as
class and grass results from the historical retraction of
front [æ:]. Also known as vowel backing.
vowel shift A process in which the realisation of a vowel
phoneme encroaches on the articulatory and percep-
tual space of another vowel phoneme, resulting in a
change in the realisation of the other vowel phoneme,
apparently to ‘avoid’ a phonemic merger. In London
English, the phoneme /ai/ is often realised as [ɑi] or
[ɔi], as in buy pronounced [bɔi]. These realisations
encroach upon the space of the phoneme /ɔi/, which
may be said to ‘take evasive action’, and is often pro-
nounced [oi], as in [boi] (boy), thus avoiding a phone-
mic merger and sustaining buy/boy as a minimal pair,
rather than as homophones. The idea of ‘taking
evasive action’ can be conveyed via the notion of ‘push
chain’, in which one vowel phoneme can be thought of
as ‘pushing’ an adjacent vowel into another, nearby,
192 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
part of the vowel space. Equally, one can conceive of
vowel shifts as ‘pull chains’ (drag chains), in which one
vowel phoneme ‘vacates’ a part of the vowel space,
dragging an adjacent vowel phoneme into the vacated
space. See Great Vowel Shift and Northern Cities
Vowel Shift.
vowel space The space in the oral cavity in which vowels
can be produced.
vowel system see Phonemic Principle
vowel triangle see Dispersion Theory
Vulgar Latin The Latin spoken at the height of the Roman
Empire by ordinary working people, soldiers and mer-
chants. It is distinct from Classical Latin and is the his-
torical source of the present-day Romance languages.
weakening A synonym for lenition. See also reduction.
weight see syllable weight
well-formed A syntactic sequence in a given language is
said to be well-formed if it conforms to the grammati-
cal rules of the language. Thus The man kicked the dog
is well-formed in English, but Kicked dog man the the
is not. In phonology, the notion can be applied to
phonological sequences. The word-initial sequences
/kl/, /kw/, /kr/ and /kj/ are all well-formed in most vari-
eties of English, as in the words clown, queen, cry and
(arguably) cure. But word-initial sequences such as
/kn/ and /ks/ are ill-formed.
W
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 193
Wells, J. C. A British phonetics/phonology specialist
based at University College London, perhaps best
known for his three-volume work Accents of English,
published in 1982. This book is a systematic descrip-
tion of the pronunciation of a large number of varieties
of English around the world, and is still frequently
referred to today.
word boundary The boundary between two words, as in
the boundary between far and away in the phrase far
away. Word boundaries can play a role in phonologi-
cal processes, as in the case of Linking ‘r’ in non-rhotic
varieties of English, where a word-final underlying /r/
is realised if the following word begins with a vowel,
as in the phrase far away.
Some sequences of two words are said to form a
‘closer’ link to each other than others, and this
closeness is believed to play a role in the triggering or
non-triggering of certain phonological processes. In
the case of obligatory Liaison in French, the under -
lying /z/ in words such as mes (the plural form
for ‘my’) is realised if the following word begins with
a vowel, as in mes amis: [mezami]. Similarly, the
plural suffix /z/ is realised in phrases such as amis
américains (‘American friends’): [amizameʁikε˜]. But
the plural /z/ of amis is not realised in the expres-
sion Mes amis arrivent (‘My friends are coming’):
[mezamiaʁiv]. It is claimed that the link between mes
and amis is closer than the link between amis and
arrivent. It is this ‘closer link’ that is said to trigger the
Liaison process. There is disagreement as to whether
syntactic structure directly influences phonological
processes, or whether the influence is indirect, medi-
ated by phonological units such as the phonological
phrase.
194 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
word-final Occurring at the end of a word. The stop /d/ is
word-final in the word bad.
Word-Final Devoicing A process whereby voiced obstru-
ents become voiceless when in word-final position. The
Polish root /trud/ (‘labour’) is pronounced as [trut],
since the final /d/ undergoes devoicing, but if the final
obstruent in the root is not word-final, no devoicing
occurs, as in [trudi], the plural form of the noun.
word-initial Occurring at the beginning of a word. The
stop /b/ is word-initial in the word bad.
word-medial Occurring in the middle of a word. The stop
/p/ is word-medial in the word happen: ['hæpən]. The
term is rather vague and unsatisfactory, since it can be
used to denote segments which occur in a wide variety
of syllabic and metrical contexts.
word phonology see Lexical Phonology
word stress Whatever language we study, we will find that
not all of the syllables in a word will have the same
degree of perceptual salience (prominence); some will
be more prominent/salient that others, as in the English
word father, where the penultimate syllable is more
prominent than the final syllable. This prominence/
salience is known as word stress, sometimes referred to
simply as stress. It can be created via any or all of the
following: greater loudness, greater segmental or syl-
labic length, or greater pitch movement. Different lan-
guages harness different combinations of these in their
word stress systems. In English, it is mostly pitch
movement and duration which convey word stress. In
Japanese, it is pitch movement alone (see pitch accent
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 195
languages). Some languages have a very simple word
stress assignment system; a given syllable in the word
is the one that will be stressed, such as the last syllable
in the case of Standard French. Others have arbitrary
patterns of stress in words, in which the stress may
appear on any of the syllables of a root, as in Modern
Greek. Yet others exhibit rule-governed word stress
assignment. An example is Malay, where the rule is as
follows: place a primary stress on the penultimate syl-
lable of the word and then place a secondary stress on
the initial syllable of the word, and each alternate syl-
lable thereafter, subject to stress clash avoidance, as in
the word [,silatu'rahim], where a primary stress falls
on the penultimate syllable, and a secondary stress on
the initial syllable. The third syllable from the begin-
ning of the word does not take a secondary stress since
this would result in a stress clash. Some phonologists
postulate, in addition to primary stress and secondary
stress, a level or tertiary stress, as in the English word
survey. It is agreed that words such as this have
primary stress on the penultimate syllable. Those who
postulate tertiary stress on the final syllable do so
because it has a vowel which does not exhibit reduc-
tion to schwa (compare the word woman, with
primary stress on the penultimate syllable and a schwa
in the final syllable. Stress is sometimes referred to as
accent and stressed syllables are said to be accentuated.
yers The name for a set of abstract underlying vowels
postulated by generative phonologists to account
for certain morpho-phonological alternations in the
Slavic languages. In Polish, some instances of phonetic
[ε] alternate with zero, as in [pɔsε¡] vs [pɔs¡a], the
Y
196 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
nominative singular and genitive singular of the word
for ‘envoy’, where we can see [ε] in the nominative
form, but no [ε] in the genitive form. These alterna-
tions are distinct from pairs such as [fɔtεl] vs [fɔtεla],
the nominative singular and genitive singular forms of
the word meaning ‘armchair’, where the [ε] does not
alternate with zero. The argument is that the [ε]s
which alternate with zero must be derived from an
underlying representation other than /ε/. That under-
lying representation is said to be a yer, a non-ATR high
vowel, represented as /i ˘/, which may be realised as [ε],
or as zero. This kind of analysis is an example of
absolute neutralisation, since there is no phonetic [i ˘] in
Polish which would provide phonetic evidence for the
existence of underlying /i ˘/.
yod A term used to refer to the palatal glide [j], often tran-
scribed as [y] by American phonologists.
Yod Dropping A term used to refer to the non-
pronunciation of yod in certain accents of English.
In many varieties of American English, there is Yod
Dropping in words such as new and tune, pronounced
[nu:] and [t|u:n]. Yod Dropping only applies where the
yod would have been preceded by a coronal conso-
nant, and thus fails to apply in words such as cure, pro-
nounced [k|jυɹ], and pure, pronounced [p|jυɹ].
zero A term often used to describe alternations in which a
sound is elided. In Standard French, schwa is said to
alternate with zero, as in the various ways of pro-
nouncing sequences such as Je te le redemande (‘I’m
asking you this again’), where the schwa vowels in Je,
Z
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 197
te le, re- and de may be elided, subject to the constraint
known as la loi des trois consonnes. An example is
[ʃtələʁədmɑ˜d], where the schwas in Je and de have
been elided, but not the schwas of te, le or re-. Many
phonologists postulate an underlying schwa in words
such as Je, which is said to have a zero realisation when
it is elided.
198 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Sources
Many of the examples come from what I know of varieties
of English and French. I also know a little about Malay and
Spanish, so I have used examples from those languages too.
For examples from these and other languages, I have relied
on the following primary and secondary sources.
Anderson, J. M. and C. J. Ewen (1987) Principles of
Dependency Phonology, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Carr, P. (1993) Phonology, Basingstoke: Macmillan.
Carr, P. (1999) English Phonetics and Phonology, Oxford:
Blackwell.
Charette, M. (1991) Conditions on Phonological
Government, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Dell, F. (1980) Generative Phonology and French
Phonology, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
English translation of Dell (1973) Les Règles et les sons:
Introduction à la phonologie générative, Paris:
Hermann.
Durand, J. (1990) Generative and Non-linear Phonology,
London: Longman.
Fox, J. and R. Wood (1968) A Concise History of the
French Language, Oxford: Blackwell.
Giegerich, H. (1992) English Phonology, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Hannahs, S. J. (1995) Prosodic Structure and French
Morphophonology, Tübingen: Niemeyer.
Harris, J. (1994) English Sound Structure, Oxford:
Blackwell.
Hock, H. H. (1991) Principles of Historical Linguistics,
Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Hyman, L. (1975) Phonology: Theory and Analysis, New
York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
Kager, R. (1999) Optimality Theory, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Kassin, T. A. (2000) The Phonological Word in Standard
Malay. Unpublished PhD thesis, Newcastle University,
UK.
Kenstowicz, M. (1994) Phonology in Generative
Grammar, Oxford: Blackwell.
Lass, R. (1984) Phonology, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Ohala, J. J. (1989) ‘Sound change is drawn from a pool of
synchronic variation,’ in L. E. Breivik and E. H. Jahr
(eds), Language Change: Contributions to the Study of
its Causes, Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 173–98.
Roca, I. and W. Johnson (1999) A Course in Phonology,
Oxford: Blackwell.
Silverman, D. (2006) A Critical Introduction to
Phonology, New York: Continuum.
Spencer, A. (1996) Phonology, Oxford: Blackwell.
Wells, J. C. (1982) Accents of English, vols 1–3,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
In giving brief details of various schools and scholars in the
history of phonology, I have relied heavily on Stephen
R. Anderson’s excellent 1985 book, Phonology in the
Twentieth Century (Chicago: University of Chicago Press).
I hope to be forgiven for the extremely simplified thumb-
nail sketches I have offered of these schools and scholars.
200 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
I also hope that no factual errors have crept into those
sketches. I have also had recourse to Key Thinkers in
Linguistics and the Philosophy of Language, edited by
Siobhan Chapman and Chris Routledge, and published in
2005 by Edinburgh University Press.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 201
Bibliography
(a) Textbook introductions
The beginning student should follow an introductory
course in phonology, preferably using a textbook which
contains exercises. Of the textbooks which appear in
the sources section, I recommend Spencer (1996).
C. Gussenhoven and H. Jacob’s (2005) Understanding
Phonology, published by Arnold, is a useful book, as is
M. Davenport and S. J. Hannahs (1998) Introducing
Phonetics and Phonology, also published by Arnold. Carr
(1993), cited above, is slightly out of date (soon to be
updated), but has useful exercises. The textbooks cited
above by Roca and Johnson, and by Kenstowicz, are both
very good but are rather long. B. Collins and I. Mees
(2003) Practical Phonetics and Phonology, published by
Routledge, is, as the title suggests, practical in its aims,
rather than being an introduction to phonological theory
as such, but it is a unique and most useful book, with an
excellent accompanying CD.
For students looking for an introduction to specifically
English phonetics and phonology, Giegerich (1992), cited
above, is a very good book but has no exercises. For an
elementary introduction to English phonetics and phon -
ology, I suggest either Carr (1999), cited above, or
April McMahon’s (2002) An Introduction to English
Phonology, published by Edinburgh University Press. The
Collins and Mees book cited above is also useful for cov-
erage of varieties of English. Mehmet Yavas¸’s (2006)
Applied English Phonology, published by Blackwell, is
also useful. Students should also consult the late Larry
Trask’s (1996) A Dictionary of Phonetics and Phonology,
published by Routledge, which is admirable in its cover-
age. Students should be aware, however, that I have reser-
vations about some of Trask’s definitions (which often lack
exemplification); because of this, the student will find that
my definition of central terms, such as ‘phoneme’ differ
substantially from his.
(b) Primary source material
For students wishing to consult primary source material,
the following is a very partial list of books and articles
which have made an impact on various parts of the field.
Anderson, J. M. and C. J. Ewen (1987) Principles
of Dependency Phonology, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Anderson, S. R. (1983) Phonology in the Twentieth
Century, Chicago, IL: Chicago University Press.
Archangeli, D. (1988) ‘Aspects of underspecification
theory,’ Phonology 5: 183–208.
Baudouin de Courtenay, J. (1972) Selected Writings of
Baudouin de Courtenay, edited by E. Stankiewicz,
Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.
Bloomfield, L. (1926) ‘A set of postulates for the study of
language,’ Language 2: 153–64. Reprinted in Joos, M.
(ed.) (1957), Readings in Linguistics, vol. 1, Washington:
American Council of Learned Societies, 329–48.
Bromberger, S. and M. Halle (1989) ‘Why phonology is
different,’ Linguistic Inquiry 20: 51–70.
Bybee, J. (2001) Phonology and Language Use,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 203
Chomsky, N. and M. Halle (1968) The Sound Pattern of
English, New York: Harper & Row.
Clements, G. N. (1985) ‘The geometry of phonological
features,’ Phonology Yearbook 2: 225–53.
Donegan, P. and D. Stampe (1979) ‘The study of Natural
Phonology,’ in D. Dinnsen (ed.), Current Approaches to
Phonological Theory, Bloomington, IN: Indiana
University Press, 126–73.
Firth, J. R. (1934) ‘The word “Phoneme”,’ Le Maître
phonétique 46: 44–6.
Jones, D. (1950) The Phoneme: its Nature and Use,
Cambridge: Heffer.
Goldsmith, J. (1979) Autosegmental Phonology, New
York: Garland.
Hale, M. and C. Reiss (2000) ‘Substance abuse and dys-
functionalism: current trends in phonology,’ Linguistic
Inquiry 31: 157–69.
Halle, M. and J. R. Vergnaud (1987) An Essay on Stress,
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Hayes, B. (1982) ‘Extrametricality and English stress,’
Linguistic Inquiry 13: 227–76.
Hyman, L. (1970) ‘How concrete is phonology?,’
Language 46: 58–76.
Jakobson, R. (1962) Selected Writings, vol. 1, The Hague:
Mouton.
Jakobson, R. (1971) Selected Writings, vol. 2, The Hague:
Mouton.
Johnson, K. (1997) ‘Speech perception without speaker
normalization,’ in K. Johnson and J. W. Mullenix (eds),
Talker Variability in Speech Processing, San Diego:
Academic, 145–65.
Kiparsky, P. (1968) ‘How abstract is Phonology?,’
reprinted in P. Kiparsky (1982) Explanation in
Phonology, Dordrecht: Foris.
204 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
Kiparsky, P. (1982) ‘From cyclic to lexical phonology,’ in
H. van der Hulst and N. Smith (eds), The Structure of
Phonological Representations (2 vols), Dordrecht:
Foris.
Labov, W. (1966) The Social Stratification of English in
New York City, Washington, DC: Center for Applied
Linguistics.
Liberman, M. Y. and A. Prince (1977) ‘On stress and lin-
guistic rhythm,’ Linguistic Inquiry 8: 249–336.
McCarthy, J. and A. Prince (1995) ‘Prosodic morphology,’
in J. Goldsmith (ed.), The Handbook of Phonological
Theory, Oxford: Blackwell, 318–66.
McGurk, H. and J. MacDonald (1976) ‘Hearing lips and
seeing voices,’ Nature 264: 746–8.
Marantz, A. (1982) ‘Re reduplication,’ Linguistic Inquiry
13: 435–82.
Nespor, M. and I. Vogel (1986) Prosodic Phonology,
Dordrecht: Foris.
Ohala, J. J. (1989) ‘Sound change is drawn from a pool of
synchronic variation,’ in L. E. Breivik and E. H. Jahr
(eds), Language Change: Contributions to the Study of
its Causes, Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 173–98.
Pierrehumbert, J. and M. Beckman (1989) Japanese
Tone Structure (Linguistic Inquiry Monograph, 15),
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Postal, P. (1968) Aspects of Phonological Theory, New
York: Harper & Row.
Prince, A. (1983) ‘Relating to the grid,’ Linguistic Inquiry
14: 19–100.
Prince, A. and P. Smolensky (1993) Optimality Theory:
Constraint Interaction in Generative Grammar. Ms,
Rutgers University and University of Colorado.
Ringen, C. (1988) Vowel Harmony: Theoretical
Implications, New York: Garland.
A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 205
Sapir, E. (1933) ‘The psychological reality of phonemes,’
reprinted in D. Mandelbaum (ed.), Selected Writings of
Edward Sapir in Language, Culture and Personality,
Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.
Saussure, F. de (1916) Cours de linguistique général, Paris:
Bayot. English translation W. Baskin (1959) Course in
General Linguistics, New York: Philosophical Library.
See also the translation by R. Harris (1983) F. de
Saussure: Course in General Linguistics, London:
Duckworth.
Selkirk, E. (1984) Phonology and Syntax: The Relation
between Sound and Structure, Cambridge, MA: MIT
Press.
Trubetzkoy, N. (1939) Grundzüge der Phonologie.
Travaux du cercle linguistique de Prague, 7. French
translation by J. Cantineau (1949) Principes de
phonologie, Paris: Klincksieck.
Vihman, M. M. (1996) Phonological Development,
Oxford: Blackwell.
Wang, W. (1967) ‘The phonological features of tone,’
International Journal of American Linguistics 33:
93–105.
Wells, J. C. (1982) Accents of English, vols 1–3,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Yip, M. (1980) The Tonal Phonology of Chinese. MIT
PhD. Published in New York by Garland in 1990.
206 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY
See more Language & Linguistics books at
www.euppublishing.com
Also Available from Edinburgh University Press
An Introduction to English Phonology
April McMahon
An Introduction to English Phonology introduces
undergraduates to the basic tools and concepts
necessary for the outline description of English
phonological systems and processes.
By working through the book and the various
exercises included, students should come to
understand the need for a dedicated system of
description and transcription for speech sounds, and
for a degree of phonological abstraction.
They should learn to carry out elementary,
broad phonetic transcription, and be able to establish contrastive vowel
and consonant systems for their own varieties and to express simple
generalisations refecting the productive and predictable patterns of English
sounds.
Key Features
designed for a one-term or one-semester introductory course in English
Language
suitable for both native and non-native speakers of English
emphasis on varieties of modern English around the world
an essentially theory-neutral approach, with the concepts central to the
practice of phonology clearly explained
April McMahon is Forbes Professor of English Language at the University of
Edinburgh.




November 2001
160pp
Pb 978 0 7486 1251 2
See more Language & Linguistics books at
www.euppublishing.com
Also Available from Edinburgh University Press
The Linguistics Student’s Handbook
Laurie Bauer
The book that tells you all the things you felt you
were expected to know about linguistics, but were
afraid to ask about.
What do you know about Burushaski and Miwok?
What’s the diference between paradigmatic and syntagmatic?
What is E-language?
What is a language?
Do parenthetical and non-restrictive mean the same thing?
How do you write a bibiliographic entry for a work you have not seen?
Every student who has asked these questions needs this book. A
compendium of useful things for linguistics students to know, from the
IPA chart to the Saussurean dichotomies, this book will be the constant
companion of anyone undertaking studies of linguistics. Part reference work,
part revision guide, and with tables providing summary information on some
280 languages, the book provides a new learning tool as a supplement to the
usual textbooks and glossaries.
Laurie Bauer is Professor of Linguistics at the Victoria University of Wellington.
April 2007
400pp
Pb 978 0 7486 2759 2





A Glossary of Phonology

TITLES IN THE SERIES INCLUDE Peter Trudgill A Glossary of Sociolinguistics 978 0 7486 1623 7 Jean Aitchison A Glossary of Language and Mind 978 0 7486 1824 8 Laurie Bauer A Glossary of Morphology 978 0 7486 1853 8 Alan Davies A Glossary of Applied Linguistics 978 0 7486 1854 5 Geoffrey Leech A Glossary of English Grammar 978 0 7486 1729 6 Paul Baker, Andrew Hardie and Tony McEnery A Glossary of Corpus Linguistics 978 0 7486 2018 0 Alan Cruse A Glossary of Semantics and Pragmatics 978 0 7486 2111 8 Philip Carr A Glossary of Phonology 978 0 7486 2234 4 Vyvyan Evans A Glossary of Cognitive Linguistics 978 0 7486 2280 1 Lyle Campbell and Mauricio J. Mixco A Glossary of Historical Linguistics 978 0 7486 2379 2

A Glossary of Phonology
Philip Carr

Edinburgh University Press

Stockport. Cheshire. .© Philip Carr. 2008 Edinburgh University Press Ltd 22 George Square. Designs and Patents Act 1988. Edinburgh Typeset in Sabon by Servis Filmsetting Ltd. Chippenham A CIP record for this book is available from the British Library ISBN 978 0 7486 2404 1 (hardback) ISBN 978 0 7486 2234 4 (paperback) The right of Philip Carr to be identified as author of this work has been asserted in accordance with the Copyright. and printed and bound in Great Britain by CPI Antony Rowe. Published with the support of the Edinburgh University Scholarly Publishing Initiatives Fund.

Contents Introduction Glossary of Phonology Sources Bibliography 1 7 199 202 .

.

abstract notions. I imagined that it would be easier to put together than a textbook. None the less. Phonologists are fond of diagrams for understandable reasons. say vowel nasalisation. I have chosen to focus on what I take to be phonological phenomena: that is. But I believe that one should not mistake the diagrams for the .Introduction When I agreed to write this little book. a glossary is bound to be even more simplified. if simplified. and thus visualise. one can tell the reader the following sort of thing: ‘Recall our discussion of this phenomenon in chapter 2. Because I wish to focus on what I take to be phenomena. many of the phenomena in question are described as processes.’ That cannot be done in a glossary. such as. and will be of some help to students engaging with a discipline which can appear to have a dauntingly large amount of specialised terminology. human beings find it helpful to be able to depict. now we’ll look at it in more detail. the kinds of states of affairs which phonologists believe they have often observed in human languages. In a textbook. since the entries have to be kept relatively short. In doing so. I hope that the definitions given here are accurate. I was wrong. I have tried to avoid defining phonological notions in terms of properties of diagrams. I have adopted the process metaphor. since it has no narrative structure. And while elementary textbooks require a good deal of simplification.

and I have not hesitated to convey that fact to the reader. given the space limitations. It is with the most fundamental. Since the focus is on phonological phenomena. One of the issues here is the question of whether a valid distinction can be drawn between phonetics and phonology. particularly in the field of generative phonology. what the different. An example is the definition of the word ‘phonology’ itself. and what might the relation be between these two areas? These are difficult. controversial issues. The fact is that there is controversy as to exactly what we take the discipline and its object of inquiry to be. I have not attempted to list every theoretical construct postulated in the history of phonology. the task would anyway have been impossible.2 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY phenomena under investigation. The moment one tries to define expressions such as ‘phonology’ or ‘phoneme’. I have given definitions for phonetic terms as and when I needed to use them. how is it to be drawn. Since I believe that we do need to distinguish phonetics and phonology. in relatively simple terms. When one considers the vast number of such constructs. Rather. And if such a distinction can be drawn. Related to the kinds of controversy which exist in the field of phonology is the status of expressions such as ‘mentalism’ and other ‘isms’. conceptions are. often competing. I have tried to explain. one has to explain that there are mentalistic and non-mentalistic conceptions of these. I have therefore included brief definitions of various ‘isms’ in order to help the reader understand what lies behind the various different conceptions of notions . Rather. I have not attempted a systematic coverage of phonetic terminology. I have not sought to sweep such controversy under the carpet. elementary terms in linguistics that the most difficult issues arise. and different kinds of mentalistic conception. and assuming that a glossary of phonetics will be forthcoming in this glossary series.

Empiricism. which are cited at the end of the book. But there are many phonological phenomena which are simply not attested in either of those languages. The discipline is as much about people and places as it is about ideas. One would not. so I have given an indication of what that debate is about. I have given brief sketches of prominent phonologists. There is a great danger in citing examples from languages one is not familiar with. cut off from other disciplines. My apologies to phonologists who believe that they are major figures in the field. such as the Prague School. founded in the mid-1920s. but whose names do not appear here. In connection with this. I have had to resort to primary and secondary sources. I have also done this because I do not believe that phonology should be taught in an intellectual vacuum. mostly English and French. There was no way of knowing just how many such figures to cite. however. But the Empiricist vs Rationalist debate has formed part of the background to the development of phonological theory and theories as to how children acquire a phonological system. but there is no way around it if one is to achieve a decent coverage of the . I do hope.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 3 such as ‘phoneme’. I have therefore included brief definitions of various schools of thought which have existed in the history of phonology. that the reader will have been given at least some idea of who has been associated with which ideas. or of knowing the extent to which a given phonologist could be described as ‘prominent’. The history of the discipline also constitutes part of the intellectual context in which phonology should be studied. and for those phenomena. of course. phrases and sentences for the purposes of exemplification. In choosing words. think of turning to a glossary of phonology if one were seeking a brief definition of. I have tried to stick with languages which I purport to know something about. say. from the nineteenth century to the present day.

However. there is a good deal of coverage of notions used in European and North American descriptive traditions. ‘drawl’ and . Since I believe that the discipline of phonology overlaps with other disciplines. I have also tried to ensure that there is a degree of consistency between the definitions of morphological. Geoffrey Leech’s A Glossary of English Grammar and Peter Trudgill’s A Glossary of Sociolinguistics. where I deemed it necessary and/or useful. It will be evident to teachers that this book has been written by someone with a background in British descriptive traditions. The term ‘broad’. historical linguistics. morphology. I have given brief accounts. or more worthy of study than other languages. sociolinguistic and syntactic terms given here and those given in Laurie Bauer’s A Glossary of Morphology. more important than. Informal terms used in ordinary everyday speech have been included if they are meaningful and are also used by linguists. Examples are terms such as ‘twang’. Where there are differences between British and American descriptive traditions. has therefore been included. The result of my attempting to exemplify notions from English and French is that there is a bias towards English in this glossary. fallen into a kind of British insularity. of some notions from the fields of child language acquisition. I hope.4 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY kinds of phonological phenomena found in the world’s languages. I have not. This should not be interpreted as an attempt to convey the idea that English is somehow superior to. Other informal terms used by the lay person have been omitted because they cannot be given a clear definition. I have included informal terms such as ‘smoothing’ (monophthongisation) when they are relatively widely used and can be given a clear definition. sociolinguistics and syntax. I have attempted to indicate what those are. used to refer to certain accents.

Glosses (English translations of non-English words) are given in inverted commas. such as intervocalic voicing or nasalisation. used to refer to such a disparate range of phonetic/phonological properties as to be more or less meaningless. such as the Scottish Vowel Length Rule. Words. Cross-referenced terms are in bold. in my view. is discussed. the entry is given in lower case.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 5 ‘flattened vowels’. . Where a general phenomenon. Such terms are. I have used upper case for the first letter. phrases and sentences given as examples are in italics. Where I am describing a process which has been postulated for a specific language. Liaison in French or Rendaku in Japanese.

.

as in [pɔsε ] vs [pɔs a]. which may be realised as [ε] or as zero. It was characterised by the postulating of underlying representations which corresponded to none of the observed surface forms. and that a child acquiring present-day Polish . represented as /˘/. For instance. absolute neutralisation A form of neutralisation which was postulated in the history of generative phonology. where we can see [ε] in the nominative form but no [ε] in the genitive form. in the analysis of Polish. a non-ATR high vowel.A ablaut A process in which a vowel in a morpheme changes to signal a morpho-syntactic property. as in the English pair come vs came. some instances of phonetic [ε] alternate with zero. the nominative singular and genitive singular of the word for ‘envoy’. The objection raised to such analyses is that there is no phonetic [˘] in contemporary Polish. These alternations are distinct from pairs such as [fɔtεl] vs [fɔtεla]. where the [ε] does not alternate with zero. That underlying representation is said to be a yer. the nominative singular and genitive singular forms of the word meaning ‘armchair’. where the ablaut process signals past tense. The suggestion is that the [ε]s which alternate with zero must be derived from an underlying representation other than /ε/.

The normal pronunciation is [wɾi]. See absolute neutralisation. Most current versions of generative phonology are less abstract than those which adopted absolute neutralisation. which differs in its . Some phonologists claim that the flap results from a synchronic process of Flapping. accent A term used. A simple example is the phonological representation /wti/ of the word witty in General American. to identify varieties of a language with respect only to phonetic and phonological properties of that variety. possess mentally real underlying representations such as /˘/. An example of an accent of English is Standard Scottish English (SSE). Those who object to analyses involving absolute neutralisation point out that the yers existed in the history of Polish but no longer exist. in which the phonemes /t/ and /d/ are realised phonetically as an alveolar flap. Accent is often distinguished from dialect. While some phonologists take the term ‘abstract’ to mean ‘mentally real’ in some sense. others who adopt instrumentalism intend ‘abstract’ to mean ‘not corresponding to anything real outside of the theory’. Phonological representations can be considerably more abstract than this. abstract This term is often used by phonologists to describe analyses in which phonological representations of words are postulated which are at some remove from the observable pronunciation of the word. with a flap (tap) rather than a [t]. To postulate such abstract representations for the synchronic phonology of Polish is arguably to represent diachrony mistakenly as synchrony. but also differences in vocabulary and syntax. See realisation.8 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY could not. not just phonetic and phonological properties of a given variety. therefore. especially by British linguists. which is said to denote.

ATR/non-ATR distinctions among high vowels often collapse during historical change. and the alveolar ridge is the passive articulator. in alveolar sounds. and the French prefix re-. For example. the tongue moves to form an articulation with the passive articulator. Prefixes precede a base. Advanced Tongue Root (ATR) A property often associated with vowels. For example. there is no /u:/ vs /υ/ contrast in SSE. Low vowels frequently fail to have an ATR counterpart. American linguists tend not to adopt the accent/dialect distinction. affix A morphological unit attached to a base. and ‘chimney’ is ‘lum’. whose syntax and vocabulary differ from the dialect known as Standard English. and often act as opaque vowels in ATR-based vowel harmony systems. as in unhappy. as . ‘ear’ in Lowland Scots is ‘lug’.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 9 vowel and consonant systems from the accent known as Received Pronunciation (also known as Standard Southern British English). suffixes and infixes. [e]/[ε]. leaving only the ATR member. such as [i] or [u]. Such vowels often then act as neutral vowels. The term ‘accent’ is also used as a synonym for word stress. so that an accented syllable is a stressed syllable. Typical ATR and non-ATR vowel pairs are [i]/[]. the tip and/or the blade of the tongue is the active articulator. [o]/[ɔ]. The three main types of affix are prefixes. [u]/[υ]. leading to various effects on the tongue body. For example. An example of a dialect is Lowland Scots. active articulator The articulator which moves to form an articulation with a passive articulator. Examples are the English prefix un-. in which the root of the tongue is pushed forward.

sucking air into the lungs. the air rushes out. as in the word sumulat. alveolar and velar ejectives are . Examples are the English suffix -ness. Sounds made this way are called ejectives. this pushes air upwards. Suffixes follow a base. in which air flows out from the lungs. If the larynx is then raised. in which air is sucked into the lungs. Infixes are inserted inside a base. An example is the Tagalog infix -um. releasing the closure. affricate A type of speech sound involving a stop closure followed by slow release of the closure. The bilabial. They are found in many African languages. resulting in audible friction. Sounds produced this way are called implosives. The one found in all human languages is the pulmonic egressive mechanism. [ ] and [ ]. from the adjective douce. and the French suffix -ment. The bilabial. which consists of the base sulat (‘to write’) with the infix -um inserted after the initial /s/. and if the oral closure is released. airstream The flow of air on which speech sounds are based. meaning ‘soft’ or ‘gentle’). alveolar and velar implosives are transcribed as [ ]. Sounds produced with the glottalic airstream mechanism have a glottal closure and a stricture of complete closure made within the oral cavity.10 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY in redemander (‘to ask again’). as in the case of the [tʃ] at the beginning and the end of the English word church. They are formed by making a stop closure in the oral cavity. creating an airstream. A less common one is the pulmonic ingressive mechanism. and allowing air to implode into the oral cavity. airstream mechanisms The various kinds of airstream which are harnessed in the production of human speech sounds. as in doucement (‘gently’. as in happiness.

alternants Variant phonetic forms of a morpheme.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 11 transcribed as [p’]. for instance. subject to stress clash avoidance. The English morpheme -in has the alternant [m] in impossible. This is the mechanism used in sucking. The alveolar click is transcribed as [!] and the alveolar lateral click is transcribed as [ ]. If the velar closure is pulled back. Sounds made with the velaric airstream mechanism have a closure between the back of the tongue and the soft palate. Sounds produced this way are called clicks. When the closure further forward in the oral cavity is released. allophone see Phonemic Principle allophony The phenomenon whereby a phoneme has two or more allophones. such as Zulu and Xhosa. They are found in child vocal play and certain languages spoken mostly in Southern Africa. In Malay. [n] in indirect. and [ŋ] in incredible. air flows in. It is common to talk. of the algorithm for word stress assignment in a language. [t’] and [k’]. The latter sound is used by speakers of various languages to ‘gee-up’ horses. this creates an ingressive airstream. and then place a secondary stress on the initial syllable of the word and each alternate syllable thereafter. These sounds are found in many American Indian languages. Such . the algorithm for word stress assignment is: place a primary stress on the penultimate syllable of the word. Aitken’s Law see Scottish Vowel Length Rule algorithm A set of rules or procedures. and another closure further forward in the oral cavity.

Some phonologists have therefore suggested that in cases like this. George . the consonant in question is simultaneously in the coda of the penultimate syllable and in the onset of the final syllable. alveolar Sounds produced with the alveolar ridge as the passive articulator are alveolar sounds. Names associated with this period include Leonard Bloomfield. located behind the upper teeth. American Structuralism The kind of linguistics practised in the US in the 1930s.trol. /t/ is not normally realised as a glottal stop in onset position. Martin Joos. belonging to two syllables at the same time. On the other hand. ambisyllabicity The boundary between syllables is often easy to establish. Archibald Hill. Take the English word petrol. the syllabification should be pe.to]. alveolar ridge The teeth ridge. prior to the emergence of generative phonology. Charles Hockett. alternation The phenomenon whereby a morpheme has more than one alternant. 1940s and 1950s.12 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY morpho-phonological alternations are rule-governed. and for these speakers. since /tr/ is a legitimate onset cluster in English. the place of articulation of the nasal stop is determined by the place of articulation of the following consonant. in this case. But there are cases where there seems to be evidence for more than one possible syllabification. many speakers have a glottal stop realisation of the /t/ in this word. the Maximal Onset Principle states that. it is ambisyllabic. On the one hand. as in the French word bateau (‘boat’): [ba.

it has often been claimed that child forms such as bringed (instead of the irregular form brought) and catched (instead of caught) are formed by analogy with the past tense forms of regular verbs such as banged and splashed. . In the field of phonology. analogy A term used in psychology. Adopting a philosophy of science which was influenced by logical positivism. The phenomenon known as Intrusive ‘r’ in non-rhotic varieties of English is often said to have come about by analogy with Linking ‘r’. but their conception of what scientific method was differed radically from Chomsky’s. the American Structuralists assumed that genuinely scientific theories were based solely on observation and on inductive generalisations over those observations. linguistics and many other fields to refer to the human capacity to spot similarities between distinct objects or events. It is widely believed that the American Structuralists were sceptical about the existence of linguistic universals. In phonology. Like Chomsky.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 13 Trager and Rulon Wells. unlike Chomsky and his followers. this meant excluding mentalism from linguistics. Some have said that there is an analogy between the Iraq War and the Vietnam War. Included in those ‘discovery procedures’ is the Phonemic Principle. the American Structuralists are said to have postulated ‘discovery procedures’ by means of which the linguist can arrive at (‘discover’) the phonemic and morphophonemic system of a given language. it is often claimed that certain diachronic changes in languages are based on perceived analogies. In child language acquisition. the American Structuralists believed that the kind of linguistics they practised was ‘scientific’. Since the mind is unobservable. they are said to be similar in certain respects.

since the deletion would result in the sequence [gonna]. such as [ʃ]. Anterior coronals are dental or alveolar (such as [θ] and [s]). He is also a specialist in the history of phonology and is known for his theory of morphology. The dental fricatives [θ] and [ð] are examples. whereas postalveolars. anterior A distinctive feature used to differentiate different kinds of coronal speech sound types. antepenultimate Third last. so that /wager/ + /é/ (‘he reconciled’) becomes [wagré]. A Scottish linguist known. vowel harmony and metrical structure. for the elaboration of the framework known as Dependency Phonology.14 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Anderson. who has worked on a wide variety of phonological phenomena including nasal consonants. are non-anterior.e. a geminate consonant). in syntax. tone. . John M. apical Sounds made with the tip of the tongue are said to be apical. unstressed vowels are deleted in the context #CVC_CV. Anderson is also known for his support of the Principle of Structural Analogy. An American linguist working in the generative phonology tradition. in phonology. with a geminate [nn]. Anderson. for his work on case grammar and. Stephen R. In the Cushitic language Afar. But the deletion fails to apply in cases such as /gonan/ + /a/ (‘search for’). Often used to refer to the position of a syllable in a word for the purposes of word stress assignment in languages where word stress is calculated from the end of the word. antigemination A phenomenon whereby vowel deletion is blocked if it would lead to two identical adjacent consonants (i.

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 15 apocope Loss of a word-final segment. . but it is neutralised in word-final position. but an archiphoneme /D/. as in last chance: [lɑ:stʃɑ:ns]. there is a phonemic contrast between voiced obstruents and voiceless obstruents. In Italian. approximant see degree of stricture archiphoneme A term used by Prague School phonologists such as Trubetzkoy when dealing with neutralisation. In English. so that /trud/ (‘labour’) undergoes Word-Final Devoicing and is pronounced as [trut] in the singular. as in the plural form [trudi]. as in una ragazza (‘a girl’) vs un’ ora (‘an hour’). which represents what the two phonemes have in common: they are both stops and are both alveolar. it is not devoiced. Trubetzkoy argued that what appears in word-final position is neither the voiced phoneme /d/ nor the voiceless phoneme /t/. which is a representation of all of the properties shared by the phonemes in question. Articulatory Phonology A phonological model which takes phonological representations to consist of sequences of overlapping phonological gestures such as laryngeal gestures and gestures in the oral cavity. Articulatory Phonetics That branch of phonetics which deals with the way human speech sounds are articulated. When the /d/ is not in word-final position. For instance. word-final /t/ is often lost if the following word begins with a consonant. When the contrast between two phonemes in opposition is suspended (neutralised) in a specific context. This can be a consonant or a vowel. in Polish. one can postulate an archiphoneme. the indefinite articles uno and una undergo loss of their final vowel if the following noun begins with a vowel.

aspiration Some phonologists argue that sounds which are aspirated are produced with spreading of the vocal cords. sounds become more similar to each other. This is the most common kind of assimilation.16 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY articulatory planning A term used to refer to the largely unconscious planning of the movements of the articulators during acts of uttering. in which the first of two sounds assimilates to a following sound. where the /n/ of ten tends to assimilate to the place of articulation of the following bilabial stop: [t εmbɔz]. assimilation A process whereby two. Aspirated stops are also sometimes referred to as fortis stops. normally adjacent. articulated somewhat higher than cardinal vowel 4. since it is grounded in ease of . which become voiced when followed by another voiced obstruent. Assimilation for voicing is also common. An example of assimilation for place of articulation can be found in sequences such as ten boys in English. These examples involve regressive (anticipatory) assimilation. as in the case of the voiceless obstruents of Hungarian. where the suffix [ban] is added. See Voice Onset Time. as seen in the root /kalap/ (‘hat’) which is realised with a voiced stop in [kalabban]. Others suggest that aspiration is produced by a delay in the onset of voicing after a stop closure has been released. Ash is often a low front unrounded vowel. as in the pronunciation [p t]. in which it is claimed that there is a delay between the release of the bilabial stop closure and the onset of voicing for the following vowel []. ash The name given to the vowel represented as / / in work on the phonology of English.

In this case. the final vowel is an atonic vowel. But progressive (preservative) assimilation is also attested. in which each of the adjacent sounds assimilates to the other. In the Latin word amare (‘to love’). typically uttered as [ɹe əh nd]. the sounds both preceding and following a segment can induce assimilation. the [z] at the end of raise becomes a postalveolar [ ] under the influence of the palatal glide /j/ at the beginning of your. ATR see Advanced Tongue Root auditory phonetics That branch of phonetics which deals with the way that the human ear and perceptual system receive and process speech sounds. changing it from an approximant to a stop. Here. In some cases. and the palatal glide becomes a [ ] as a result of progressive assimilation. . which are realised as voiced stops intervocalically: /pap/ (‘cooked rice’) is realised with a [b] when the suffix /i/ is added: [pabi]. Reciprocal assimilation is also known as coalescence. as in the case of the Lumasaaba morpheme /li/ (‘a root’) which is realised as [di] when a nasal stop precedes it. in which the segments in question are not adjacent. Some phonologists claim that long-distance assimilation exists. Examples of this are the phenomena known as consonant harmony and vowel harmony. the complete closure of the nasal stop carries over on to the following sound. as in the case of voiceless unaspirated stops in Korean. See tonic vowel and countertonic vowel. as in the form [zindi] (‘roots’).A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 17 articulation. There are also cases of reciprocal assimilation. atonic vowel An unstressed vowel. This is what happens with intervocalic voicing. as in the case of Raise your hand! in English.

18 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Autosegmental Phonology A way of depicting. and conceiving of. since Firthian prosodies seem parallel to autosegments. Autosegmental Phonology is a form of non-linear phonology. which would then be nasal consonants or nasalised vowels. phonological representation which departed from previous purely segmental models of phonological structure and postulated several tiers of phonological structure. ‘H’ and ‘L’ represent high and low tones. It has been suggested by some that Firthian Phonology was a historical precursor of Autosegmental Phonology. A nasal autosegment was postulated. The nasal autosegment was then said to be able to attach to individual segments. as in the following diagram: segmental tier b u l u tonal tier H L Here. represented as: ˜ segmental tier nasal tier /l [N] u/ where ‘[N]’ represents a nasal autosegment which gets attached to the segments on the segmental tier. as in Gokana [nu] (‘thing’). The same approach came to be applied to certain languages with nasal harmony. a tonal tier was postulated on which tones were represented as autosegments. . For tone languages. overlaid on a sequence of segments. located on a nasal tier.

in which the child utters syllable-like sequences. homophony was avoided by using an alternative name for a cockerel. The amount of variegated babbling increases towards the end of the first year of life.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 19 avoidance of homophony It is believed by some that there is a general trend towards avoiding the application of phonological processes which create homophones. since we need to maintain lexical contrasts for functional reasons. but overlapping with. In the history of French. B babbling A phenomenon which begins during the second half of the first year of life. such as [dadada]. which is homophonous with the Latin word gattus. When the child utters reduplicated sequences of identical syllables. if most of the minimal pairs of a language were to become homophones. this is referred to as variegated babbling. The syllables in question are often of the CV (consonant-vowel) type. the vocal play period. meaning ‘cat’. back see features . resulting in forms such as gattus. following. In this case. resulting in the present-day word coq. the Latin word gallus (‘cockerel/rooster’) underwent a sound change whereby the intervocalic /l/ became a /t/. based on rhythmic movements of the jaw. some writers use the term babbling to refer to the pre-babbling vocalisations of the vocal play period. When the child utters sequences of non-identical syllables. this is referred to as canonical babbling. the language would be less useful for purposes of communication. such as [da]. Unfortunately. such as [bada].

and the psychological aspect of sound systems. His work influenced the thinking of the Prague School. leading to opacity. the base is not a root. backing see vowel retraction base A term used in morphology. He was part of the Kazan School. which he called psychophonetics. it contains the morphemes friend and -ly. Behaviourism A particularly extreme form of Empiricism practised in the mid-twentieth century. in which it was held that only observable behaviour constitutes the object of a properly scientific linguistics. behind the front of the tongue and in front of the tongue root. the base is happy. In this case. which is the active articulator in velar and uvular sounds. Roots contain no affixes. BBC English Another term for Received Pronunciation. This is the kind of base known as a root. but that grounding can become obscured in the course of time. In the English word unhappy. to denote any part of a word to which an affix may be added.20 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY back of the tongue That part of the body of the tongue. which he called anthropophonics. This is a phonetics/phonology distinction in which phonology (psychophonetics) is seen as mentalistic phonetics. Baudouin also elaborated a theory of alternations and a theory of phonologisation in which alternations start out as phonetically grounded. The base in friendliness is friendly. Behaviourism . Baudouin distinguished between the purely physical aspects of sound structure. Baudouin de Courtnay. Jan (1845–1929) Baudouin worked in Russia and later in his native Poland.

not only Empiricism. since the contents of the mind are. unobservable.to]. but one cannot establish . as in the French word bateau: [ba. Bloomfield argued that one should analyse linguistic structure independently of meaning. bilabial see labial bilateral opposition see opposition bimoraic see mora binary-valued features see feature values bisyllabic Containing two syllables. It is associated with the work of B. blade That part of the tongue just behind the tip. but he inevitably failed to do so. Bloomfield adopted. Leonard (1887–1949) An American linguist who worked on the native languages of North America and who is often associated with American Structuralism. Because he opposed mentalism. Skinner and Leonard Bloomfield. usually involved in alveolar articulations. F. blockers see opaque vowels and nasal spread Bloomfield. Bloomfield embraced the concept of the phoneme. The term disyllabic is a synonym. if one allows that both observable behaviour and mental realities constitute the object of linguistic (and thus phonological) inquiry. by definition. Influenced by the drift away from mentalism in psychology. that does not constitute Behaviourism.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 21 is thus fundamentally opposed to any variety of mentalism. It is important to bear in mind that. but also Behaviourism.

The term ‘bootstrapping’ may come from the expression ‘to pull oneself up by one’s . Bloomfield believed that linguistics could be ‘scientific’. body of the tongue The main part of the tongue. Associated with anthropological linguistics in the USA. Boas. and his conception of what this meant was influenced by logical positivism. His best-known student was Edward Sapir. Franz (1858–1942) A German linguist who became an American citizen in the late nineteenth century. blade and root. But how can the child extract these if he/she does not already have mental representations of words? There are not normally pauses between words in the stream of speech. bootstrapping problem A problem in child language acquisition. Boas engaged in a great deal of fieldwork on the native languages of the North American Indians. The problem is this: if the child decodes speech by mapping utterances of words on to words stored in the child’s mind.22 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY phonemic contrasts without recourse to meaning (see minimal pairs). how can the child make a start? In order to have mental representations of words stored in the mind. It is because of this conception that he believed that the only scientifically valid generalisations in linguistics were inductive generalisations. in which language is viewed as a set of cultural practices. the child must first extract words from the stream of speech. excluding the tip. so how is the child to know which sequences of phonetic segments constitute words? One response to this puzzle is to appeal to the child’s capacity to extract statistical tendencies from the stream of speech (see stochastic phonology).

borrowing see loanword. The term is also used in the literature on code-switching. contains the English word disconnected which is borrowed and modified. branching onset An onset which contains more than one consonant. with a French [i] vowel instead of an English [] vowel. both phonologically and morphologically. The notion is used by phonologists who analyse intonation contours by separating them into their component tones. a branching onset is visually represented using a diagram in which the onset node contains two branches. The term ‘branching’ derives from the use of tree diagrams to represent syllable structure.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 23 own bootstraps’. meaning to get started from scratch without help. An utterance such as L’ordinateur est disconnecté (‘The computer is disconnected’). which have a bootstrapping program which gets the computer started when it is switched on. The morphological modification lies in the uttering of the French suffix -é instead of the English suffix -ed. as in the English word brow. to fit with the phonology and morphology of French. boundary tone The tone that occurs at the edge of an intonation group. breaking A synonym for diphthongisation. Boundary tones are represented in the representational system ToBI. to denote words uttered by bilinguals which have been taken from one of the speaker’s languages and phonologically or morphologically modified in accordance with the system of the other language. The phonological modification lies in the utterance of the English prefix dis. uttered by a bilingual speaker.as [dis]. . or from its application to computers.

a speaker with a broad Liverpool English accent will retain all of the features of that non-standard accent. Joan Under the name Joan Hooper. This is one of the few terms to be used. such as the lenition of voiceless stops to affricates or fricatives. The difference between the two is that. For example. Broader transcriptions contain less phonetic detail and often approximate to phonemic transcription. this American phonologist was associated with Natural Generative Phonology and has more recently been associated with usage-based phonology. in much the same sense. they mean simple syllables with a single consonant in the onset position and a single vowel in the nucleus position. the narrower a transcription. as in [bυx] for book. the more phonetic detail it contains. the broader the accent. Some authors equate broad transcription with phonemic transcription. when phonologists speak of CV syllables. Accents may be more or less broad. broad transcription Usually defined in contradistinction to narrow transcription.24 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY broad Used to describe non-standard accents which have not been influenced by features of standard accents. C C Stands for consonant. the more non-standard features it retains. canonical babbling see babbling cardinal vowels Specific vowel qualities which are used as reference points for locating any given vowel . Bybee. by specialists and the general public alike. Thus.

. It has often been claimed that. humans are able to allocate a given speech sound to a specific speech sound type. The cardinal vowels are often said to be vowel qualities produced at certain very peripheral points in the vowel space. say. The cardinal vowel chart is still used in the International Phonetic Alphabet. Part of the Indo-European language family. the cardinal vowel system of representing vowel qualities in a trapezium-shaped chart is still seen as a useful. for example.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 25 articulation. Celtic A language family which subsumes present-day languages such as Scots Gaelic. None the less. in making the transition from. Irish Gaelic. This can range from categorising a given object as an instance of. categorisation The act of allocating specific objects and events to categories. to cardinal vowel 3 ([ε]) and on to cardinal vowel 4 ([a]). which is said to be produced with the tongue as high and as far front as it can go in the mouth without friction being created (and with the lips unrounded). practical way of visualising the vowel space and the available range of vowel qualities. such as cardinal vowel 1. The cardinal vowel system of description is based on the idea that one can distinguish the highlow dimension from the front-back dimension. Many believe that categorisation is central to perception. See normalisation. a spoon. In decoding the speech signal. But it has equally often been pointed out that this seems not to be physiologically true. cardinal vowel 1 ([i]) through cardinal vowel 2 ([e]). we can hear a given speech sound as an instance of a [t] or an [s]. to the categorisation of a given speech sound to a particular category. Welsh and Breton. the body of the tongue descends through a series of equidistant steps. say.

poor and there. centralised vowels are transcribed with a dieresis. The term is also used. transcribed as [u]. See lateral. yesterday. a centralised version of [ε] found in many Scottish speakers’ pronunciation of the stressed vowel in words such as eleven. checked vowel Another name for the set of English vowels which are known as short or lax vowels. [υə] and [εə]. as in [e ]. An example of a centralised vowel in English is the [ε] of Scottish English. as in here. The RP centring diphthongs are [ə]. rounded ‘u’-type sound produced in Scottish English. centralisation A vowel articulation is said to be centralised if it is produced closer to the central area of the vowel space than it might otherwise have been. seven. back vowels lie below the velum (soft palate). Noam An American linguist who has worked in the second half of the twentieth century and in the . it lies between high back [u] and high front [y]. as in the alveolar fricative [s]. which denotes a centralised version of the cardinal vowel [e]. In the IPA. checked syllable Synonym for a closed syllable. for sounds in which the air escapes down a groove in the tongue. and central vowels lie below where the two meet. next. in the description of consonants. centring diphthong A diphthong in which a transition is made towards the centre of the vowel space.26 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY central The area of the vowel space between front and back. Most of the fricatives and approximants in English have central escape of air. in the area where schwa is produced. Chomsky. Front vowels lie below the hard palate. An example of a central vowel is the high.

thus establishing the framework known as SPE phonology. the /l/ phoneme is realised as a ‘dark l’ in the rhyme of syllables. but are also not pronounced with a retraction of the body of the tongue. where the superscript diacritic ‘ ’ denotes palatalisation. by colonising Roman soldiers and by merchants. ‘clear l’. One would then have three main types of ‘l’: ‘dark l’. ‘clear l’ This term could be used to denote a lateral that is palatalised. he co-authored The Sound Pattern of English (SPE) with Morris Halle. In the field of phonology. His name is closely associated with generative linguistics. and was used as a lingua franca among scholars throughout Europe for centuries after the demise of the Roman Empire. Classical Latin is usually distinguished from Vulgar Latin. and an ‘l’ which is neither clear nor dark (neither velarised nor palatalised). In Received Pronunciation (RP). widely seen as the starting point for generative phonology.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 27 early twenty-first century. they are not ‘dark l’s’. Many authors refer to this ‘non-dark’ l as ‘clear l’. He is known for advocating Rationalism in linguistics. clash avoidance see stress clash avoidance Classical Latin The standard language spoken in Ancient Rome. Latin was imposed on the inhabitants of the Roman Empire. as in the ‘l’ sound found in the Scottish English of the Highlands of Scotland. It is Vulgar Latin that is taken to be the source from which the present-day Romance languages evolved. the term is used to refer to ‘l’ sounds which are not palatalised. in words such as [l l ] (lull). . However. but it is not ‘dark’ in onset position. the version of Latin spoken by the lay person.

Nor do they seem to have the same status as affixes. A clitic which precedes its ‘host’ (such as the J’ and the t’ in J’t’aime) is called a proclitic. but they are unlike full words in that they typically do not receive the tonic accent in an intonation group. clicks see airstream mechanisms clitic A unit which is intermediate between a word and an affix. te and le in Je te le rends (‘I’m giving it back to you’). units such as the n’t in expressions like couldn’t are said to be clitics. as in J’t’aime (‘I love you’). such as the elision of the schwa vowel. among other things. often conveyed in spelling via the use of apostrophes. Nick An American phonologist with French (and British) connections who has worked in the USA. feature geometry. Since 1992. . the words to and be are ‘fused’ with want to form a single trochaic foot which may then function as a single word.28 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Clements. the leader of a phonology research team in Paris. He is a specialist in the phonology of various African languages who has worked on. pronounced [ tεm].in redemander (‘ask again’). from want to be. They also undergo reduction processes. In English. cliticisation A process in which full words are ‘demoted’ to the status of clitics. which do not seem to have the status of full words such as livre in Je te rends ton livre. such as the prefix re. In the expression wannabe. A clitic which follows its ‘host’ (such as n’t) is called an enclitic. he has worked extensively in both the generative phonology tradition and in the Laboratory Phonology community. distinctive features in the world’s languages. nasality. tone and the phonetics/phonology interface. as in the French pronouns je. Such units are not affixes.

Those who support a cognitive view of phonology argue that phonology is about investigating certain mental states and processes. such as phonological representations understood as representations in the mind. On this view. yielding the palato-alveolar sound [ʃ]. a sequence of alveolar [s] followed by the palatal approximant [j] will often result in coalescence. as in [mʃə] for miss you. Cockney The popular term for broad varieties of London English. since such speakers switch from one phonological system to another during a single utterance. Also known as reciprocal assimilation.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 29 close approximation see degree of stricture close juncture see juncture closed syllable see syllable coalescence A process in which two sounds assimilate to each other. In English. cognition Mental states and processes. cognitive Relating to cognition. in which the speaker switches from one language to another during a single sentence or intonation group. This is relevant for phonological investigation. the study of phonological representations and processes is a part of cognitive science. coda see syllable code-switching A phenomenon found among both adult and child bilinguals. .

compensatory lengthening A process in which a segment undergoes elision and an adjacent segment lengthens. Most generative linguists assume that there is a phonological component within a speaker’s linguistic competence. Very often. ‘competence’ means ability to do something well. In the history of French. Chomsky is using an everyday term in a specialist sense. It is important to bear in mind that. as in the noun phrase the dog in the sentence John kicked the dog. and a preceding vowel is lengthened. to a later form with an elided /s/ and a lengthened /ε/: [bε:tə]. Many believe that it is possible to gain scientific understanding of at least some aspects of the human mind. In this example. Chomsky denies that knowing a language is knowing how to do something. ability to perform certain tasks to a certain level. complement A term used in syntax to refer to obligatory syntactic constituents.30 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY cognitive science The science of mental states and processes. In everyday language. in speaking of linguistic competence. as in the transition from Old French beste (‘beast’). It designates a speaker’s linguistic knowledge. pronounced [bεstə]. it is a coda consonant which is elided. as opposed to the use of that knowledge. reflected in the present-day spelling bête. the noun phrase the dog is said to be the complement of . See I-language. where the circumflex historically marked the length of the vowel. competence A term associated with the work of Noam Chomsky and thus widely used in generative linguistics. E-language and performance. vowel + /s/ + consonant sequences underwent elision of the /s/ and compensatory lengthening of the preceding vowel.

Many phonologists postulate a compound stress rule for English in which the first of the two elements is the most prominent. For instance. complementary distribution see Phonemic Principle complete closure see degree of stricture complex segment Another term for a contour segment. being a transitive verb. as in the word /k t/ (cat). the nucleus of the syllable is said to require a complement in the form of a coda consonant. The verb kicked. in this case known as a direct object.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 31 the verb kicked. concrete A term often used to describe postulated phonological representations which are said to be close to the . eyelid and mole-hill. Phonologists who postulate parallelisms between syntactic structure and phonological structure have argued that certain phonological constituents are complements. must be followed by a complement. coda consonants are said by some to be complements of the vowels which precede them. where the coda consonant /t/ is said to be the complement of the vowel / /. The criteria for establishing whether a given sequence of two words in English is a phrase or a compound include both phonological and semantic phenomena. But there are large numbers of English two-part compounds in which the second element is the most prominent. compound A word made from two or more other words. Frameworks which have adopted the notion of complement in phonology include Dependency Phonology. Government Phonology and Head-Driven Phonology. Simple two-part cases in English include words such as textbook.

e. unlike vowels. Consonants can be defined in terms of their position in syllable structure. See realisation. but. as in [wpu] for ‘whistle’. a phenomenon in which a consonant is altered so as to harmonise with. i. share with vowels a stricture of open approximation. as in [ ɒ ] or [dɒd] for ‘dog’. close approximation and open approximation. become more similar to. The harmonising consonant may become identical to another consonant. There is a general tendency for coronals to cede place of articulation to non-coronals. The distinction is closely related to the difficult problem of the possible distinction between phonology and phonetics. often called semiconsonants. consonant harmony In child speech. It is often opposed to abstract. whereas vowels occupy the head of the nucleus position in a syllable (but see syllabic consonants). See sonority hierarchy. thus harmonising with the initial labial (the [w]).32 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY phonetic form of words as they are pronounced by speakers. where a coronal sound (the [s]) in the adult target is uttered as a labial ([p]). Child consonant harmony usually involves major place of articulation. Consonants are produced with three different degrees of stricture: complete closure. Some consonants. such as the glides [w] and [j]. do not occupy the head of the syllable nucleus. another consonant. There is a continuum among the set of human speech sounds from most consonantal to most vowel-like. Connectionism see neural nets consonant Consonants are a subset of the set of human speech sounds. they usually occupy the onset and coda positions. as in [wpu] and .

the plural ending for nouns is -or. where the /l/ is in coda position. There is also variation in the shape of words which undergo consonant harmony. with deletion of the -a. conspiracy Two or more distinct phonological processes can ‘conspire’ to bring about a specific pattern. the resulting form is flickor. In Swedish. In adult phonology. The definite article in Swedish is the suffix -an. so that . Individual children vary a great deal in the extent to which they produce harmonised forms. The term is also used as a distinctive feature. the /a/ in the suffix is deleted. consonant harmony for major place of articulation is unattested. For instance. In London English. consonant-like. When this is added to a noun root ending in a vowel. as in [gεw] for ‘girl’. but not in CVCV words. with the palato-alveolar /ʃ/ harmonising with the alveolar /s/. but there are many phenomena involving harmony for minor place of articulation. an /l/ in the rhyme of a syllable is frequently realised as a [w] sound. some individual children will have harmony in CVC and CVCVC words. but the reverse is attested. When this is added to a root ending in a vowel. where the underlying representation /j-iʃ-mas/ (I’m rolling along’) becomes [jismas]. as in Navajo sibilant harmony. as in [dɒd]. consonant system see Phonemic Principle consonant vocalisation A process whereby a consonant articulation becomes vowel-like.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 33 [ ɒ ]. so that when the plural suffix is added to a root such as flicka. consonantal Pertaining to consonants. the final vowel of the root deletes.

which postulated both rules and constraints. a transition occurred in the 1990s from the SPE tradition.34 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY flicka becomes flickan. which are ways of stating which sequences of segments may occur in specific parts of a syllable in a given language (for instance. Examples are phonotactic constraints. the sequence in the park forms a constituent known as a prepositional phrase. which attempts to state all phonological generalisations in terms of constraints. Phonologists also postulate metrical constituents of words and phrases. constituent A term used in both syntax and phonology. but they ‘conspire’ to block sequences of two vowels across a morpheme boundary. constricted glottis A feature used to denote the closure of the vocal cords found in glottal stops and glottalised sounds. the onset sequence /pn/ violates English phonotactic constraints). In syntax. See degree of stricture. Constraints also play a central role in the Theory of Constraints and Repair Strategies proposed by Carole Paradis. to Optimality Theory. which is easily interpreted as process. it denotes a set of words which go together to form a structural unit. The notion of ’constraint’ is essentially more declarative than the notion of rule. syllables are often said to be composed of the two main constituents onset and rhyme. In phonology. the main such constituent being the metrical foot. These are distinct processes. . constraint A way of stating an observed generalisation. In the history of generative phonology. In the sentence Jim is in the park. constriction Synonym for stricture.

In the field of developmental disorders in child language acquisition. contrastive function see phoneme contrastive stress A term used to refer to the placement of tonics to highlight a contrast. one could place the tonic on John. who went to the pub. thus contrasting John with some other person. Prenasalised stops are also often analysed as contour segments. since they consist of a stop closure followed by a fricative release. content word Another term for words of a lexical category. The ‘neutral’ or unmarked tonic placement in the sentence John went to the pub would have the tonic on pub. and not someone else. . occurring in sequence. since it is the last lexical item. Annette KarmiloffSmith’s work is constructivist. Pre-aspirated stops in some languages may be analysed this way too. a well-known constructivist is Michael Tomasello. the work of Marilyn Vihman is constructivist. Constructivists reject the Chomskyan conception of the child’s linguistic development. In the field of child syntax.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 35 constructivism An approach to child language acquisition which takes the child to be actively constructing his/her linguistic knowledge. Affricates are often said to be contour segments. The terms ‘contrastive intonation’ or ‘contrastive tonic placement’ would seem more appropriate than ‘contrastive stress’. In the field of child phonology. contour segment A segment in which there are two distinct subparts. But if one were seeking to emphasise the fact that it was John.

of the tongue. it is common to try to establish whether a given sociolinguistic parameter. correlates with the presence of a given pronunciation feature. rather than the crown. It is often said. Various theories of distinctive features make use of [coronal] as a feature. for example. or pitch movement. increased loudness. 4 ([a]).36 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY cooing A term used by some child phonology experts to describe the first comfort sounds. Some languages rely more on pitch movement than duration to signal word stress. These sounds are normally produced in response to adults smiling at and talking to the child. which are all produced using the blade of the tongue. corner vowels The four corner points in the cardinal vowel chart: cardinal vowel 1 ([i]). that occurrence of pre-aspirated [t] in Tyneside English correlates with age. while others rely equally on both. uttered in the 2–4month age period. we speak of the blade. since it is used mostly by young working-class women. 5 ([ɑ]) and 8 ([u]). for some reason. correlate A term used to denote the relationship between some phonological phenomenon and its phonetic realisation. such as age or social class. correlation In sociophonetic inquiry. alveolar and postalveolar consonants. The word has the same root as crown and coronation but. for example. We may say. The term is used as a verb in work on sociophonetic variation. that the phonetic correlates of word stress are increased duration. coronal A term used to subsume dental. such as non-rhotic . social class and gender.

In Classical Latin and Vulgar Latin.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 37 speech. degree of nonrhoticity correlates with the social class of the speaker. the language becomes less simplified than the pidgin. Some ‘dark l’ sounds may have a retraction of the body of the tongue which is not raised towards the velum. but is withdrawn . which may form a structure of open approximation with the velum. creole When children are exposed to a pidgin language as their first language during the language acquisition period. or simple. in which the initial vowel is the countertonic vowel and the second vowel receives primary stress. They are found universally in the babbling stage of child development. In New York City English. See tonic vowel. D ‘dark l’ An informal term used to denote a lateral that has a secondary articulation involving the body of the tongue. with no coda consonant. as in the word amare (‘to love’). creolisation see creole CV syllable A syllable consisting of a single consonant in the onset position and a single vowel in the nucleus. resulting in velarisation of the lateral. This process is known as creolisation. countertonic vowel A vowel which receives secondary stress. word-initial vowels which did not bear primary stress received a secondary stress. usually the back of the tongue. Syllables of this sort are often assumed to be the most basic. Some languages have phonotactic constraints which allow only CV syllables. sorts of syllable.

Here. It is sometimes claimed. declarative phonology A phonological model is declarative if it states phonological generalisations in such a way as to avoid any appeal to the notion of derivation. without being raised. The British accent referred to as Received Pronunciation (RP) has ‘dark l’ in the rhyme of syllables. See ‘clear l’. as can be seen in the RP pronunciation of words such as lull: [l ]. in that the phonological representations postulated in declarative models are said to represent surface forms ‘directly’. This kind of approach is said to be declarative. The dynamic way leans on the notion of phonological processes. but the /l/ in coda position of the rhyme is a ‘dark l’. the /l/ in the onset position is not dark. The static way involves stating what the well-formed phonological structures are in a given language (phonotactic constraints are an example). but not in the onset position in syllables.38 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY towards the back of the oral cavity. Default values of features are the values that are supplied to . in models which are said to be declarative. declarative A distinction is often made between an essentially static way of conceiving of phonological generalisations. declination see downdrift default A term used to denote an unmarked state of affairs. The placement of the tonic in English on the last lexical item is the default placement. that phonological representations in those models are more concrete than those in derivational models. such as the idea of syllabification processes which actively build syllable structure. and an essentially dynamic way of stating those generalisations.

the prefix un. Some phonologists have therefore postulated default rules to supply feature [voiced] to sonorants. degree of stricture The extent to which airflow is obstructed in the production of a sound. But the word is pronounced with a nongeminate [m]: [mə təɹiəl]. The unmarked voicing state for sonorants in human languages is that they are voiced. Examples are the [p] in open. which are left unspecified for voicing state in underlying representations. with a fake geminate. Complete closure represents the highest degree of stricture: the airflow is blocked completely. but the airflow is not completely blocked. In the English word immaterial. Examples are the [θ] in thin. heard as audible friction. Rather.is added to the root natural. it escapes through a small space. Examples . the [f] in fin. resulting in the pronunciation [ n n tʃəɹəl]. Sounds produced this way are called fricatives. Close approximation constitutes a less extreme degree of stricture: the articulators come into close contact. with a fake geminate. and not as [mmə təɹiəl]. Sounds produced this way are called stops or plosives.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 39 underspecified representations if no process has applied to provide a non-default value. the [s] in sin and the [ʃ] in shin. causing turbulence. the [t] in butter and the [k] in bucket. Three degrees of stricture are often recognised. degemination A process in which a geminate segment is simplified to become non-geminate. where degemination does not take place.is added to the adjective material. Sounds produced this way are called approximants and vowels. the prefix in. This is in contrast to words such as unnatural. Open approximation is an even less extreme degree of stricture: the articulators do not come close enough to cause friction.

and the vowels [i:] and [ɑ:] in see and far in certain varieties of English. as in the mor´ pheme /vilgoc / (‘moisture’) which is realised with a [t] in the adjective [vilgotn ] (‘moist’). In the early 1970s. he runs a phonology research laboratory in Paris. deletion A term used to refer to the loss (elision) of a segment or syllable. Anderson. Dental stops are also widely attested. where the subscript diacritic indicates that the articulation is dental. /j/ and /n/ are realised as alveolar [t]. François A French phonologist who works in the tradition of generative phonology.40 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY are the approximants [j] and [w] in yes and go. With Nick Clements. Dell. Degree of stricture is also known as manner of articulation. This phenomenon is attested in many varieties of English. as in the pronunciation [t ŋ] for thing. in which the head-dependent . usually as a result of a process of ´ ´ assimilation. Dell approached the phonology of French from the perspective of SPE phonology. the palatal phonemes /c /. dental Sounds which are dental involve an articulation between the tip of the tongue and the upper teeth. He is also known for his later work on the phonology of the Berber language. Dependency Phonology A framework associated with the linguist John M. [d] and [n] respectively ´ when followed by coronal segments. See TH-Stopping. depalatalisation A process whereby palatal sounds become non-palatal. In Polish. An example is the voiceless dental fricative at the end of the English word teeth: [ti:θ].

in which one level is derived from the other. It often . and between the syllables within a foot. while the other is not. often via the ordered application of a set of rules. A simple example would be a phonemic model in which the phonetic level is derived from the phonemic level. derived see derivation derived contrast One often finds minimal pairs in which one member of the pair is morphologically complex. In this framework. the /e/ phoneme often has an [eə] allophone in closed syllables.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 41 relation is central. and which map one level on to another. between the constituents within a syllable. dependent see head derivation Models of phonological organisation which posit more than one level of representation. since it appeals to the idea of postulating two levels of representation (underlying representations and surface forms) and deriving one from the other. as in the derivation of the phonetic representation [p υ ] from the phonemic representation /pυl/ (pull). as in same and daze: [seəm] and [deəz]. in the characterisation of segmental structure. rather than binary-valued features. contain appeal to the notion of a derivation. An example is SPE phonology. derivational phonology Any model of phonology which appeals to the notion of a derivation. Dependency Phonology uses elements. SPE phonology is derivational. Dependency relations are postulated to hold between elements within segments. elements cluster together to form gestures. In Northern Irish English.

Such contrasts seem distinct from non-derived contrasts such as [get] (gate) and [gεt] (get). diachrony From the Ancient Greek meaning ‘through time’. devoicing A process in which an underlyingly voiced phoneme is realised as voiceless. diachronic Relating to diachrony. When one adds the plural suffix to nouns such as day. The diachronic phonology of a language is the study of how its phonology has changed during its history. ˜ ˜ with a voiceless uvular fricative. the contrast is derived from a morphological process (here. the pronunciation tends to retain the [ε:] allophone of the singular: [dε:z] (days). as seen in the form [ʁadəs] (‘of the wheel’). Final devoicing involves the devoicing of voiced obstruents in wordfinal or syllable-final position. which is underlyingly /ʁad/. as in day: [dε:].42 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY has an [ε:] allophone in open syllables. This latter kind of devoicing is a form of assimilation. as in the case of the French voiced uvular fricative /ʁ/. as in the German word [ʁat] (‘wheel’). Such contrasts are often referred to as derived contrasts. Consonants may be devoiced because they are adjacent to a voiceless sound. the addition of the plural suffix). Opposed to synchrony. The French word train (‘train’) is /tʁε/ phonologically. One thus finds minimal pairs such as [deəz] (daze) vs [dε:z] (days). despite the fact that the vowel is in a closed syllable in days. but [tχε] phonetically. . which is devoiced in onset clusters when preceded by a voiceless stop. Also known as marginal contrasts. See paradigm uniformity effect. Studies in the diachrony of a language are studies of the way it has changed over time.

for instance. but this is not a diphthong. as in the English word [ba] (buy). such as the one we have just seen. Some diacritics are superscript diacritics. Transitions from one vowel quality to another across syllable boundaries are not diphthongs.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 43 diacritic A visual symbol used in transcriptions to denote some phonetic property. as in the case of the velarisation diacritic used to represent ‘dark l’ and other velarised sounds. Direct Syntax Hypothesis A claim that syntactic structure may directly affect phonological processes. English [si:ŋ] (seeing) has a transition from [i:] to []. Some diacritics run through the symbols in question. diphthongisation A process in which a monophthong becomes a diphthong. For example. the monophthongs /e/ and /o/ have undergone diphthongisation in many varieties of English to become. they are placed below the relevant symbol. Others are subscript diacritics. [e] and [əυ]. for example. full in English is often transcribed as [fυ ]. Some have argued. Referred to informally as breaking. they are written above the relevant symbol. An example is the ‘ ’ diacritic used to denote aspiration in voiceless stops. since the transition does not take place within a single nucleus. as in the English word tip: [t p]. as in the case of the diacritic for Advanced Tongue Root: [e] denotes an [e] with ATR. although the IPA now represents velarised consonants with a superscript diacritic: [fυl ] dialect see accent diphthong A vowel sound in which there is a transition from one vowel quality to another within a single syllable nucleus. that Liaison in French is triggered .

Disharmony can also be induced by the presence of neutral vowels and opaque vowels. A process whereby two adjacent sounds become less similar. . Dispersion Theory The claim that vowel phonemes tend to be dispersed across the vowel space. dissimilation The opposite of assimilation. the more unlike each other the vowels will be. a sequence of a fricative followed by a stop. say. so that a language with. as in les amis (‘the friends’): [lezami]. since they are visualised as three points on a triangle. in the history of Greek. only three vowel phonemes will have maximally distinct vowel qualities. typically /i/. but these tended to become. For instance. The idea is that. as is the case here. where the word is from French chauffeur ([ʃof ʁ]). disharmony Many languages which have vowel harmony contain words with vowels from different harmonic sets. the fewer the vowel contrasts in a given language. rather than. in which the latent consonant is pronounced since the definite article and the noun form a syntactic constituent. a sequence of two fricatives in an onset was permitted in Ancient Greek. over time. as in Hungarian [sofør] ‘driver’. say. /e/ and /ε/. /i/. This minimal vowel triangle plays a central role in element-based theories such as Dependency Phonology. as in Ancient Greek [fθinos] (‘cheap’) becoming [ftinos] in Modern Greek. The three vowels in question are sometimes referred to as the point vowels.44 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY by sequences of words which form a close syntactic unit. /u/ and /a/. which has a vowel from the back set and a vowel from the front set. Such cases are often loanwords.

In such languages.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 45 distinctive features see features distribution see Phonemic Principle distributionalism A term associated with American Structuralism. Such suffixes are said to be dominant. . where the aspectual suffix undergoes ATR harmony. Examples of postulated domains are the syllable. dorsal A term used to describe sounds in which the body of the tongue (the dorsum) features. the foot and the phonological word. In phonology. dominant/recessive harmony A form of vowel harmony in which a property of a vowel in some specific affix is spread throughout the root to which it attaches. phonological processes apply. as in [a-mυj-]. where the root /mυj/ has RTR vowels. whose practitioners focused on establishing the distribution of linguistic units in order to come up with an analysis. or at the edge of which. and as a node in theories of feature geometry. its ATR value spreads throughout the root: [ak-imuj-eeni]. there will be other suffixes which are not dominant. domain A stretch of phonological material within which. as in Turkana. but when the habitual suffix /eeni/ is added. The term subsumes velar and uvular sounds. Such suffixes are said to be recessive. this meant examining the distribution of segment types in order to assign them to phonemes. It is used as a feature in theories of distinctive features. or across which. disyllabic A synonym for bisyllabic.

is close in pitch level to the first low tone. The Dravidian languages are spoken in Southern India. on the word na. the second high tone is ´ lower than the first high tone. Malayalam. The last high tone. In the Kwa language Igbo. Instances of downstepping may well derive historically from processes of downdrift. They include Tamil.46 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY downdrift A phenomenon found in tone languages in which the tones become progressively lower as the utterance goes on. In the Kwa language Twi. ` downstep A phenomenon found in tone languages. marked here with the superscript diacritics ´ and `: o na a wa unja ´gwè (‘He is trying ´ ` ´ŋ ` ´ ` to ride a bicycle’). ` ´ ` so that the cause of the downstepping is not phonetically present in the utterance. or even a lower pitch. The underlying vowel /ɔ / is then deleted. Also known as declination. These languages do not belong to the Indo-European language family. It has been downstepped by the underlying low tone in the underlying representation /m´ ɔ bu /. Toda. in which words of the lexical . the following sentence has a sequence of alternating high and low tones. than a word uttered with a low tone early in the utterance. Telugu and Kannada. DRESS Raising The name for a phenomenon found in New Zealand English. drag chain see vowel shift Dravidian A language family. in the phonetic sequence [m´ bu] (‘my stone’). so that a word with a high tone which is uttered near the end of the utterance may have the same pitch. on the first syllable of ´gwè. whereby a high tone has been lowered because of the effect of a preceding low tone which is not phonetically realised.

There are also problems in deciding where exactly a given segment starts when one examines a spectrogram. while words of the lexical set DRESS move into the space of the lexical set KIT.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 47 set DRESS are raised from the low mid [ε] position to the high [] position. Durand. but is mostly known as a phonologist who has worked on a variety of languages. depending on context and rate of speech. Long vowels are said to be articulated with greater duration than short vowels. so that words such as desk are pronounced [dsk]. before returning to his native France. Durand has worked extensively on machine translation. duration A term used to describe the amount of time taken to articulate a given segment. . DRESS Raising forms part of a vowel shift in New Zealand English. Some phonologists distinguish length as a property of phonological representations with the brute phonetic duration of a given segment uttered on a given occasion. Jacques A contemporary French linguist who spent much of his career in Britain. especially French phonology. Thus the claim that check-in desk in New Zealand English sounds like chicken disk. Words of the lexical set TRAP are raised from [ ] to low mid [ε]. Geminate consonants are said to be articulated with greater duration than non-geminates. The term is clearly relative. including the phonology of Midi French (Southern French). and words in the latter set have a vowel that is shifted back to the high central unrounded vowel [ ]. The main problem associated with measuring duration is that it varies from speaker to speaker. but the phonetic duration of segments is more or less measurable in milliseconds.

since they suggest that graphophonemic knowledge is modular in nature. but the capacity of individuals to access their graphophonemics may remain intact. the damage is the other way round: affected individuals can recognise whole written word forms. In surface dyslexia. ejectives see airstream mechanisms E-language External language. one makes a saving in articulatory effort by keeping the lips closed in the production of the nasal stop. These phenomena are important for phonologists. Rather. Ease of articulation stands in a relation of tension to the need to sustain oppositions which signal differences in meaning. ‘German’ and ‘Japanese’ are sociopolitical notions which do not constitute the object of linguistic inquiry.48 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY dyslexia A condition which may be present from birth or which may be acquired as the result of brain injury of the sort induced by a stroke. In cases of phonological dyslexia. notions such as ‘French’. E ease of articulation The tendency that human beings have to produce utterances in which articulatory effort is diminished. if one utters an /np/ sequence in English sequences such as /n pυt/ (input) as [mpυt]. but cannot access their grapho-phonemic knowledge. the ability to recognise whole written word forms is damaged. See avoidance of homophony and Martinet. Dyslexia is a reading dysfunction. the object of inquiry is said to be I-language. Two main subtypes are identified. In the view of Noam Chomsky. Assimilations of various sorts are examples. Chomsky .

emphatic consonants Consonants found in the Semitic languages which are apical. as in Cockney [ pi] for happy. When French-speakers (who have no /h/ phoneme in their native language) speak English. The pharyngealisation can spread to other segments in a word containing an emphatic consonant. often in the pharynx. In many varieties of English. it is usually unstressed vowels which are elided. it is not pronounced. but which have a secondary articulation. elision A process in which a segment is not pronounced. Empiricism A tradition in the history of philosophy in which human knowledge is said to emerge from the interaction of the mind with the mind-external world. Empiricism has traditionally denied the existence of . words such as [f mli] (family) can be pronounced with an elided []:[f mli].A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 49 also argues that languages defined as sets of sentences constitute E-language. often pronounced [sks]. The process is often referred to as deletion. the word for ‘friend’ is [s a a ib]. elements see feature values elide When a speech sound is elided. as in [sksθs] (sixths). In this case. the informal term ‘hdropping’ is often used. Consonants too may be elided. where the diacritic [ ] indicates pharyngealisation. In English. they often elide the [h] sounds in words such as happy and hair. In Cairene Arabic. For the elision of [h] in English. the pharyngealisation spreads from the emphatic consonant [s ] to the following two vowels.

Empiricism is traditionally distinguished from Rationalism. An Empiricist account of phonology claims that phonological knowledge is internalised from the environment. Pierre A French phonologist who is known for combining an investigation of sociophonetic variation in speakers of French with an autosegmental approach to Liaison in French. such as innate concepts. empty onset see syllable enclitic see clitic Encrevé. The inserted segment is said to be epenthetic. enhancement The idea that a phonological contrast can be perceptually reinforced. the contrast can be enhanced if the back vowel is rounded and the front vowel is unrounded. heightened or enhanced by the addition of some extra articulatory gesture to one member or members of the sounds in contrast. An example of an epenthetic consonant is the Intrusive ‘r’ of non-rhotic varieties of English. via social interaction with other human beings. as in law and order: [lɔ:ɹənɔ:də]. also known as Nativism. If a back vowel contrasts with a front vowel. epenthetic consonant see epenthesis . An example of an epenthetic vowel is the epenthetic [ ] in Scottish pronunciations of words such as umbrella: [ mb ɹε ].50 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY innate cognitive content. environment see phonemic Principle epenthesis The insertion of a segment in a sequence of segments.

followed by an unstressed syllable. followed by an unstressed syllable. exemplar theory An approach to the mental lexicon whose central claim is that words are stored in the mind with all of the phonetic detail perceived by the speaker/hearer. or exemplars.u t] (‘near to death’) ˜ exemplifies this. that recursion is not an absolute universal of human languages. words which are frequently heard will have a large number of traces. Dan A linguist who works on South American Indian languages. which will form a dense exemplar cloud in the mind. It has a (secondary) stressed syllable. there is a tendency towards sequences of alternating stressed and unstressed syllables. among other things. including all redundant material. Such a word is said to be eurhythmic. Thus. The idea is that each time a speaker/hearer hears a word.tul. Everett. a trace of it is stored in the mind with all of the phonetic detail included. followed by an unstressed syllable. with every alternate syllable being stressed.ka. morphology and syntax. Everett is a controversial figure since he claims. The Malay word [ sa.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 51 epenthetic vowel see epenthesis European Structuralism see structuralist linguistics eurhythmic see eurhythmy eurhythmy In many rhythmic systems. Everett is known for his work in phonology. Such sequences exemplify eurhythmy. followed by a (primary) stressed syllable. Words which are heard infrequently will . particularly the language Piraha. m ã. followed by another (secondary) stressed syllable. ɾa.

of visual and acoustic images.52 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY have weaker representation in the mind. extrasyllabicity One or more segments are said to be extrasyllabic if they are not integrated into syllable structure. Exemplar theory assumes that the human mind has a vast capacity for storage. It has been argued that. it is possible to simplify the statement of the word stress assignment algorithm. as in English [aυ] (sometimes transcribed [aw]). F fake geminate see geminate falling diphthong a diphthong in which the most prominent element is the first one. The floating consonants which participate in Liaison in French are often said to be extrasyllabic. Phonologists who adopt exemplar theory deny that underlying representations in the mind are stripped of all predictable information. exponence see realisation external sandhi see sandhi extrametricality Segments or syllables are said to be extrametrical if they ‘do not count’ in the calculation of syllabic or foot structure. If the final segment in a verb such as astonish is extrametrical. where the off-glide [w] is less . if one discounts the final segment in English words. then the final syllable ceases to be heavy and the primary stress will be assigned to the preceding syllable. Supposedly extrametrical material occurs at the edges of phonological constituents. and subsequent recognition.

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 53 prominent than the [a]. as in [+round]. Some phonological theories. a feature said to characterise speech sounds which have lip rounding. coronal and dorsal group together in this way. The most prominent element is often referred to as the head of the diphthong. so that sounds with lip rounding have the element [labial]. such as [round]. and replace them with elements which are said to be either present or absent. On this view. the features [ATR] and [RTR] are seen as grouping together under a Tongue Root node. [high]. feature contrasts are privative in nature (see Trubetzkoy). feature geometry The study of the way different features group together. and presence of [ labial] vs presence of [ labial] on the other hand. seek to dispose of such binary-valued features. such as Dependency Phonology. feature values Some phonologists who postulate that segments are bundles of features argue that features have a binary ‘ ’ or ‘ ’ value. . while sounds which lack lip rounding are characterised as not possessing that element. Speech sounds which are said to possess the negative feature value [ round] are characterised as lacking lip rounding. It is an open question whether there is any profound conceptual distinction between presence vs absence of an element such as [labial] on the one hand. Similarly. Many believe that the major place of articulation features labial. and that this grouping may be represented using a tree diagram in which those features are seen as nodes branching from an Oral Place node. features Most phonologists agree that segments can be decomposed into features.

among others. such as the contrast between voiced and voiceless phonemes. which was supported by his contemporary Daniel Jones. final devoicing see devoicing Firth. An example of a prosody is the nasality which one finds in the language Terena. means ‘my brother’. for instance. Firth argued that phonological properties such as this often had as their domain. the features [high]. R. and this led him to question the validity of the notion phoneme. [front] and [back]. In cases such as this.54 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY [low]. and then at the School of Oriental and African Studies in London. but larger units such as the syllable. nasality appears to be a purely suprasegmental morpho-syntactic property. (1890–1960) A British linguist based at University College London. and thus anti-mentalism. J. in which words such as [ajo] (‘his brother’) become [ãjo which ˜]. possesses. not single segments. among others. the features [round]. There is a strong element of instrumentalism in Firth’s ideas. He adopted a polysystemic approach to phonological analysis and postulated prosodies. . When phonologists speak of distinctive features. the [k] consonant is said to possess. which are parallel to the autosegments of Autosegmental Phonology. so that the [u] vowel. they mean features which function to signal phonological contrasts. [high] and [back]. [back] and [voiceless]. Firth was sceptical about the extent to which the speech signal can be segmented into individual speech sounds. Firth also appears to have adopted the thesis that phonological objects lack intrinsic phonetic content. Similarly. See also cardinal vowels. the phonological word and the intonation group.

some phonologists insist on distinguishing them. Also known as a tap. a [t] sound or a [d] sound has come to be produced as a flap (also known as a tap). During the production of [ɾ]. the tongue tip/blade taps briefly against the alveolar ridge. or extrasyllabic.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 55 Firthian Phonology see Firth flap A speech sound type in which an active articulator engages in a brief contact with a passive articulator. but that it may be linked to an empty onset in . The claim is that there is a word-final /r/ in words such as far in such varieties. The Linking ‘r’ of non-rhotic varieties of English is sometimes analysed as a floating consonant. flaps are said to be retroflex. historically. floating consonants Also known as latent consonants. Flapping A process in which. The words patting and padding in General American are typically produced with a tap: [p ɾŋ]. taps are said to involve a movement up and down of the upper surface of the tip/blade of the tongue against the alveolar ridge. or like an alveolar trill. and that it is floating. On this latter view. transcribed as [ɾ]. these are usually word-final consonants which are not realised unless they can occupy the onset position in a following word which would otherwise have an empty onset. but with only one tap of the tip/blade of the tongue against the passive articulator. which is rather like a short [d]. while taps are not. Although the IPA takes taps and flaps to be the same thing. while flaps are said to involve a back-front movement of the underside of the tongue tip/blade. as in Spanish pero (‘but’) or American English witty. Several varieties of English have an alveolar flap.

but that material is deleted. as in mes gants (‘my gloves’): [megɑ ]. the underlying sequence /tla wa/ (‘to cut in two’) contains a low tone ` ´ followed by a high tone. It is claimed that. which attaches to the preceding vowel in the word /agba /. underlying tones are postulated which in this case are attached to underlying segmental material. with a high tone on the second ` ` ` vowel of the first element. A process of vowel deletion deletes the first vowel. leaving the tone floating and potentially available to be connected with some other segmental material. ` ` In the second sense of the expression. its tone is not. while the [a] segment is deleted. Similarly. with a rising tone. Phonologists have postulated an underlying high floating tone. but are said to be unattached to any segmental material in those representations. seen as a . such as the /z/ of mes in mes amis (‘my friends’): [mezami]. Rather. ` ` ` ` But the expression ‘jaw of monkey’ is realised phonetically as [agbaáeŋwe]. it becomes a floating tone which then attaches to the remaining vowel to produce a rising tone. floating tones are postulated to be present in underlying representations. and the sequence is realised phonetically as [tlwa]. placed between the two words. In the Nigerian language Margi. there are two senses in which the expression is used. the ‘latent consonants’ which participate in the phenomenon of Liaison in French are said to be floating consonants. ˜ floating tones In the literature on tone languages.56 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY phrases such as far away. there are two low tones in the underlying representations of the words /agba / (‘jaw’) and /eŋwe/ (‘monkey’). meaning ‘of’. These floating consonants fail to be realised if the following word begins with a consonant. In the first of these. In the Central dialect of the Kwa language Igbo.

This can be achieved syntactically. If one wishes to highlight the word John in the sentence John went to the pub. so that the /t/ in tack is more strongly aspirated than the /t/ in witty. but the /t/ in attack does not undergo Flapping since it is in foot-initial position. ´ focalisation A process in which some element in a linguistic expression is highlighted. formalism Any conception of human language in general. or phonology in particular. foot see rhythm foot-initial A phonological process is said to occur in foot-initial position if the segment it affects is located at the beginning of a metrical foot. the /t/ in witty undergoes Flapping because it is located within a metrical foot. in which human language is not seen to be functionalist in nature (designed for the function of communication). In most varieties of English. aspiration is at its strongest in segments which are in foot-initial position. Also known as latent tones. foot-internal A phonological process is said to occur footinternally if it applies to a segment which is located within a metrical foot. whereas the /t/ in witty is in foot-internal position. Flapping in American English operates foot-internally. This places the focus on John. in the sense of having abstract formal . but is taken to be a formal object. usually using intonation. one can place the tonic on John. but it can also be achieved phonologically. The /t/ in tack is in foot-initial position.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 57 combination of the floating low tone and the underlying high tone in /wa /.

58

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

properties such as infinitude and recursion. The work of Noam Chomsky is formalist (anti-functionalist) in the sense that he denies that human language is designed for communication (instead, it is, for him, designed for thinking). The term is also used to denote any set of formal devices for the representation of linguistic structure, such as the formalisms known as metrical grids used in Metrical Phonology. Some linguists take the term to denote a way of describing human languages in terms of mathematical or logical formalisms. Some have argued that Chomsky’s work is not properly formalist, in the sense that it is not properly mathematical in nature. formant The cavities above the larynx, such as the pharynx and the oral cavity, act as amplifiers of the sounds created by the vibration of the vocal cords. Since all resonators have natural frequencies at which they will resonate, these cavities will resonate some frequencies, but not others. These resonances are called formants. fortis see lenis. See also fortition and aspiration fortition The opposite of lenition. A process whereby a segment becomes ‘stronger’, or more consonantal, moving up the sonority hierarchy. In the historical change known as Grimm’s Law, the voiced stops of Proto-Indo-European (PIE) became voiceless stops, as in the case of the PIE root gews (‘choose’), which became kiusan in Gothic. Processes of assimilation can induce fortition. Lumasaaba morphemes such as /li/ (‘a root’), with an initial /l/, are realised with a [d] when a nasal stop precedes the /l/, as in the form [zindi] (‘roots’). Here, the complete closure of the nasal

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

59

stop carries over on to the following sound, changing it from an approximant to a stop, which is said to be ‘stronger’ (more fortis) than a lateral approximant. frame theory of syllable structure A theory of how syllables emerge in child speech, proposed by Peter MacNeilage and his colleague Barbara Davis. The idea is that the consonant-vowel syllables found at the babbling stage of child development emerge from the rhythmic alternation of open and closed jaw, which in turn is said to have evolved from cyclic behaviour such as chewing in early primates. The open/closed jaw movement is said to provide the frame for such syllables, with the tongue and lips being carried by the jaw movement. With the tongue body in the neutral position, a sequence such as [bɐ] is produced, with a central low vowel; with the tongue fronted, a sequence such as [gɑ] is produced, with a front low vowel; and with the tongue body retracted, a sequence such as [gɑ] is produced, with a low back vowel. As the child develops, the tongue and lips begin to function as independent articulators. free syllable Synonym for an open syllable. free vowel Used in the analysis of English to refer to what are elsewhere known as the tense, or long, vowels in the vowel phoneme system of most varieties of English. The free vowel phonemes are all the vowel phonemes except the checked vowels /υ, , ɒ, , /. These latter vowels are also known as the lax vowels, or the short vowels of English. frequency of occurrence The frequency with which a given word is uttered. Two main sorts are distinguished. Token frequency denotes the frequency with which

60

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

tokens of a given word are uttered. The word went in English, which is an irregular past tense form, has a high token frequency; it is often uttered. Type frequency denotes the number of words belonging to a given type. Regular past tense verbs in English, such as cried, shouted and kicked, have high type frequency; the vast majority of English verbs have regular past tense forms. The distinction is central to usage-based phonology and the notion of productivity. fricative see degree of stricture front see features front of the tongue That part of the tongue which lies below the hard palate when the tongue is at rest. It really ought to be called the middle of the tongue, since it excludes the tip and the blade of the tongue, which lie at the very front of the tongue. frontness The property of being front (see features). Front vowels such as /i/ and /e/ have this property. Some phonologists, particularly those working with privative features, use the term ‘palatality’ as a synonym for frontness, to subsume both front vowels and consonant articulations made with the front of the tongue, the tip of the tongue and the blade of the tongue. function word A term used to refer to words of a grammatical category. Important for phonologists, since function words are often unstressed in human languages, and often fail to receive the tonic. functional category The same thing as grammatical category.

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

61

functional load The extent to which a phonemic contrast serves to sustain semantic contrast in a language, via minimal pairs. In English, the contrast between /ð/ and /θ/ is said to have a low functional load, since there are few minimal pairs based on that contrast, whereas the contrast between /p/ and /b/ is said to have a high functional load, since there are many minimal pairs which exhibit that contrast, such as pat vs bat, pin vs bin, etc. functionalism Any view of language in general or phonology in particular, in which language in general, and phonology in particular, is taken to be driven by a major function: that of the need for human beings to communicate. Usually distinguished from formalism. G Gallo-Romance The language spoken in ancient Gaul after the disintegration of the Roman Empire and before the emergence of Old French, roughly from the end of the fifty century AD until the middle of the ninth century. geminate A long, or double, sound, normally a consonant, as in Archi [lappus] (‘to throw’) or Finnish [poltta] (‘burn’). The constriction in such consonants is held for longer than for single, non-geminate, consonants. Geminates are often represented as being connected to two skeletal slots, or two moraic positions, in syllable structure. When a long consonant of this sort occurs within a morpheme, it is known as a true geminate. When two identical segments happen to occur adjacently across a morpheme boundary, as in Archi [k’ossas] (‘touch a knife’), they are referred to as a fake geminate.

and which differ from RPtype accents in several respects. or define certain sequences of symbols. the consonant undergoes gemination. Some argue that much of generative linguistics has ceased to be fully explicit. In early work in generative linguistics. and not belonging to the non-rhotic accents. such as the Boston accents. consonant undergoes lengthening to become a geminate consonant. ‘fully explicit’. non-geminate. but many linguists use it in exactly that way. quite distinct from the utterances produced in performance. talking of speakers generating utterances. General American (GA) A term used to designate a range of American accents (known as dialects in the USA) which are broadly similar. simply. so that an analysis or an entire grammar is said to be generative if it is fully explicit. thus the root /lətop/ suffix /an/ is pronounced [lətoppan] (‘explosion’). For instance. as in ‘produce electricity’. as an account of a speaker’s competence. It has its origins in a branch of mathematics known as formal language theory. generate A term used in generative linguistics. The term is often used to mean. or characterise. GA is defined as not being a Southern US accent. in which very explicit formal rules are said to generate.62 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY gemination A process whereby a single. The term was not intended to mean ‘produce’. The original idea was that a generative grammar. Among these differences is rhoticity and the existence of Flapping/ Tapping in GA. . in Malay. when a root ending in a single consonant combines with a suffix beginning with a vowel. found in the northeastern seaboard of the USA. generated a set of abstract expressions. this aspect of formal language theory was applied to human languages.

associated with the work of Noam Chomsky. as in French [jauʁt] (‘yoghurt’). while others believe that the advent of generative phonology represented a radical break with structuralist linguistics. Autosegmental Phonology and Optimality Theory. often associated with the work of Noam Chomsky. such as feature geometry. Some scholars see generative phonology as a continuation of structuralist linguistics. where the [j] is a palatal glide and the [w] is a labial-velar glide. unlike vowels. In Dependency Phonology. It is sometimes claimed that such segments can be considered as high . Generative phonology subsumes the SPE model. Lexical Phonology. It is generally agreed that the founding book in this tradition is SPE. In Articulatory Phonology. glide A name given to a class of sounds which are vowellike. laryngeal and supralaryngeal gestures are said to overlap in the stream of speech and in phonological representations. Geordie see Tyneside English gesture In certain models of the internal structure of segments. [wat] (‘watt’).A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 63 generative linguistics Designates various different approaches. and the articulatory gesture. generative phonology The phonological aspect of generative linguistics. phonological features are bundled together into subunits within the segment. do not occupy the head position in the nucleus of a syllable. to the study of language in which the term generate is central. but which. the two main subgroupings of features (elements) are the categorical gesture. which subsumes laryngeal features. which subsumes place of articulation in the oral cavity.

Glide formation is sometimes distinguished from glide insertion. and instead occupies the onset position of a syllable. glide insertion A process whereby the vowel articulation in a nucleus carries over into an empty onset to form a homorganic glide. with [a] as the head of the nucleus. preceding the head.64 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY vowels occupying positions outside of the head of the syllable nucleus. Other examples from French are /ty/ /e/ (the root ‘kill’ infinitive suffix). Where a glide follows the head within a nucleus. it is referred to as an off-glide. since they are vowel-like. Glides of this sort are referred to as on-glides. but often occupy syllabic positions in which one normally finds consonants. as in the French word [wa] (‘goose’). and /li/ /e/ (the root ‘link’ infinitive suffix). /tari/ /an/ (the root ‘dance’ and the suffix /an/) is pronounced [talijan]. in Malay. the high vowels in question are /i/ and /u/. which is pronounced as a single syllable: [lwe]. with an unrounded palatal glide in the onset. The non-head position in a diphthong is sometimes referred to as a glide. as in the English word [aj] (eye). pronounced as [lje]. Glides are sometimes known as semiconsonants or semivowels. with a rounded palatal glide in the onset. and the position in syllable structure is the onset position. For instance. and [w] as glide within the nucleus. as in French /lu/ /e/ (the root ‘rent’ infinitive suffix). Malay /buru/ /an/ (the root ‘hunt’ and the suffix /an/) is pronounced [buruwan]. pronounced as monosyllabic [tɥe]. In our French examples. with a labial-velar glide within the onset. Similarly. which consists only of a nucleus. . glide formation A process in which a nucleus vowel ceases to occupy the nucleus of a syllable.

glottis The space between the vocal cords. Examples are [ hæʔpi] (happy).A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 65 glossematics see Hjelmslev glottal An adjective used to describe sounds produced in the glottis. [ wʔɾi] (witty) and [ p ʔki] (picky). the stop closure will be released. glottal fricative A fricative made in the glottis by bringing the vocal cords together to produce friction. spoken in the North-East of England. as in the Scottish English pronunciation [ b ʔəɹ] (butter). Glottalic airstream mechanism see airstream mechanisms glottalisation A process in which the closure in an oral articulation is accompanied by a glottal stop articulation. Often. Because the closure of the vocal cords blocks the airstream and puts a sudden end to voicing. glottal stop A consonant formed by complete closure of the vocal cords. as in Cockney [ wʔi] for witty. It is transcribed as [ʔ]. An example can be found in the first sound in the English word happy. Glottalised stops are common in Tyneside English. one often detects a glottal stop because one hears a very abrupt end to a preceding vowel. Glottalling occurs in many varieties of English. It is transcribed as [h]. . glottalised Exhibiting glottalisation. glottalling A process in which oral stops undergo reduction to a glottal stop articulation.

the final nucleus position is said to govern the preceding one. grammatical category see lexical category grammatical word A word which is a member of a grammatical category. The postulated government relations are said to give rise to the observed patterns of alternation in Standard French between schwa and zero. Government Phonology A framework within generative phonology which adopts an element-based approach to the internal structure of segments. government A postulated relation between linguistic objects. He is known as an early pioneer in studies . Transitive verbs such as kick are said by some syntacticians to govern their direct objects. Grammont. Maurice A late nineteenth-early twentiethcentury French phonologist. as seen in pronunciations such as bisyllabic [dəvniʁ] for devenir. in the Standard French word devenir. John An American phonologist known for his work on Autosegmental Phonology. but he came to abandon that tradition in its entirety. The term has been taken over into phonology within the framework known as Government Phonology. often found in work on syntax. Goldsmith is interesting since his training was in generative phonology. as in The man kicked the dog.66 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Goldsmith. based at Montpellier University. in which some syllabic positions are said to govern others. and which sees segments as contracting government relations. where the verb kick may be said to govern the direct object the dog. For instance.

Present-day pronunciations of words such as divine ([dvain]) show the results of the vowel shift. since a given grapheme may contain more than one letter. A complete account of the graphophonemics of a language provides an exhaustive statement of all the grapheme-phoneme correspondences. but still act as a single unit in the spelling system. and the high vowels [i:] and [u:] undergoing diphthongisation to become [ai] and [au]. which corresponds to the phonemes /θ/ and /ð/. whereby each parent sticks to only one language in addressing the child. with vowels such as the high mid vowels [e:] and [o:] undergoing raising to [i:] and [u:] respectively. One Language (OPOL) approach to bringing up bilingual children. Graphemes are usually distinguished from letters. See dyslexia. Great Vowel Shift (GVS) A historical change which took place in the history of English. Long vowels shifted upwards in the vowel space. notably la loi des trois consonnes. He also worked on bilingualism. graphophonemics The study of the relationship between spelling and pronunciation.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 67 of the way schwa works in French. they used to be pronounced with an [i:]: [divi:n]. In Scots and in certain accents of English. one can find words which have not undergone the GVS. grapheme A unit in the spelling system of a language. An example is the <th> grapheme used in English spelling. such as the word toon . in which he argued for the One Parent. Graphemes which contain two letters are called digraphs. more precisely the relationship between the graphemes of an alphabetic writing system and the phonemes of the language.

gutturals An informal cover term. Lionel (1921–2001) A French phonologist who specialised in the phonology of English. where the term ‘phonetic’ covers facts about the production and perception of human speech sounds in social context. Those who argue for phonetics-free phonology deny that phonology is grounded in phonetics. grounded see grounding grounding A notion appealed to by some scholars who postulate a clear distinction between phonology and phonetics. since the historical [u:] diphthongised to [aυ] during the GVS.68 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY (‘town’) in Scots. by definition mentally real. is rooted in phonetic phenomena. claiming that English spelling is. a reliable guide to pronunciation. Many processes of assimilation are said to be phonetically grounded in the tendency towards ease of articulation. The GVS has been interpreted both as a drag chain (pull chain) and a push chain (see vowel shift). pronounced [t n]. Guierre. as in the case of assimilation for place of articulation. for sounds . witnessed in pronunciations such as [mpυt] (input). where the nasal assimilates to the place of articulation of the following stop. this is pronounced as [t aυn]. Guierre elaborated an analysis of English word stress patterns which departs from the Anglo-American quantity sensitivity approach. contrary to first impressions. The idea is that phonological knowledge. not found in the chart of the International Phonetic Association. He also worked extensively on the graphophonemics of English. In RP.

behind the alveolar ridge and in front of the velum. Morris An American phonologist who was professor of phonology at MIT in Boston. the head of a unit is said to be obligatory. hard palate The front part of the palate. Bruce An American phonologist who works in generative phonology. See cardinal vowels. and widely regarded as one of the founding fathers of generative phonology. There is some evidence that sounds produced in these areas constitute a natural class. He is also associated with an interpretation of Optimality Theory in which constraints are said to be phonetically grounded. including metrical structure. H half-close Another term for high mid. In phonology. of The Sound Pattern of English (SPE). in the uvular. pharyngeal and laryngeal places of articulation. one can argue that the obligatory element in a syllable is the . He was co-author. morphology and phonology. with Noam Chomsky. notably word stress systems. half-open Another term for low mid. Halle has worked on a wide range of phonological phenomena. Hayes has worked on a wide range of phonological phenomena.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 69 produced at the back of the mouth and in the throat. One is the idea of obligatoriness. See cardinal vowels. Several notions are appealed to in talking of heads. located in the roof of the mouth. Halle. head A term used variably in syntax. Hayes.

The headdependent (or governor-governee) relation lies at the heart of Dependency Phonology. In such descriptions. relation. it is often claimed that one vowel quality will be more prominent than the other. where the [a] is more prominent than the off-glide [υ] and is thus the head of the diphthong. so that [a] governs [υ] in the diphthong [aυ]. and is thus the head. the stressed syllable in a metrical foot is the most prominent and is thus the head of the foot. It can also be argued that a metrical foot must contain a stressed syllable. Within diphthongs. Government Phonology and Head-Driven Phonology. and any syllables following it. In phonology. the head of a falling diphthong is said to govern the dependent. These theories apply the notion of head-dependent to the relation between the elements of individual segments. For instance.70 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY nucleus. the ‘head’ in an intonation group consists of the first stressed syllable occurring before the tonic syllable. in which the tonic falls on pub. the notion of prominence (salience) is also appealed to in talking of heads. Similarly. two or more elements in a phonological constituent are often said to contract a head-dependent. and John went to the is said to be the head of the intonation . as in John went to the pub. the term ‘head’ is used in some descriptions of intonation groups to mean something quite distinct from the notions just mentioned. the head of a phonological constituent is the most prominent element in that constituent. Unfortunately. The notion head is often linked to the notion dependent. and thus the nucleus is the head of the syllable. To return to our two examples: the nucleus of a syllable is said to be the most prominent element in the syllable and is thus the head of the syllable. as in the English falling diphthong [aυ]. and that this is therefore the head of the foot. or governor-governee.

nor are they the most perceptually salient parts of an intonation group. such as phrases and sentences. it is believed that those sequences can be subdivided into constituents. Thus. This notion of head is thus quite unlike the notion described above. such as glide formation and vowel apocope. Associated with the work of Dutch phonologist Harry van der Hulst. This constituentwithin-constituent structure is hierarchical. This latter constituent can be said to contain the constituent who shot the farmer. hierarchical structure It is widely believed that human languages contain expressions. heavy syllable see syllable weight hiatus A sequence of two adjacent vowels across a syllable boundary.i.bu]. but no head). Head-Driven Phonology An approach to phonological representation which takes the head-dependent relation to be central at all levels of analysis.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 71 group. since John is the first stressed syllable before the tonic. which is said to contain the constituent the farmer. the sentence I saw the man who shot the farmer is said to be analysable into the subject noun phrase I followed by the predicate verb phrase saw the man who shot the farmer. as in Standard French le hibou (‘the owl’). and that those constituents can in turn be analysed into smaller constituents. ‘Heads’ are not obligatory in intonation groups (Go! contains a tonic syllable. Rather. which do not consist simply of linear strings of words strung together like a string of beads. Many languages exhibit hiatus avoidance processes. which may be pronounced as [lə. Many .

Louis (1899–1965) A Danish linguist who was associated with a school of linguistic thought known as glossematics. Also referred to as half-close. feet are said to be analysable into their constituent syllables. For instance. Hjelmslev. The consequence of this purely formalistic approach is that his conception of phonology was substance-free. It is also used as a distinctive feature (see features). Hjelmslev also argued in favour of the principle of structural analogy. which in turn are said to be analysable into their constituent segments. but are less high than high vowels. non-mentalistic account of linguistic structure. Examples are [e] and [o]. Charles (1916–2000) An American linguist who taught at Cornell University. he published a book which constituted a critique of some of the central claims made by Noam Chomsky. He is often seen as the last of the great linguists associated with American Structuralism. Hockett remained critical of generative linguistics throughout his career. . in 1968. historical phonology The study of the way the phonology of languages changes over time. high A term used in the description of vowels (see cardinal vowels). and to describe certain types of tone. Hjelmslev was influenced by logical positivism. and attempted to devise a purely formal. high mid Vowels which are high mid are articulated above the neutral position of the tongue.72 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY phonologists believe that phonological structures are also hierarchical. Hockett.

Homophones such as these constitute minimal pairs in accents of the South of England: [p υt] vs [p t]. Hyman works on African languages. pairs such as put and putt are pronounced identically: [p υt]. But they may also hypercorrect words such as mass to [mɑ:s].A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 73 homophone Two words are homophones if they have identical pronunciation. tone languages. among other things. Larry An American phonologist who works in the generative phonology tradition. See avoidance of homophony. homorganic A term used to describe identical place of articulation of two adjacent segments. since they can reveal facts about . Hyman. hypocoristics Pet names or nicknames. when in fact it is pronounced [m s] in RP. Speakers with a native accent of English which lacks the / / vs /ɑ:/ distinction may ‘correct’ their pronunciation so as to say [dɑ:ns] (dance) when they attempt to speak with an RP accent. where the nasal stop and the following oral stop are homorganic (they are both velar) because the nasal stop exhibits nasal assimilation. These are of interest to phonologists. Phonemic mergers create homophony. hypercorrection A phenomenon connected with the attempt by a speaker to alter his or her pronunciation so as to approximate a pronunciation perceived as more ‘correct’. homophony The state of affairs whereby homophones exist. Hypercorrection occurs when words which do not need to be ‘corrected’ are changed. as in English [θŋk] (think). and is known for his work on. In many accents of the North of England.

not a stop. hypocorrection A term associated with the work of John Ohala. which can be seen in historical changes such as that from [kkən] to [tʃkən] (chicken). The hearer can then. in which the first syllable of the name is reduplicated. the affrication is factored out as redundant ‘noise’ in the speech signal.74 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY phonological structures in specific languages. When this factoring out fails to take place. The ‘hypo’ part comes from a word in Classical Greek meaning ‘under’. This. is what lies behind the well-known sound change known as Velar Softening (Palatalisation). This is hypocorrection: the hearer mistakenly assumes that the speaker he/she was listening to intended to utter an affricate. Often. A simple example comes from French. start to utter affricates deliberately in such positions. it is phonetically natural for there to be slight affrication of such sounds in that position. where names such as Florence and Didier may be pronounced in their hypocoristic forms as [floflo] and [didi]. uttered before a high front vowel. Take velar sounds. this affrication will be factored out by the listener. the hearer identifies the affricate as an instance of an affricate. such as [k]. I iamb see rhythm iambic see rhythm . who will hear words such as kick in such a way as to classify both consonants as instances of the voiceless velar stop [k]. not a stop. Ohala argues. in turn. Ohala argues that speakers sometimes fail to engage in normalisation (correction) when perceiving the speech signal.

proponents of this hypothesis argue that syntactic structure does not directly trigger phonological processes. Followers of Chomsky believe that a speaker’s I-language contains a phonological component. since Chomsky believes that linguistic knowledge is located within the minds of individuals. But when East London occurs in the phrase East London Airport. rather than distributed across social communities. implementation see realisation implicational universals see universals implosive see airstream mechanisms Indirect Syntax Hypothesis Unlike proponents of the Direct Syntax Hypothesis. since Chomsky believes that linguistic knowledge is mind-internal. It also stands for ‘individual’. Rather. The ‘I’ stands for ‘internal’.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 75 Iambic Reversal A term used to describe a phenomenon attested in English. so that Airport is more prominent than East. Also known as the rhythm rule. I-language A notion found in work by Noam Chomsky. which in turn is more prominent than London. rather than public. since this is a rhythmic phenomenon. the prominence levels of East and London are typically switched around. the purely phonological domains which feature in the prosodic hierarchy are said to be the proper domains for the operation of phonological processes. in which prominence patterns are switched round (reversed) in phrases containing three metrical feet. . the word London constitutes a trochaic foot which is more prominent than the metrical foot in East. In the name East London.

how many English sentences there are. infinitude A property said by Noam Chomsky and others to be a formal characteristic of all human languages. the past participle of courir is the irregular form couru. inductive generalisations Generalisations which arise from the observation of specific instances. can lead to child utterances such as Il a couri (‘He ran’).76 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Indo-European A major language family which subsumes many of the world’s present-day languages. it is possible for the child to form the inductive generalisation that the past participle of verbs ending in -ir is a form ending in [i]. The Indo-European language family was reconstructed in the nineteenth century. it makes no sense to ask. then this guarantees that there is no limit to the set of well-formed expressions in a given language.500 to 2. the set is literally infinite. If a Frenchacquiring child often hears Il a fini (‘He has finished’) with the past tense of the verb finir (‘to finish’) and Il est sorti (‘He’s gone out’) with the past tense of the verb sortir. . In this specific case. If one assumes that all human languages exhibit recursion. via a process of analogy. a language of Ancient India. the form couri is an over-generalisation. from the verb courir (‘to run’). On these assumptions. including most of the languages of Europe and the languages of the North of the Indian subcontinent.000 BC. and Greek and Latin. for instance. when systematic phonological and morphological correspondences were established between Sanskrit. there exists an infinite number of such sentences. Application of this generalisation. Proto-IndoEuropean was spoken around the period from 2.

An instrumentalist interpretation of atomic theory would interpret the theory as a mere device. as in the case of the Intrusive ‘r’ in sequences such as law and order when pronounced as [lɔ:ɹənɔ:də]. Phonologists sometimes argue that epenthetic sounds have been inserted into a sequence of segments. the idea that phonological and syntactic knowledge form separate modules in the mind. classifying and making predictions about observable phenomena. they have different conceptions of the phonology/syntax interface. while others claim that it does. Instrumentalism is opposed to realism. without granting that atoms and atomic structure are real. internal sandhi see sandhi International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) An alphabet designed to provide a symbol for every speech sound type which is capable of functioning in a phonological opposition in a human language. instrumentalism A way of interpreting theories in which one takes theoretical constructs to be mere instruments for organising. Provided by the . one needs to address the question of how the two modules interact. The American Structuralists are said to have adopted a purely instrumentalist interpretation of notions such as the phoneme. The point at which the two modules connect is said to constitute an interface. With respect to phonology and syntax. interface A notion used by those who adopt any modular conception of linguistic knowledge.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 77 insertion A way of talking about epenthesis. some claim that phonology does not interact directly with syntax. for instance. If one accepts.

whereby voiceless sounds become voiced between vowels. which are realised as voiced fricatives or voiced approximants intervocalically. pronounced [laβoðeγɐ]. then the whole utterance constitutes a single intonation group. with the tonic on ‘me’. The written English sentence ‘It’s me. which forms an intonational unit. the Korean root /pap/ (‘cooked rice’). or a sequence of words. containing a tonic syllable. interpretation see realisation intervocalic Between vowels. with the tonic on ‘me’. the IPA is regularly updated in accordance with the latest thinking about phonetic and phonological categories. is pronounced [pabi]. The IPA continues to incorporate the notion of the cardinal vowels. Intonation contours can be used to highlight certain elements in an utterance.78 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY International Phonetic Association. and a second intonation group consisting of the word ‘Tom’. If the speaker is called Tom and is announcing that it’s he who is there. intonation group A single word. If a speaker is addressing someone called Tom. intonation The kinds of pitch modulation which are found in whole utterances. to bundle words together into information chunks. when followed by the suffix /i/. which constitutes a tonic syllable. Intonation groups are also known as . there will be two intonation groups: ‘It’s me’. For instance. intervocalic voicing A lenition process. and to convey the speaker’s attitude to what he/she is saying. as in la bodega. Tom’ is ambiguous. as in the case of the voiced stop phonemes in Spanish. Consonants often undergo certain lenition processes in this context.

phonetics. they were said to have intrinsic phonetic content. Also known as a tone group or a breath group. intrinsic phonetic content Among the phonologists who adhere to a distinction between phonology and phonetics. and cannot be defined in terms of phonetics. so that a phonological feature such as [voice] could be defined in terms of the vibration of the vocal cords. Opponents of this notion argue for substance-free phonology. a major figure in twentieth-century . could be given a phonetic definition. the rule of final devoicing in German may be said to be grounded in the natural tendency for obstruents to devoice in utterance-final position. Jakobson. SPE phonology incorporated the view that phonological processes. and phonological features. or grounded in. they argue that phonological objects are abstract in at least one sense of the term. some believe that phonology is ‘based on’.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 79 intonational phrases. Roman (1896–1982) A Russian linguist who became an American citizen in the mid-twentieth century. One of the functions of intonation groups is to bundle up the stream of speech into information chunks. Intrusive ‘r’ see non-rhotic IPA see International Phonetic Alphabet isochronous see stress-timed J Jakobson. intonational phrase Another term for an intonation group. Thus.

since he spent the first half of his career in Europe and the second half in the USA. Daniel (1881–1967) A British phonetician who worked at University College London. Unlike J. His conception of the phoneme was that of a ‘family’ (a set) of sounds. including aphasia.80 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY linguistics. and also a functionalist conception of the notion phoneme. He proposed that historical sound changes were teleological in nature. Slavic folklore and child language acquisition. phonology. Jones is still known for his English Pronouncing Dictionary. American Structuralism and generative phonology. poetry. latterly at MIT. He believed that linguistic structure was driven by what he took to be the main function of language: that of communication. Jakobson was a functionalist. arguably bridged the gap between European Structuralism. his views are quite distinct from those of the formalist linguist. Noam Chomsky. Jones. In this respect. where Morris Halle was based. first published in . R. Firth. and later co-founded the Prague School with Trubetzkoy. Jakobson had a wide range of interests. In the field of child acquisition of phonology. and attempted to state implicational universals based on markedness. Jakobson argued that there was a major discontinuity between the babbling stage and the first words stage. Jakobson also worked with Gunnar Fant and Morris Halle on an acoustic theory of distinctive features in phonology. He adopted Saussure’s notion of the linguistic sign. Jakobson adhered to the concept of markedness. His work on phonology also incorporated the idea of redundancy. Jones argued for the validity of the notion phoneme. This view was later discredited by Marilyn Vihman in her empirical work on infant speech. Jakobson co-founded the Moscow School.

K Karmiloff-Smith. The lengthening does not occur in the word brood since there is no juncture between the vowel and the [d]. Weaker junctures are often referred to as close junctures. brood is morphologically simple. morpheme and word boundaries.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 81 1917 and still used by learners of English all over the world. Examples are cuppa (from cup of ) and wannabe (from want to be). with could and n’t forming a single trochaic foot. foot. who believes that she has found a middle way between Empiricism and Rationalism. Junctures include syllable. whereas the juncture in couldn’t is said to be weaker. sequences of words which undergo such cliticisation end up undergoing lexicalisation. such as vision. The juncture between could and go is said to be a full word boundary. In Scottish English. but she denies that . She postulates innate biases in specific cognitive domains. Annette A child development expert and advocate of constructivism. Such boundaries are widely believed to play a role in certain phonological generalisations. the morpheme boundary between the root and the past tense suffix in words such as brewed will induce lengthening of the preceding vowel. n’t is said to be joined to could as a result of a process of cliticisation. juncture A boundary or transition point in a phonological sequence. In some cases. the juncture between could and n’t in the sentence He couldn’t is said to be weaker than that between could and go in the sentence He said he could go. It is often said that some junctures are ‘weaker’ than others. and stronger junctures are known as open junctures.

82 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY there are richly specified innate modules of the sort postulated by Noam Chomsky. studying a wide range of different languages. Kazan School A name given to two late nineteenthcentury scholars and their students. In doing so. Like many Western linguists in later decades. metrics and the phonology of English. in which statements about alternations are not taken to be statements about processes. In the field of child phonological development. They adopted the idea of the phoneme. they sought to develop what they took to count as a ‘science’ of language. Michael An American phonologist who has worked in generative phonology throughout his career. It has been argued that their work influenced the thinking of Roman Jakobson. the work of Marilyn Vihman is broadly consistent with Karmiloff-Smith’s ideas. and had a static theory of morpho-phonological alternations. Kenstowicz. Kiparsky. He took over from Morris Halle when the latter retired as professor of phonology at MIT. . Their work pre-dated that of Saussure. based in Kazan in central Russia: notably the Polish linguists Miko aj Kruszkewski and Jan Baudouin de Courtnay. He played a prominent part in arguments against the abstract nature of the underlying representations postulated in SPE phonology. Her work has been influenced by Jean Piaget and is reasonably described as Neo-Piagetian. Paul A phonologist known for his work in historical phonology. they attempted to find ‘laws’ governing the synchronic structure of human languages. He is the founder of the generative phonology framework known as Lexical Phonology.

Labial consonants such as [p]. For example. as well as vowels with lip rounding. te le. such as [u] and [o]. A sound is labial if one or both lips are involved in its production. The diacritic ‘ ’ denotes the labialisation of the [k]. re. Subsumes labiodental and bilabial sounds. labial One of the major places of articulation. The phrase cannot be uttered as [ʃtləʁədmɑd]. concerning constraints on schwa deletion in French. postulated by the French phonologist Maurice Grammont. [f] and [v]. labial harmony see vowel harmony labialisation A process in which a speech sound acquires labial articulation. In the North American Indian language Nootka. in the phrase Je te le redemande (‘I’m asking you this again’). The generalisation states that a given schwa cannot be deleted if it would result in a sequence of three consonants.and de may be elided. le or re-.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 83 L La loi des trois consonnes A generalisation. as in [ʃtələʁədmɑd]. an otherwise non-labial consonant is ‘picking up’ labiality from an adjacent segment which is labial. but not the schwas of te. labiality The property of labial articulation. [b]. Labialisation is a form of assimilation. the initial consonant of the root /ki: / (‘making’) undergoes labialisation when preceded by a labial vowel (a vowel with lip rounding). in this case. as in the word [ʔok i: ] (‘making it’). where the ˜ schwas in Je and de have been elided. since the elision of those schwas would ˜ result in the three-consonant sequence [ʃtl]. The property is represented as . the schwa vowels in Je. are said to possess labiality.

84

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

[+labial] in theories of distinctive features which adopt binary-valued features. The element/feature [labial] is said to be a privative feature in element-based theories. Labiality enters into certain vowel harmony systems. labiodental A place of articulation term which denotes sounds produced with the lower lip as the active articulator and the upper teeth as the passive articulator. Examples are the voiceless labiodental fricative [f] in the English word fin, and the voiced labiodental fricative in the English word van. Laboratory Phonology (Lab Phon) The members of the Lab Phon community of scholars believe that laboratory techniques, such as acoustic analysis, are central to any properly scientific phonological investigation. Use of mathematical and statistical techniques is also central to Lab Phon. Prominent proponents include Janet Pierrehumbert and Robert D. Ladd. Labov, William An American pioneer of modern urban sociolinguistics, Labov is famous for his work on sociophonetic variation in New York City and elsewhere in the USA, particularly his work on the sociolinguistic variables which underlie variable rhoticity amongst speakers of New York City English. Ladd, Robert D. An American phonologist based at Edinburgh University who is widely known for his work on intonation. He is a member of the Laboratory Phonology community. language family A group of languages which have a common historical origin. Examples are the IndoEuropean and the Dravidian language families. Much

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

85

of the reconstruction of common historical origins has been based on phonological reconstruction. language games It is common to find cases in which speakers of a language ‘play around’ with the pronunciation of certain words in the language, often producing a kind of secret language. An instance of this is the French language game known as verlan, pronounced [vεʁlɑ], which is based on the expression l’envers (‘the ˜ reverse’), pronounced [lɑvεʁ]. Phonologists believe ˜ that language games are based on systematic processes, which can reveal facts about the phonological structure of the language. In this case, one simply reverses the syllables of the word in question to produce the verlan version. In the case of phonetically monosyllabic words such as femme (‘woman’), pronounced [fam], the verlan version is meuf, pronounced [m f]. Some have argued that forms such as this provide evidence for an underlying schwa at the end of the word femme, which appears in the verlan form in its stressed form, [ ]. language-specific Specific to a particular language. The English phonotactic constraint according to which only /j, w, r, l/ may occur as the second consonant in an onset containing two consonants is a language-specific constraint. The term is not to be confused with the expression ‘specifically linguistic’, meaning specific to human language as a whole. langue A term used by Saussure to denote a language as a set of signs which enter into a series of oppositions. Saussure claimed that langue, which he took to be social in nature, was to be distinguished from parole, which he took to be individual in nature.

86

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

laryngeal A place of articulation. Laryngeal sounds are produced in the larynx. The term is also used to refer to laryngeal features. laryngeal features Features postulated to characterise laryngeal properties of speech sounds. Examples are [spread glottis] and [stiff vocal folds]. larynx The voicebox: a structure made of cartilage, located in the windpipe, containing the vocal cords. Lass, Roger An American linguist who has spent his career in Britain and South Africa. Lass is a phonologist who specialises in the history of English, historical phonology in general, and the application of notions from the field of biology to language study. He was one of the first to query the explanatory power of the notion of markedness. last lexical item In work on the intonation of English, it is often claimed that the basic rule for the placement of the tonic is on the last lexical item in a clause. Lexical items are words of a lexical category. These are typically nouns, verbs and adjectives. In the sentence John went to the pub, the most ‘neutral’ (unmarked) intonation would have the tonic on the word pub, which is the last lexical item in the sentence. latent consonant see floating consonant latent tones see floating tones lateral Sounds produced with air escaping down one or both sides of the tongue are lateral sounds. An example is the [l] in the RP pronunciation of the word lip: [lp].

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

87

Lateral escape of air is distinguished from central escape of air. lax The opposite of tense. Lax vowels are often said to be articulated in a more central manner than their tense counterparts, and with less duration. laxing Any process in which a tense speech sound becomes lax. A well-known example is Trisyllabic Laxing. learning by forgetting An expression used by the French psycholinguists Jacques Mehler and Emmanuel Dupoux. It is used to refer to a phenomenon attested in child acquisition of phonology whereby, in the first year of life, infants become desensitised to allophonic differences in the adult language. For instance, a child being exposed solely to RP will ‘filter out’ the purely allophonic distinction between aspirated and unaspirated voiceless stops, whereas a child being exposed solely to a language, such as Thai, where the aspirated/unaspirated distinction is phonemic, will not do this. The term ‘forgetting’ is something of a misnomer; the child is not engaged in forgetting anything, but is focusing on the phonemic contrasts in the adult language and classifying allophones as instances of ‘the same thing’. left-headed Used to refer to phonological constituents with the head on the left side of the constituent, as in the case of trochaic feet, where the head of the foot (the stressed syllable) is the leftmost syllable in the foot, as in the English word happen. See right-headed and rhythm. length A term often used to describe the relative duration of a vowel or consonant. The long vs short distinction can be phonemic or allophonic. In the Dravidian

whereas [ko: :a]. In Scottish English. Lenis sounds are considered to be produced with less articulatory energy than fortis sounds. Long vowels in English are also known as tense. Lenis consonants are said to be ‘weaker’ than fortis ones. in the sense of becoming . with a long [ ]. vowels. One kind of lengthening is compensatory lengthening. Vowel length is phonemic in Malayalam. means ‘thickness’. or free. whereas [ka :i]. The voiced obstruents of English are held to be lenis. Any process whereby consonants become weaker. certain vowels undergo lengthening before voiced fricatives or /ɹ/. or checked. and duration. with greater muscular effort and greater breath force. with a short [o]. Similarly. as a phonological property. as a phonetic property.88 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY language Malayalam. means ‘castle’. lengthening A process in which a consonant or vowel is produced with greater length than it previously was. Consonant length is also phonemic in Malayalam. In the history of Received Pronunciation. with a short [ ]. as in [bɹ :z] (bruise) and [bɹi:z] (breeze). the sequence /əɹ/ underwent lengthening of the vowel in coda position. with a long [o:]. means ‘biting’ in Malayalam. as opposed to [bɹ s] (Bruce) and [flis] (fleece). vowels. See also lenition. also known as lax. whereas the voiceless sounds are said to be fortis. as in the words third and fir. lenis The opposite of fortis. [ka i]. and are distinguished from the short vowels. lenition The opposite of fortition. This is allophonic length. Some phonologists distinguish between length. means ‘basket’. now pronounced with the long vowel [ :]. [ko :a]. with short vowels.

In both RP and certain varieties of English spoken in the North of England. which happened in the history of many languages. Lenition processes are often cited as evidence for the sonority hierarchy. adjectives and adverbs. the opposition between short / / and long /ɑ:/ is present.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 89 voiced and/or undergoing a diminution in stricture. typically include nouns. verbs. which typically include articles. The RP pronunciation of words like these is with . But in words of the lexical set BATH. auxiliary verbs and pronouns. They convey substantial semantic content. lexical-distributional differences A difference between two varieties of a language is said to be lexicaldistributional if a given phonemic opposition is shared by the two varieties. conjunctions. and are often distinguished from words of a grammatical (or functional) category. since words of a functional category often undergo various forms of reduction. so that pairs such as ant and aunt are minimal pairs: ant is pronounced [ nt] and aunt is pronounced [ɑ:nt]. where the [f] of Latin filium became an [h] in hijo. level-ordering see Lexical Phonology lexical category Words of a lexical category. also called content words. This is relevant for phonology. which subsequently underwent elision. North of England varieties select the short phoneme. such as Spanish. but specific lexical sets in the two varieties contain different members of the opposition. Anther example of lenition is the reduction of voiceless fricatives to [h]. and often fail to contain the tonic syllable. with pronunciations of the sort [b θ] for bath. Intervocalic voicing of voiceless sounds is an example of lenition. are often unstressed.

level 2 processes later. Differences of this sort are neither realisational nor systemic. Lexical Phonology Also known as Lexical Morphology or Lexical Phonology and Morphology. This particular difference between RP and North of England accents often functions as a shibboleth. Lexical Phonology also postulates a distinction between word phonology and phrase phonology.in words like unnatural. Degemination is said not to hold at level 2. The morphological and phonological processes in question are said to take place in a specific order: level 1 processes first. with a non-geminate [n]. An example of a level 2 affix is the prefix un. Lexical Phonology is a model of the interaction of phonology and morphology which postulates different levels (also known as strata) of word formation.in words like innumerable. In English. word-level phonology contains the kinds of . and a later level at which stratum 2 (level 2) affixes are added.90 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY the long phoneme: [bɑ:θ]. Two levels of word formation have been postulated for English: one at which the so-called stratum 1 (level 1) affixes are added to roots. This idea of word formation taking place at different levels is often referred to as level-ordering. claiming that word-level phonological operations have distinct characteristics from phrase-level operations. with different phonological rules and/or constraints holding at those different levels. which yields forms such as [nju:məɹəbəl]. It has been claimed that the level 2 affixes are more productive than the level 1 affixes. so that words such as unnatural contain a (fake) geminate: [ n n tʃəɹəl]. An example of a lexical rule applying at only one level is the rule of degemination in English. An example of a level 1 affix is the prefix in.

Another example is the lexical set LOT. The phrase-level phonology contains phenomena such the Linking ‘r’ of many non-rhotic accents of English. which has the short /ɒ/ phoneme in RP. These sets were devised to bring out the kinds of accent differences which exist between different varieties of English. whereas. horse has /ɔ/. in SSE. whereby a word-final underlying /r/ is said to be realised if the following word has an empty onset. often appeal to a list of word sets proposed by J. This /ɔ/ vs /o/ opposition has undergone a phonemic merger in RP. as in far away. FORCE and NORTH. as in the expression wannabe . lexicalisation A process in which a sequence of words becomes a single word. Words in these sets all have the long /ɔ:/ phoneme in Received Pronunciation (RP).A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 91 affixation and process which we have just seen. but minimal pairs in SSE. but hoarse has /o/. there is a systemic difference with respect to RP: pairs such as horse/hoarse are homophones in RP. Versions of Lexical Phonology which contain Optimality Theory constraints (rather than rules) are sometimes referred to as ‘Stratal Optimality Theory’. such as Standard Scottish English (SSE). C. Wells. in certain varieties of English. In RP. particularly British phonologists. who work on the pronunciation of different varieties of English. The usefulness of these sets can be seen in the descriptive statement that. Examples are the lexical sets THOUGHT. lexical word A word which is a member of a lexical category. lexical sets Phonologists. but not in SSE. pronounced [fɑ:ɹəwe]. both words have [ɔ:].

English often acts as a lingua franca among speakers of different Indian languages. ˜ light syllable see syllable weight lingua franca A language used by speakers who do not share a common language. which have been borrowed by French speakers. under certain conditions. Examples are ‘l sounds’. if the word in question is followed by a word with an empty onset. such as the English words weekend and parking. and will be realised. Swahili is used this way in parts of East Africa. the floating consonant is not pronounced.92 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY (from want to be). listed as a single word. Liaison A syllabification phenomenon found in French. Typically. Linking ‘r’ see non-rhotic liquid A kind of consonant in which one part of the oral cavity is blocked while airflow escapes through another part of the cavity. loanword A word from one language which is introduced into another. pronounced [lezami]. But some word-final consonants in certain words have remained as floating consonants. pronounced [legɑ]. and certain ‘r sounds’. pronounced [kapo]. as in the lateral [l] in RP light. such as the [ɹ] in RP run. which can now be found in dictionaries. as in les gants (‘the gloves’). as in les amis (‘the friends’). Where the following word does not have an empty onset. Many word-final coda consonants were elided in the history of French. loanwords are pronounced by speakers of the borrowing language according to the phonology . as in words such capot.

the logical positivists known as the Vienna Circle argued that truly scientific statements were based on observation statements. since onset sequences such as /skr/ do not conform to the phonotactic constraints of Japanese. and to phonology in particular. On this view. for instance. logical positivism A philosophy of science which is said to have influenced American Structuralism and thus the kind of phonological investigation practised by the American Structuralists. They also pronounce the <p>. a uvular ‘r’. this led to an anti-mentalistic stance. Applied to linguistics. which has three syllables. See Prague School. Lombard effect A phenomenon documented by Etienne Lombard in the early twentieth century. Some of the philosophers who were members of the Vienna Circle were also members of the Linguistic Circle of Prague. and [i] instead of []. with no aspiration on the voiceless stops. in accordance with the French word stress placement pattern. In our example parking. loanword adaptation The process whereby loanwords are adapted by speakers of the borrowing language. Working in the 1920s and 1930s. as in the Japanese utterance of the English word screw: [sɯkɯɾɯ].A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 93 of their native language. the <a>. a French central [ɐ]. the <k> and the <I>in a French way: [pɐʁ kiŋ]. postulated unobservable realities had no part to play in scientific theorising. in which speakers are said to raise the volume of their speech to . Very often. loanwords are forced into the phonotactic patterns of the speaker’s native language. French speakers place the stress on the final syllable of the word. the <r>. as opposed to RP [ p ɑ:kŋ].

is . early in the evening. at the bottom of the vowel space. lowering Any process in which a speech sound is lowered. in its shortened. but are less low than low vowels. See cardinal vowels. such as a bar. The effect is said by some to be interpretable as a purely self-orientated phenomenon (one wants to be heard). low mid Vowels which are low mid are articulated below the neutral position of the tongue. which. London English A variety of English which has its origins in the working-class districts of the East End in the inner city in London. and that loop is conceived of as central to speech perception and production. You can observe this if you go into a public space. informal form.94 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY compensate for increased background noise. but is said to be an altruistic phenomenon by others (one is bearing one’s listeners in mind). The term is used as a distinctive feature. The phenomenon need not indicate a fully conscious decision to raise one’s voice. A perception/production feedback loop is said to be involved in this phenomenon. in articulatory terms. Examples are [a] and [ɑ]. as in the case of the lowering of the high mid vowel /e/ to low mid [ ] in French alternations such as cafeteria. Also referred to as half-open vowels. Normally used to refer to vowels which shift down the vowel space. and listen to the rising volume of speakers’ voices as the bar gets busier. Examples are [ε] and [ɔ]. pronounced [kafeterja]. long vowel/long consonant see duration and length low Vowels which are low are articulated lower than low mid vowels.

McGurk effect A form of perceptual illusion in speech perception. the context which triggers the lowering is the closed syllable created when the word is shortened. [ga]. but remains as [kamikaze]. but the audio track features the sequence [ga]. because of the presence of the [z] in [kaze]. [ga]. Viewers frequently report that they have perceived a sequence [da]. [da]. which does not become [kamigaze]. An often-cited example is the combination of [kami] (‘god’) and [kaze] (‘wind’). the phenomenon is said by some to show that lipreading occurs spontaneously in humans and is not just a special form of behaviour adopted by the deaf. Peter A New Zealander based at the University of Texas at Austin. Based on an experiment carried out by McGurk and McDonald in the 1970s. the [t] in [kafεt] is in coda position. He has worked extensively on Optimality Theory and is widely known for his work on a prosodic approach to morphology. in which subjects are exposed to a video recording of a speaker uttering. John An American linguist who works in the generative phonology tradition. [ba]. [da]. whereas the [t] in [kafeterja] is in onset position. Lyman’s Law states that Rendaku voicing is blocked if the second element of the compound contains a voiced obstruent. M McCarthy. MacNeilage. say. Lyman’s Law A well-known phenomenon in the phonology of Japanese which relates to Rendaku.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 95 pronounced [kafεt]. [ba]. MacNeilage is known . [ba]. In this particular case.

manner of articulation A synonym for degree of stricture.96 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY for his theory of the evolution of speech and handedness. or classes of sound. With his colleague Barbara Davis. are said to be more difficult to acquire than others and are thus acquired later than others. and are said to be marked with respect to front unrounded vowels. A further sense of the term relates to the frequency of occurrence of certain sounds. leading to left hemisphere specialisation for speech. marginal contrast see derived contrast mark see opposition marked In the work of Trubetzkoy. and that the right-hand/left hemisphere evolved for the control of bodily posture. in the world’s languages. or classes of speech sound. so that /θ/ is said to be a more marked sound than /s/. he is also known for the frame theory of syllabic utterances of infants during the babbling phase. He argues that the left-hand/right hemisphere of the brain evolved for the purpose of predation. It . See minor place of articulation. the fricative /s/ occurs much more widely than the fricative /θ/. rounded front vowels occur in the world’s languages but are rarer. some speech sounds. Markedness has also been said to be related to sequence of acquisition in child development. major place of articulation The labial. Similarly. a member of an opposition is said to be marked if it possesses a property which enters into a privative opposition. the class of front vowels tend to be unrounded. For instance. so that the /m/ in the opposition /m/ vs /b/ is said to be marked. coronal and dorsal places of articulation.

The idea is that marked properties of phonological segments and constituents play an active role in phonological processes. so that English /bɹat/ (bright) is said to have a more marked onset than English /bat/ (bite). the unmarked shape of syllables is the shape which contains an onset constituent (containing one or more onset consonants). in comparison with the English word buy. then at Columbia University from 1947 to 1955. containing an onset consonant and no coda consonants. Martinet. and . Syllables with complex (branching) onsets are said to be more marked than syllables which have single onset consonants.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 97 is often claimed that a child acquiring a language which has both /s/ and /θ/ will acquire the former (the less marked segment) earlier than the latter. in this respect. For instance. so that the English word eye is marked. He worked in Paris in the late 1930s. markedness A notion which appears in a variety of phonological theories. Syllables which contain one or more coda consonants are said to be marked with respect to syllables which lack coda consonants. A syllable with an empty onset is thus said to be marked in comparison with a syllable which contains a filled onset. Some have questioned the explanatory value of the appeal to markedness. from Prague School phonology to Optimality Theory. since the most basic syllable structure is said to be the CV syllable. the shape of phonological systems and their acquisition. André (1908–99) A French linguist who worked within European Structuralism (see structuralist linguistics). It is sometimes claimed that certain phonological processes are sensitive to the marked vs unmarked distinction.

Maximal Onset Principle A principle which states that. are said to be melodic features. it is the latter syllabification which holds. The principle states that.ɹez] satisfies the phonotactic constraints of English. or elements. but as a network of interconnected representations which vary in the extent to which they resemble each . However. Features. He is known for his claim. in cases such as this. since a coda containing only a /p/ is legitimate (as in cup). that there was a tension in human languages between the need to sustain oppositions in the form of minimal pairs. such as [labial]. so that the syllabification [ə.pɹez] is also legitimate. and the tendency to ease of articulation. as determined by the phonotactic constraints of the language. then it is syllabified as an onset. as opposed to properties of suprasegmental phenomena. in the English word appraise. mental lexicon The idea that the mind contains a vast stock of stored mental representations of words. since it maximises the content of an onset. which leads naturally to homophones. and an onset containing only an /r/ is also legitimate (as in run). [m] and [u]. the syllabification [əp. the branching onset /pr/ is also legitimate (as in pray). found in labial sounds such as [b]. See avoidance of homophony. later reiterated in Optimality Theory. linked together in multiple ways. The mental lexicon is not conceived of as a list of the sort found in dictionaries. melody A term used to identify properties of segments. where a given consonant could constitute a wellformed coda consonant in a word or equally a wellformed onset.98 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY finally at the Sorbonne in Paris. For example.

or the Language Faculty. the phonemes have merged for many younger speakers. merger A term used in the phonemic tradition to denote a historical process in which a phonemic distinction is conflated. mentalism A given form of linguistics is mentalistic if its practitioners postulate mental realities as part of the object of inquiry. That postulated module is often referred to as Universal Grammar. he postulates an innate module of mind devoted solely to language. Noam Chomsky is a mentalist. the two words have the same number of syllables. They are therefore closely linked in the mental lexicon. seen in minimal pairs such as pattes (‘feet of an animal’) and pâtes (‘pasta’). When we select the wrong word from the mental lexicon.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 99 other. in which Bush selected prevents instead of presents. and pairs such as these are now homophones. Edward Sapir is known for his mentalism: he argued for the psychological reality of phonemes in the mind of the speaker. While the distinction is still given in dictionaries and can be heard in the speech of older speakers. the same stress pattern. metaphony A kind of assimilation process involving vowels. in which one vowel assimilates to another despite the fact that they are not strictly adjacent to . Bush that ‘coal prevents an environmental challenge’. this is often because we have selected a word which is similar in some way(s) to the word we were searching for. and differ with respect to only one segment. as in the statement by George W. An example is the traditional phonemic opposition between front [a] and back [ɑ] in Standard French. of a specific sort.

In Lithuanian. An example of a metrical grid follows: * * * * * * * * * * * * Dundee marmalade The idea is to represent the different degrees of salience of each syllable in the phrase: the more asterisks. The morpheme /dresk/ (‘to bind’) has the past tense form [dreske]. Metathesis also occurs in child speech. Metrical phonologists represented such phenomena using either grid-like visual representations or metrical trees. fricative + stop clusters undergo metathesis when they occur before a consonant. metathesis A process in which segments within a word are switched around. with the addition of a suffix [e]. Work in Metrical Phonology was chiefly concerned with suprasegmental phenomena such as word stress and rhythm. the more salient the syllable. with the addition of the suffix [ti] and metathesis of the /k/ and /s/. whereas the infinitival form is [dreksti]. The two main kinds are umlaut and vowel harmony.100 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY each other in the stream of speech. Here. metre see rhythm metrical Relating to the metre (the rhythm) of a language. Metrical Phonology A development in generative phonology which emerged in the early 1980s. the least . in utterances such as [ tʃkn] for kitchen.

metrics The study of the metre (the rhythm) of languages. [n]. The most prominent syllable is the antepenultimate syllable in marmalade. If we analyse English long (free) vowels as VV (vowel-vowel) sequences. minor place of articulation A sub-division within the major place of articulation categories. . A prestigious East Coast American university in Boston. MIT Massachusetts Institute of Technology. mid A vowel is a mid vowel if the height of the tongue falls between high and low. or between alveolar and postalveolar/palato-alveolar. minimal pair see Phonemic Principle minimal word The minimal amount of phonological material required to form a word. [nυ]. which is unstressed. then the minimal word for most varieties of English is (C)VV or (C)VC. [n ] fail the minimal word requirement for English. So word shapes such as [n ]. modular Relating to a specific mental module.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 101 salient syllable is the penultimate syllable in the word marmalade. and English short (checked) vowels as containing a single V slot. The birthplace of SPE phonology. The representation depicts the result of the application of Iambic Reversal. since both Noam Chomsky and Morris Halle were based there. The second most prominent syllable is the penultimate syllable in Dundee. there are no words consisting of (C)V. within coronals. [nɒ]. such as the distinction. between dental and alveolar.

with a monophthong.102 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY modularity see module module A term used in linguistics and cognitive science to refer to a specific component of mind which is said to be dedicated to a specific cognitive function. monomoraic see mora monophthong A vowel in which the quality remains more or less constant during its production. Of those who adopt this view. monophthongisation A process in which a diphthong becomes a monophthong. bistratal. since there are phonologists who subscribe to the thesis that the mind contains a language module. so that cry is pronounced [kɹa:]. In some varieties of Yorkshire English and some accents of English spoken in the South of the USA. a view associated with the linguist Noam Chomsky. such as declarative phonology. . approach. monostratal models of phonology. Relevant for phonology. the diphthong /a/ loses its off-glide. Some linguists who subscribe to the idea of a language module in the mind (whether innate or not) believe that there is a submodule devoted to phonology. Others reject this modular conception of the nature of phonological organisation in the mind. Known informally as smoothing. monostratal Involving only one level of representation. While classical SPE phonology postulated two levels of phonological representation (underlying representation and surface representation (see surface form)). some believe that the putative module is innate (present at birth). abandon this two-level.

The English words man. Morpheme boundaries can play a role in phonological processes. Similarly. as opposed to short consonants. morphologically complex Containing more than one morpheme. geminate consonants are often said to have two moras. Moraic Phonology Any theory of phonological structure in which the mora is postulated as a significant phonological unit. morphological Relating to morphology. whereas short vowels are said to have only one. In the case of the Scottish Vowel Length Rule. as in /k t + s/ (cats). . the presence of a morpheme boundary triggers lengthening of a preceding /i/. as in the word [əgɹi:d] (agreed).A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 103 monosyllabic containing one syllable. /u/ or / i/. whereas segments with one mora are said to be monomoraic. moraic Relating to moras. whereas the plural noun cats is morphologically complex. The singular noun cat is morphologically simple. indicated using a ‘+’ symbol. Segments which have two moras are said to be bimoraic. morpheme see morphology morpheme boundary The boundary between two morphemes. which consists of the root morpheme agree and the past tense suffix: /əgi: + d/. mora A term which is often used to describe the length of segments. dog and cat are all monosyllabic. it contains the root morpheme /k t/ and the plural suffix. Long vowels are often said to have two moras (or morae).

Morphology and phonology are connected because of the existence of morpho-phonological processes. the root consonant undergoes the phonological process of gemination. These are often referred to as morphemes. the root happy and the suffix -ness are morphemes. In Malay. the phenomenon is thus said to be morpho-phonological. morphology The study of the internal structure of words.104 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY morphologically simple Containing only one morpheme. as opposed to the . Morphosyntactic properties include properties such as singular vs plural. morpho-phonology see morpho-phonological morpho-syntactic see morpho-syntax morpho-syntax The aspect of linguistic structure in which both syntax and morphology play a role. or present vs past. when a root ending in a single consonant undergoes the morphological process of suffixation with a vowel-initial suffix. This is an example of a morphological process triggering a phonological process. morpho-phonological Involving the interaction between morphology and phonology. See morphologically complex. they contain more than one morpheme. the prefix un-. as in the case of the singular form of the English noun cat. Words such as this are therefore said to be morphologically complex. More specifically. morphology deals with units within the word which have an identifiable meaning or grammatical function. Thus the root /lətop/ plus suffix /an/ is pronounced [lətoppan] (‘explosion’). In the English word unhappiness.

the phonetic form of the plural morpheme is determined by phonological factors. and if the root ends in a voiceless segment. Chief among them was Roman Jakobson. as in the case of the . multilateral opposition see opposition N narrow transcription see broad transcription nasal assimilation The process whereby nasal stops assimilate to an adjacent obstruent.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 105 plural form cats. who was later involved with the Prague School and then American Structuralism. Motor Theory of Speech Perception A controversial theory of speech perception. /ʃ/ or / /. the realisation of the plural morpheme will be [s]. these scholars were interested in the linguistic analysis of literary objects. the realisation of the plural morpheme will be [z]. /z/. Influenced by the work of Baudouin de Courtenay and Saussure. and then seek to match these on to the incoming speech signal. including poetry. as in horses ([hɔ:sz]). this was a group of Russian linguists working in the early twentieth century. If the root ends in /s/. In this case. as in dogs ([dɒgz]). if the root ends in a voiced segment. otherwise. the realisation of the plural morpheme will be [z]. according to which we perceive speech sounds by internally synthesising the vocal tract shapes involved in the production of a given speech pattern. Morpho-syntax is connected to phonology in many cases. as in cats ([k ts]). Moscow School Also known as the Moscow Circle.

In many accents of American English. This phenomenon is an example of a phonetically motivated process. the vowel / / is nasalised when followed by a nasal stop. nasality will spread from a nasal stop on to all following vowels and approximants. the speaker anticipates the place of articulation properties of the oral stop. a vowel . unless blocked by a consonant with oral cavity constriction. In Malay. and produces a nasal stop which is homorganic with the stop. a word. nasal cavity One of the three resonance chambers. and [ŋ] in incredible. rather in the way that certain vowel properties spread in the process of vowel harmony. as in Malay [m˜h˜l]. nasal spread see nasalisation nasal stop A stop consonant in which there is complete closure in the oral cavity but velic opening. nasal harmony A process in which nasality spreads throughout all of. Nasal stops are usually voiced. often a nasal stop. or part of. where the [h] and a ˜a the vowels undergo nasal harmony. allowing air to flow out through the nasal cavity. resulting in a kind of resonance which is readily identifiable as being nasal in character.106 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY English prefix /n-/. In Malay. as in [p ˜ n] (pan). It refers to the space within the nose through which air may flow during the production of nasal stops and nasalised sounds. but the [l] blocks the spread of nasality. [n] in indirect. nasalisation An assimilation process in which a vowel becomes nasalised when it is adjacent to a nasal sound. realised as [m] in impossible.

Two main classes are consonants and vowels. Some phonologists regard [nasality] as a privative feature. Other subclasses are obstruents vs sonorants. as in the French nasalised vowel [ɑ]. When nasality spreads beyond sega ments which are strictly adjacent to a nasal stop. Nasality seems to be able to function at the segmental level and at the suprasegmental level. nasality is a property of segments. Vowels which are nasalised are transcribed with a superscript diacritic. this is often referred to as nasal spread. spirantisation will often affect the entire set of voiceless stops in a language. yielding [f]. . In English. ˜ nasality The presence of nasal airflow in speech sounds. namely nasal stops and nasalised vowels. and stops vs fricatives. [t] and [k]. found in words such as banc. or ‘families’. as in the word map. nasalised Involving escape of air through the nasal cavity. as in the case of the language Terena. In cases such as this. In other languages. in which words such as [ajo] (‘his brother’) become [˜jo]. nasality is overlaid on a sequence of oral vowels to signal a morpho-syntactic property. It is often claimed that many phonological processes affect all of the members of a given natural class.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 107 preceded by a nasal stop becomes nasalised. which means ‘my a˜ brother’. For instance. as in Malay [m˜h˜l] a ˜a (‘expensive’). nasality appears to be a purely suprasegmental morpho-syntactic property. Nativism see Rationalism natural class The idea that speech sounds fall into classes. [θ] and [x] instead of [p]. as in [m˜saʔ] (‘cook’).

she proposed that speakers store the alternants in their surface phonetic form. but not in English. Stampe . such as nasal assimilation. It is common to assume that there is a rule of Final Devoicing in German. which is arguably grounded in the phonetic fact that the vocal cords will tend to cease to vibrate at the end of an utterance. In the theory bearing this name adopted by David Stampe. For morphologically related pairs such as divine/divinity. Instead. This approach to phonological generalisations was founded on a rejection of overly abstract underlying representations which are at a considerable remove from surface forms. In the place of such abstract analyses. Natural Phonology An approach to phonological phenomena which was a reaction to the abstractness of SPE phonology. which involved postulating a single abstract underlying representation from which the alternants [dvan] and [dvnti] could be derived. a set of natural phonological processes were postulated. To account for the fact that these natural processes are not present as rules in English. given the nature of human perceptual capacities and the human speech apparatus. it was postulated that true phonological generalisations express phonetically motivated allophonic variation. An example of a natural process is final devoicing. It is also assumed that there is a rule of Nasalisation in (Standard) French. but not in most varieties of English. By ‘natural’ is meant ‘naturally occurring’. Bybee rejected the SPE analysis.108 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Natural Generative Phonology A development in the history of generative phonology initiated by the phonologist Joan Bybee. Another example is the natural tendency for vowels to undergo nasalisation when followed by a nasal stop.

if neural nets can learn linguistic patterns without initial built-in ‘knowledge’. in acquiring English.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 109 argued that the child. Network English A synonym for General American. the vowel quality produced with this position is schwa. when fed input. It has been argued that. then so can the brain of a child. no inherent structure. neural nets A term used in the theory of computing to describe systems which are set up as vast networks of nodes which. who support Empiricism. must suppress the natural process. Neural nets are important to phonologists who want to argue that statistical learning plays a role in phonological acquisition. unaided by the Universal Grammar postulated by Chomsky and his followers. a theory of computation in which patterns can be identified by a neural net simply by the establishing of connections between nodes in the net. neutral position of the tongue The position of the tongue when the body of the tongue is in the centre of the vowel space. The emergence of work on neural nets in the late 1980s was important for linguists such as Geoffrey Sampson. The term ‘neural’ is used since it is suggested that such networks resemble the network of neurons in the human brain. See stochastic phonology. can apparently learn patterns in the input via a form of inductive generalisation. The . it was claimed. since neural nets are said to start out as a blank slate with. on exposure to specific kinds of input. Another version of Natural Phonology has been proposed by Wolfgang Dressler. When the lips are unrounded. Neural nets are central to Connectionism.

the /t/ vs /d/ contrast is neutralised via a postulated process of Flapping. Similarly. this variety is socially stigmatised. while vowels with the body of the tongue lower than the neutral position are said to be low. as Hungarian [rɑdir-to:l] ‘frog. since harmony ‘passes through’ them. These are also known as transparent vowels.110 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY notion of the neutral position is central to the cardinal vowel system of vowel description. there is a contrast between /t/ and /d/ in many varieties of American English. But the contrast is frequently neutralised intervocalically in foot-internal position. For instance. Features include . since vowels with the tongue raised above the neutral position are said to be high. See absolute neutralisation. and vowels with the body of the tongue retracted from the neutral position are said to be back. as in tin vs din. neutralisation A phonological contrast (see Phonemic Principle) is said to be neutralised in a specific context if the contrast is not attested in that context. New York City English A variety of English spoken mostly by people of working-class origins in boroughs of New York City such as Brooklyn and the Bronx. neutral vowel A vowel which fails to undergo vowel harmony but none the less does not block the spread of harmony. vowels with the body of the tongue in front of the neutral position are said to be front. whereby either phoneme is realised as a flap (tap) in this context. where the suffix vowel harmonises with the back vowel in the root. ablative’. ‘skipping over’ the neutral vowel [i]. as in bedding and betting. or the Brooklyn accent. Sometimes known as the Bronx accent. both typically pronounced [ bεɾŋ].

but which is none the less applicable to other languages. node A point in a tree diagram. or a variety of a language. they say that non-rhotic accents do not have non-prevocalic ‘r’. The term is something of a misnomer. since all varieties of non-linear phonology incorporate linear sequences of segments or syllables. there is no ‘r’ pronounced in farm or in far left. subsuming features representing properties such as word stress and nasality. A language. is said to be nonrhotic if its ‘r’ sounds do not occur in the rhyme of a syllable. such as the Place node in diagrams used in feature geometry intended to represent the internal structure of segments.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 111 variable rhoticity. raising of the / / vowel and THStopping. the ‘r’ has been elided during the history of the variety in question. . There are many non-rhotic varieties of English. In RP. since the ‘r’ there occupies an onset position. One such is RP. since the ‘r’. in which an ‘r’ is pronounced in run. Some phonologists define non-rhoticity in non-syllabic terms. particularly with respect to suprasegmental properties. The term subsumes Autosegmental Phonology and Metrical Phonology. non-rhotic A term used mostly in the study of English. Non-linear phonology involved the postulating of multiple layers of representation. SPE phonology postulated phonological representations consisting of a linear sequence of segments. In the late 1960s and early 1970s. would be in coda position. non-linear phonology A development in generative phonology which emerged in the 1970s. All non-rhotic varieties of English used to be rhotic. were it to be pronounced there.

This is an example of resyllabification. Midi French and Andalucian Spanish. say. Speakers are able to compensate for this variability. When we articulate speech sounds.112 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Non-rhotic varieties of English often exhibit the phenomenon known as Linking ‘r’. where a word-final ‘r’ is pronounced when it occupies the otherwise empty onset of a following word. Examples are New York City English. as in RP far away: [fɑ:ɹəwe]. as in law and order: [lɔ:ɹənɔ:də]. parallel to what one finds with Liaison in French. we can fail to categorise a speech sound as an instance of the speech sound intended by the speaker one is listening to. a given articulation of. the speech sound type [ ] in English will not be articulated in exactly the same way every time we utter it. such that they can categorise the variants as instances (tokens) of the same speech sound type. For instance. non-standard A variety of a language which has not come to be viewed socially as a standard variety. normalisation A perceptual process in which variability in an acoustic signal is factored out. where an ‘r’ is pronounced despite the fact that the word in question had no ‘r’ historically. The normalisation process is not foolproof. the . in turn. result in changes in pronunciation on the part of the speaker who has failed to normalise the speech sound. In certain varieties of Spanish. Connected with this is the phenomenon of Intrusive ‘r’. Normalisation is part and parcel of the process of the categorisation of speech sounds. there is inherent variability in how we do so. Some phonologists believe that this is the source of certain kinds of historical change in sound systems. This can.

as in calle (‘street’). Thus. Chicago and Syracuse. nucleus see syllable and intonation O Obligatory Contour Principle (OCP) A supposed ‘principle’ of phonological organisation. nuclear syllable The syllable on which the pitch change occurs in an intonation group. such as Milwaukee. Northern Cities Vowel Shift A vowel shift in American English which is said to have been under way for some time in the central and eastern cities of the North of the USA. It has . It could be that failure to normalise affricated versions of these phonemes lies behind this merger. calle is pronounced [kad e] and yo is pronounced [d o]. The /ε/ phoneme of the lexical set DRESS is retracted to [ ] or lowered to [ ]. as in the syllable ‘pub’ in the English sentence John went to the pub. The // phoneme in words of the lexical set KIT is lowered to [ε] or [ ]. this is a statement of an observed tendency in some languages towards the avoidance of adjacent sequences of like elements. a phonemic merger has taken place. The / / of the lexical set STRUT is retracted to [ɔ].A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 113 Castillian (Standard Iberian Spanish) contrast between the palatal lateral /ʎ/. The / / phoneme in words of the lexical set TRAP is said to be raised to pronunciations such as [] or [ə]. The /ɔ/ of the lexical set THOUGHT switches to [ɒ]. and the /ɒ/ of the lexical set LOT is fronted to [ ]. and the palatal approximant /j/. in which both phonemes have come to be pronounced as the voiced palato-alveolar affricate [d ]. as in yo (‘I’) has collapsed.

which he believes to be grounded in facts about human articulation. which he takes to be non-explanatory and ‘non-scientific’. The term subsumes oral stops. Obstruents are characterised by a major constriction in the oral cavity. such as the avoidance of sequences of stressed syllables. Low). obstruent The class of obstruents is a subclass of the class of consonants. Ohala seeks genuine ‘scientific’ explanations for phonological patterns. namely complete closure or close approximation. Ohala is known for stressing the role of the listener in phonological change. as opposed to sequences such as HLH (High. because of the phonologisation of various phenomena. such as HHL (High. off-glide see glide Ohala. can be investigated in laboratory experiments. . sequences of stressed and unstressed vowels. The notion has been extended to other phenomena. John An American phonologist who has been a long-standing critic of generative phonology. There are countless examples of phenomena which violate this ‘principle’. The other subclass of consonants is that of sonorants. High). for Ohala. Low. High. or sequences of high and low tones. affricates and fricatives.114 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY its origins in the frequently observed avoidance of sequences of like tone contours. perception and social behaviour that. Proper explanation. The idea probably has some foundation in a human perceptual tendency in favour of alternating opposites. such as sequences of consonant and vowel. is phonetic explanation. Whether it has any genuine explanatory power as a principle of phonological organisation is a moot point.

despite the fact that ‘start’ is an ATR root. from the seventh to the eleventh century. This is the case with Flapping in American English. The stressed vowel in betting remains shorter than the one in bedding. but where the low vowel [a] lacks a harmonic counterpart. the /t/ vs /d/ contrast is neutralised foot-internally. opaque vowel A vowel which fails to undergo vowel harmony and also blocks the spread of harmony. on-glide see glide onset see syllable opacity An phonological process is said to be opaque if its original phonetic grounding is no longer apparent. transcribed as [ɾ]. so that betting and bedding are both realised with a flap/tap. but the original phonetic motivation for this length difference has become obscured. the phonetic basis for such length distinctions may become obscured.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 115 Old English Used to refer to a period in the history of English stretching. so that the stressed vowel in bedding will be somewhat longer than the stressed vowel in betting. roughly. Old French The language spoken in France from roughly the middle of the ninth century to the end of the fourteenth century. so that [top-a] ‘start’ and [tɔp-a] ‘answer’ take the same form of the nominative suffix. whereas ‘answer’ is a . as in Tangale. When a given voiced/voiceless distinction is neutralised. Vowels tend to be longer before voiced segments for purely phonetic reasons. which has ATR and non-ATR vowel sets. the lengthening process has become opaque.

A process in which a vowel in an open syllable undergoes lengthening. Trubetzkoy identified privative oppositions. characterised by the presence vs absence of a phonological . of the sort /p/ vs /t/ vs /k/. as in English /p/ vs /b/. opposition A term associated with the work of Ferdinand de Saussure and Nikolaj Trubetzkoy. Another type is the multilateral opposition. open syllable lengthening The opposite of closed syllable shortening. Trubetzkoy distinguished between different kinds of opposition. it fails to undergo harmony. exemplified by minimal pairs such as staple and stable. which comes from Old English ofer. open approximation see degree of stricture open juncture see juncture open syllable A synonym for free syllable. but where the suffix /na/ blocks the spread of ATR harmony to the final suffix. contrasting for major place of articulation. These are two-way oppositions of the sort /p/ vs /b/. When a further suffix is added after a suffix containing /-a/. In the transition from Old English to Middle English. Among the bilateral oppositions. A phonological opposition is a contrast (see Phonemic Principle). as in [ped-na-n-gɔ] ‘united me’. Opaque vowels are also known as blockers. as in Middle English over. with a short mid vowel.116 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY non-ATR root. One type is the bilateral opposition. where the contrasts involve more than two members. where the root /ped/ is an ATR root. they induce disharmony. the vowel in the first stressed syllable in a bisyllabic word underwent lengthening. with a long mid vowel. See syllable.

constraints are said to be ranked differently in different languages. Other interpretations reject this view and argue that all constraints are language-specific. There is debate as to .A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 117 property. In our German case. so that a constraint banning voiced obstruents in word-final position would be violated in a language which permits voiced obstruents in that position. In some interpretations of OT. The property which may be present or absent was called the mark. or predominate over. Optimality Theory (OT) An approach to the study of phonological phenomena which replaces the notion of rule with the notion constraint. as in ‘life’ vs ‘death’. as in the case of nasal stops vs their equivalent non-nasal counterparts. and the member of the opposition which possesses this property was said to be marked for that property. this universal constraint comes into conflict with the constraint which bans voiced obstruents in word-final position. constraints are said to be violable.e. the former member contrasts with the latter in that it possesses the property of nasality. The term ‘opposition’ is used loosely in literary theory to mean ‘dichotomy’. In a language which has voiced obstruents word-finally. all constraints are said to be universal. the constraint banning voiced obstruents is said to ‘outrank’. In a language which has Word-Final Devoicing. Thus the opposition between /m/ and /b/ is a privative opposition. Constraints are also said to be capable of clashing with each other. the universal constraint. i. In OT. coming into conflict. the ranking is reversed. given by Universal Grammar. In OT. such as German. A constraint which is said by some to be universal (but violable) is the proposed constraint that the voicing state of a given segment must remain the same in its surface form.

oral cavity That part of the vocal tract above the pharynx. but has over-generalised it to irregular forms such as the past tense of the verb catch. such as [p] and [d]. oral stop A stop consonant in which the velum (soft palate) is raised.118 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY whether constraints should be seen as phonetically grounded or not. as in the English word deny. Children pass through this phase and eventually master the irregular forms. Examples are oral stops. in which children grasp a phonological. oxytone A word which has primary stress on the final syllable. excluding the nasal cavity. P palatal Sounds in which the active articulator is the front of the tongue and the passive articulator is the hard . This velic closure prevents nasal airflow. morphological or syntactic rule and apply it to forms it does not apply to in adult speech. which suggest that the child has grasped the generalisation for forming regular past tense forms of English verbs. over-generalisation A phenomenon attested in child language acquisition. During the production of these sounds. Examples are child utterances such as I catched the butterfly. there is velic closure. and affricates such as [dz] and [tʃ]. especially if they are high in frequency. Examples of oral stops are [t] and [b]. fricatives such as [f] and [s]. oral Sounds in which there is no airflow through the nasal cavity are called oral sounds.

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 119 palate are said to be palatal. and later became [s] in Old French. toi. found in present-day alternations such as electric. in that each can be substituted for the other in a given structural slot. In the description of English. Although there is some variability in the way it is used. lui. the initial [s] in the modern French word ciel (‘sky’) was a [k] in Latin. vous. elles. Processes in which velars undergo fronting to become alveolar sounds are also sometimes referred to as palatalisation processes. eux. An example is the palatal approximant [j] in the English word yes. and then became [ʃ]. such as the structure Il est chez____. it often denotes a set of related word forms. palatalisation A process in which non-palatal sounds become palatal or postalveolar. in which an [s] is found before the suffix -ity. ending with velar [k] and electricity. The velar stop [k] in Latin was fronted to the alveolar affricate [ts] before the high front vowel [i] in Gallo-Romance. whereas use of toi yields Il est chez toi (‘He’s at your place’). palatalisation is referred to informally as velar softening. It is common for velar sounds to become palatalised before front vowels. where use of moi yields Il est chez moi (‘He’s at my place’). These are said to stand in a paradigmatic relationship. The term is also . nous. The postalveolar fricative [ʃ] found in French words such as cher (‘expensive’) was a velar [k] in Latin which palatalised to become the postalveolar affricate [tʃ]. such as the French pronouns moi. palatality see frontness palato-alveolar see postalveolar paradigm A term used both in morphology and in phonology. elle.

but it does not. unkindliness. In General American. parallel distribution see Phonemic Principle parameter The term is sometimes used in a relatively nontechnical way. paradigm uniformity effect A phonological phenomenon in which the paradigmatic relatedness of words has an effect on phonological processes. the process of Flapping occurs foot-internally. See paradigm uniformity effect. so one would expect it to undergo Flapping. unkind. but not in the word military. etc. kindly. Carole A Canadian phonologist associated with the Theory of Constraints and Repair Strategies. the morphological relatedness of the words in question acts to block the phonological process. so that it will occur in the word city. The /t/ in question is now in foot-internal position. with primary stress on the [ m] and secondary stress on the [ tε]. to mean . in cases like this. kindliness. which has two metrical feet in American English: [ ml] [ tεɹi]. with primary stress on the [ s]. the primary stress shifts: [ mltəɹ stk].120 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY used for sets of morphologically related words. Phonologists believe that. paradigmatic Two items stand in a paradigmatic relation if they belong to the same paradigm. kindness. one is retaining a degree of uniformity in the phonetic shape of the members of the paradigm. in its ordinary everyday sense. When one forms the paradigmatically related word militaristic. Paradis. Because the /t/ in [ tε] is in foot-initial position. such as kind. in retaining the non-flapped pronunciation. See constraint and repair strategies. it cannot undergo Flapping.

and phonology in particular. vary. C. postulated parameters include selecting left-headed vs right-headed foot structures. For instance. It is symbols which act as linguistic signs. Applied to phonology.’ Sociolinguistic parameters are also appealed to in work on sociophonetic variation. S. The distinction between type and token. His conception of signs is distinct from Saussure’s. parole A term used by Saussure to denote individual acts of uttering. as in the English word city. for Peirce. Peirce divided signs into three sorts: indices. as opposed to a connection between an acoustic image and a concept. as in the example ‘If we consider the parameter of lip rounding. or varieties of a language. including phonology. paroxytone A word which has primary stress on the penultimate syllable.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 121 some feature according to which languages. . much used in linguistics. Saussure distinguished parole and langue. a sign was a mind-external object. icons and symbols. Used in a more technical sense by those who adopt a principles and parameters approach to generative linguistics. passive articulator see active articulator Peirce. we find that back vowels tend to be rounded. the more non-rhotic the speaker is likely to be. the parameter of social class correlates with degree of non-rhoticity among speakers of New York City English: the lower the social class of a speaker. stems from Peirce’s work. for Peirce. (1839–1914) An American philosopher whose work has implications for linguistics in general. whereas front vowels tend not to be.

stretching from the larynx up to the oral cavity. but to focus as much on performance as on competence. not individual. and performance is located in social context. To transcribe such sounds using the IPA. Often used to refer to the position of a syllable in a word for the purposes of word stress assignment. pharyngeal Articulated in the pharynx. performance A term associated with the work of Noam Chomsky. and thus much used in generative linguistics. It designates use of linguistic knowledge in a specific context of utterance. but they differ in at least two major respects. as in the Arabic word [t i:n] (‘mud’). pharyngealisation A kind of secondary articulation in which there is constriction in the pharynx. See I-language and E-language. For Saussure. For Saussure. as distinct from linguistic knowledge per se (referred to as competence). Some linguists argue that the competence/performance distinction is untenable. it is a mind-internal grammar.122 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY penultimate Second last. pharynx One of the three resonance chambers in the vocal tract. langue is social. competence is not. Competence is located within the individual for Chomsky. a superscript diacritic [ ] is placed after the relevant symbol. phoneme The term dates at least as far back as the work of the nineteenth-century Polish linguist Jan Baudouin . while parole is individual. The competence/performance distinction bears some similarity to Saussure’s langue/parole distinction. langue is an inventory of signs. Others wish to retain it. For Chomsky.

phonemes are not sounds and cannot be heard. By ‘distinctive’ is meant ‘having a contrastive function’. There is more than one definition of the phoneme in the phonological literature. This view is based on instrumentalism. of distinct speech sound types which count as ‘the same thing’. the substitution of one sound-type ([s]) for another ([l]) results in a change of word meaning. A third view takes phonemes to be no more than theoretical constructs. A variant on this concrete view is that a phoneme is a set. a distinctive sound in a specific language. All of these interpretations of the notion ‘phoneme’ assume the validity of the Phonemic Principle. Trubetzkoy’s view of phonemes seems to be neither phonetic. one must identify phonemes on the basis of their function in the phoneme system of a particular language. or phonetic. nor instrumentalist. they believe that the phoneme notion arises from the influence of alphabetic writing systems on phonologists’ analyses. in order to provide a picture of the sound patterns in a specific language. On one version of this view.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 123 de Courtnay. have argued for a functional view of phonemes. or family. such as Trubetzkoy. Some phonologists. It is the norm to represent . This view is a rather concrete. devised by the linguist as convenient fictions. nor mentalistic. as in the distinction between [lp] (lip) and [sp] (sip) in English. since they are mental categories. Some linguists deny the existence of phonemes. This variant version is more abstract than the idea that phonemes are literally sounds. in some sense. These first two views are based on realism. they are abstract. It is common to find a phoneme defined as a kind of sound. since sets are not sounds. conception of the phoneme. Another view is more mentalistic than this. for Trubetzkoy. where the contrast in question is semantic (related to meaning).

The sound [ ]. An environment is a specific structural slot in which a sound can occur. or word-initial position. they are said to occur in complementary distribution. predictable realisations of phonemes. we may ask whether the sounds in question are phonetically similar. as in [p i: ] (peel). When two or more sounds exhibit this kind of non-overlapping distribution.] (couple). is the range of environments in which it can occur. Once it is established that two or more sounds are in complementary distribution. Two or more sounds are said to have overlapping. Allophones are said to be rule-governed. and [k p . or the status.124 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY phonemes using slanted brackets. or intervocalic position. Central to this method is the idea of distribution. Once we have established complementary distribution and phonetic similarity. both are voiced. both are laterals. phonemic see phoneme Phonemic Principle Whatever view one takes of the existence. of phonemes. Square brackets are used in phonetic transcriptions which show allophonic detail: [p υ ]. such as [l] in RP. where it occurs in coda position. one finds a cluster of notions which constitute the Phonemic Principle. The distribution of a sound type. The sound [l] in RP has the following distribution: it occurs only in onsets. both have an alveolar articulation. In this case. we say that the two (or more) sounds are allophones of the same phoneme. such as the onset of a syllable. often known as ‘dark l’. as in the case of the English word pull: /pυl/. has a different distribution in RP: it occurs only in rhymes. and as [ ] in rhymes. or . where it occurs in nucleus position. they are. as in the word [lp] (lip). In this case the rule is: the /l/ phoneme is realised as [l] in onsets.

We therefore say that the phonetic property of voicing is phonemic for stops in English. Once we have established that two sounds are in parallel distribution. This is true for the two sounds [l] and [s] in RP. voicing is allophonic for stops in Korean. /t/ and /k/. Once we have established that two or more sounds have parallel distribution and that they function contrastively. there are no voiced stop phonemes in Korean. A given phonetic property may be allophonic in one language but phonemic in another. if there is at least one structural slot in which either sound can occur. We have here a system of phonemic oppositions which is symmetrical. distribution. This is the case here: [lp] does not mean the same thing as [sp]. A minimal pair is a pair of words which differ with respect to only one sound. whether the presence of one rather than the other may signal a difference in meaning. Phonemic contrasts are often known as phonemic oppositions. This is different from the phonetic property of velarisation which we saw in RP [ ].A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 125 parallel. and the same is true of /t/ vs /d/ and /k/ vs /g/. . we find an opposition between a voiceless member and a voiced member. we say that velarisation is allophonic in RP. /p/ stands in opposition to /b/. we may establish whether they have a contrastive function: that is. in each case. in this case /l/ and /s/. we say that they are realisations of different phonemes. Since these two sounds are allophones of the phoneme /l/ in RP. both may occur in wordinitial onsets before a stressed vowel. the set of phonemic oppositions in a language is systematic. as distinct from RP [l]. the oppositions form a phonemic system. Pairs of words of this sort are known as minimal pairs. In English. Typically. but Korean has voiced stop allophones of the phonemes /p/. For instance. as in [lp] (lip) and [sp] (sip).

/ε/. Phonemic transcriptions ought not to show allophones. the system of oppositions is symmetrical. or sequence of words. when an alphabetic writing system is invented. to the contrary. An alternative to this picture of the way oppositions work is the polysystemic approach. Others argue that. / /. It should be noted that some scholars argue that the idea of the phoneme is based solely on knowledge of alphabetic writing systems and that phonemes do not exist. /ø/. this ought to be a form of visual representation of a word. mentally real phonemes. transcriptions such as /sɾi/ for the word city ought to be /sti/ if they are to be truly phonemic. An example of this is the representation in such dictionaries of the tap in General American. It also has a corresponding set of front rounded vowel phonemes: /y/. However. the difference between a phonemic transcription of the word and a phonetic transcription is that the aspiration on the /p/ and the velarisation of the /l/ would be represented in the phonetic transcription: [p υ ]. Once again. French has a series of front unrounded vowel phonemes: /i/. phonemic transcription Strictly speaking. which contains only symbols representing the phonemes of the language. /e/. it taps into intuitions based on pre-existing. Not all sets of phonemic oppositions are symmetrical. the reality in many pronouncing dictionaries is that supposedly phonemic transcriptions do indeed contain representations of allophones. since . For instance. In our example.126 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Vowel phonemes are also typically organised into phonemic systems of opposition. A strictly phonemic transcription of the RP word pull ought to contain only three symbols for the three phonemes in the word: /pυl/. but there is a general tendency towards symmetricality.

which has a voiceless stop at the end of the base when the diminutive suffix /-ka/ is added: [gorotka] (‘little town’). It appears that this view was adopted by the Danish linguist Louis Hjelmslev and the British linguist J. Firth. articulation or the perception of speech sounds. The idea recurs . phonetics The study of human speech sounds. phonetics-free phonology Any conception of phonological objects in which they are said not to be definable in terms of phonetics. phonetic transcription see phonemic transcription phonetically motivated A process is said to be phonetically motivated if it can be shown to be driven by facts about acoustics. Often subdivided into articulatory phonetics (the study of how human speech sounds are made) and acoustic phonetics (the study of the acoustic properties of those sounds). in which the voicelessness of the [k] is anticipated. See realisation. There is no universal consensus on the distinction and relation between phonetics and phonology. An example of a phonetically motivated process is the phenomenon of voicing assimilation in obstruents. but in doing so. as in the case of Polish /gorod/ (‘town’). This is a form of anticipatory assimilation. resulting in devoicing of the /d/ at the end of the base. R. dictionary editors are providing transcriptions which are not strictly phonemic.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 127 the tap is an allophone of the phonemes /t/ and /d/. Such assimilations are driven by facts about articulation. It is clear what the practical advantage is of representing allophones such as taps.

as in Ils arrivent (‘They are coming’). rather. It has been claimed that the phonologi- . In the analysis of the process of Liaison in French. Here. certain syntactic configurations in specific languages are said to form phonological phrases. objects. which can be said to consist of two phonological phrases: [Les amis] and [arrivent]. But Liaison can be said to be blocked at the boundary between phonological phrases. pronounced [lezamiaʁiv]. it is possible to argue that a sequence of a determiner and a noun. form a phonological phrase. which then act as the domain for the application of certain phonological processes. associated with the writings of Mark Hale and Charles Reiss. ‘substance’ means ‘phonetic substance’. One can then argue that Liaison must apply within phonological phrases: [lezami] (les amis) and [izaʁiv] (Ils arrivent).128 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY throughout the history of phonology. Phonologists who postulate units such as the phonological phrase often embrace the claim that syntactic structure does not directly trigger phonological processes. or a pronoun and a verb. often said to constitute one of the units in the prosodic hierarchy. as opposed to phonetic. as in les amis (‘the friends’). phonological phrase A prosodic unit postulated by some phonologists. It is claimed by some that this unit acts as the domain for the operation of certain phonological processes. which they take to be misused if incorporated into our account of phonological. as in the sentence Les amis arrivent. appearing in work on Government Phonology and in the notion of ‘substance abuse’. phonological word A prosodic unit postulated by some phonologists. with no [z] at the end of the word amis.

We can tell this because there are minimal pairs such as /maʁʃe/ vs /maʁke/ (marquer. The term is also used to describe the historical process by which a speech sound type changes its status from that of an allophone to that of the realisation of an independent phoneme. the [ʃ] sound was merely an allophone of the /k/ phoneme (marcher comes from the Vulgar Latin verb marcare. phonologisation The term is used when ‘low-level’. there was no /ʃ/ phoneme. In present-day French. ‘to mark’). as in words like /maʁʃe/ (marcher. . which forms a phonological word with the root. The process of glide formation in French is claimed to apply within phonological words. there is a /ʃ/ phoneme. pronounced [ əviapaʁi]. such as the Scottish Vowel Length Rule. pronounced [kɔlɔni]. universal phonetic tendencies attain the status of phonological generalisations in a specific language. But this tendency can evolve into a languagespecific vowel lengthening process. pronounced [kɔlɔnjal]. Universally. Here. ‘to walk’). the [i] at the end of colonie becomes the glide [j] when followed by a vowel-initial suffix.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 129 cal word in French consists of a root plus any suffixes which follow it. Here. in which specific vowels are considerably lengthened before specific voiced consonants. vowels tend to be longer before voiced consonants. as in the adjective colonial (‘colonial’). and that prefixes in French constitute separate phonological words. the [i] at the end of the phonological word Je vie does not undergo glide formation: the pronunciation is not [ əvjapaʁi]. Glide formation fails to occur across the boundary between phonological words. as can be seen in the pronunciation of Je vis à Paris (‘I live in Paris’). In Old French. derived from the noun colonie (‘colony’).

The term is used both for the discipline and for the object of inquiry. Others have a more mentalistic conception of what the discipline of phonology is. Some define phonology as the study of the functions of speech sounds. In contrast. For instance. we also use the word ‘phonology’ to refer to the sound systems under investigation. but as with the term ‘politics’. they see sound systems as being objects represented in the minds of human beings. This kind of phonologisation is also an example of a phonemic split. Phonemic Principle and realisation. but it attained phonemic status during the evolution of the French phonemic system. then only one of the following approximants can occur in the second position: /r. phonology The study of the sound systems found in human languages. l. play. j/. there are constraints on what kinds of consonant can occur in the first and second positions in a branching onset. phonotactic constraints These are restrictions on the sequence of sounds that can occur in a given position in a syllable. as in the phrase ‘Vowel harmony occurs in the phonology of Hungarian. as in pneu . They vary from one language to another. twice and cure. See phoneme. If a stop consonant occupies the first slot in a branching onset. as in tray. French phonotactic constraints allow the consonants /n/ and /s/ in the second position in a branching onset. phonology is functional phonetics. we talk of phonology as a field of study. On that definition. parallel to politics.130 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY with a /k/).’ The distinction and relation between phonology and phonetics is controversial. in most varieties of English. w.

then that too would constitute a phonotactic constraint. In the adjective phrase very tall. pronounced [psikjatʁ].A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 131 (‘tyre’). the phrasal stress rule is said to create a stress clash between men and -teen. and psychiatre (‘psychiatrist’). Phonotactic constraints can refer to specific consonant types. as we have seen. the verb departed is most prominent. the noun boy is most prominent. In the verb phrase quickly departed. In the noun phrase tall boy. if a language allows only CV syllables. the phrasal stress rule is said to make the final element in the phrase the most prominent. But when thirteen is inserted into a phrase such as thirteen men. Present-day Neo-Piagetians include Annette Karmiloff-Smith. phrasal phonology see Lexical Phonology phrasal stress Prominence of specific syllables in specific words in a phrase. Piaget. For instance. pidgin A pidgin language is a form of language which emerges when speakers of different languages seek to communicate. Unlike Chomsky.and -teen. pronounced [pnø]. In English. -teen is normally more prominent than thir-. does not allow coda consonants. Jean Twentieth-century Swiss psychologist who worked on child development. The application of the phrasal stress rule is said to trigger Iambic Reversal. the adjective tall is most prominent. i. In the word thirteen. A pidgin language therefore acts as a . resulting in the reversal of the prominence patterns between thir.e. but they can be very broad too. he argued that the child’s linguistic development was integrated into the child’s general cognitive development.

Spanish and Portuguese which emerged during the slave trade. Pitch changes feature in word stress. Janet An American phonologist known for her work on intonation. See creole. Syllables which have a pitch accent have pitch movement on that syllable. Pitch accent languages are said by many to be different from tone languages and stress and intonation languages. pitch accent A form of salience. Some of the best-known examples are pidgin varieties of English. the higher the rate of vibration. in which each word has a single tonal pattern. Pierrehumbert. Generally speaking. Pierrehumbert is a leading light in the Laboratory Phonology community. is the stressed syllable. coronal and dorsal. pitch The acoustic effect produced by different rates of vibration of the vocal cords. In the Japanese word toshokan (‘library’). the main places of articulation are labial. the stress is conveyed by pitch alone. morphologically and phonologically simpler than the languages they are based on. pitch accent language A language such as Japanese. the second syllable. French. Pidgin languages are said to be syntactically. Dutch. place of articulation The point in the oral cavity at which a sound is articulated. the higher the pitch. and is a proponent of stochastic phonology. unlike in English. the first having a low pitch. the second a high pitch and the third a low pitch. For consonants. intonation and tone. with the high pitch. .132 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY lingua franca. as in the Japanese word toshokan (‘library’) which has a sequence of three syllables. which are the languages of the slave traders and the languages of the slaves.

a system of onset consonants and a distinct system of coda consonants. Associated with the work of British linguist J. elaborate and gentlemanliness are all polysyllabic. See degree of stricture. The /d/ in the word bad is postvocalic. with the allophones of those phonemes being distributed across a range of environments. Examples are the English fricatives in words such as ship [ʃp] and measure [mε ə]. Under the latter. there is a single set of phonemic oppositions. The English words elephant. for example.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 133 plosive A synonym for a stop. Poverty of the Stimulus (POS) argument see stimulus . one postulates several sets of phonemic systems for each environment. such as onset position and coda position. postalveolar Sounds which are postalveolar are produced with a stricture involving the blade of the tongue and the area just behind the alveolar ridge. though this does not feature in the most recent revision of the IPA. R. On this view. postvocalic Occurring after a vowel. On this view. a given language has. one considers the entire set of environments. point vowels see dispersion theory polysyllabic Containing more than two syllables. Firth. and establishes allophones on the basis of complementary distribution. Many phonologists and phoneticians still use the term palato-alveolar for such sounds. On the polysystemic approach. polysystemic Polysystemic approaches to the nature of phonological contrasts differ from the classical phonemic approach.

sequential subparts within a single segment. The [t] at the end of the utterance ‘He got hit’ is in pre-pausal position if the speaker pauses at the end of that utterance.134 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Prague School A group of linguists and philosophers. including markedness and the idea of different types of phonological opposition. such as the Applecross dialect of Scots Gaelic. Icelandic has both preaspirated and post-aspirated stops. These are distinct from post-aspirated stops such as the [p ]. pre-aspirated stops Stops which are pre-aspirated have a period of aspiration preceding the stop closure. prevocalic Occurring before a vowel. In some languages. [t ] and [k ] in English. they are analysed as sequences of two segments. which are normally referred to simply as aspirated stops. Perhaps the best-known phonologist working in the Prague School was a Russian prince called Nikolaj Trubetzkoy. such as Icelandic. Prenasalised stops. pre-pausal Occurring before a pause. . based in Prague from the mid-1920s into the 1930s. as in the Terena word [mbiho] (‘I went’). since. preaspirated stops have been analysed as single contour segments. prenasalised stops Stops which are treated as single segments. The phonologist Roman Jakobson also worked closely with members of the Prague School. are often described as contour segments. The [ɹ] in the sentence I’m ready is in prevocalic position. who developed several concepts in linguistic analysis. or complex segments. like affricates. in each case. as in the case of the [ht] stop found in Icelandic. there are two distinct. In other languages. but which contain a nasal articulation prior to the oral stop articulation.

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

135

primary articulation The main articulation produced in sounds which also have a secondary articulation. The primary articulation in English ‘dark l’ is alveolar, but this sound also has a secondary articulation, a velarisation in which the back of the tongue articulates with the velum. primary stress Some languages have more than one degree of word stress. Many varieties of English are said to have both primary stress and secondary stress, as in the word preconception, which contains both a secondary stress and a primary stress: [ precon ception], where the diacritic [ ] marks secondary stress, and the diacritic [ ] marks primary stress. The idea is that the syllables between the stressed syllables are unstressed, and thus less prominent than the stressed syllables, but that the syllable with primary stress is more prominent than the syllable with secondary stress. Prince, Alan An American phonologist who works within the generative phonology tradition. He is known for his work in Metrical Phonology. He is considered the co-founder, with Paul Smolensky, of Optimality Theory. He has also worked with John McCarthy on Optimality Theory. principles Many linguists believe that there are basic principles which govern the structure of human languages. In the field of phonology, avoidance of homophony is considered to be a functioning general principle, which is said to come into conflict with the tendency towards ease of articulation. A more formal sense of ‘principle’ is used in branches of generative linguistics which postulate formal principles and parameters, given by Universal Grammar.

136

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

principles and parameters approach Any approach to the theory of linguistic structure which postulates linguistic principles and parameters that are said to be given by Universal Grammar. Mostly associated with syntactic analyses adopted within present-day generative linguistics, but the notion has been adopted by generative phonologists. privative feature A feature which is said to be either present or absent, as in the case of the feature [labial], present in segments such as /u/, /o/, /p/, /b/ and /m/, but absent in segments such as /i/, /e/, /t/, /d/ and /n/. See also opposition. privative opposition see opposition process One way of talking about the relationship between related phonetic and phonological forms is to appeal to the idea of phonetic or phonological processes. In Korean, there are related forms, such as [pap] (‘cooked rice’) and [pabi] (the ‘subjective’ form of the ‘cooked rice’ morpheme). Phonologists have analysed such pairs by postulating an underlying representation of the form /pap/, with an underlyingly voiceless unaspirated stop. Forms such as [pabi] are then said to result from the operation of a process of intervocalic voicing. The process idea tends to be associated with the notion of phonological rule. proclitic see clitic productivity The extent to which a given phonological, morphological or syntactic pattern can apply to create new forms. The suffix -ee in contemporary English is currently exhibiting a certain degree of productivity;

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

137

speakers are uttering new forms such as kissee and teachee, in which the new forms denote the person undergoing the experience. It is claimed, particularly in usage-based phonology, that the productivity of a given pattern is largely determined by the type frequency of the pattern. progressive (preservative) assimilation see assimilation prominence A synonym of salience. proparoxytone A word which has primary stress on the antepenultimate syllable, as in the English word America. prosodic Relating to prosody. prosodic domains see prosodic hierarchy prosodic hierarchy It is often claimed that phonological units larger than the segment form a hierarchy of everlarger units, known as the prosodic hierarchy. An example of such a proposed hierarchy would contain the units known as the syllable, the foot, the phonological word, the phonological phrase, the intonational phrase and the utterance. As one moves from the syllable at the bottom of the hierarchy to the utterance at the top, the units are said to get larger, so that feet contain syllables, phonological words contain feet, and so on. It is a moot point whether all languages have all of these units. It is also debatable whether utterances can be strictly subdivided into neat packages containing such units. Prosodic Morphology An approach to morphology, associated primarily with the work of John McCarthy and

138

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

Alan Prince, in which morphological templates are said to be definable in terms of prosodic constituents such as the syllable and the metrical foot. prosody The study of prosody is the study of suprasegmental features of speech, such as word stress, rhythm and intonation. Some phonologists treat other phenomena, such as nasality, as a potentially prosodic property. The term is used in Firthian Phonology to denote phonological elements which correspond to what were later called autosegments. See Autosegmental Phonology. proto-language A reconstructed earlier stage in the history of a language family. Examples are Proto-IndoEuropean, the reconstructed precursor of the IndoEuropean language family and Proto-Dravidian, the reconstructed precursor of the present-day Dravidian languages, such as Malayalam, Tamil and Telugu. The term ‘proto-language’ is also used by the linguist Derek Bickerton to refer to a postulated more ‘primitive’ form of human language which he claims was an evolutionary precursor to fully-fledged human language. prototypes In the work of Eleanor Rosch, it is argued that human perception relies heavily on prototypes, which are central exemplars of a given category. In the field of colour perception, it is said that we have a clear sense of a prototypical example of, say, ‘green’, and a prototypical example of, say, ‘blue’. But we are poor at categorising tokens which lie on the fuzzy boundaries of blueness and greenness, and will often disagree as to whether a given object is green or blue, if the colour is not prototypical. It is argued that vowel perception

Chomsky’s Rationalism. Geoffrey A British linguist who spent a great deal of his career in the USA before returning to Britain in 2007 to become Professor of Linguistics at Edinburgh University in Scotland. as in the word pet. . including syntactic theory (he was one of the co-founders of a framework known as Generalised Phrase Structure Grammar) and the syntax-phonology interface. as in the word pit. But if we hear non-prototypical exemplars of these phonemes. psychological reality The idea that the phonological representations and generalisations postulated by linguists correspond in some way to mental entities and/or processes in the minds of speaker/hearers. pull chain A synonym for a drag chain. Prototype theory is similar to exemplar theory. say. See realism. so that concepts such as ‘dog’ are said to have more and less central exemplars. they are also good at recognising prototypical examples of /ε/. Pullum. but he has worked on a remarkably wide range of areas in linguistics. Pullum’s early work was on SPE phonology. He is co-author of a phonetic symbol guide and lately known for his work with the philosopher Barbara Scholz criticising the Poverty of the Stimulus argument and. articulated halfway between // and /ε/. See vowel shift. Native speakers are good at recognising a prototypical example of.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 139 works in the same way. more generally. we are less good at identifying the vowel sound (though context of utterance will help immensely in guessing what word is intended). // in English. Prototypes are said by some to be central to speech perception and to our conceptual categories.

It is common for phonologists to postulate different ‘r’ sounds in a . In the Latin word l[a]udati (‘praised’). Syllable rhymes in Latin are said to have been light if they contained only a short vowel. The heavy syllables are said to have greater quantity than the light syllables. or a vowel followed by a coda consonant. and heavy if they contained a long vowel. a diphthong. R ‘r’ sounds Otherwise known as rhotics. pronounced [lauda:ti]. Syllables are often said to be heavy if the rhyme contains a certain amount of phonological material. In Latin. or otherwise on the antepenultimate syllable. normally the rhyme of the syllable. the final syllable is light and the other two syllables are heavy.140 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY pulmonic egressive see airstream mechanisms pulmonic ingressive see airstream mechanisms push chain see vowel shift Q quantity A property often attributed to syllables. quantity sensitivity A term for word stress assignment systems in which syllable weight (otherwise known as syllable quantity) plays a role. words which are trisyllabic or longer are said to have been stressed on the penultimate syllable if it was heavy. Many word stress systems are said to be governed by syllable quantity. Some phonologists distinguish quantity as a phonological property from length as a purely phonetic property of segments.

The process applies if the segment following the target consonant is a vowel. It is worth noting that. it is none the less constrained. [madrasah] (‘Koranic school’). it does not happen across all sequences of two words. and the range of sounds considered to be ‘r’ sounds is remarkably broad. Radoppiamento Sintattico (RS) Literally. a liquid or a glide. ‘syntactic doubling’. It is a moot point whether there is a natural class of ‘r’ sounds. and various affixes can be added to them. An external sandhi phenomenon found in Italian. found in the first example. In the analysis of such forms. and nor do voiceless stops. trills. although the class of sounds considered to be rhotics is large. fricatives and approximants. With the addition of various vowels and affixes. among others. The sequence /drs/ is an example. can be created: [darasa] (‘he studied’. [darsun] (‘a lesson’). phonologists often appeal to the idea of templates such as CVCVC. Vowels can then be interspersed among these consonants. Like Liaison in French. and if the syllable preceding the target consonant is stressed. subsuming taps. in which a word-initial consonant undergoes gemination (doubling) next to a word boundary. as in Era venuto con tré piccoli cani (‘He came with three little dogs’). or . the following forms. for example. radical consonants Sequences of three consonants in Arabic which constitute morphological roots.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 141 language. in which the underlyingly short [p] in piccoli (the plural form of the adjective meaning ‘little’) is geminated to [pp]. no nasal stops ever count as rhotics. There has been much discussion of the conditions for RS. and this has led to discussion as to whether syntactic structure plays a direct role in the triggering of the process.

Rationalism A tradition in the history of philosophy which rests on the idea that certain kinds of cognitive content are native to. many of the articulations of the / / phoneme are raised towards the low mid vowel [ε]. or innate in. which means ‘relying on rationality’. Rationalism is often referred to as Nativism. In the Northern Cities Vowel Shift. mediated by postulated units such as the phonological phrase. An example is DRESS Raising in New Zealand English. Raising in phonology is not to be confused with the use of the same term in the history of generative syntax. as in the pronunciation of the word desk as [dsk]. or even higher than that. raised A vowel is said to be raised if its articulation has moved upwards in the vowel space. with certain ‘innate ideas’. The notion of innate cognitive content was pursued in the twentieth century by Chomsky. . The idea that humans are born with innate linguistic knowledge is opposed by those who support Empiricism. including phonological knowledge. who argued that the human mind is possessed.142 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY whether there is an indirect link between syntactic structure and phonological processes. the human mind and not acquired via interaction with the environment. Rationalism is associated with the work of the French philosopher Descartes. raising Any phonological process in which vowels are raised in the vowel space. at birth. in which vowels of the lexical set DRESS are raised from the low mid [ε] position and pronounced as []. who claims that humans are born with innate linguistic knowledge. It is important not to confuse this meaning with the everyday use of the term.

There is no consensus on whether a clear distinction can be drawn between phonology and phonetics. Other terms used to designate the relation between phonology and phonetics are manifestation. realisation A term often used by scholars who postulate a distinction between phonological and phonetic representations. It is. are said to be transduced into phonetic substance. Others use the term transduction to describe the relationship between phonology and phonetics phonological objects.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 143 Innate phonological knowledge is said to include general principles governing the shape of the phonological systems of human languages. phonetic implementation. unclear exactly what terms such as these are supposed to mean. but this is usually not intended by authors who use the term. Rationalist Relating to Rationalism. The term is somewhat unfortunate for proponents of realism. since it suggests that the phonological representation is somehow less real than the phonetic representation. phonetic interpretation and phonetic exponence. taken to be mental in nature. In Received Pronunciation (RP). realisational difference A difference between two varieties of a language is said to be realisational if there is a difference in the way the phonemes of those varieties are realised. or on what the relation between the two is. at times. and who see the relation between the two to be one of the phonological representation being realised in phonetic substance. the /l/ phoneme is realised as a ‘dark l’ in the rhyme of a . and even those who believe that such a distinction can be drawn do not agree on how it should be drawn.

144

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

syllable, as in the word dull: [d ], where the /l/ is in the coda position of the rhyme. In the word lip, the /l/ is in the onset, and is therefore not realised as a dark l in RP. The word lull in RP has an /l/ in onset position and an /l/ in the rhyme, and is therefore pronounced [l ], with two different l sounds. In Standard Scottish English, the /l/ phoneme is realised as a dark l in all syllabic positions, so that lull is pronounced [ ]. This kind of difference is realisational, not systemic; the difference does not lie in the set of phonemic oppositions found in the two varieties, but in the way a specific phoneme is realised. See systemic differences. realism A way of interpreting scientific theories, according to which the theoretical constructs postulated by the scientist are assumed to correspond to real entities and events. A realist interpretation of atomic theory assumes that atoms are real. Adopting a realist interpretation of phonological constructs such as phoneme, syllable and foot means assuming that such things are real entities in some sense. The alternative to this assumption is to adopt an instrumentalist interpretation of theoretical constructs, according to which we are not justified in assuming that phonemes, feet, syllables and other postulated objects actually exist outside of our theories. Received Pronunciation (RP) An accent of English which has often been associated with speakers who attended the English fee-paying schools. It is widely taught to foreign learners of English around the world. Some phonologists prefer to speak of the present-day RPtype accents as Standard Southern British English. RP is also referred to as BBC English, although BBC presenters nowadays speak with a wide variety of accents.

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

145

reciprocal assimilation see assimilation recursion In syntax, a syntactic category is said to be recursive if one can identify an instance of that category occurring within a category of the same type. For instance, the noun phrase, The old man in the park, contains another noun phrase (the park). Since noun phrases can occur within noun phrases in English, we say that noun phrase is a recursive category in English. It has often been claimed that recursion is a universal property of human language, present in all human languages. This claim has recently been disputed by the linguist Dan Everett. Recursive categories have been postulated in phonology, but their status is much more questionable than the status of recursive categories in syntax. Examples of postulated recursive categories in phonology are the phonological word and the intonational phrase. recursive see recursion reduced vowel see reduction reduction With respect to consonants, this is a process in which a sound with oral cavity articulation comes to be replaced by another sound without oral cavity articulation. Voiceless fricatives are often historically reduced to glottal fricatives, with loss of stricture in the oral cavity. Spanish hijo (‘son’) used to be pronounced with an [h] at an earlier stage in the history of the language. This [h] was a reduced form of Latin [f] in filium. Voiceless oral stops are often reduced to glottal stops, again with loss of stricture in the oral cavity, as in the pronunciation [b ʔə] (butter). This process is often called glottalling. With respect to vowels, in many languages, unstressed vowels are often reduced

146

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

to schwa, which involves no deviation from the neutral position of the tongue. A word such as personal has reduced vowels in its unstressed syllables, both of them schwas: [ p :sənəl], but in the word personality, the syllable with primary stress has a non-reduced vowel: [ p :sə n lti]. Some languages have a more restricted range of vowel phonemes in unstressed syllables than is found in stressed syllables, but none the less do not reduce the unstressed vowels to schwa. In Catalan, the seven vowels /i, e, ε, a, ɔ, o, u/ can occur in stressed syllables, but in unstressed syllables only /i, a, u/ can occur. This kind of phenomenon is analysed as a kind of vowel reduction by some. redundancy see redundant redundant A phonetic feature is said to be redundant if its occurrence is predictable from context. The notion is central to the Phonemic Principle: allophonic properties of speech sounds are predictable from context, as in the case of the intervocalic voicing of unaspirated voiceless stops in Korean, where morphemes such as /pap/ (‘cooked rice’) have a [b] realisation of the morphemefinal /p/ in forms such as [pabi]. In SPE phonology, underlying representations were stripped of all such redundant features, so that the underlying representation for ‘cooked rice’ in Korean would be /pap/. In exemplar theory, it is argued that mental representations of words are not stripped of redundant phonetic material but are stored in the form they are heard, with all the phonetic detail which was perceived when a word was uttered on a specific occasion. reduplication A morphological process in which segmental material from a base is copied. In Maori, /mate/

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY

147

means ‘sick’ and the reduplicated form /matemate/ means ‘sickly’. Reduplication is relevant for phonology because any account of reduplication phenomena requires a statement of exactly which phonological material is to be reduplicated. There are clear cases, such as our Maori example, in which a constituent such as a syllable or a word is reduplicated. But other reduplication phenomena are less straightforward, leading phonologists to appeal to notions such as templates and underspecification. In Ilokano, a Philippine language, the progressive form of the base [basa] (‘read’) is [ag+bas+basa], with [bas] copied from the base. Here, what is copied is neither a syllable nor a base. The same is true for the base [trabaho] (‘work’), whose reduplicated form is [ag+trab+trabaho]. An analysis making appeal to the idea of a template would postulate a prefix consisting of a CCVC template which is underspecified for phonological content. Segmental content from the base is then copied on to the template. Other phonologists have argued that there are prosodic constraints on reduplication, so that the reduplicated material is a prosodic constituent such as the mora, the syllable and the foot. In the case of Ilokano reduplication, the suggestion is that the sequence CCVC is not arbitrary, but corresponds to the language’s maximal syllable. regressive (anticipatory) assimilation see assimilation Rendaku A well-known voicing process in Japanese, in which an initial voiceless consonant in a compound becomes voiced when inserted into the compound. The standard example is the combination or ori (‘fold’) plus kami (‘paper’), which together form the compound [oɾigami] (‘paper folding’). See Lyman’s Law.

The first was the level of systematic phonemic/phonological representation. otherwise known as underlying representation. which yielded a derived level of representation known as the systematic phonetic level of representation. if a given language has a languagespecific constraint prohibiting adjacent consonants. In SPE phonology. When these are violated. In her theory of constraints and repair strategies. the nasal cavity and the pharynx. both attributed with psychological reality. then any such sequence could be repaired by the insertion of an epenthetic vowel between the two consonants. both universal and language-specific constraints are postulated. in which the root of the tongue is retracted. representation A notion that has been widely appealed to in phonology in a variety of different ways. resulting in various effects on the body of the . This was a level at which all redundant (predictable) phonetic features were stripped away. resyllabification see syllable retracted see vowel retraction Retracted Tongue Root (RTR) A property often associated with vowels. For instance. resonance chamber Any of the three chambers in the vocal tract in which resonance may take place: the oral cavity.148 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY repair strategies An idea associated with the work of Canadian phonologist Carole Paradis. repair strategies may be triggered. Those features were then supplied by phonological rules. a distinction was made between two significant levels of phonological representation.

Retroflex consonants are common in both the Dravidian and the Indo-European languages of India. and the voiced retroflex stop [ ] in the Tamil word [pu: υ] (‘garlic’). Typical RTR and non-RTR vowel pairs are [i]/[]. in which the latter member is RTR. Such pairs often figure in vowel harmony systems. The latter word also contains the retroflex nasal stop [ ]. See non-rhotic. [u]/[υ]. such as Tamil. Some believe that there are languages with both ATR and RTR vowel harmony. retraction see vowel retraction and stress retraction retroflex A speech sound is said to be retroflex when the tip/blade of the tongue is curled back and the underside of the tip/blade forms a constriction with the passive articulator. and the Tamil word [pɑ ɯ] (‘waste’) contains the voiced retroflex fricative [ ]. The Tamil word [kυ υ] (‘give’) contains the retroflex tap/flap [ ].A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 149 tongue. In Standard Scottish English and in many varieties of American English. [o]/[ɔ]. There is often debate as to whether a given system is ATR-based or RTR-based. such as the voiceless retroflex stop [ ] in the Tamil word [ ɑβam] (‘penance’). is said to be rhotic if its ‘r’ sounds may appear in both onsets and codas. They include retroflex stops. usually the alveolar ridge. an ‘r’ is pronounced in farm and far left. rhotics see ‘r’ sounds . or variety of a language. [e]/[ε]. reversal see Iambic Reversal rhotic A language. It appears that ATR-based systems may change into RTR systems over time.

The term is also used to refer to a constituent within a syllable which consists of the nucleus and any coda consonants. Ignoring the onset consonants.) The word pneumonia has an initial unstressed syllable. as in the word [ŋin tip] (‘bee’) in the language Weri. In English. The structures in question are often referred to as metrical feet. and when one ignores the onset consonants. different human languages exhibit different rhythmic patterns. as in the English word father. While all human speech is rhythmic. as in the sentence They’ll stone ya. The phrase stone ya consists of the metrical foot [stəυnjə]. It is said that . Each word constitutes a trochaic metrical foot. it is possible to form rhymes such as the following: pneumonia and stone ya (informal spelling of stone you. both expressions contain the metrical foot [əυnjə]. One pattern contains a perceptually salient syllable followed by a less salient syllable. There is a phenomenon known as rhyme which is found in poetry and song. rhythm The regular placement of beats in speech. Because metrical feet can cut across word boundaries. It is worth noting that. both have the foot [ti]. Such a structure is known as a trochee.150 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY rhyme There are two different senses of this word. Another pattern contains a less salient syllable followed by a more salient one. the unit for rhyming is the metrical foot. See syllable. and thus they rhyme. This is known as an iamb. and is referred to as a trochaic structure. Popular music abounds with examples like this. the rhyme of a syllable is not the basis for rhyming in English. despite its name. with any onset consonants ignored. followed by the metrical foot [məυnjə]. and is referred to as an iambic structure. so that city rhymes with witty.

The most prominent element in a diphthong is often referred to as the head of the diphthong. Italian. The term is also used in phonetics to refer to the tongue root.and the suffixes -ly and -ness. one arrives at the root friend. as French [wa] (‘goose’). the South American language Weri. where the [a] is more prominent than the on-glide [w]. Occitan. while Weri ŋintip constitues an iambic foot. root A term from the field of morphology. These can be found in. in which the final stressed syllable forms an iambic foot with the preceding unstressed syllable. For instance. See left-headed and rhythm. French. which contains two trochaic feet: [ precon] [ ception]. The most prominent syllable in a foot may have only secondary stress. once one removes the prefix un. The Romance languages are historically derived from Vulgar Latin. Romance languages A subgrouping within the IndoEuropean language family which includes present-day languages such as Catalan. rhythm rule see Iambic Reversal right-headed Used to refer to phonological constituents in which the head is located at the right edge of the constituent. for example. in the English word unfriendliness.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 151 English father constitutes a trochaic foot. . rising diphthong A diphthong in which the most prominent element is the second. designating the part of a word which remains once all affixes have been removed. as in the English word preconception. Portuguese and Spanish. as in the case of iambic feet. An example from this language is the word [ŋin tip] (‘bee’).

rule-governed A given phonological pattern is said to be rule-governed if it exhibits a clearly stateable regularity. The occurrence of the allophones of a phoneme are said to be rule-governed if we can state exactly which environments they occur in. Rutgers Optimality Archive (ROA) An on-line archive of papers on Optimality Theory. For some phonologists working with private features. but there are front rounded vowels too. peu (‘little’) and sœur (‘sister’). found in words such as share and ash. roundedness The property of being rounded. this is a way of saying that there is a generalisation to be made about the assimilation that occurs between adjacent obstruents in Polish. roundedness is subsumed under labiality RP see Received Pronunciation RTR see Retracted Tongue Root rule A way of stating a generalisation. as in the case of [u] and [o]. based at Rutgers University in the USA. [ø] and [ ] found in the words lune (‘moon’). . as in the case of the English palatoalveolar sound [ʃ]. An alternative way of stating the generalisation would be in the form of a constraint.152 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY rounded Having lip-rounding. When we say that there is a rule of voicing assimilation in Polish. Consonants can also have lip-rounding. Back vowels are typically rounded. The word stress patterns of a language are said to be rule-governed if we can state an explicit algorithm for word stress assignment in that language. as in the case of the French vowels [y].

In all languages. from sam (‘together’) and dhi. as in the word happen. he denies the existence of Universal Grammar. The phenomenon of Linking ‘r’ in non-rhotic varieties of English. Geoffrey A British linguist who has consistently opposed the Rationalist belief that humans are born with linguistic knowledge. Sampson. While he has not worked on phonology. Sandhi processes are processes which operate across morphological and syntactic boundaries. Stressed syllables are more salient than unstressed syllables. meaning ‘putting together’. as in Mary bought a dress. his views are relevant for the study of phonology. using general learning mechanisms. Among the stressed syllables. External sandhi processes operate across word boundaries. as in [fɑ:ɹəwe]. (‘put’). In opposition to this.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 153 S salience A perceptual notion. human children learn the phonology of their language from scratch. sandhi A term taken from Sanskrit. is an example of . syllables bearing the tonic are more salient than syllables which do not carry the tonic. some phonological units will be more salient (prominent) to its speakers than others. there is no innate phonological knowledge (though this is not to deny that humans possess certain innate perceptual and articulatory capacities). Sampson supports Empiricism. far away. According to his view. The term was first used by the ancient Indian grammarians. in which the tonic syllable dress is more salient than the other stressed syllables Mary and bought. Sampson claims that we learn the language(s) we speak. where the penultimate syllable is more salient than the final syllable.

sometimes beginning as internal sandhi. . The present-day IndoEuropean languages of India. as in the form [zindi] (‘roots’). nature of linguistic practices. as in the case of Lumasaaba morphemes such as /li/ (‘a root’). such as Bengali and Hindi. Some processes operate both internally and externally. Unlike some of his American successors in the mid-twentieth century. He studied with Boas. Sapir stressed the cultural. Sapir. he was committed to the psychological reality of phonological representations. since the presence of the ‘r’ is triggered by the presence of a vowel-initial word following the word far. Latin and Ancient Greek that led to the postulating of the Indo-European language family.154 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY this. His name is also associated with the ‘Sapir-Whorf Hypothesis’ because of his association with Benjamin Lee Whorf and the idea that the language one has learned shapes the kinds of thought process in which we regularly engage. Internal sandhi processes operate within word boundaries often across morpheme boundaries. as opposed to biological. Edward (1884–1939) An American linguist who did a great deal of work on native American Indian languages in the first half of the twentieth century. and is known for his combination of anthropological linguistics and mentalism. Sanskrit An Indo-European language which was spoken on the Indian subcontinent. realised as [di] when a nasal stop precedes it. are said to be descendants of Sanskrit. It was the discovery of systematic phonological and morphological relationships between Sanskrit. and then being extended such that they also operate externally.

and frequently associated with various versions of Structuralism.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 155 Saussure. not in a social collectivity. He was concerned to identify what the object of linguistic inquiry was. His emphasis on the importance of synchronic linguistics influenced the way linguistics was practised in the twentieth century. Unfortunately. But if acoustic images and concepts exist in individual minds. as opposed to parole. Linguistic signs were said by Saussure to stand in opposition to each other. Sanford An American phonologist who was the first to investigate the phonology of French within the . published in French in 1916. Saussure also distinguished between the synchronic and the diachronic study of language. was an arbitrary connection between a phonological representation (for Saussure. whereas Chomsky takes competence to reside in individuals. and argued that it was langue. the book was not actually written by Saussure. a system of linguistic signs. this was said to be an acoustic image) and a concept. langue is said to be a social fact. rather than in a social collectivity. and on decisions taken by different translators as to how best to translate key terms from the Course in General Linguistics into English. it is a reconstruction of lecture notes taken by two of his students. The distinction between langue and parole bears some similarity to Chomsky’s distinction between competence and performance. for Saussure. often referred to as the physical realisation of the underlying system. There is a large literature on how to interpret Saussure’s ideas. it is hard to see how the social concept of langue can be sustained. He is best known for the Course in General Linguistics. Schane. The linguistic sign. Ferdinand de (1857–1913) A Swiss linguist often described as ‘the father of modern linguistics’. for Saussure. but.

. based on the notion of elements. He later developed an approach to phonological segments. as in the word character: [ k ɹəktə]. It also alternates with zero in many languages.156 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY SPE phonology framework. Transcribed as [ə]. known as Particle Phonology. as suggested here. Scots is not to be confused with Scots Gaelic. Whether Scots is to be viewed as a dialect of English or as a separate language. Canada and Northern Ireland which is derived historically from the Northumbrian dialect of Old English. schwa The name for a vowel quality which is produced without lip rounding and with the body of the tongue in the neutral position. as in the words [bi:z] (bees). such as French. after the linguist Jack Aitken. A few examples of Scots words are bairn (‘child’). it occurs widely in unstressed syllables in many varieties of English. This vowel alternates with a wide variety of other vowels in many languages. [bi:ɹ] (beer) and [əgɹi:d] (agreed). is a sociopolitical issue. as in the expression ‘Dinnae fash yersel’ (‘Don’t get irritated or upset’). Scottish Standard English see Standard Scottish English Scottish Vowel Length Rule (SVLR) A vowel lengthening process in Scots and Scottish English whereby the vowels /i/. Nor is it to be confused with Standard Scottish English. which is a Celtic language spoken in Scotland and Canada. Also known as Aitken’s Law. Scots A language spoken in Scotland. the accent of English spoken predominantly by the educated middle classes in Scotland. /r/ or a morpheme boundary. lum (‘chimney’) and the verb fash (‘get annoyed’). /u/ and / i/ are lengthened before voiced fricatives.

like vowels. semivowel Synonym for semiconsonant. everyday sense to denote a syntactic unit consisting of a subject and a predicate. do not occupy the head position in the nucleus of a syllable. Also known as semivowel. and are reflected in slip of the tongue phenomena. segments Many phonologists argue that the continuous stream of speech is analysed by speakers into segments. Semitic A language family which includes Hebrew and the various dialects of Arabic. Some argue that segments are an artefact stemming from our knowledge of alphabetic writing systems. as in the unit John went to .A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 157 secondary articulation see primary articulation secondary stress see primary stress segmental Relating to segments. which may group together to form syllables. See glides and yod. Examples are the [w] in wet and the [j] in yet. unlike vowels. so that the monosyllabic English word bit can be analysed as the sequence of segments [b]-[ɹ]-[t]. semiconsonant There is a class of segments which. but that segments are psychologically real objects which enter into the speech planning process. but which. Others argue that the idea of segments is not a mere artefact. sentence The term is often used in its ordinary. Segmental phonology is the study of segmental phenomena such as vowel and consonant allophones. are voiced and have a stricture of open approximation.

it derives from a Hebrew word which features in a biblical tale in which the members of an ethnic group are identified by their pronunciation of the word.158 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY the pub. sibilant harmony see consonant harmony . An example is trisyllabic shortening. It has been used more technically in the literature on generative linguistics. where John is the subject and went to the pub is the predicate. by speakers with a North of England origin. shibboleth Any feature of language use which betrays one’s social or ethnic origins. and then slaughtered. An example of a present-day phonological shibboleth in England is the pronunciation. morphological or phonological. uttering shibboleths of this sort can lead to such speakers being judged socially inferior. where a distinction has sometimes been drawn between the sentence as a unit of competence and the utterance as a unit of performance. sentence stress A term sometimes used to refer to the placement of the tonic in a sentence. short see length shortening Any process in which a segment is shortened. The notion ‘sentence’ is sometimes used in phonology when discussing sentence stress. Pronounced [ ʃbələθ]. instead of the long /ɑ:/ phoneme found in Received Pronunciation (RP) and similar accents. Shibboleths can be syntactic. Since speakers from the North of England are sometimes associated with working-class lifestyles. of words of the sort bath and class with the short / / phoneme.

such as a Spoonerism. signified see sign signifier see sign slack vocal folds A laryngeal feature said to be present during the production of voiced sounds. instead of ‘It’s pouring with rain’. ‘It’s roaring with pain’. Unfortunately. Paul An American scholar who works on formalist approaches to the study of human cognition. so that the English acoustic image represented by /dɒg/ is arbitrarily coupled. slanted brackets The brackets used to represent phonemes. Slips of the tongue give us insights into articulatory planning and production. Smolensky has worked extensively on neural nets and is also known as the co-founder. with Alan Prince. rather than the concept ‘dog’. in English. See square brackets and phonemic transcription. is an example. of Optimality Theory. And many people use the term ‘signified’ to denote. for instance. .A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 159 sign A term used by Saussure to denote the arbitrary coupling. in a given language. This is arguably not what Saussure intended. the set of all dogs. such as the utterance [dɒg]. slip of the tongue A speech error. Saussure described the acoustic image as a signifier. smoothing An informal term for monophthongisation. with the concept ‘dog’. Smolensky. many writers use the term ‘sign’ to denote actual sequences of speech sounds. of an acoustic image and a concept. and described the concept as the signified.

so that. Two main factors determine how sonorous a sound is: the degree of obstruction of the vocal tract during the production of the sound. The term subsumes nasal stops. such as [m] and [n]. gender. such as [l] and [ɹ]. organised according to their degree of sonority. the stricture of complete closure. the hierarchy reads as follows: voiced fricatives>- . since it is found predominantly among young working-class women. Consonants are often subdivided into obstruents and sonorants. sonority hierarchy A hierarchy of classes of speech sound types. Important for phonology. Examples of sociolinguistic variables which affect the different ways in which people speak are age. social class. and liquids.160 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY sociolinguistics The study of the relationship between language use and social context. ethnicity and gender. and are thus less sonorant than fricatives. social class and gender. this pronunciation is correlated with age. soft palate see velum sonorants A subset of the set of consonants. An example of this is the occurrence of a pre-aspirated pronunciation of [t] in pre-pausal position in Tyneside English. sociophonetic variation Variation in people’s speech which is governed by sociolinguistic factors such as age. since the way people speak is intimately tied into their social background. Oral stops have a high degree of obstruction. and whether the sound is voiced or not. All voiced sounds are more sonorous than their voiceless counterparts. within the class of obstruents. ethnicity and social class.

sonority sequencing principle The idea that sequences of consonants in the onset of a syllable increase in sonority. which is taken to be the most sonorous sound in the syllable. as one heads towards the nucleus of the syllable. A general depiction of the sonority hierarchy would be: vowels>glides>liquids>nasals>obstruents. In processes of fortition. The principle also claims that sequences of consonants in the coda of a syllable decrease in sonority as one heads away from the nucleus. which have a structure of open approximation and are typically voiced. since openness equates with less obstruction in the vocal tract. and the facts are complicated by the presence of suffix consonants within a syllable (as in pleads).A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 161 voiceless fricatives>voiced stops>voiceless stops. The most sonorant of all classes are vowels. with speech sounds becoming more sonorous as they are lenited. and works well for words such English pleased (/pli:zd/). Among the vowels. the more open a vowel. sounds are said to move up the sonority hierarchy. there is disagreement as to which are more sonorous than others. . The sonority hierarchy is said to figure in processes of lenition. where ‘>’ means ‘more sonorant than’. The class of sonorant consonants (sonorants) are all considered more sonorant than the class of obstruents. the more sonorant it is. but it is common to take glides to be more sonorant than liquids. becoming less sonorous. The idea has some validity. But there appear to be many exceptions. as well as the existence of syllabic consonants. The sonority hierarchy is also said to figure in the sonority sequencing principle. according to the sonority hierarchy. which in turn are more sonorant than the nasal stops (nasals). Among the class of sonorants.

Some include the state of North Carolina in the linguistic South of the USA. Spectrograms have two axes. Mississippi and Louisiana. Arkansas. and the vertical one showing the frequencies of the formants of the speech sounds. which all agree is Southern. made by a device known as a sound spectrograph. as in the neighbouring state of Louisiana. Kentucky. Tennessee. as distinct from non-derivational models such as various versions of declarative phonology. and that the linguistic South begins in the state of South Carolina. Alabama. spectrogram A visual display of the component parts of a sound wave. the horizontal one showing the number of milliseconds that have elapsed in a recording. It is often seen as the founding text for generative phonology. based on the combined notions of rule and representation. Quite how the vast state of Texas fits into this is unclear. coupled with the idea that rules apply to underlying representations to yield derived representations. a book published in 1968 by Noam Chomsky and Morris Halle. SPE phonology The model of generative phonology adopted in the book SPE. extending south into the states of Georgia and northern Florida. and models of phonological organisation based on this idea are known as derivational phonologies. The transition from an underlying representation to a surface phonetic representation is known as a derivation. Eastern Texan accents are to some extent non-rhotic. SPE The Sound Pattern of English. and west into the states of Virginia. .162 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Southern US accent Most agree that the linguistic South in the USA is in the South-east.

The same spirantisation process happened with the voiced bilabial stop [b]. as seen in minimal pairs such as [bo] beau (‘beautiful’) and [bo] bon (‘good’). the present-day nasalised vowel phonemes of Standard French emerged. Nasalised vowels used to be allophones of oral vowels in the history of French.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 163 spirantisation Fricativisation: the process in which stops become fricatives. which became the voiced dental fricative [ð]. A phonemic split is said to have taken place when a sound which had allophonic status takes on phonemic status over time. Examples are ‘You have hissed my mystery lecture and were caught fighting a liar in the quad.’ Spoonerisms involve the transposition of segments. with the elision of word-final nasal stops in the history of the language. Thus. Spooner. In the history of Spanish. voiced stops underwent spirantisation in intervocalic position.’ instead of ‘You have missed my history lecture and were caught lighting a fire in the quad. rather than segments. The process is often mistakenly described in popular definitions as the transposition of letters. ˜ Spoonerism A kind of speech error named after the Reverend W. split A term used in the phonemic tradition when describing historical change in phoneme systems. A. This has happened as a historical change in many languages. But. Spirantisation is one form of lenition. which became the voiced bilabial fricative [β]. and the voiced dental stop [d]. syllables or words. occurring before nasal stops. a word such as lugar (‘place’) changed over time from having the voiced velar stop [g] to having the voiced velar fricative [γ]. Spoonerisms are interesting for phonologists because they give us insight into .

164 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY syllabic constituents. not only are word-initial onsets transposed. In reality. but the result of the transposition in each case is a well-formed word which is stored in the mental lexicon. Andalucian Spanish). the translation of the Bible into that variety and the adopting of an agreed-upon spelling system. articulatory planning and the mental lexicon. which are used in phonemic transcription. . They are distinct from slanted brackets. in many cases. standard A standard variety of a language is a variety which happens to have undergone the sociohistorical process of standardisation. Regional standards also exist. and indeed some authors often use no brackets at all. In the examples just given. and certain grammatical structures are also deemed to be ‘correct’. spread glottis Open glottis: a laryngeal feature said to be present in sounds which are aspirated. and are thus used for visual representation of underlying representations. as for the English word pull: [p υ ]. Several different sociolinguistic and sociopolitical factors may lead to the standardisation of a language variety. Examples of standard varieties are Standard French (as opposed to Midi French) and Castillian Spanish (as opposed to. as in the case of Standard Jamaican English. in which fixed forms of words are established as the ‘correct’ pronunciations. including. square brackets The brackets used in phonetic transcription. books and articles on phonology frequently fail to stick consistently to the use of slanted brackets for phonemic representations and square brackets for phonetic representations. say.

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 165 Standard Scottish English (SSE) An accent of English spoken predominantly by the educated middle classes in Scotland. false starts. the more Scottish they will sound. Sometimes referred to as Scottish Standard English. Stimulus-response Behaviourism took utterances of speakers to be stimuli which induced a verbal response on the part of the hearer. On this view. Having assumed this. Chomskyans adopt the Poverty of the Stimulus argument. they go on to argue that a child could not acquire a language . claiming that the stimulus is impoverished. Most Scots speak SSE. The term is used quite differently by the followers of Noam Chomsky to refer to the ambient language (the input) to which the human child is exposed. one conceives of phonology. but as a set of verbal behavioural patterns and dispositions to behave verbally in certain ways. one of which is the presence of the Scottish Vowel Length Rule. stimulus A term used in Behaviourism in conjunction with the term ‘response’. Standard Southern British English (SSBE) see Received Pronunciation standardisation see standard stiff vocal folds A laryngeal feature said to be present in voiceless sounds. the more Scots in a speaker’s speech. but many mix this with Scots to varying degrees. errors and uncompleted sentences. Generally speaking. not as phonological knowledge. and the more working class. in that it is full of hesitations. SSE differs from Received Pronunciation in many phonological respects.

166 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY without the aid of innate linguistic knowledge. Linguists such as the British Empiricist linguist Geoffrey Sampson assume the richness of the stimulus. Sampson’s view is that all of the phonological knowledge that the child has to acquire is present in the input. stochastic phonology Probabilistic phonology. As far as phonological knowledge is concerned. For instance. the following segment will be one of the approximants /w. l. ɹ/. given a complex onset cluster in English starting with a stop. Because infants can extract such probabilities from the stream of speech. from birth. j. The transitions between segment types are different across word boundaries from what they are within words. who argues that the stimulus is impoverished. this helps considerably with the bootstrapping problem. of extracting statistical probabilities from the stream of speech. Those who adopt stochastic approaches to the acquisition of phonology and of morphological and syntactic knowledge tend to argue for the richness of the stimulus to which the child is exposed. and argue that everything the child has to acquire is present in the stimulus. Human beings are capable. the probability of any other segment type occurring in that position is zero. This approach stands in stark contrast to the approach of Noam Chomsky. These include the probability of a given speech sound to follow another speech sound. stop see degree of stricture strata see stratal phonology stratal phonology Any model of the interaction of phonology and morphology which postulates different .

stress clash a situation in which two stressed syllables in a word are adjacent.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 167 levels or strata of affixation. as in Japan ese. we avoid saying Ja pa nese. but which is neither a tone language nor a pitch accent language. synonymous with one of the senses of accent. the secondary stress is placed so as to avoid a stress clash. stress and intonation language A language like English. strengthening see fortition stress The term is often used to refer to word stress. stress clash avoidance see stress clash stress retraction A term sometimes used to refer to the kind of reversal one encounters in phenomena such as . when one word is derived from another by the addition of affixes. where the placement of the secondary stress on the syllable which has primary stress in Ja pan would result in a stress clash. where a secondary stress has been placed on the syllable which has primary stress in character. Many languages exhibit stress clash avoidance. Lexical Phonology is an example. which has both a word stress system and an intonation system. But where this tendency would result in a stress clash. However. as in characteri sation. phonologists also use the term when referring to phrasal stress and sentence stress. In English. there is a tendency to place a secondary stress on the syllable which had a primary stress in the deriving word. with specific phonological operations or constraints holding at specific levels of word formation.

or isochronous. and both are said to exhibit hierarchical structure. stricture see degree of stricture structural analogy The idea that the structure of phonological constituents is analogous to the structure of syntactic constituents. Structuralism see structuralist linguistics structuralist linguistics In a sense. so that East becomes more prominent than London. since linguists are typically interested . some linguists believe that the structure of syllables is parallel in some serious sense with the structure of sentences. See syllable-timed. It is often claimed that most varieties of English are stresstimed. This claim rests on the idea that there is a tendency for the time between the beats to be the roughly same. For instance. in that both are said to contain constituents. Government Phonology and Head-Driven Phonology. Stressed vowels can have either primary or secondary stress. more recently.168 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Iambic Reversal. stressed vowel A vowel which is stressed. as in the vowel [] in the English word ambiguous: [ m bgjuəs]. all forms of linguistics are structuralist. the prominence levels (stress levels) of East and London are switched around. in Dependency Phonology. The idea can be found in the work of the Danish linguist Louis Hjelmslev and. When expressions such as East London occur in phrases such as East London Airport. the stress on London is said to be retracted. stress-timed A language is said to have stress-timed rhythm if the beats fall on the stressed syllables.

Secondly. But the term ‘structuralist’ has been used to denote several traditions in linguistics. is often called European Structuralism. See phonetics-free phonology and Hjelmslev. markedness and systems of opposition. phonological objects have no intrinsic phonetic content. Firstly. and continued with the Prague School. and thus arrive at an analysis of a language. the kinds of linguistics practised in the United States in the 1930s to the 1950s are often referred to as American Structuralism. . Articulations involving the tongue and lips are examples. or ‘revolution’ between pre-generative American Structuralism and generative linguistics. the European tradition which started with Saussure. structuralist phonology see structuralist linguistics substance-free An approach to phonological structure which is substance-free attempts to define phonological objects independently of phonetic substance. On this view. Central ideas here are the notions of sign. both in syntax and in phonology. supralaryngeal Articulatory features and gestures which are supralaryngeal are articulated above the larynx. it was held that one could identify the distribution of syntactic and phonological objects. Scholars working within generative linguistics argue that there was a radical break. Others claim that generative linguistics shares so many assumptions with American Structuralism that it is wise to label both generative and pre-generative American linguistics as ‘structuralist’.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 169 in structure and believe that human languages have structure. A key idea here was distribution.

such as word stress. Aspiration is also omitted because it too is said to be predictable (i. The general idea. Sweet.e. This more closely represents the actual pronunciation by many speakers than a postulated underlying representation such as /pi:ɹiɒd/. intonation and tone. because the stress assignment principles are said to reduce it. is that surface forms are somehow closer to the actual pronunciation of the word in question. found in derivational theories of phonology. surface form Often distinguished from underlying representation. For example. Transcribed with a subscript diacritic . to the unstressed vowel [ə] (schwa). His work contains an appeal to the distinction between phonemic and phonetic representations. allophonic). syllabic consonants Consonants which occupy the nucleus of a syllable. in a predictable manner. Henry (1845–1912) A British phonetics/phonology scholar based at Oxford University. but the British phonetician Beverley Collins has argued persuasively that Higgins was modelled on Daniel Jones. and the nonreduced vowel /ɒ/ is postulated as forming part of the underlying representation. the primary stress is omitted on the grounds that English word stress is predictable. Sweet worked on the history of English and on the transcription of English and other languages. It has been widely assumed that Sweet was the model for Professor Henry Higgins in George Bernard Shaw’s play Pygmalion (which forms the basis for the film My Fair Lady). In the latter representation.170 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY suprasegmental Concerning phonological phenomena above the level of the segment. the surface form of the English word period is [ p i:ɹiəd] in many varieties.

as in the English word but. . In English. Syllables which contain no coda consonants are open syllables. in the English word but (/b t/). The rhyme is said to be further subdivided into the nucleus and the coda (any consonants following the nucleus). The syllable is often said to be subdivided into the onset (any consonants preceding the nucleus) and the rhyme (the nucleus and any consonants following the nucleus). which contains the nucleus / / and the coda consonant /t/. as in the English word bee (/bi:/). Syllables which contain one or more coda consonants are closed syllables. syllabification The process whereby segments are slotted into syllabic positions.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 171 under the consonant symbol. Some languages contain only CV syllables. the onset contains /b/ and the sequence / t/ constitutes the rhyme. as in the sequence green eye. syllabified as /gri:. Syllables which lack an onset consonant are said to have an empty onset. [ba]). and which may be preceded or followed by consonants. Empty onsets are said to be involved in the process of resyllabification. the second syllable consisting of a syllabic [m]. the pronunciation [h ʔm] of the word happen is bisyllabic.nai/ (where the full stop represents a syllable boundary). which is normally a vowel. This is the kind of syllable attested in the babbling stage of child development. as in the English word eye (/ai/). Principles such as Maximal Onset are said to guide the syllabification of segments. Thus. The most basic kind of syllable is the CV (Consonant-Vowel) syllable (e. syllable A unit of phonological organisation whose central component is a nucleus. whereby a consonant which might otherwise occupy a coda position comes to occupy a following onset position.g.

In many languages. Generally speaking. heavy syllables have more weight. It is often said that French is syllable-timed. Opposed to diachrony. a heavy penultimate syllable was stressed. it is often claimed that a heavy syllable can be defined as a syllable with a branching rhyme. rather than its historical phonology. whereas a syllable containing a short vowel will count as light. synchronic Related to synchrony. a syllable containing a long vowel in the nucleus will count as heavy. in the form of more segments. Coda consonants often contribute to syllable weight. The distinction is often appealed to in analyses of word stress assignment. syllable-timed A language is said to be syllable-timed if the beats in the rhythm fall on each successive syllable. See stress-timed. or longer segments. only heavy syllables in certain positions may be stressed.172 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY syllable quantity A synonym for syllable weight. . The study of the synchronic phonology of a language is the study of its present-day phonology. For instance. synchrony The present day. rather than the past. as in rela:tus (with a long vowel in the penultimate syllable) and refectus (with a short vowel and a coda consonant in the penultimate syllable). or quantity. In many languages. so that a syllable containing a short vowel followed by a coda consonant will count as a heavy syllable. When tree diagrams are used to represent syllable structure. syllable weight A notion based on the distinction between heavy syllables and light syllables. in the rhyme. in Latin. regardless of whether it is stressed or not. than do light syllables.

The three-way conceptual distinction between systemic. systemic differences A difference between two varieties of a language is said to be systemic if the varieties exhibit differences in the set of phonemic oppositions found in those varieties.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 173 syncope The deletion (elision) of a vowel. as in the word aunt. pairs of words such as ant/aunt are homophones. this opposition does not exist. with a low central vowel. although he used different terms for each of the members of the trichotomy. resulting in the loss of a syllable. in Received Pronunciation (RP). half-way between [ ] and [ɑ:]. as opposed to the trisyllabic pronunciation [ f mli]. and long /ɑ:/. T tap see flap . there is a phonemic opposition between short / /. For example. as in the bisyllabic pronunciation [ f mli] (family). both being pronounced [ɐnt]. systematic phonemic level of representation see representation systematic phonetic level of representation see representation systematic phonological representation A synonym for systematic phonemic level of representation. as in the word ant. In English. See realisational differences and lexical-distributional differences. this deletion typically affects unstressed syllables. In Standard Scottish English (SSE). realisational and lexical-distributional differences goes back at least as far as the work of Trubetzkoy.

An example would be the various vowel lengthening and vowel shortening changes which led to the elimination of phonemic vowel length in Scots and Standard Scottish English. templates are appealed to in the analysis of Arabic and in the study of reduplication patterns: see reduplication for examples. as in our example [lεla]. such as CCVC. These are generalised patterns. In generative phonology. Examples of French child utterances conforming to that template are [lεla] (Il/Elle est là: ‘He/She is there’) and [sεla] (C’est là: ‘It’s there’). In the field of child phonology. For instance. and that the child will select such utterances in his/her attempt at adult utterances. She also argues that infants will adapt adult utterance so that they are slotted into the templatic pattern. such as /CVlV/. Some phonologists believe that we can conceive of sound changes in the history of human languages as ‘conspiring’ towards specific outcomes. or purpose-orientated. . specific to the speech of an individual child. which does not conform exactly to the targeted adult forms. See conspiracy. teleological Goal-orientated. the [ ] in the English word full is tautosyllabic with the preceding vowel. templates are appealed to in the work of Marilyn Vihman.174 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Tapping see Flapping tautosyllabic A sound is said to be tautosyllabic if it is produced in the same syllable as some other sound. Also see radical consonants. Vihman argues that utterances which conform to the child’s templates are perceptually salient to the child. template Generalised phonological patterns. where the ‘C’ stands for ‘consonant’ and the ‘V’ stands for ‘vowel’.

while others question this equation. tensing Any process in which a segment is said to be articulated with greater tension. One definition claims that tense vowels are articulated with ‘heightened subglottal pressure’. Some equate it with Advanced Tongue Root. tertiary stress see word stress TH-Fronting An informal term for the uttering of labiodental fricatives in place of dental fricatives.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 175 tense A feature which has often been postulated to account for certain vowel oppositions. and to be typically longer than their lax counterparts. This is attested in child language acquisition and in many non-standard varieties of English. as opposed to lax vowels. rather than a lax []. The opposite of laxing. but the term ‘tense’ remains controversial. such as the oppositions /i:/ vs // and /u:/ vs /υ/ in RP. Both of these are certainly true for the RP pairs just mentioned. where the first member of the pair is said to be ‘tense’ and the second member ‘lax’. The process known as ‘happY tensing’ in various varieties of English affects the word-final vowel written <-y> in words such as happy. to be articulated closer to the periphery of the vowel space. often the dental stops [t] and [d]. such as New York City English. as in pronunciations such as [tŋ] for thing. Indian English and Standard Jamaican English. yielding a tense [i]. Other definitions take tense vowels. . TH-Stopping The pronunciation of the dental fricatives /θ/ and /ð/ as stops. This is attested in child language acquisition and in several varieties of English. as in the pronunciations [fŋ] for thing and [fεvə] for feather.

the word is said by English speakers to be ‘on the tip of my tongue’. tip of the tongue phenomenon The state of affairs in which people report that a word is almost.176 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY tip of the tongue The very foremost part of the tongue. even though the entire phonological form of the word cannot. This is relevant for theories of how phonological information is stored in the mind. token see type token frequency see frequency of occurrence Tomasello. can sometimes be retrieved. Michael A child syntax specialist who rejects the Chomskyan notion of innate linguistic knowledge. ToBI Tone and Break Index. often involved in dental articulations. . In its place. he argues for a constructivist approach to child language acquisition. The essence of the ToBI system is the breaking down of intonation contours into their component high and low tones. within reach of retrieval from the mental lexicon. ToBI is a notational system for the description of intonational patterns which originates in the work of Janet Pierrehumbert. emphasising the child’s social interaction with other human beings. since psycholinguistic research suggests that certain phonological properties of the word in question. This is relevant for phonologists. but less among phonologists working in the British tradition. such as its initial onset consonant or its stress pattern. but not quite. The tones in question are intonational tones and the breaks are various kinds of juncture. The ToBI system is used a great deal in the USA.

High tones are often transcribed using the acute accent. which means ‘build’ in the African language ´ Yoruba. This is usually a vowel. High tones have a higher relative pitch than mid tones. Tone Bearing Unit (TBU) In tone languages. Tones are often subdivided into level tones and contour tones. conveys hesitation or doubt. as in the word ko. as in the case of vowels in the utterance [m´bu] ´ (‘my stone’) in the Kwa language Twi. or the tonic syllable) in an intonation group. the segmental material to which a tone is attached. the fall-rise and the rise-fall. with a fall-rise tone. Consonants can also act as TBUs. Typical level tones are high vs mid vs low tones. The term ‘tone’ is used by some phonologists. the rising tone. Low tones are often transcribed using the . the general approach carries over into the acquisition of phonology. Examples of tones referred to in the description of English intonation are the falling tone. which in turn have a relatively higher pitch than low tones. in describing non-tone languages. to refer to the pitch changes that occur on the nuclear syllable (also known as the nucleus. Consider the question ‘Has Mary been seeing Bill?’ The response ‘No!’ with a rise-fall tone.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 177 Although his work is in the acquisition of syntax. as in ‘Has Mary been seeing Bill?’ tone group see intonation group tone language A language in which pitch differences function to differentiate words. The rise tone in English is associated with questioning. and the response ‘No’. conveys certainty. tone see tone language.

178 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY grave accent. tonic syllable The syllable in an intonation group on which the pitch changes. so that ‘sing’ in Yoruba would be transcribed as ko. which is a suprasegmental property. as in the Yoruba word ko. Rising tones are often transcribed using a wedge diacritic. The ¯ segmental material in these three Yoruba words is the same. tongue root That part of the tongue which lies behind the back of the tongue. In the English sentence John went to the pub. they differ only with respect to tone. Non-tone languages. such as English. though some writers use a level diacritic for mid tones. It is often argued that the basic rule for the placement of the tonic syllable in English is on the last lexical item in a clause. as in the Thai ˆ word na. Mid tones are often transcribed with no marker. which means ‘face’. which means ‘thick’. as in the Yoruba word ko. as in the antepenultimate syllable of the Spanish word . including Africa. Tone languages can be found in many parts of the world. which means ‘sing’. tonic see tonic syllable tonic placement The placement of the tonic in an intonation group. the ‘neutral’ (least marked) intonation has pub as the tonic syllable. do not exhibit this phenomenon. Falling tones are often transcribed with a circumflex. as is the case here. which means ` ‘refuse’. as in the Thai word na. Contour tones include rising tones and falling tones. opposite the back wall of the pharynx. tonic vowel A vowel which receives primary word stress. Asia and South America.

There is a natural affinity between. deleting or transposing elements of syntactic structure. whereas low tones and voiced obstruents are characterised by slack vocal cords. a sequence of a voiced obstruent and a following vowel can develop into a voiced obstruent and a vowel with a low tone. In SPE phonology. tonogenesis The historical process in which a non-tone language becomes a tone language. and. In phonological frameworks which are derivational. it is possible to formulate certain phonological rules as transformations. which ‘becomes’ [drekskite]. voiceless obstruents and high tones. on the other. two of the rules postulated for many varieties of English were Nasal Assimilation and Voiced Velar Deletion. as in /dresk/ + /kite/.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 179 bueno (‘good’). in Lithuanian. Tonal contrasts can often be reconstructed as voicing contrasts. For instance. Nasal Assimilation: /sŋg/. Not to be confused with the term ‘tonic’ used in studies of intonation. . For example. Voiced Velar Deletion: /sŋ/. on the one hand. they applied as follows: Underlying Representation: /sng/. voiced obstruents and low tones. In words of the sort sing and bring. The second and third of these are derived representation. there is a process of metathesis under which a fricative + stop sequence is switched around when such a sequence occurs before a consonant. High tones and voiceless obstruents are characterised by stiff vocal cords. Transformational rules were postulated which applied to a representation to yield a derived representation. transduction see realisation transformation A term used in the earlier stages of generative linguistics. by means of inserting.

trill A sound made with a rapid series of closures and openings. They have also been used in work on feature geometry. then closes again and so on. transcribed as [B]. then opens. in quick succession.180 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY This process can be construed as a transformational rule which transposes two elements. they consist of a central node which branches on to other nodes. used in both syntax and phonology. involve the same kind of articulation. Tree diagrams take the same form as the family trees used in genealogy. horizon and kangaroo are all trisyllabic. tree diagrams have been used to represent the structure of syllables and feet. Bilabial trills. both in syntax and phonology. but with the back of the tongue as the active articulator and the uvula as the passive articulator. trisyllabic Containing three syllables. which themselves have branches. transparent vowel see neutral vowel tree diagram A type of visual representation of a structure. where the blade of the tongue closes against the alveolar ridge. involve rapid closures and openings between the lips. this was a change that took place in the history of English whose effect can be seen in certain alternations in present-day English. The English words cinema. They are used to represent the idea of constituents. transcribed as [R]. Uvular trills. In bisyllabic words which . as in the alveolar trill [r]. Trisyllabic Laxing Also known as Trisyllabic Shortening. Trills can be made at two other points of articulation. In phonology.

sometimes termed ‘cognitive’) interpretation of phonology. Central ideas in Trubetzkoy’s work are the identification of different kinds of phonological opposition (bilateral. privative. He was interested in systems of opposition between phonemes. multilateral. isolated. where bisyllabic serene has the long stressed vowel [i:]. trochaic see rhythm trochaic bias hypothesis The claim that infants are predisposed towards trochaic. An examples of the residue of this change in present-day English is the pair serene/serenity. metrical feet. rather than iambic. the addition of a suffix meant that the word had three or more syllables. true geminate see geminate . gradual and equipollent oppositions). He was known for his collaboration with Roman Jakobson. but rejected a mentalistic (psychological. Trubetzkoy insisted on a distinction between phonetics and phonology. trochee see rhythm Trubetzkoy. and the vowel in question then underwent laxing/shortening. Nikolaj (1890–1938) A Russian prince who fled Russia at the time of the Russian Revolution.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 181 contained a stressed long (tense) vowel. Trubetzkoy’s name is widely associated with the Prague School (although he actually spent most of his career in Vienna). Connected with this is the appeal to markedness in phonological oppositions. proportional. He also developed the notion of the neutralisation of phonological oppositions. but serenity has the short/lax vowel [ε].

when one hears a given [t]. ‘voiceless alveolar stop’. An example of a postulated typological difference in phonology is the three-way distinction between stress and intonation languages. morphology and phonology. uttered on another occasion. slightly different. Also known as Geordie. Types may be viewed as categories. the study of different vowel harmony systems or the study of natural classes. it may be claimed that a large set of utterances of voiceless alveolar stops are tokens of the type. tone languages and pitch accent languages. and many believe that human perception relies heavily on classifying objects and events into categories. so that. Types are said to be more abstract than this. the term can subsume the study of different word stress systems. Tokens are specific objects or events at a particular point in space and time. typology The study of different linguistic types. Peirce (1839– 1914) and has been adopted in most areas of linguistics. In phonology. or kind. such as the utterance of a voiceless aspirated alveolar stop ([t]) by a specific speaker at a specific point in time. type frequency see frequency of occurrence typological Relating to typology. [t]. . Tokens of a type are said to ‘count as the same thing’.182 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Tyneside English The variety of English spoken in the area around the River Tyne in the North-East of England. S. type/token The type/token distinction goes back to the work of the American philosopher C. The term is used in syntax. it counts as an occurrence of ‘the same thing’ as another.

in present-day German. a single underlying representation /kut/ is postulated. . as in the French word pain (‘bread’): [p˜]. had a plural suffix consisting of the high front vowel [i]. this word. umlaut is a process in which a vowel in a root assimilates to a vowel in a suffix. which is high mid and front. For alternants such as Hungarian [kut] (‘well’) and [kudban] (‘in the well’).A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 183 U umlaut A kind of metaphony in which a vowel (normally in a root) assimilates to another vowel (normally in a suffix). unaspirated Voiceless stops which are unaspirated can be defined as having no delay in Voice Onset Time. For some scholars. In rule-based derivational theories such as SPE. like many others. even though the two vowels are not adjacent to each other. [o] and [ɔ] in a root fronted to [y]. For instance. [ø] and [ ] respectively when the plural suffix [-i] was added. An example is the historical process of iumlaut in German. These are distinct from the ε voiceless aspirated stops of most varieties of English. back vowel [o] in the root. as in the word pad: [p d]. but the plural Söhne has the umlauted version of that vowel: [ø]. while vowel harmony is a process in which a vowel in a suffix assimilates to one or more vowels in a root. the voicing for a following vowel begins at the point at which the stop closure is released. underlying representation A level of representation postulated in theories which are derivational in nature. the singular noun Sohn (‘son’) has a high mid. in which the back vowels [u]. morphophonological alternations were dealt with by postulating a single underlying representation from which the surface forms could be derived. Historically.

who adopt exemplar theory. The existence of innate linguistic knowledge is hotly disputed by many scholars. The place of articulation of the nasal at the end of the prefix is entirely predictable. [zi e ele] (‘buds’) and [ziŋgunija] (‘bags’). In the Bantu language Lumasaaba. Phonologists who argue that underlying representations should contain only arbitrary. It is used as a name for a postulated innate module of mind said to contain specifically linguistic knowledge. [zi ] and [ziŋ]. The realisations of the prefix are [zim]. underspecification An underlying representation is said to be underspecified if any of its features are not present. Chomsky now uses the expression only for the theory of this postulated module. or are not assigned a value. . including entirely predictable information. it is stripped of all place of articulation feature values. But many of his followers continue to use the term for both the theory and its object. they claim that words are stored in the mind in full phonetic detail. Universal Grammar (UG) A term associated with the work of Noam Chomsky. it will have the same place of articulation as the following consonant.184 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY from which the surface form [kud] is derived via a process of voicing assimilation. preferring the term ‘the human language faculty’ for that module. Phonologists such as Joan Bybee. there is a prefix which attaches only to nouns beginning with a consonant. [zindaha] (‘wings’). as in [zimbati] (‘knives’). argue against this approach. because of nasal assimilation. non-predictable features postulate a nasal stop at the end of the prefix which is underspecified. [zin].

See Jakobson. For other linguists. but there are front rounded vowels too. It is conceptually possible to allow that there are absolute universals while denying that they are given by Universal Grammar. An example would be: if a given language has voiced obstruents. [ø] and [ ]. found in the words lune (‘moon’). An example of an absolute syntactic universal would be the claim that all human languages exhibit recursion. This is a strong sense of the term. talk of universals is talk of tendencies in human languages. unstressed Bearing neither primary stress nor secondary stress. while the penultimate syllable has primary stress. Front vowels are typically unrounded. unmarked see markedness unrounded Lacking lip-rounding. An example of a phonological universal would be the statement that all languages have both consonants and vowels. since the universal principles postulated are absolute. In the English word happen. Implicational universals take the following form: if a given language has property X. who believe in the existence of Universal Grammar. linguistic universals are universal principles.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 185 universals The term is used in at least two different senses. peu (‘little’) and sœur (‘sister’). This is a weaker sense of the term. given by a supposedly innate language module. as in the vowels [i] and [e]. For the followers of Noam Chomsky. then it will also have voiceless obstruents. then it will also have property Y. as in the case of the French vowels [y]. which operate in all human languages. the final syllable is unstressed. . Unstressed syllables often have reduced vowels. such as the tendency for vowels to nasalise when adjacent to a nasal stop.

associated with the work of Joan Bybee. utterance A term sometimes used in its ordinary. pronounced [ʁɐ]. . when phonologists speak of CV syllables. For instance. A key notion in usage-based phonology is frequency of occurrence.186 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY usage-based phonology An approach to phonology. However. uvular Sounds which have the back of the tongue as the active articulator and the uvula as the passive articulator are uvular. and the latter as units of performance produced by a speaker. as in the word rat (‘rat’). fricatives and approximants can all be produced in this way. uvula The part of the soft palate which can be seen dangling down at the back of the mouth. Stops. V V Stands for vowel. It has been used more technically in the literature in generative linguistics when a distinction is made between sentences and utterances. the utterance is often postulated as the largest unit in the hierarchy. they mean syllables consisting simply of an onset consonant and a vowel in the nucleus position. everyday sense to mean a stretch of uninterrupted speech made by a speaker. with the former seen as units of competence generated by a grammar. the generative literature is inconsistent in its usage of this distinction. In discussion of the prosodic hierarchy. which stresses that performance (actual usage in specific contexts of utterance) is as central to our understanding of phonological phenomena as competence. An example of a voiced uvular fricative is the ‘r’ sound produced in Northern French.

preventing air from flowing through the nasal cavity. Velar sounds are characterised by an articulation between the back of the tongue and the velum. velar softening see palatalisation velaric airstream mechanism see airstream mechanisms velarisation A secondary articulation made by the back of the tongue and the velum. Harry A Dutch phonologist who has worked on.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 187 van der Hulst. See structural analogy. This velarised [l] is transcribed with a diacritic which runs through the phonetic symbol for the consonant. among other things. variegated babbling see babbling velar A place of articulation. and velic opening (or lowering) in which the velum is lowered and air may flow through the nasal cavity. velic Relating to the velum. It is often said that the ‘dark l’ in many accents of English has a primary articulation which is alveolar and a secondary articulation which is velar. vowel harmony systems and word stress systems. Used to refer to velic closure. thus: [n ] (null). velic closure see velic . in which the velum is raised. velarised Articulated with a secondary articulation of velarisation. He has developed a descriptive famework for phonological representations known as Head-Driven Phonology.

the nasal cavity and the pharynx.188 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY velic opening see velic velum The soft palate: the soft part of the palate. vocal cords Two strips of tissue located in the larynx. vocal folds A synonym for the vocal cords. Vihman is a constructivist who opposes the Chomskyan conception of child linguistic development. The sounds produced are not syllabic in nature. verlan see language games Vihman. Note that the term is not spelled ‘vocal chords’. whereas they are said to be stiff during the production of voiced sounds. the child seems to be experimenting with its vocal apparatus. vocal tract The three resonance chambers taken together: the oral cavity. leading to voicing. which may vibrate. located behind the hard palate. See template. vocal play A stage in the first year of life. which starts before the babbling period. During this period. During the production of voiceless sounds. and . Marilyn A specialist in child phonology who has carried out extensive empirical investigation with infants. Voice Onset Time (VOT) When one produces a stop consonant in which the vocal cords are not vibrating. unlike the CV syllables of the babbling period. the vocal cords are said to be slack. They include a range of relatively ‘exotic’ sounds such as clicks and bilabial and uvular trills.

It has been pointed out that. Many phonologists have pointed out that the voiced/voiceless dichotomy alone is insufficient to distinguish between the full range of laryngeal contrasts in human languages. voiceless unaspirated and voiceless aspirated stops. while the contrast in most varieties of English is between voiceless aspirated and voiceless unaspirated stops. the sound in question is not. we say that the stop is unaspirated. unlike the stop at the beginning of the French word bain. ε voiced A term for speech sounds which are produced with voicing. a fully voiced stop. If there is no such delay in VOT. The contrast among French stops is thus a contrast between fully voiced and voiceless unaspirated stops. there may be a delay in the onset of voicing in the vowel. (c) voiceless aspirated stops. One needs. When this happens. we say that the stop in question is aspirated. at least. although English spelling conventions represent words such as bed with the <b> grapheme. Languages such as Thai have a three-way phonemic contrast between fully voiced. ` voiceless Speech sounds are said to be voiceless if the vocal cords are not vibrating during their production. [pa:] ` ` (‘forest’) and [p a:] (‘split’). to distinguish between the following: (a) fully voiced stops. as in the French word pain (‘bread’): [p˜]. as in the English word pad: [p d]. in which the vocal cords are vibrating prior to the release of the stop closure. in fact. but an unaspirated voiceless stop. as in the words [ba:] (‘shoulder’).A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 189 then follows this with a vowel sound. as in ε the English word pad: [p d]. Example of voiceless sounds are the voiceless . as in the French word pain (‘bread’): [p˜]. as in the French word bain (‘bath’): [b˜]. ε (b) voiceless unaspirated stops.

one possessing the harmonic property. vowel harmony A kind of metaphony in which all the vowels in a word must share one or more properties (but see opaque vowels and neutral vowels). See degree of stricture. and the voiceless fricatives [f] and [s] in the English words sin and fin. where the first word has vowels which share the property of frontness (palatality) and the vowels in the second word all lack that property. [o] and [ɔ]. See also umlaut.190 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY unaspirated stops [p]. as in Finnish [tyhm ] ‘stupid’ vs [tuhmɑ] ‘naughty’. ε voicing assimilation see assimilation vowel Any sound which occupies the nucleus of a syllable and is produced with a stricture of open approximation. Vowel harmony often spreads from roots to affixes. Fully voiced sounds are produced with vibration of the vocal cords during the articulation of the sound. as in Hungarian [by:n-tøl] ‘crime’. [ø] and [ ] in contemporary Standard French all resulted from the historical fronting of the back vowels [u]. Such languages tend to have two sets of vowels. where the ablative suffix undergoes . still and skin. as in the [v] in the word heavy. [t] and [k] in the English words spilt. voicing The vibration of the vocal cords. The front rounded vowels [y]. vowel fronting Any process in which one or more vowels is produced further forward in the vowel space than it previously was. Word-initial stops are fully voiced if the vocal cords are vibrating prior to the release of the stop closure. the other lacking it. as in the French word bain (‘bath’): [b˜:].

[k l-d ] and [bol-du]. vowel quality The acoustic impression given by the production a given vowel type. This is difficult to pin down precisely. [kyl-dy]. Other properties which feature in vowel harmony include the following: (a) labiality (roundedness). For instance. Vowel harmony often has no effect on intervening consonants. determined by the height of the first vowel of the stem: [rut-r-a] ‘work for’. say. (b) lowness. the Khirgiz infinitive forms [bil] ‘know’. [e] and [ε]. There are languages in which harmony may spread from certain affix vowels into the root: see dominant/recessive harmony. [εkɔ] ‘pap’. There is often debate as to whether a given system exhibits ATR or RTR harmony. which has a suffix which takes the form [r] (with a high vowel) or [er] (with a lowered vowel). unlike [mokuʃ-tol] ‘squirrel’. (d) Retracted Tongue Root (RTR). as in Yoruba [epo] ‘oil’. [kyl] ‘laugh’. it is possible for humans to identify . [iz-i] ‘footprint’ (possessive). Some languages have harmony for more than one property. [gyl-y] ‘rose’ (possessive) as distinct from [is] ‘footprint’ (nominative). [k l] ‘do’ and [bol] ‘be’ take different forms of the past definite suffix: [bil-di]. [ror-er-a] ‘look at’.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 191 palatal harmony and thus contains a front vowel. where the ablative suffix has a back vowel. as in Turkish [gyl] ‘rose’ (nominative). None the less. [i]. [wυd-ɔ] ‘farming’. because there is a continuum as one moves from one vowel sound to another. Some languages with vowel harmony have words exhibiting disharmony. showing both palatal and labial harmony. there are no sharp boundaries between. but there are cases where it does. involving neutral vowels and/or opaque vowels. as in Kikuyu. (c) Advanced Tongue Root (ATR). as in Tangale [tug-o] ‘pounding’.

rather than as homophones. which may be said to ‘take evasive action’. pronounced [tʁuve]. In Standard French. the phoneme /a/ is often realised as [ɑ] or [ɔ]. vowel raising Any process in which one or more vowels is produced higher in the vowel space than it previously was. vowel shift A process in which the realisation of a vowel phoneme encroaches on the articulatory and perceptual space of another vowel phoneme. These realisations encroach upon the space of the phoneme /ɔ/. vowel reduction see reduction vowel retraction Any process in which one or more vowels is produced further back in the vowel space than it previously was. even though there are colours which are intermediate between the two. The idea of ‘taking evasive action’ can be conveyed via the notion of ‘push chain’. In present-day Received Pronunciation. nearby. Also known as vowel backing. in which one vowel phoneme can be thought of as ‘pushing’ an adjacent vowel into another. the vowel [u] results from the historical raising of an [o] vowel. apparently to ‘avoid’ a phonemic merger. . as in [bo] (boy). and is often pronounced [o]. the back vowel [ɑ:] in words such as class and grass results from the historical retraction of front [ :]. just as we can identify prototypical examples of colours such as green and blue. resulting in a change in the realisation of the other vowel phoneme. as in buy pronounced [bɔ]. as in the transition from trover (‘to find’) to trouver.192 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY prototypical [i]-type. [e]-type and [ε]-type qualities. thus avoiding a phonemic merger and sustaining buy/boy as a minimal pair. In London English.

vowel system see Phonemic Principle vowel triangle see Dispersion Theory Vulgar Latin The Latin spoken at the height of the Roman Empire by ordinary working people. one can conceive of vowel shifts as ‘pull chains’ (drag chains). . the notion can be applied to phonological sequences. soldiers and merchants. dragging an adjacent vowel phoneme into the vacated space. In phonology. Equally. weight see syllable weight well-formed A syntactic sequence in a given language is said to be well-formed if it conforms to the grammatical rules of the language. It is distinct from Classical Latin and is the historical source of the present-day Romance languages. The word-initial sequences /kl/. but Kicked dog man the the is not. See Great Vowel Shift and Northern Cities Vowel Shift. queen. vowel space The space in the oral cavity in which vowels can be produced.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 193 part of the vowel space. But word-initial sequences such as /kn/ and /ks/ are ill-formed. /kr/ and /kj/ are all well-formed in most varieties of English. cry and (arguably) cure. See also reduction. W weakening A synonym for lenition. Thus The man kicked the dog is well-formed in English. in which one vowel phoneme ‘vacates’ a part of the vowel space. as in the words clown. /kw/.

Similarly. as in the case of Linking ‘r’ in non-rhotic varieties of English. In the case of obligatory Liaison in French. There is disagreement as to whether syntactic structure directly influences phonological processes. as in the boundary between far and away in the phrase far away. where a word-final underlying /r/ is realised if the following word begins with a vowel. C. as in the phrase far away.194 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Wells. A British phonetics/phonology specialist based at University College London. the plural suffix /z/ is realised in phrases such as amis américains (‘American friends’): [amizameʁikε]. It is claimed that the link between mes and amis is closer than the link between amis and arrivent. This book is a systematic description of the pronunciation of a large number of varieties of English around the world. as in mes amis: [mezami]. Word boundaries can play a role in phonological processes. J. perhaps best known for his three-volume work Accents of English. It is this ‘closer link’ that is said to trigger the Liaison process. or whether the influence is indirect. But ˜ the plural /z/ of amis is not realised in the expression Mes amis arrivent (‘My friends are coming’): [mezamiaʁiv]. . and is still frequently referred to today. word boundary The boundary between two words. the underlying /z/ in words such as mes (the plural form for ‘my’) is realised if the following word begins with a vowel. mediated by phonological units such as the phonological phrase. and this closeness is believed to play a role in the triggering or non-triggering of certain phonological processes. published in 1982. Some sequences of two words are said to form a ‘closer’ link to each other than others.

where the penultimate syllable is more prominent than the final syllable. since the final /d/ undergoes devoicing. the plural form of the noun. Word-Final Devoicing A process whereby voiced obstruents become voiceless when in word-final position. The stop /p/ is word-medial in the word happen: [ h pən]. In Japanese. The stop /b/ is word-initial in the word bad. This prominence/ salience is known as word stress. It can be created via any or all of the following: greater loudness. The stop /d/ is word-final in the word bad. word-initial Occurring at the beginning of a word. we will find that not all of the syllables in a word will have the same degree of perceptual salience (prominence). it is mostly pitch movement and duration which convey word stress. word phonology see Lexical Phonology word stress Whatever language we study. greater segmental or syllabic length. as in [trudi]. In English. The Polish root /trud/ (‘labour’) is pronounced as [trut]. The term is rather vague and unsatisfactory. it is pitch movement alone (see pitch accent .A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 195 word-final Occurring at the end of a word. or greater pitch movement. as in the English word father. but if the final obstruent in the root is not word-final. word-medial Occurring in the middle of a word. no devoicing occurs. some will be more prominent/salient that others. sometimes referred to simply as stress. since it can be used to denote segments which occur in a wide variety of syllabic and metrical contexts. Different languages harness different combinations of these in their word stress systems.

Yet others exhibit rule-governed word stress assignment. and a secondary stress on the initial syllable. the . Those who postulate tertiary stress on the final syllable do so because it has a vowel which does not exhibit reduction to schwa (compare the word woman. as in the word [ silatu rahim]. Y yers The name for a set of abstract underlying vowels postulated by generative phonologists to account for certain morpho-phonological alternations in the Slavic languages. subject to stress clash avoidance. as in [pɔsε ] vs [pɔs a]. as in Modern Greek. a level or tertiary stress. Others have arbitrary patterns of stress in words. In Polish. where the rule is as follows: place a primary stress on the penultimate syllable of the word and then place a secondary stress on the initial syllable of the word. in addition to primary stress and secondary stress. and each alternate syllable thereafter. Some languages have a very simple word stress assignment system. Some phonologists postulate. It is agreed that words such as this have primary stress on the penultimate syllable. Stress is sometimes referred to as accent and stressed syllables are said to be accentuated. in which the stress may appear on any of the syllables of a root. some instances of phonetic [ε] alternate with zero. such as the last syllable in the case of Standard French. where a primary stress falls on the penultimate syllable. The third syllable from the beginning of the word does not take a secondary stress since this would result in a stress clash. An example is Malay. a given syllable in the word is the one that will be stressed. with primary stress on the penultimate syllable and a schwa in the final syllable.196 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY languages). as in the English word survey.

pronounced [p jυɹ]. Z zero A term often used to describe alternations in which a sound is elided. or as zero. In Standard French. but no [ε] in the genitive form. as in the various ways of pronouncing sequences such as Je te le redemande (‘I’m asking you this again’). Yod Dropping A term used to refer to the nonpronunciation of yod in certain accents of English. The argument is that the [ε]s which alternate with zero must be derived from an underlying representation other than /ε/. pronounced [k jυɹ]. since there is no phonetic [˘] in Polish which would provide phonetic evidence for the existence of underlying /˘/. which may be realised as [ε]. In many varieties of American English. That underlying representation is said to be a yer.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 197 nominative singular and genitive singular of the word for ‘envoy’. the nominative singular and genitive singular forms of the word meaning ‘armchair’. yod A term used to refer to the palatal glide [j]. often transcribed as [y] by American phonologists. and pure. where we can see [ε] in the nominative form. where the schwa vowels in Je. and thus fails to apply in words such as cure. This kind of analysis is an example of absolute neutralisation. a non-ATR high vowel. there is Yod Dropping in words such as new and tune. where the [ε] does not alternate with zero. pronounced [nu:] and [t u:n]. schwa is said to alternate with zero. Yod Dropping only applies where the yod would have been preceded by a coronal consonant. . These alternations are distinct from pairs such as [fɔtεl] vs [fɔtεla]. represented as /˘/.

but not the schwas of te. An example is [ʃtələʁədmɑd].198 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY te le. which is said to have a zero realisation when it is elided. re.and de may be elided. where the schwas in Je and de have ˜ been elided. . subject to the constraint known as la loi des trois consonnes. le or re-. Many phonologists postulate an underlying schwa in words such as Je.

P. Basingstoke: Macmillan. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. H. Giegerich. P. (1992) English Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. M. Dell. so I have used examples from those languages too. Fox. (1991) Conditions on Phonological Government. J.Sources Many of the examples come from what I know of varieties of English and French. J. Carr. English translation of Dell (1973) Les Règles et les sons: Introduction à la phonologie générative. and R. J. Durand. (1993) Phonology. For examples from these and other languages. I also know a little about Malay and Spanish. Anderson. London: Longman. J. Oxford: Blackwell. I have relied on the following primary and secondary sources. (1990) Generative and Non-linear Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Ewen (1987) Principles of Dependency Phonology. (1980) Generative Phonology and French Phonology. Paris: Hermann. Oxford: Blackwell. M. Charette. Wood (1968) A Concise History of the French Language. Carr. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. . and C. (1999) English Phonetics and Phonology. F.

(1989) ‘Sound change is drawn from a pool of synchronic variation. Oxford: Blackwell. Kassin. J. Roca. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Hyman. C. Phonology in the Twentieth Century (Chicago: University of Chicago Press). New York: Continuum. I. A. A. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. L. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (1982) Accents of English. Breivik and E. (1975) Phonology: Theory and Analysis. S. Oxford: Blackwell. J. J. and W. (1996) Phonology. H. (2006) A Critical Introduction to Phonology. Johnson (1999) A Course in Phonology. I hope to be forgiven for the extremely simplified thumbnail sketches I have offered of these schools and scholars. In giving brief details of various schools and scholars in the history of phonology. Oxford: Blackwell. H. Harris. Unpublished PhD thesis. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Language Change: Contributions to the Study of its Causes. Hock. I have relied heavily on Stephen R.200 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Hannahs. H. Kager. R. New York: Holt. 173–98. (1991) Principles of Historical Linguistics. (1994) English Sound Structure. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. (1984) Phonology. E. Lass. R. pp. Tübingen: Niemeyer.’ in L. Silverman. J. M. (1995) Prosodic Structure and French Morphophonology. vols 1–3. J. Newcastle University. Spencer. (1999) Optimality Theory. T. Kenstowicz. Anderson’s excellent 1985 book. D. Jahr (eds). (2000) The Phonological Word in Standard Malay. Ohala. Oxford: Blackwell. . Rinehart & Winston. (1994) Phonology in Generative Grammar. Wells. UK.

A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 201 I also hope that no factual errors have crept into those sketches. . I have also had recourse to Key Thinkers in Linguistics and the Philosophy of Language. edited by Siobhan Chapman and Chris Routledge. and published in 2005 by Edinburgh University Press.

I suggest either Carr (1999). B. also published by Arnold.Bibliography (a) Textbook introductions The beginning student should follow an introductory course in phonology. are both very good but are rather long. and by Kenstowicz. as the title suggests. For students looking for an introduction to specifically English phonetics and phonology. Carr (1993). or April McMahon’s (2002) An Introduction to English Phonology. Collins and I. but it is a unique and most useful book. with an excellent accompanying CD. published by Arnold. is a useful book. rather than being an introduction to phonological theory as such. published by Routledge. For an elementary introduction to English phonetics and phonology. J. I recommend Spencer (1996). C. is slightly out of date (soon to be updated). Hannahs (1998) Introducing Phonetics and Phonology. Jacob’s (2005) Understanding Phonology. cited above. but has useful exercises. The . published by Edinburgh University Press. Of the textbooks which appear in the sources section. Davenport and S. Giegerich (1992). cited above. cited above. practical in its aims. is a very good book but has no exercises. Gussenhoven and H. preferably using a textbook which contains exercises. is. The textbooks cited above by Roca and Johnson. as is M. Mees (2003) Practical Phonetics and Phonology.

Mehmet Yavas’s (2006) ¸ Applied English Phonology. M. published by Routledge. because of this. is also useful. Bloomfield. M. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. published by Blackwell. Chicago. Reprinted in Joos.) (1957). and C. (2001) Phonology and Language Use. (1983) Phonology in the Twentieth Century. S. the student will find that my definition of central terms. 329–48. Ewen (1987) Principles of Dependency Phonology. (1926) ‘A set of postulates for the study of language. edited by E. J. (1972) Selected Writings of Baudouin de Courtenay. Bybee. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Washington: American Council of Learned Societies. and M. (b) Primary source material For students wishing to consult primary source material. (ed. S. L. Anderson. the following is a very partial list of books and articles which have made an impact on various parts of the field. Archangeli. R. however. Bloomington. Readings in Linguistics. which is admirable in its coverage. Students should be aware. Baudouin de Courtenay. vol. IN: Indiana University Press.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 203 Collins and Mees book cited above is also useful for coverage of varieties of English. Bromberger. D. Students should also consult the late Larry Trask’s (1996) A Dictionary of Phonetics and Phonology. 1.’ Phonology 5: 183–208. that I have reservations about some of Trask’s definitions (which often lack exemplification). . J. Stankiewicz. J. (1988) ‘Aspects of underspecification theory.’ Linguistic Inquiry 20: 51–70.’ Language 2: 153–64. Halle (1989) ‘Why phonology is different. Anderson. IL: Chicago University Press. such as ‘phoneme’ differ substantially from his. J.

Vergnaud (1987) An Essay on Stress. Stampe (1979) ‘The study of Natural Phonology. Jakobson. Current Approaches to Phonological Theory.204 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Chomsky. G. 2. (1950) The Phoneme: its Nature and Use. Mullenix (eds). (1985) ‘The geometry of phonological features.’ Phonology Yearbook 2: 225–53.’ reprinted in P.’ Linguistic Inquiry 13: 227–76.’ in D. Clements. Kiparsky. vol. (1979) Autosegmental Phonology. Firth. vol. Halle (1968) The Sound Pattern of English. Hayes. Johnson. 145–65. R. Hyman. (1971) Selected Writings. (1962) Selected Writings. Jones. R. Jakobson. J. Cambridge: Heffer. P.’ Linguistic Inquiry 31: 157–69. 1. and M. and C. The Hague: Mouton. B. J. 126–73. Talker Variability in Speech Processing. (1970) ‘How concrete is phonology?. San Diego: Academic. Dinnsen (ed. Donegan. R. Reiss (2000) ‘Substance abuse and dysfunctionalism: current trends in phonology. (1934) ‘The word “Phoneme”. P. . MA: MIT Press. L. (1982) ‘Extrametricality and English stress.). N. and J. Goldsmith. Halle. Cambridge. The Hague: Mouton. Bloomington. IN: Indiana University Press. and D. Johnson and J. (1997) ‘Speech perception without speaker normalization.’ Le Maître phonétique 46: 44–6. K. M.’ Language 46: 58–76. New York: Harper & Row. W. N. Kiparsky (1982) Explanation in Phonology. New York: Garland.’ in K. Hale. R. D. M. Dordrecht: Foris. (1968) ‘How abstract is Phonology?.

H. DC: Center for Applied Linguistics. (1982) ‘From cyclic to lexical phonology. Smolensky (1993) Optimality Theory: Constraint Interaction in Generative Grammar. Pierrehumbert. and A.’ in J. Washington. Ohala. McGurk. Dordrecht: Foris. (1983) ‘Relating to the grid. J. van der Hulst and N. P. Rutgers University and University of Colorado. Breivik and E.). Smith (eds). Nespor. A. MacDonald (1976) ‘Hearing lips and seeing voices. Language Change: Contributions to the Study of its Causes. 173–98. (1966) The Social Stratification of English in New York City. H. Prince (1995) ‘Prosodic morphology. Oxford: Blackwell.’ Linguistic Inquiry 13: 435–82. Jahr (eds). (1968) Aspects of Phonological Theory. and I. and P. (1982) ‘Re reduplication. The Handbook of Phonological Theory. J. and M. Prince. Labov. C. Ringen. Prince (1977) ‘On stress and linguistic rhythm. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. Dordrecht: Foris.’ Linguistic Inquiry 8: 249–336. E. A. Cambridge.A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY 205 Kiparsky. (1989) ‘Sound change is drawn from a pool of synchronic variation. Goldsmith (ed. Beckman (1989) Japanese Tone Structure (Linguistic Inquiry Monograph. McCarthy. Vogel (1986) Prosodic Phonology. MA: MIT Press. W. .’ Linguistic Inquiry 14: 19–100. Prince. M. 15). and A. J. M. (1988) Vowel Harmony: Theoretical Implications. 318–66.’ in L.’ Nature 264: 746–8.’ in H. Ms. Postal. A. Marantz. New York: Garland. Liberman. J. The Structure of Phonological Representations (2 vols). Y. P. and J. New York: Harper & Row.

MIT PhD.’ International Journal of American Linguistics 33: 93–105. See also the translation by R. Trubetzkoy. MA: MIT Press. J. Culture and Personality. . M. French translation by J. Baskin (1959) Course in General Linguistics.’ reprinted in D. Paris: Klincksieck. E. (1984) Phonology and Syntax: The Relation between Sound and Structure. Harris (1983) F. (1996) Phonological Development. 7. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. F. Travaux du cercle linguistique de Prague. Vihman. New York: Philosophical Library. Yip. Cantineau (1949) Principes de phonologie. Selected Writings of Edward Sapir in Language. Selkirk. (1982) Accents of English. Wells. E. CA: University of California Press. vols 1–3. (1967) ‘The phonological features of tone. M. W. Oxford: Blackwell. (1939) Grundzüge der Phonologie. London: Duckworth. Paris: Bayot. (1933) ‘The psychological reality of phonemes. Mandelbaum (ed.206 A GLOSSARY OF PHONOLOGY Sapir. de Saussure: Course in General Linguistics. Berkeley. N. de (1916) Cours de linguistique général.). (1980) The Tonal Phonology of Chinese. M. English translation W. Published in New York by Garland in 1990. Cambridge. C. Saussure. Wang.

.

.

broad phonetic transcription. students should come to understand the need for a dedicated system of description and transcription for speech sounds. By working through the book and the various exercises included. and for a degree of phonological abstraction. They should learn to carry out elementary.euppublishing. with the concepts central to the practice of phonology clearly explained April McMahon is Forbes Professor of English Language at the University of Edinburgh.Also Available from Edinburgh University Press An Introduction to English Phonology April McMahon An Introduction to English Phonology introduces undergraduates to the basic tools and concepts necessary for the outline description of English phonological systems and processes. See more Language & Linguistics books at www.com . November 2001 160pp Pb 978 0 7486 1251 2 Key Features • designed for a one-term or one-semester introductory course in English Language • suitable for both native and non-native speakers of English • emphasis on varieties of modern English around the world • an essentially theory-neutral approach. and be able to establish contrastive vowel and consonant systems for their own varieties and to express simple generalisations reflecting the productive and predictable patterns of English sounds.

Laurie Bauer is Professor of Linguistics at the Victoria University of Wellington. this book will be the constant companion of anyone undertaking studies of linguistics.euppublishing.Also Available from Edinburgh University Press The Linguistics Student’s Handbook Laurie Bauer The book that tells you all the things you felt you were expected to know about linguistics. but were afraid to ask about. Part reference work. part revision guide. • What do you know about Burushaski and Miwok? • What’s the difference between paradigmatic and syntagmatic? • What is E-language? • What is a language? • Do parenthetical and non-restrictive mean the same thing? • How do you write a bibiliographic entry for a work you have not seen? Every student who has asked these questions needs this book.com . and with tables providing summary information on some 280 languages. April 2007 400pp Pb 978 0 7486 2759 2 See more Language & Linguistics books at www. the book provides a new learning tool as a supplement to the usual textbooks and glossaries. from the IPA chart to the Saussurean dichotomies. A compendium of useful things for linguistics students to know.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful